User’s Manual

ISO
Programming

iTNC 530

NC Software
340 490-05
340 491-05
340 492-05
340 493-05
340 494-05

English (en)
12/2008
Controls of the TNC Program/file management, TNC functions
Keys on visual display unit Key Function
Key Function Select or delete programs and files,
external data transfer
Split screen layout
Define program call, select datum and
point tables
Toggle display between machining and
programming modes
Select MOD functions
Soft keys for selecting functions on
screen
Display help text for NC error messages,
call TNCguide
Shift between soft-key rows
Display all current error messages

Alphanumeric keyboard
Show pocket calculator
Key Function
File names, comments
Navigation keys
DIN/ISO programming Key Function
Move highlight

Machine operating modes

Go directly to blocks, cycles and
Key Function
parameter functions
Manual Operation
Potentiometer for feed rate and spindle speed
Electronic Handwheel Feed rate Spindle speed

100 100
smarT.NC

50 150 50 150
Positioning with Manual Data Input
F % S %
0 0
Program Run, Single Block
Cycles, subprograms and program section repeats
Program Run, Full Sequence Key Function
Define touch probe cycles
Programming modes
Key Function Define and call cycles
Programming and Editing
Enter and call labels for subprogramming
and program section repeats
Test Run
Program stop in a program
Tool functions Coordinate axes and numbers: Entering and editing
Key Function Key Function
Define tool data in the program Select coordinate axes or
... enter them into the program

Call tool data Numbers

...

Programming path movements Decimal point / Reverse algebraic sign

Key Function
Polar coordinate input / Incremental
Approach/depart contour values

Q parameter programming /
FK free contour programming Q parameter status

Save actual position or values from

Straight line calculator

Skip dialog questions, delete words

Circle center/pole for polar coordinates

Confirm entry and resume dialog

Circle with center

Conclude block and exit entry

Circle with radius

Clear numerical entry or TNC error

Circular arc with tangential connection message

Abort dialog, delete program section

Chamfering/Corner rounding

Special functions / smarT.NC

Key Function
Show special functions

smarT.NC: Select next tab on form

smarT.NC: Select first input field in

previous/next frame
 Controls of the TNC

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 4

 About this Manual
About this Manual
The symbols used in this manual are described below.

This symbol indicates that important notes about the

function described must be adhered to.

This symbol indicates that using the function described

runs one or more than one of the following risks:
„ Danger to workpiece
„ Danger to fixtures
„ Danger to tool
„ Danger to machine
„ Danger to operator

This symbol indicates that the described function must be

adapted by the machine tool builder. The function
described may therefore vary depending on the machine.

This symbol indicates that you can find detailed

information about a function in another manual.

Do you desire any changes, or have you found

any errors?
We are continuously striving to improve documentation for you.
Please help us by sending your requests to the following e-mail
address: [email protected].

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 5

TNC Model, Software and Features
TNC Model, Software and Features
This manual describes functions and features provided by TNCs as of
the following NC software numbers.

TNC model NC software number

iTNC 530 340 490-05

iTNC 530 E 340 491-05

iTNC 530 340 492-05

iTNC 530 E 340 493-05

iTNC 530 programming station 340 494-05

The suffix E indicates the export version of the TNC. The export
version of the TNC has the following limitations:
„ Simultaneous linear movement in up to 4 axes
The machine tool builder adapts the usable features of the TNC to his
machine by setting machine parameters. Some of the functions
described in this manual may therefore not be among the features
provided by the TNC on your machine tool.
TNC functions that may not be available on your machine include:
„ Tool measurement with the TT
Please contact your machine tool builder to become familiar with the
features of your machine.
Many machine manufacturers, as well as HEIDENHAIN, offer
programming courses for the TNCs. We recommend these courses as
an effective way of improving your programming skill and sharing
information and ideas with other TNC users.

User’s Manual for Cycles:

All of the cycle functions (touch probe cycles and fixed
cycles) are described in a separate manual. Please contact
HEIDENHAIN if you require a copy of this User’s Manual.
ID: 670 388-xx

smarT.NC user documentation:

The smarT.NC operating mode is described in a separate
Pilot. Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you require a copy of
this Pilot. ID: 533 191-xx

6
 TNC Model, Software and Features
Software options
The iTNC 530 features various software options that can be enabled
by you or your machine tool builder. Each option is to be enabled
separately and contains the following respective functions:

Software option 1
Cylinder surface interpolation (Cycles 27, 28, 29 and 39)

Feed rate in mm/min for rotary axes: M116

Tilting the machining plane (Cycle 19, PLANE function and 3-D ROT
soft key in the Manual Operation mode)

Circle in 3 axes with tilted working plane

Software option 2
Block processing time 0.5 ms instead of 3.6 ms

5-axis interpolation

Spline interpolation

3-D machining:
„ M114: Automatic compensation of machine geometry when
working with swivel axes
„ M128: Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning
with swivel axes (TCPM)
„ FUNCTION TCPM: Maintaining the position of the tool tip when
positioning with swivel axes (TCPM) in selectable modes
„ M144: Compensating the machine’s kinematics configuration for
ACTUAL/NOMINAL positions at end of block
„ Additional parameters for finishing/roughing and tolerance for
rotary axes in Cycle 32 (G62)
„ LN blocks (3-D compensation)

DCM Collision software option Description

Function that monitors areas defined by the Page 325
machine manufacturer to prevent collisions.

DXF Converter software option Description

Extract contours and machining positions from Page 216
DXF files (R12 format).

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 7

TNC Model, Software and Features
Additional dialog language software
Description
option
Function for enabling the conversational Page 554
languages Slovenian, Slovak, Norwegian,
Latvian, Estonian, Korean, Turkish, Romanian,
Lithuanian

Global Program Settings software option Description

Function for superimposing coordinate Page 340
transformations in the Program Run modes,
handwheel superimposed traverse in virtual
axis direction.

AFC software option Description

Function for adaptive feed-rate control for Page 351
optimizing the machining conditions during
series production.

KinematicsOpt software option Description

Touch-probe cycles for inspecting and User’s Manual for
optimizing the machine accuracy. Cycles

8
 TNC Model, Software and Features
Feature content level (upgrade functions)
Along with software options, significant further improvements of the
TNC software are managed via the Feature Content Level (FCL)
upgrade functions. Functions subject to the FCL are not available
simply by updating the software on your TNC.

All upgrade functions are available to you without surcharge

when you receive a new machine.

Upgrade functions are identified in the manual with FCL n, where n

indicates the sequential number of the feature content level.
You can purchase a code number in order to permanently enable the
FCL functions. For more information, contact your machine tool
builder or HEIDENHAIN.

FCL 4 functions Description

Graphical depiction of the protected Page 330
space when DCM collision monitoring is
active

Handwheel superimposition in stopped Page 329

condition when DCM collision
monitoring is active

3-D basic rotation (set-up compensation) Machine Manual

FCL 3 functions Description

Touch probe cycle for 3-D probing User’s Manual for Cycles

Touch probe cycles for automatic datum User’s Manual for Cycles
setting using the center of a slot/ridge

Feed-rate reduction for the machining of User’s Manual for Cycles

contour pockets with the tool being in full
contact with the workpiece

PLANE function: Entry of axis angle Page 390

User documentation as a context- Page 146

sensitive help system

smarT.NC: Programming of smarT.NC Page 113

and machining can be carried out
simultaneously

smarT.NC: Contour pocket on point smarT.NC Pilot

pattern

smarT.NC: Preview of contour programs smarT.NC Pilot

in the file manager

smarT.NC: Positioning strategy for smarT.NC Pilot

machining point patterns

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 9

TNC Model, Software and Features
FCL 2 functions Description
3-D line graphics Page 138

Virtual tool axis Page 475

USB support of block devices (memory Page 123

sticks, hard disks, CD-ROM drives)

Possibility of assigning different depths User’s Manual for

to each subcontour in the contour Cycles
formula

DHCP dynamic IP-address management Page 532

Touch-probe cycle for global setting of User’s Manual for Touch

touch-probe parameters Probe Cycles

smarT.NC: Graphic support of block scan smarT.NC Pilot

smarT.NC: Coordinate transformation smarT.NC Pilot

smarT.NC: PLANE function smarT.NC Pilot

Intended place of operation

The TNC complies with the limits for a Class A device in accordance
with the specifications in EN 55022, and is intended for use primarily
in industrially-zoned areas.

Legal information
This product uses open source software. Further information is
available on the control under
U Programming and Editing operating mode
U MOD function
U LEGAL INFORMATION soft key

10
 New functions in 340 49x-01 since the predecessor versions
340 422-xx/340 423-xx
New functions in 340 49x-01 since
the predecessor versions
340 422-xx/340 423-xx
„ A new form-based operating mode, smarT.NC, has been
introduced. These cycles are described in a separate user's
document. In connection with this the TNC operating panel was
enhanced. There are some new keys available for quicker navigation
within smarT.NC
„ The single-processor version supports pointing devices (mice) via
the USB interface.
„ The tooth feed fz and feed per revolution fu can now be defined as
alternate feed entries.
„ New cycle CENTERING (see User’s Manual for Cycles)
„ New M function M150 for suppressing limit switch messages (see
“Suppress limit switch message: M150” on page 318)
„ M128 is now also permitted for mid-program startup (see “Mid-
program startup (block scan)” on page 506)
„ The number of available Q parameters was expanded to 2000 (see
“Principle and Overview” on page 250).
„ The number of available label numbers was expanded to 1000. Now
label names can be assigned as well (see “Labeling Subprograms
and Program Section Repeats” on page 234).
„ In the Q parameter functions FN9 to FN12 you can now also assign
label names as jump targets (see “If-Then Decisions with
Q Parameters” on page 259).
„ Selectively machine points from a point table (see User's Manual for
Cycles)
„ The current time is also shown in the additional status display
window (see “General program information (PGM tab)” on page
79).
„ Several columns were added to the tool table (see “Tool table:
Standard tool data” on page 158).
„ The Test Run can now also be stopped and resumed within
machining cycles (see “Running a program test” on page 497).

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 11

New functions with 340 49x-02
New functions with 340 49x-02
„ DXF files can be opened directly on the TNC, in order to extract
contours into a plain-language program (see “Processing DXF Files
(Software Option)” on page 216)
„ 3-D line graphics are now available in the Programming and Editing
operating mode (see “3-D Line Graphics (FCL2 Function)” on page
138)
„ The active tool-axis direction can now be set as the active machining
direction for manual operation (see “Setting the current tool-axis
direction as the active machining direction (FCL 2 function)” on page
475)
„ The machine manufacturer can now define any areas on the
machine for collision monitoring (see “Dynamic Collision Monitoring
(Software Option)” on page 325)
„ Instead of the spindle speed S you can now define the cutting speed
Vc in m/min (see “Calling tool data” on page 169)
„ The TNC can now display freely definable tables in the familiar table
view or as forms
„ For contours which you connect via the contour formula, you can
now assign separate machining depths for each subcontour (see
User's Manual for Cycles)
„ The single-processor version now supports not only pointing
devices (mice), but also USB block devices (memory sticks, disk
drives, hard disks, CD-ROM drives) (see “USB devices on the TNC
(FCL 2 function)” on page 129)

12
 New functions with 340 49x-03
New functions with 340 49x-03
„ The Adaptive Feed Control function (AFC) was introduced (see
“Adaptive Feed Control Software Option (AFC)” on page 351)
„ The global parameter settings function makes it possible to set
various transformations and settings in the program run modes (see
“Global Program Settings (Software Option)” on page 340).
„ The TNC now features a context-sensitive help system, the
TNCguide (see “The Context-Sensitive Help System TNCguide
(FCL3 Function)” on page 146).
„ Now you can extract point files from DXF files(see “Selecting and
storing machining positions” on page 226).
„ Now, in the DXF converter, you can divide or lengthen laterally
joined contour elements (see “Dividing, extending and shortening
contour elements” on page 225).
„ In the PLANE function the working plane can now also be defined
directly by its axis angle (see “Tilting the working plane through axis
angle: PLANE AXIAL (FCL 3 function)” on page 390).
„ In Cycle 22 ROUGH-OUT, you can define a feed-rate reduction if the
tool is cutting on its entire circumference (FCL3 function, see User's
Manual for Cycles)
„ In Cycle 208 BORE MILLING, you can now choose between climb or
up-cut milling (see User's Manual for Cycles)
„ String processing has been introduced in Q parameter programming
(see “String Parameters” on page 272)
„ A screen saver can be activated through machine parameter 7392
(see “General User Parameters” on page 554)
„ The TNC now also supports a network connection over the NFS V3
protocol (see “Ethernet Interface” on page 525)
„ The maximum manageable number of tools in a pocket table was
increased to 9999 (see “Pocket table for tool changer” on page 166)
„ Parallel programming is possible with smarT.NC (see “Select
smarT.NC programs” on page 113)
„ The system time can now be set through the MOD function (see
“Setting the System Time” on page 549)

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 13

New functions with 340 49x-04
New functions with 340 49x-04
„ The global parameter settings function makes it possible to activate
handwheel superimposed traverse in the active tool axis direction
(virtual axis) (see “Virtual axis VT” on page 350)
„ Machining patterns can now easily be defined with PATTERN DEF
(see User's Manual for Cycles)
„ Program defaults valid globally can now be defined for machining
cycles (see User's Manual for Cycles)
„ Now, in Cycle 209 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING, you can define a
factor for the retraction shaft speed, so that you can depart the hole
faster (see User's Manual for Cycles)
„ In Cycle 22 ROUGH-OUT, you can now define the fine-roughing
strategy (see User's Manual for Cycles)
„ In the new Cycle 270 CONTOUR TRAIN DATA, you can define the type
of approach of Cycle 25 CONTOUR TRAIN (see User's Manual for
Cycles)
„ New Q-parameter function for reading a system datum was
introduced (see “Copying system data to a string parameter,” page
277)
„ New functions for copying, moving and deleting files from within
the NC program were introduced
„ DCM: Collision objects can now be shown three-dimensionally
during machining (see “Graphic depiction of the protected space
(FCL4 function),” page 330)
„ DXF converter: New settings possibility introduced, with which the
TNC automatically selects the circle center when loading points
from circular elements (see “Basic settings,” page 218)
„ DXF converter: Element information is shown in an additional info
window (see “Selecting and saving a contour,” page 223)
„ AFC: A line diagram is now shown in the additional AFC status
display (see “Adaptive Feed Control (AFC tab, software option)” on
page 85)
„ AFC: Control settings parameters selectable by machine tool builder
(see “Adaptive Feed Control Software Option (AFC)” on page 351)
„ AFC: The spindle reference load currently being taught is shown in
a pop-up window in the teach-in mode. In addition, the learning
phase can be restarted at any time via soft key (see “Recording a
teach-in cut” on page 355).
„ AFC: The dependent file <name>.H.AFC.DEP can now also be
modified in the Programming and Editing operating mode (see
“Recording a teach-in cut” on page 355)

14
„ The maximum path permitted for LIFTOFF was increased to 30 mm

New functions with 340 49x-04

(see “Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop:
M148” on page 317)
„ File management was adapted to the file management of smarT.NC
(see “Overview: Functions of the file manager” on page 109)
„ New function for generating service files was introduced (see
“Generating service files” on page 145)
„ A window manager was introduced (see “Window Manager” on
page 86)
„ The new dialog languages Turkish and Romanian were introduced
(software option, Page 554)

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 15

New functions with 340 49x-05
New functions with 340 49x-05
„ DCM: Integrated fixture management (see “Fixture Monitoring
(Software Option)” on page 332)
„ DCM: No collision checking in the Test Run mode(see “Collision
monitoring in the Test Run mode of operation” on page 331)
„ DCM: Management of tool-carrier kinematics has been simplified
(see “Tool-carrier kinematics” on page 164)
„ Processing DXF data: Fast point selection via mouse area (see
“Quick selection of hole positions in an area defined by the mouse”
on page 228)
„ Processing DXF data: Fast point selection via diameter input (see
“Quick selection of hole positions in an area defined by the mouse”
on page 228)
„ DXF data processing: Polyline support was integrated (see
“Processing DXF Files (Software Option)” on page 216)
„ AFC: Smallest occurring feed rate will now also be saved in the log
file (see “Log file” on page 359)
„ AFC: Monitoring for tool breakage/tool wear (see “Tool
breakage/tool wear monitoring” on page 361)
„ AFC: Direct monitoring of spindle load (see “Spindle load
monitoring” on page 361)
„ Global program settings: Function also partially effective with
M91/M92 blocks (see “Global Program Settings (Software Option)”
on page 340)
„ Pallet preset table added (see “Pallet datum management with the
pallet preset table,” page 411 or see “Application,” page 408 or see
“Storing measured values in the pallet preset table,” page 455 or
see “Saving the basic rotation in the preset table,” page 460)
„ The additional status display now has an additional tab, i.e. PAL, on
which an active pallet preset is displayed (see “General pallet
information (PAL tab)” on page 80)
„ New tool management (see “Tool management” on page 175)
„ New column R2TOL in the tool table (see “Tool table: Tool data
required for automatic tool measurement” on page 160)
„ Tools can now also be selected during tool call by soft key directly
from TOOL.T (see “Calling tool data” on page 169)
„ TNCguide: Context sensitivity has been improved in that when the
cursor is engaged it jumps to the appropriate description (see
“Calling the TNCguide” on page 147)
„ Lithuanian dialog added, machine parameter 7230 (see “List of
general user parameters” on page 555)
„ M116 allowed in combination with M128 (see “Feed rate in
mm/min on rotary axes A, B, C: M116 (software option 1)” on page
397)
„ Introduction of local and nonvolatile Q parameters QL and QR (see
“Principle and Overview” on page 250)
„ The MOD function can now test the data medium (see “Checking
the Data Carrier” on page 548)
„ New Cycle 241 for Single-Fluted Deep-Hole Drilling (see User’s
Manual for Cycles)

16
„ Touch probe cycle 404 (SET BASIC ROTATION) was expanded by

New functions with 340 49x-05

parameter Q305 (Number in table) in order to write basic rotations
to the preset table (see User's Manual for Cycles)
„ Touch probe cycles 408 to 419: The TNC now also writes to line 0
of the preset table when the display value is set (see User's Manual
for Cycles)
„ Touch probe cycle 416 (Datum on Circle Center) was expanded by
parameter Q320 (safety clearance) (see User's Manual for Cycles)
„ Touch probe cycles 412, 413, 421 and 422: Additional parameter
Q365 (type of traverse) (see User's Manual for Cycles)
„ Touch probe cycle 425 (Measure Slot) was expanded by parameters
Q301 (Move to clearance height) and Q320 (setup clearance) (see
User's Manual for Cycles)
„ Touch probe cycle 450 (Save Kinematics) was expanded by input
option 2 (Display saving status) in parameter Q410 (mode) (see
User's Manual for Cycles)
„ Touch probe cycle 451 (Measure Kinematics) was expanded by
parameters Q423 (number of circular measurements) and Q432 (set
preset) (see User's Manual for Cycles)
„ New touch probe cycle 452 (Preset Compensation) simplifies the
measurement of tool changer heads (see User's Manual for Cycles)
„ New touch probe cycle 484 for calibrating the wireless TT 449 tool
touch probe (see User's Manual for Cycles)

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 17

Changed functions in 340 49x-01 since the predecessor versions
340 422-xx/340 423-xx Changed functions in 340 49x-01
since the predecessor versions
340 422-xx/340 423-xx
„ The layouts of the status display and additional status display were
redesigned (see “Status Displays” on page 77)
„ Software 340 490 no longer supports the small resolution in
combination with the BC 120 screen (see “Visual display unit” on
page 71)
„ New key layout of the TE 530 B keyboard unit (see “Operating
panel” on page 73)
„ The entry range for the EULPR precession angle in the PLANE EULER
function was expanded (see “Defining the machining plane with
Euler angles: EULER PLANE” on page 383)
„ The plane vector in the VECTOR PLANE function no longer has to be
entered in standardized form (see “Defining the machining plane
with two vectors: VECTOR PLANE” on page 385)
„ Positioning behavior of the CYCL CALL PAT function has been
modified (see User's Manual for Cycles)
„ The tool types available for selection in the tool table were increased
in preparation for future functions
„ Instead of the last 10, you can now choose from the last 15 selected
files (see “Choosing one of the last files selected” on page 118)

18
 Functions changed in 340 49x-02
Functions changed in 340 49x-02
„ Access to the preset table was simplified. There are also new
possibilities for entering values in the preset table. See table
“Manually saving the datums in the preset table”
„ In inch-programs, the function M136 (feed rate in 0.1 inch/rev) can
no longer be combined with the FU function
„ The feed-rate potentiometers of the HR 420 are no longer switched
over automatically when the handwheel is selected. The selection is
made via soft key on the handwheel. In addition, the pop-up window
for the active handwheel was made smaller, in order to improve the
view of the display beneath it (see “Potentiometer settings” on
page 437)
„ The maximum number of contour elements for SL cycles was
increased to 8192, so that much more complex contours can be
machined (see User's Manual for Cycles)
„ FN16: F-PRINT: The maximum number of Q-parameter values that
can be output per line in the format description file was increased to
32
„ The soft keys START and START SINGLE BLOCK in the Program
Test mode of operation were switched, so that the soft-key
alignment is the same in all modes of operation (Programming and
Editing, smarT.NC, Test) (see “Running a program test” on page
497)
„ The design of the soft keys was revised completely

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 19

Changed functions with 340 49x-03
Changed functions with 340 49x-03
„ In Cycle 22 you can now define a tool name also for the coarse
roughing tool (see User's Manual Cycles)
„ In the PLANE function, an FMAX can now be programmed for the
automatic rotary positioning (see “Automatic positioning:
MOVE/TURN/STAY (entry is mandatory)” on page 392)
„ When running programs in which non-controlled axes are
programmed, the TNC now interrupts the program run and displays
a menu for returning to the programmed position (see
“Programming of noncontrolled axes (counter axes)” on page 503)
„ The tool usage file now also includes the total machining time,
which serves as the basis for the progress display in percent in the
Program Run, Full Sequence mode (see “Tool usage test” on page
510)
„ The TNC now also takes the dwell time into account when
calculating the machining time in the Test Run mode (see
“Measuring the machining time” on page 493)
„ Arcs that are not programmed in the active working plane can now
also be run as spatial arcs (see “Circular path C around circle center
CC” on page 198)
„ The EDIT OFF/ON soft key on the pocket table can be deactivated
by the machine tool builder (see “Pocket table for tool changer” on
page 166)
„ The additional status display has been revised. The following
improvements have been introduced (see “Additional status
displays” on page 78):
„ A new overview page with the most important status displays
were introduced
„ The individual status pages are now displayed as tabs (as in
smarT.NC). The individual tabs can be selected with the Page soft
keys or with the mouse
„ The current run time of the program is shown in percent by a
progress bar
„ The tolerance values set in Cycle 32 are displayed
„ Active global program settings are displayed, provided that this
software option was enabled
„ The status of the Adaptive Feed Control (AFC) is displayed,
provided that this software option was enabled

20
 Changed functions with 340 49x-04
Changed functions with 340 49x-04
„ DCM: Retraction after collision simplified (see “Collision monitoring
in the manual operating modes,” page 327)
„ The input range for polar angles was increased (see “Circular path
G12/G13/G15 around pole I, J” on page 208)
„ The value range for Q-parameter assignment was increased (see
“Programming notes,” page 252)
„ The pocket-, stud- and slot-milling cycles 210 to 214 were removed
from the standard soft-key row (CYCL DEF >
POCKETS/STUDS/SLOTS). For reasons of compatibility, the cycles
will still be available, and can be selected via the GOTO key
„ The soft-key rows in the Test Run operating mode were modified to
those of the smarT.NC operating mode
„ Windows XP is now used on the dual-processor version (see
“Introduction” on page 582)
„ Filtering of contours was moved to the special functions (SPEC FCT)
„ Loading of values from the pocket calculator was changed (see “To
transfer the calculated value into the program” on page 135)

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 21

Changed functions with 340 49x-05
Changed functions with 340 49x-05
„ GS global program settings: Form was redesigned (see “Global
Program Settings (Software Option),” page 340)
„ The menu for network configuration was revised (see “Configuring
the TNC” on page 528)

22
Table of Contents First Steps with the iTNC 530
1
Introduction
2
Programming: Fundamentals, File
Management 3
Programming: Programming Aids
4
Programming: Tools
5
Programming: Programming Contours
6
Programming: Miscellaneous Functions
7
Programming: Data Transfer from DXF
Files 8
Programming: Subprograms and
Program Section Repeats 9
Programming: Q Parameters
10
Programming: Miscellaneous Functions
11
Programming: Special Functions
12
Programming: Multi-axis Machining
13
Programming: Pallet Management
14
Positioning with Manual Data Input
15
Test Run and Program Run
16
MOD Functions
17
Tables and Overviews
18
iTNC 530 with Windows XP (option)
19

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 23

1 First Steps with the iTNC 530 ..... 49
1.1 Overview ..... 50
1.2 Machine Switch-On ..... 51
Acknowledge the power interruption and move to the reference points ..... 51
1.3 Programming the First Part ..... 52
Select the correct operating mode ..... 52
The most important TNC keys ..... 52
Create a new program/file management ..... 53
Define a workpiece blank ..... 54
Program layout ..... 55
Program a simple contour ..... 56
Create a cycle program ..... 58
1.4 Graphically Testing the Program ..... 60
Select the correct operating mode ..... 60
Select the tool table for the test run ..... 60
Choose the program you want to test ..... 61
Select the screen layout and the view ..... 61
Start the program test ..... 62
1.5 Setting Up Tools ..... 63
Select the correct operating mode ..... 63
Prepare and measure tools ..... 63
The tool table TOOL.T ..... 63
The pocket table TOOL_P.TCH ..... 64
1.6 Workpiece Setup ..... 65
Select the correct operating mode ..... 65
Clamp the workpiece ..... 65
Align the workpiece with a 3-D touch probe system ..... 66
Set the datum with a 3-D touch probe ..... 67
1.7 Running the First Program ..... 68
Select the correct operating mode ..... 68
Choose the program you want to run ..... 68
Start the program ..... 68

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 25

2 Introduction ..... 69
2.1 The iTNC 530 ..... 70
Programming: HEIDENHAIN conversational, smarT.NC and DIN/ISO formats ..... 70
Compatibility ..... 70
2.2 Visual Display Unit and Keyboard ..... 71
Visual display unit ..... 71
Sets the screen layout ..... 72
Operating panel ..... 73
2.3 Operating Modes ..... 74
Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel ..... 74
Positioning with Manual Data Input ..... 74
Programming and Editing ..... 75
Test Run ..... 75
Program Run, Full Sequence and Program Run, Single Block ..... 76
2.4 Status Displays ..... 77
“General” status display ..... 77
Additional status displays ..... 78
2.5 Window Manager ..... 86
2.6 Accessories: HEIDENHAIN 3-D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels ..... 87
3-D touch probes ..... 87
HR electronic handwheels ..... 88

26
3 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management ..... 89
3.1 Fundamentals ..... 90
Position encoders and reference marks ..... 90
Reference system ..... 90
Reference system on milling machines ..... 91
Polar coordinates ..... 92
Absolute and incremental workpiece positions ..... 93
Setting the datum ..... 94
3.2 Creating and Writing Programs ..... 95
Organization of an NC program in DIN/ISO ..... 95
Define the blank: G30/G31 ..... 95
Creating a new part program ..... 96
Programming tool movements in DIN/ISO ..... 98
Actual position capture ..... 99
Editing a program ..... 100
The TNC search function ..... 104
3.3 File Management: Fundamentals ..... 106
Files ..... 106
Data backup ..... 107
3.4 Working with the File Manager ..... 108
Directories ..... 108
Paths ..... 108
Overview: Functions of the file manager ..... 109
Calling the file manager ..... 110
Selecting drives, directories and files ..... 111
Creating a new directory (only possible on the drive TNC:\) ..... 114
Creating a new file (only possible on the drive TNC:\) ..... 114
Copying a single file ..... 115
Copying files into another directory ..... 116
Copying a table ..... 117
Copying a directory ..... 118
Choosing one of the last files selected ..... 118
Deleting a file ..... 119
Deleting a directory ..... 119
Tagging files ..... 120
Renaming a file ..... 122
Additional functions ..... 123
Working with shortcuts ..... 125
Data transfer to or from an external data medium ..... 126
The TNC in a network ..... 128
USB devices on the TNC (FCL 2 function) ..... 129

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 27

4 Programming: Programming Aids ..... 131
4.1 Adding Comments ..... 132
Function ..... 132
Entering comments during programming ..... 132
Inserting comments after program entry ..... 132
Entering a comment in a separate block ..... 132
Functions for editing of the comment ..... 133
4.2 Structuring Programs ..... 134
Definition and applications ..... 134
Displaying the program structure window / Changing the active window ..... 134
Inserting a structuring block in the (left) program window ..... 134
Selecting blocks in the program structure window ..... 134
4.3 Integrated Pocket Calculator ..... 135
Operation ..... 135
4.4 Programming Graphics ..... 136
Generating / Not generating graphics during programming: ..... 136
Generating a graphic for an existing program ..... 136
Block number display ON/OFF ..... 137
Erasing the graphic ..... 137
Magnifying or reducing a detail ..... 137
4.5 3-D Line Graphics (FCL2 Function) ..... 138
Function ..... 138
Functions of the 3-D line graphics ..... 138
Highlighting NC blocks in the graphics ..... 140
Block number display ON/OFF ..... 140
Erasing the graphic ..... 140
4.6 Immediate Help for NC Error Messages ..... 141
Displaying error messages ..... 141
Display HELP ..... 141
4.7 List of All Current Error Messages ..... 142
Function ..... 142
Show error list ..... 142
Window contents ..... 143
Calling the TNCguide help system ..... 144
Generating service files ..... 145
4.8 The Context-Sensitive Help System TNCguide (FCL3 Function) ..... 146
Function ..... 146
Working with the TNCguide ..... 147
Downloading current help files ..... 151

28
5 Programming: Tools ..... 153
5.1 Entering Tool-Related Data ..... 154
Feed rate F ..... 154
Spindle speed S ..... 155
5.2 Tool Data ..... 156
Requirements for tool compensation ..... 156
Tool numbers and tool names ..... 156
Tool length L ..... 156
Tool radius R ..... 156
Delta values for lengths and radii ..... 157
Entering tool data into the program ..... 157
Entering tool data in the table ..... 158
Tool-carrier kinematics ..... 164
Using an external PC to overwrite individual tool data ..... 165
Pocket table for tool changer ..... 166
Calling tool data ..... 169
Tool change ..... 171
Tool usage test ..... 173
Tool management ..... 175
5.3 Tool Compensation ..... 177
Introduction ..... 177
Tool length compensation ..... 177
Tool radius compensation ..... 178

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 29

6 Programming: Programming Contours ..... 183
6.1 Tool Movements ..... 184
Path functions ..... 184
Miscellaneous functions M ..... 184
Subprograms and program section repeats ..... 184
Programming with Q parameters ..... 185
6.2 Fundamentals of Path Functions ..... 186
Programming tool movements for workpiece machining ..... 186
6.3 Contour Approach and Departure ..... 189
Starting point and end point ..... 189
Tangential approach and departure ..... 191
6.4 Path Contours—Cartesian Coordinates ..... 193
Overview of path functions ..... 193
Straight line at rapid traverse G00
Straight Line with Feed Rate G01 F ..... 194
Inserting a chamfer between two straight lines ..... 195
Corner rounding G25 ..... 196
Circle center I, J ..... 197
Circular path C around circle center CC ..... 198
Circular path G02/G03/G05 with defined radius ..... 199
Circular path G06 with tangential connection ..... 201
6.5 Path Contours—Polar Coordinates ..... 206
Overview ..... 206
Zero point for polar coordinates: pole I, J ..... 207
Straight line at rapid traverse G10
Straight line with feed rate G11 F ..... 207
Circular path G12/G13/G15 around pole I, J ..... 208
Circular path G16 with tangential connection ..... 209
Helical interpolation ..... 210

30
7 Programming: Data Transfer from DXF Files ..... 215
7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option) ..... 216
Function ..... 216
Opening a DXF file ..... 217
Basic settings ..... 218
Layer settings ..... 220
Specifying the reference point ..... 221
Selecting and saving a contour ..... 223
Selecting and storing machining positions ..... 226
Zoom function ..... 232

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 31

8 Programming: Subprograms and Program Section Repeats ..... 233
8.1 Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats ..... 234
Labels ..... 234
8.2 Subprograms ..... 235
Operating sequence ..... 235
Programming notes ..... 235
Programming a subprogram ..... 235
Calling a subprogram ..... 235
8.3 Program Section Repeats ..... 236
Label G98 ..... 236
Operating sequence ..... 236
Programming notes ..... 236
Programming a program section repeat ..... 236
Calling a program section repeat ..... 236
8.4 Separate Program as Subprogram ..... 237
Operating sequence ..... 237
Programming notes ..... 237
Calling any program as a subprogram ..... 238
8.5 Nesting ..... 239
Types of nesting ..... 239
Nesting depth ..... 239
Subprogram within a subprogram ..... 240
Repeating program section repeats ..... 241
Repeating a subprogram ..... 242
8.6 Programming Examples ..... 243

32
9 Programming: Q Parameters ..... 249
9.1 Principle and Overview ..... 250
Programming notes ..... 252
Calling Q-parameter functions ..... 253
9.2 Part Families—Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values ..... 254
Function ..... 254
9.3 Describing Contours through Mathematical Operations ..... 255
Function ..... 255
Overview ..... 255
Programming fundamental operations ..... 256
9.4 Trigonometric Functions ..... 257
Definitions ..... 257
Programming trigonometric functions ..... 258
9.5 If-Then Decisions with Q Parameters ..... 259
Function ..... 259
Unconditional jumps ..... 259
Programming If-Then decisions ..... 259
9.6 Checking and Changing Q Parameters ..... 260
Procedure ..... 260
9.7 Additional Functions ..... 261
Overview ..... 261
D14: ERROR: Displaying error messages ..... 262
D15 PRINT: Output of texts or Q parameter values ..... 267
D19 PLC: Transfer values to the PLC ..... 267
9.8 Entering Formulas Directly ..... 268
Entering formulas ..... 268
Rules for formulas ..... 270
Programming example ..... 271
9.9 String Parameters ..... 272
String processing functions ..... 272
Assigning string parameters ..... 273
Chain-linking string parameters ..... 274
Converting a numerical value to a string parameter ..... 275
Copying a substring from a string parameter ..... 276
Copying system data to a string parameter ..... 277
Converting a string parameter to a numerical value ..... 279
Checking a string parameter ..... 280
Finding the length of a string parameter ..... 281
Comparing alphabetic priority ..... 282

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 33

 9.10 Preassigned Q Parameters ..... 283
Values from the PLC: Q100 to Q107 ..... 283
WMAT block: QS100 ..... 283
Active tool radius: Q108 ..... 283
Tool axis: Q109 ..... 284
Spindle status: Q110 ..... 284
Coolant on/off: Q111 ..... 284
Overlap factor: Q112 ..... 284
Unit of measurement for dimensions in the program: Q113 ..... 285
Tool length: Q114 ..... 285
Coordinates after probing during program run ..... 285
Deviation between actual value and nominal value during automatic tool measurement with the TT 130 ..... 286
Tilting the working plane with mathematical angles: rotary axis coordinates calculated by the TNC ..... 286
Measurement results from touch probe cycles (see also User’s Manual for Touch Probe Cycles) ..... 287
9.11 Programming Examples ..... 289

34
10 Programming: Miscellaneous Functions ..... 297
10.1 Entering Miscellaneous Functions M and STOP ..... 298
Fundamentals ..... 298
10.2 Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run Control, Spindle and Coolant ..... 300
Overview ..... 300
10.3 Miscellaneous Functions for Coordinate Data ..... 301
Programming machine-referenced coordinates: M91/M92 ..... 301
Activating the most recently entered datum: M104 ..... 303
Moving to positions in a non-tilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane: M130 ..... 303
10.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior ..... 304
Smoothing corners: M90 ..... 304
Insert rounding arc between straight lines: M112 ..... 304
Do not include points when executing non-compensated line blocks: M124 ..... 305
Machining small contour steps: M97 ..... 306
Machining open contours corners: M98 ..... 308
Feed rate factor for plunging movements: M103 ..... 309
Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution: M136 ..... 310
Feed rate for circular arcs: M109/M110/M111 ..... 310
Calculating the radius-compensated path in advance (LOOK AHEAD): M120 ..... 311
Superimposing handwheel positioning during program run: M118 ..... 313
Retraction from the contour in the tool-axis direction: M140 ..... 314
Suppressing touch probe monitoring: M141 ..... 315
Delete modal program information: M142 ..... 316
Delete basic rotation: M143 ..... 316
Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop: M148 ..... 317
Suppress limit switch message: M150 ..... 318
10.5 Miscellaneous Functions for Laser Cutting Machines ..... 319
Principle ..... 319
Output the programmed voltage directly: M200 ..... 319
Output voltage as a function of distance: M201 ..... 319
Output voltage as a function of speed: M202 ..... 320
Output voltage as a function of time (time-dependent ramp): M203 ..... 320
Output voltage as a function of time (time-dependent pulse): M204 ..... 320

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 35

11 Programming: Special Functions ..... 321
11.1 Overview of Special Functions ..... 322
Main menu for SPEC FCT special functions ..... 322
Program defaults menu ..... 323
Functions for contour and point machining menu ..... 323
Menu of various DIN/ISO functions ..... 324
11.2 Dynamic Collision Monitoring (Software Option) ..... 325
Function ..... 325
Collision monitoring in the manual operating modes ..... 327
Collision monitoring in Automatic operation ..... 329
Graphic depiction of the protected space (FCL4 function) ..... 330
Collision monitoring in the Test Run mode of operation ..... 331
11.3 Fixture Monitoring (Software Option) ..... 332
Fundamentals ..... 332
Fixture templates ..... 333
Setting parameters for the fixture: FixtureWizard ..... 334
Placing the fixture on the machine ..... 336
Editing fixtures ..... 337
Removing fixtures ..... 337
Check the position of the measured fixture ..... 338
11.4 Global Program Settings (Software Option) ..... 340
Function ..... 340
Technical prerequisites ..... 342
Activating/deactivating a function ..... 343
Basic rotation ..... 345
Swapping axes ..... 346
Superimposed mirroring ..... 347
Additional, additive datum shift ..... 347
Axis locking ..... 348
Superimposed rotation ..... 348
Feed rate override ..... 348
Handwheel superimposition ..... 349
11.5 Adaptive Feed Control Software Option (AFC) ..... 351
Function ..... 351
Defining the AFC basic settings ..... 353
Recording a teach-in cut ..... 355
Activating/deactivating AFC ..... 358
Log file ..... 359
Tool breakage/tool wear monitoring ..... 361
Spindle load monitoring ..... 361

36
 11.6 Creating Text Files ..... 362
Function ..... 362
Opening and exiting text files ..... 362
Editing texts ..... 363
Deleting and inserting characters, words and lines ..... 364
Editing text blocks ..... 365
Finding text sections ..... 366
11.7 Working with Cutting Data Tables ..... 367
Note ..... 367
Applications ..... 367
Table for workpiece materials ..... 368
Table for tool cutting materials ..... 369
Table for cutting data ..... 369
Data required for the tool table ..... 370
Working with automatic speed / feed rate calculation ..... 371
Data transfer from cutting data tables ..... 372
Configuration file TNC.SYS ..... 372

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 37

12 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining ..... 373
12.1 Functions for Multiple Axis Machining ..... 374
12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1) ..... 375
Introduction ..... 375
Define the PLANE function ..... 377
Position display ..... 377
Reset the PLANE function ..... 378
Defining the machining plane with space angles: PLANE SPATIAL ..... 379
Defining the machining plane with projection angles: PROJECTED PLANE ..... 381
Defining the machining plane with Euler angles: EULER PLANE ..... 383
Defining the machining plane with two vectors: VECTOR PLANE ..... 385
Defining the machining plane via three points: POINTS PLANE ..... 387
Defining the machining plane with a single, incremental space angle: PLANE RELATIVE ..... 389
Tilting the working plane through axis angle: PLANE AXIAL (FCL 3 function) ..... 390
Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function ..... 392
12.3 Inclined-Tool Machining in the Tilted Plane ..... 396
Function ..... 396
Inclined-tool machining via incremental traverse of a rotary axis ..... 396
12.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes ..... 397
Feed rate in mm/min on rotary axes A, B, C: M116 (software option 1) ..... 397
Shorter-path traverse of rotary axes: M126 ..... 398
Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360°: M94 ..... 399
Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working with tilted axes: M114 (software option 2) ..... 400
Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes (TCPM): M128 (software option
2) ..... 401
Exact stop at corners with nontangential transitions: M134 ..... 404
Selecting tilting axes: M138 ..... 404
Compensating the machine’s kinematics configuration for ACTUAL/NOMINAL positions at end of block: M144
(software option 2) ..... 405
12.5 Peripheral milling: 3-D radius compensation with workpiece orientation ..... 406
Function ..... 406

38
13 Programming: Pallet Editor ..... 407
13.1 Pallet Editor ..... 408
Application ..... 408
Selecting a pallet table ..... 410
Leaving the pallet file ..... 410
Pallet datum management with the pallet preset table ..... 411
Executing the pallet file ..... 413
13.2 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining ..... 414
Application ..... 414
Selecting a pallet file ..... 419
Setting up the pallet file with the entry form ..... 419
Sequence of tool-oriented machining ..... 424
Leaving the pallet file ..... 425
Executing the pallet file ..... 425

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 39

14 Manual Operation and Setup ..... 427
14.1 Switch-On, Switch-Off ..... 428
Switch-on ..... 428
Switch-off ..... 431
14.2 Moving the Machine Axes ..... 432
Note ..... 432
To traverse with the machine axis direction buttons: ..... 432
Incremental jog positioning ..... 433
Traversing with the HR 410 electronic handwheel ..... 434
HR 420 electronic handwheel ..... 435
14.3 Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M ..... 440
Function ..... 440
Entering values ..... 440
Changing the spindle speed and feed rate ..... 441
14.4 Datum Setting without a 3-D Touch Probe ..... 442
Note ..... 442
Preparation ..... 442
Workpiece presetting with axis keys ..... 443
Datum management with the preset table ..... 444
14.5 Using the 3-D Touch Probe ..... 451
Overview ..... 451
Selecting probe cycles ..... 451
Recording measured values from the touch probe cycles ..... 452
Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in datum tables ..... 453
Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in the preset table ..... 454
Storing measured values in the pallet preset table ..... 455
14.6 Calibrating a 3-D Touch Probe ..... 456
Introduction ..... 456
Calibrating the effective length ..... 456
Calibrating the effective radius and compensating center misalignment ..... 457
Displaying calibration values ..... 458
Managing more than one block of calibrating data ..... 458
14.7 Compensating Workpiece Misalignment with a 3-D Touch Probe ..... 459
Introduction ..... 459
Measuring the basic rotation ..... 459
Saving the basic rotation in the preset table ..... 460
Saving the basic rotation in the pallet preset table ..... 460
Displaying a basic rotation ..... 460
Canceling a basic rotation ..... 460

40
 14.8 Datum Setting with a 3-D Touch Probe ..... 461
Overview ..... 461
Datum setting in any axis ..... 461
Corner as datum—using points that were already probed for a basic rotation ..... 462
Corner as datum—without using points that were already probed for a basic rotation ..... 462
Circle center as datum ..... 463
Center line as datum ..... 464
Setting datum points using holes/cylindrical studs ..... 465
Measuring Workpieces with a 3-D Touch Probe ..... 466
Using the touch probe functions with mechanical probes or dial gauges ..... 469
14.9 Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1) ..... 470
Application, function ..... 470
Traversing the reference points in tilted axes ..... 472
Setting the datum in a tilted coordinate system ..... 472
Datum setting on machines with rotary tables ..... 472
Datum setting on machines with spindle-head changing systems ..... 472
Position display in a tilted system ..... 473
Limitations on working with the tilting function ..... 473
Activating manual tilting ..... 474
Setting the current tool-axis direction as the active machining direction (FCL 2 function) ..... 475

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 41

15 Positioning with Manual Data Input ..... 477
15.1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations ..... 478
Positioning with Manual Data Input (MDI) ..... 478
Protecting and erasing programs in $MDI ..... 481

42
16 Test Run and Program Run ..... 483
16.1 Graphics ..... 484
Application ..... 484
Overview of display modes ..... 486
Plan view ..... 486
Projection in 3 planes ..... 487
3-D view ..... 488
Magnifying details ..... 491
Repeating graphic simulation ..... 492
Displaying the tool ..... 492
Measuring the machining time ..... 493
16.2 Functions for Program Display ..... 494
Overview ..... 494
16.3 Test Run ..... 495
Application ..... 495
16.4 Program Run ..... 500
Application ..... 500
Running a part program ..... 501
Interrupting machining ..... 502
Moving the machine axes during an interruption ..... 504
Resuming program run after an interruption ..... 505
Mid-program startup (block scan) ..... 506
Returning to the contour ..... 509
Entering a program with the GOTO key ..... 509
Tool usage test ..... 510
16.5 Automatic Program Start ..... 512
Application ..... 512
16.6 Optional Block Skip ..... 513
Application ..... 513
Erasing the “/” character ..... 513
16.7 Optional Program-Run Interruption ..... 514
Application ..... 514

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 43

17 MOD Functions ..... 515
17.1 Selecting MOD Functions ..... 516
Selecting the MOD functions ..... 516
Changing the settings ..... 516
Exiting the MOD functions ..... 516
Overview of MOD functions ..... 517
17.2 Software Numbers ..... 518
Function ..... 518
17.3 Entering Code Numbers ..... 519
Function ..... 519
17.4 Loading Service Packs ..... 520
Function ..... 520
17.5 Setting the Data Interfaces ..... 521
Function ..... 521
Setting the RS-232 interface ..... 521
Setting the RS-422 interface ..... 521
Setting the OPERATING MODE of the external device ..... 521
Setting the baud rate ..... 521
Assign ..... 522
Software for data transfer ..... 523
17.6 Ethernet Interface ..... 525
Introduction ..... 525
Connection possibilities ..... 525
Connecting the iTNC directly with a Windows PC ..... 526
Configuring the TNC ..... 528
17.7 Configuring PGM MGT ..... 535
Function ..... 535
Changing the PGM MGT setting ..... 535
Dependent files ..... 536
17.8 Machine-Specific User Parameters ..... 537
Function ..... 537
17.9 Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space ..... 538
Function ..... 538
Rotate the entire image ..... 539
17.10 Position Display Types ..... 540
Function ..... 540
17.11 Unit of Measurement ..... 541
Function ..... 541
17.12 Selecting the Programming Language for $MDI ..... 542
Function ..... 542
17.13 Selecting the Axes for Generating G01 Blocks ..... 543
Function ..... 543

44
 17.14 Entering the Axis Traverse Limits, Datum Display ..... 544
Function ..... 544
Working without additional traverse limits ..... 544
Find and enter the maximum traverse ..... 544
Datum display ..... 545
17.15 Displaying HELP Files ..... 546
Function ..... 546
Selecting HELP files ..... 546
17.16 Displaying Operating Times ..... 547
Function ..... 547
17.17 Checking the Data Carrier ..... 548
Function ..... 548
Performing the data carrier check ..... 548
17.18 Setting the System Time ..... 549
Function ..... 549
Selecting appropriate settings ..... 549
17.19 TeleService ..... 550
Function ..... 550
Calling/exiting TeleService ..... 550
17.20 External Access ..... 551
Function ..... 551

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 45

18 Tables and Overviews ..... 553
18.1 General User Parameters ..... 554
Input possibilities for machine parameters ..... 554
Selecting general user parameters ..... 554
List of general user parameters ..... 555
18.2 Pin Layouts and Connecting Cables for the Data Interfaces ..... 569
RS-232-C/V.24 interface for HEIDENHAIN devices ..... 569
Non-HEIDENHAIN devices ..... 570
RS-422/V.11 interface ..... 571
Ethernet interface RJ45 socket ..... 571
18.3 Technical Information ..... 572
18.4 Exchanging the Buffer Battery ..... 580

46
19 iTNC 530 with Windows XP (Option) ..... 581
19.1 Introduction ..... 582
End User License Agreement (EULA) for Windows XP ..... 582
General ..... 582
Specifications ..... 583
19.2 Starting an iTNC 530 Application ..... 584
Logging on to Windows ..... 584
19.3 Switching Off the iTNC 530 ..... 586
Fundamentals ..... 586
Logging a user off ..... 586
Exiting the iTNC application ..... 587
Shutting down Windows ..... 588
19.4 Network Settings ..... 589
Prerequisite ..... 589
Adjusting the network settings ..... 589
Controlling access ..... 590
19.5 Specifics About File Management ..... 591
The iTNC drive ..... 591
Data transfer to the iTNC 530 ..... 592

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 47

48
First Steps with the
iTNC 530
1.1 Overview
1.1 Overview
This chapter is intended to help TNC beginners quickly learn to handle
the most important procedures. For more information on a respective
topic, see the section referred to in the text.
The following topics are included in this chapter
„ Machine Switch-On
„ Programming the First Part
„ Graphically Testing the Program
„ SETTING UP TOOLS
„ Workpiece Setup
„ Running the First Program

50 First Steps with the iTNC 530

 1.2 Machine Switch-On
1.2 Machine Switch-On
Acknowledge the power interruption and move
to the reference points

Switch-on and crossing the reference points can vary

depending on the machine tool. Your machine manual
provides more detailed information.

U Switch on the power supply for control and machine. The TNC starts
the operating system. This process may take several minutes. Then
the TNC will display the message “Power interruption.”
U Press the CE key: The TNC converts the PLC program

U Switch on the control voltage: The TNC checks

operation of the emergency stop circuit and goes into
the reference run mode
U Cross the reference points manually in the displayed
sequence: For each axis press the machine START
button. If you have absolute linear and angle encoders
on your machine there is no need for a reference run.
The TNC is now ready for operation in the Manual Operation mode.

Further information on this topic

„ Traversing the reference marks: See “Switch-on,” page 428
„ Operating modes:See “Programming and Editing,” page 75

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 51

1.3 Programming the First Part
1.3 Programming the First Part
Select the correct operating mode
You can write programs only in the Programming and Editing mode:
U Press the operating modes key: The TNC goes into
the Programming and Editing mode

Further information on this topic

„ Operating modes:See “Programming and Editing,” page 75

The most important TNC keys

Functions for conversational guidance Key

Confirm entry and activate the next dialog
prompt

Ignore the dialog question

End the dialog immediately

Abort dialog, discard entries

Soft keys on the screen with which you select

functions appropriate to the active state

Further information on this topic

„ Writing and editing programs: See “Editing a program,” page 100
„ Overview of keys: See “Controls of the TNC,” page 2

52 First Steps with the iTNC 530

 1.3 Programming the First Part
Create a new program/file management
U Press the PGM MGT key: the TNC displays the file
management. The file management of the TNC is
arranged much like the file management on a PC with
the Windows Explorer. The file management enables
you to manipulate data on the TNC hard disk
U Use the arrow keys to select the folder in which you
want to open the new file
U Enter a file name with the extension .I: The TNC then
automatically opens a program and asks for the unit
of measure for the new program
U To select the unit of measure: press the MM or INCH
soft key: The TNC automatically starts the workpiece
blank definition (see “Define a workpiece blank” on
page 54)
The TNC automatically generates the first and last blocks of the
program. Afterwards you can no longer change these blocks.

Further information on this topic

„ File management: See “Working with the File Manager,” page 108
„ Creating a new program: See “Creating and Writing Programs,”
page 95

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 53

1.3 Programming the First Part
Define a workpiece blank
Immediately after you have created a new program, the TNC starts the
dialog for entering the workpiece blank definition. Always define the
workpiece blank as a cuboid by entering the MIN and MAX points,
each with reference to the selected reference point.
After you have created a new program, the TNC automatically initiates
the workpiece blank definition and asks for the required data:
U Spindle axis Z - Plane XY?: Enter the active spindle axis. G17 is
saved as default setting. Accept with the ENT key
U Coordinates?: Smallest X coordinate of the workpiece blank with
respect to the reference point, e.g. 0. Confirm with the ENT key
U Coordinates?: Smallest Y coordinate of the workpiece blank with
respect to the reference point, e.g. 0. Confirm with the ENT key
U Coordinates?: Smallest Z coordinate of the workpiece blank with
respect to the reference point, e.g. -40. Confirm with the ENT key
U Coordinates?: Largest X coordinate of the workpiece blank with
respect to the reference point, e.g. 100. Confirm with the ENT key
U Coordinates?: Largest Y coordinate of the workpiece blank with Z
respect to the reference point, e.g. 100. Confirm with the ENT key
U Coordinates?: Largest Z coordinate of the workpiece blank with MAX
respect to the reference point, e.g. 0. Confirm with the ENT key Y
100
Example NC blocks
X
%NEW G71 *
N10 G30 G17 X+0 Y+0 Z-40 * 0
100
N20 G31 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 *
-40 MIN
N99999999 %NEW G71 * 0

Further information on this topic

„ Defining the workpiece blank: (See page 96)

54 First Steps with the iTNC 530

 1.3 Programming the First Part
Program layout
NC programs should be arranged consistently in a similar manner. This
makes it easier to find your place and reduces errors.

Recommended program layout for simple, conventional contour

machining
1 Call tool, define tool axis Example: Layout of contour machining programs
2 Retract the tool
%BSPCONT G71 *
3 Pre-position the tool in the working plane near the contour starting
point N10 G30 G71 X... Y... Z... *
4 In the tool axis, position the tool above the workpiece, or pre- N20 G31 X... Y... Z... *
position immediately to workpiece depth. If required, switch on N30 T5 G17 S5000 *
the spindle/coolant
5 Move to the contour N40 G00 G40 G90 Z+250 *
6 Machine the contour N50 X... Y... *
7 Leave the contour N60 G01 Z+10 F3000 M13 *
8 Retract the tool, end the program N70 X... Y... RL F500 *
Further information on this topic: ...
„ Contour programming: See “Tool Movements,” page 184 N160 G40 ... X... Y... F3000 M9 *
N170 G00 Z+250 M2 *
N99999999 BSPCONT G71 *

Recommended program layout for simple cycle programs

1 Call tool, define tool axis Example: Program layout for cycle programming
2 Retract the tool
%BSBCYC G71 *
3 Define the fixed cycle
N10 G30 G71 X... Y... Z... *
4 Move to the machining position
5 Call the cycle, switch on the spindle/coolant N20 G31 X... Y... Z... *
6 Retract the tool, end the program N30 T5 G17 S5000 *

Further information on this topic: N40 G00 G40 G90 Z+250 *

„ Cycle programming: See User’s Manual for Cycles N50 G200... *

N60 X... Y... *
N70 G79 M13 *
N80 G00 Z+250 M2 *
N99999999 BSBCYC G71 *

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 55

1.3 Programming the First Part
Program a simple contour
The contour shown to the right is to be milled once to a depth of 5 mm.
You have already defined the workpiece blank. After you have initiated Y 10
a dialog through a function key, enter all the data requested by the
TNC in the screen header. 3
95
2

10
U Call the tool: Enter the tool data. Confirm each of your
entries with the ENT key. Do not forget the tool axis
U Retract the tool: Press the orange axis key Z in order
0 to get clear in the tool axis, and enter the value for the
position to be approached, e.g. 250. Confirm with the
ENT key

20
1 4
U Confirm Radius comp.: RL/RR/no comp? by pressing 5

the ENT key: Activate the radius compensation 20 X

U Confirm Miscellaneous function M? with the END 5 9
key: The TNC saves the entered positioning block
U Preposition the tool in the working plane: Press the
0 orange X axis key and enter the value for the position
to be approached, e.g. -20
U Press the orange Y axis key and enter the value for the
position to be approached, e.g. -20. Confirm with the
ENT key
U Confirm Radius comp.: RL/RR/no comp? by pressing
the ENT key: Do not activate the radius compensation
U Confirm Miscellaneous function M? with the END
key: The TNC saves the entered positioning block
U Move the tool to workpiece depth: Press the orange Y
axis key and enter the value for the position to be
approached, e.g. -5. Confirm with the ENT key
U Confirm Radius comp.: RL/RR/no comp? by pressing
the ENT key: Do not activate the radius compensation
U Feed rate F=? Enter the positioning feed rate, e.g.
3000 mm/min and confirm with the ENT key
U Miscellaneous function M? Switch on the spindle and
coolant, e.g. M13. Confirm with the END key: The TNC
saves the entered positioning block
U Move to the contour: Define the rounding radius of
26 the approaching arc
U Machine the contour and move to contour point 2: You
only need to enter the information that changes. In
other words, enter only the Y coordinate 95 and save
your entry with the END key
U Move to contour point 3: Enter the X coordinate 95
and save your entry with the END key

56 First Steps with the iTNC 530

 1.3 Programming the First Part
U Define the chamfer at contour point 3: Enter the
chamfer width 10 mm and save with the END key
U Move to contour point 4: Enter the Y coordinate 5 and
save your entry with the END key
U Define the chamfer at contour point 4: Enter the
chamfer width 20 mm and save with the END key
U Move to contour point 1: Enter the X coordinate 5 and
save your entry with the END key
U Depart the contour: Define the rounding radius of the
27 departing arc
U Retract the tool: Press the orange axis key Z in order
0 to get clear in the tool axis, and enter the value for the
position to be approached, e.g. 250. Confirm with the
ENT key
U Confirm Radius comp.: RL/RR/no comp? by pressing
the ENT key: Do not activate the radius compensation
U Confirm Miscellaneous function M? Enter M2 to end
the program and confirm with the END key: The TNC
saves the entered positioning block

Further information on this topic

„ Complete example with NC blocks: See “Example: Linear
movements and chamfers with Cartesian coordinates,” page 202
„ Creating a new program: See “Creating and Writing Programs,”
page 95
„ Approaching/departing contours: See “Contour Approach and
Departure,” page 189
„ Programming contours: See “Overview of path functions,” page
193
„ Tool radius compensation: See “Tool radius compensation,” page
178
„ Miscellaneous functions (M): See “Miscellaneous Functions for
Program Run Control, Spindle and Coolant,” page 300

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 57

1.3 Programming the First Part
Create a cycle program
The holes (depth of 20 mm) shown in the figure at right are to be drilled
with a standard drilling cycle. You have already defined the workpiece
blank. Y
100
U Call the tool: Enter the tool data. Confirm each of your
90
entries with the ENT key. Do not forget the tool axis
U Retract the tool: Press the orange axis key Z in order
0 to get clear in the tool axis, and enter the value for the
position to be approached, e.g. 250. Confirm with the
ENT key
U Confirm Radius comp.: RL/RR/no comp? by pressing
the ENT key: Activate the radius compensation 10

U Confirm Miscellaneous function M? with the END X

10 20 80 90 100
key: The TNC saves the entered positioning block
U Call the cycle menu

U Display the drilling cycles

U Select the standard drilling cycle 200: The TNC starts

the dialog for cycle definition. Enter all parameters
requested by the TNC step by step and conclude each
entry with the ENT key. In the screen to the right, the
TNC also displays a graphic showing the respective
cycle parameter

U Move to the first drilling position: Enter the

0 coordinates of the drilling position, switch on the
coolant and spindle, and call the cycle with M99
U Move to the subsequent drilling positions: Enter the
0 coordinates of the respective drilling positions, and
call the cycle with M99
U Retract the tool: Press the orange axis key Z in order
0 to get clear in the tool axis, and enter the value for the
position to be approached, e.g. 250. Confirm with the
ENT key
U Confirm Radius comp.: RL/RR/no comp? by pressing
the ENT key: Do not activate the radius compensation
U Confirm Miscellaneous function M? Enter M2 to end
the program and confirm with the END key: The TNC
saves the entered positioning block

58 First Steps with the iTNC 530

 1.3 Programming the First Part
Example NC blocks
%C200 G71 *
N10 G30 G17 X+0 Y+0 Z-40 * Definition of workpiece blank
N20 G31 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 *
N30 T5 G17 S4500 * Tool call
N40 G00 G40 G90 Z+250 * Retract the tool
N50 G200 DRILLING Define the cycle
Q200=2 ;SETUP CLEARANCE
Q201=-20 ;DEPTH
Q206=250 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGN
Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q210=0 ;DWELL TIME AT TOP
Q203=-10 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=20 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q211=0.2 ;DWELL TIME AT DEPTH
N60 X+10 Y+10 M13 M99 * Spindle and coolant on, call cycle
N70 X+10 Y+90 M99 * Call the cycle
N80 X+90 Y+10 M99 * Call the cycle
N90 X+90 Y+90 M99 * Call the cycle
N100 G00 Z+250 M2 * Retract in the tool axis, end program
N99999999 %C200 G71 *

Further information on this topic

„ Creating a new program: See “Creating and Writing Programs,”
page 95
„ Cycle programming: See User’s Manual for Cycles

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 59

1.4 Graphically Testing the Program
1.4 Graphically Testing the
Program
Select the correct operating mode
You can test programs only in the Test Run mode:
U Press the operating modes key: The TNC goes into
the Test Run mode

Further information on this topic

„ Operating modes of the TNC: See “Operating Modes,” page 74
„ Testing programs: See “Test Run,” page 495

Select the tool table for the test run

You only need to execute this step is you have not activated a tool
table in the Test Run mode.
U Press the PGM MGT key: the TNC displays the file
management
U Press the SELECT TYPE soft key: The TNC shows a
soft-key menu for selection of the file type to be
displayed
U Press the SHOW ALL soft key: The TNC shows all
saved files in the right window
U Move the highlight to the left onto the directories

U Move the highlight to the TNC:\ directory

U Move the highlight to the right onto the files

U Move the highlight to the file TOOL.T (active tool

table) and load with the ENT key: TOOL.T receives
that status S and is therefore active for the Test Run
U Press the END key: Leave the file manager

Further information on this topic

„ Tool management: See “Entering tool data in the table,” page 158
„ Testing programs: See “Test Run,” page 495

60 First Steps with the iTNC 530

 1.4 Graphically Testing the Program
Choose the program you want to test
U Press the PGM MGT key: the TNC displays the file
management
U Press the LAST FILES soft key: The TNC opens a pop-
up window with the most recently selected files
U Use the arrow keys to select the program that you
want to test. Load with the ENT key

Further information on this topic

„ Selecting a program: See “Working with the File Manager,” page
108

Select the screen layout and the view

U Press the key for selecting the screen layout. The TNC
shows all available alternatives in the soft-key row
U Press the PROGRAM + GRAPHICS soft key: In the
left half of the screen the TNC shows the program; in
the right half it shows the workpiece blank
U Select the desired view via soft key
U Plan view

U Projection in three planes

U 3-D view

Further information on this topic

„ Graphic functions: See “Graphics,” page 484
„ Running a test run: See “Test Run,” page 495

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 61

1.4 Graphically Testing the Program
Start the program test
U Press the RESET + START soft key: The TNC
simulates the active program up to a programmed
break or to the program end
U While the simulation is running you can use the soft
keys to change views
U Press the STOP soft key: The TNC interrupts the test
run
U Press the START soft key: The TNC resumes the test
run after a break

Further information on this topic

„ Running a test run: See “Test Run,” page 495
„ Graphic functions: See “Graphics,” page 484
„ Adjusting the test speed:See “Setting the speed of the test run,”
page 485

62 First Steps with the iTNC 530

 1.5 Setting Up Tools
1.5 Setting Up Tools
Select the correct operating mode
Tools are set up in the Manual Operation mode:
U Press the operating modes key: The TNC goes into
the Manual Operation mode

Further information on this topic

„ Operating modes of the TNC: See “Operating Modes,” page 74

Prepare and measure tools

U Clamp the required tools in their chucks
U When measuring with an external tool presetter: Measure the tools,
note down the length and radius, or transfer them directly to the
machine through a transfer program
U When measuring on the machine: Place the tools into the tool
changer (See page 64)

The tool table TOOL.T

In the tool table TOOL.T (permanently saved under TNC:\), save the
tool data such as length and radius, but also further tool-specific
information that the TNC needs to conduct its functions.
To enter tool data in the tool table TOOL.T, proceed as follows:
U Display the tool table
U Edit the tool table: Set the EDITING soft key to ON
U With the upward or downward arrow keys you can
select the tool number that you want to edit
U With the rightward or leftward arrow keys you can
select the tool data that you want to edit
U To leave the tool table, press the END key

Further information on this topic

„ Operating modes of the TNC: See “Operating Modes,” page 74
„ Working with the tool table: See “Entering tool data in the table,”
page 158

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 63

1.5 Setting Up Tools
The pocket table TOOL_P.TCH

The function of the pocket table depends on the machine.

Your machine manual provides more detailed information.

In the pocket table TOOL_P.TCH (permanently saved under TNC:\) you

specify which tools your tool magazine contains.
To enter data in the pocket table TOOL_P.TCH, proceed as follows:
U Display the tool table
U Display the pocket table
U Edit the pocket table: Set the EDITING soft key to ON
U With the upward or downward arrow keys you can
select the pocket number that you want to edit
U With the rightward or leftward arrow keys you can
select the data that you want to edit
U To leave the pocket table, press the END key

Further information on this topic

„ Operating modes of the TNC: See “Operating Modes,” page 74
„ Working with the pocket table: See “Pocket table for tool changer,”
page 166

64 First Steps with the iTNC 530

 1.6 Workpiece Setup
1.6 Workpiece Setup
Select the correct operating mode
Workpieces are set up in the Manual Operation or Electronic
Handwheel mode
U Press the operating modes key: The TNC goes into
the Manual Operation mode

Further information on this topic

„ Manual mode: See “Moving the Machine Axes,” page 432

Clamp the workpiece

Mount the workpiece with a fixture on the machine table. If you have
a 3-D touch probe on your machine, then you do not need to clamp the
workpiece parallel to the axes.
If you do not have a 3-D touch probe available, you have to align the
workpiece so that it is fixed with its edges parallel to the machine
axes.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 65

1.6 Workpiece Setup
Align the workpiece with a 3-D touch probe
system
U Insert the 3-D touch probe: In the Manual Data Input (MDI) operating
mode, run a TOOL CALL block containing the tool axis, and then return
to the Manual Operation mode (in MDI mode you can run an
individual NC block independently of the others)
U Select the probing functions: The TNC displays the
available functions in the soft-key row
U Measure the basic rotation: The NC displays the basic
rotation menu. To identify the basic rotation, probe
two points on a straight surface of the workpiece
U Use the axis-direction keys to pre-position the touch
probe to a position near the first contact point
U Select the probing direction via soft key
U Press NC start: The touch probe moves in the defined
direction until it contacts the workpiece and then
automatically returns to its starting point
U Use the axis-direction keys to pre-position the touch
probe to a position near the second contact point
U Press NC start: The touch probe moves in the defined
direction until it contacts the workpiece and then
automatically returns to its starting point
U Then the TNC shows the measured basic rotation
U Press the END key to close the menu and then
answer the question of whether the basic rotation
should be transferred to the preset table by pressing
the NO ENT key (no transfer)

Further information on this topic

„ MDI operating mode:See “Programming and Executing Simple
Machining Operations,” page 478
„ Workpiece alignment: See “Compensating Workpiece
Misalignment with a 3-D Touch Probe,” page 459

66 First Steps with the iTNC 530

 1.6 Workpiece Setup
Set the datum with a 3-D touch probe
U Insert the 3-D touch probe: In the MDI mode, run a TOOL CALL block
containing the tool axis and then return to the Manual Operation
mode
U Select the probing functions: The TNC displays the
available functions in the soft-key row
U Set the reference point at a tool corner, for example:
The TNC asks whether the prove points from the
previously measured basic rotation should be loaded.
Press the ENT key to load points
U Position the touch probe at a position near the first
touch point of the side that was not probed for basic
rotation.
U Select the probing direction via soft key
U Press NC start: The touch probe moves in the defined
direction until it contacts the workpiece and then
automatically returns to its starting point
U Use the axis-direction keys to pre-position the touch
probe to a position near the second contact point
U Press NC start: The touch probe moves in the defined
direction until it contacts the workpiece and then
automatically returns to its starting point
U Then the TNC shows the coordinates of the measured
corner point
U Set to 0: Press the SET DATUM soft key
U Press the END to close the menu

Further information on this topic

„ Datum setting: See “Datum Setting with a 3-D Touch Probe,” page
461

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 67

1.7 Running the First Program
1.7 Running the First Program
Select the correct operating mode
You can run programs either in the Single Block or the Full Sequence
mode:
U Press the operating mode key: The TNC goes into the
Program Run, Single Block mode and the TNC
executes the program block by block. You have to
confirm each block with the NC key
U Press the operating mode key: The TNC goes into the
Program Run, Full Sequence mode and the TNC
executes the program after NC start up to a program
break or to the end of the program

Further information on this topic

„ Operating modes of the TNC: See “Operating Modes,” page 74
„ Running programs: See “Program Run,” page 500

Choose the program you want to run

U Press the PGM MGT key: the TNC displays the file
management
U Press the LAST FILES soft key: The TNC opens a pop-
up window with the most recently selected files
U If desired, use the arrow keys to select the program
that you want to run. Load with the ENT key

Further information on this topic

„ File management: See “Working with the File Manager,” page 108

Start the program

U Press the NC start button: The TNC executes the
active program

Further information on this topic

„ Running programs: See “Program Run,” page 500

68 First Steps with the iTNC 530

Introduction
2.1 The iTNC 530
2.1 The iTNC 530
HEIDENHAIN TNC controls are workshop-oriented contouring
controls that enable you to program conventional machining
operations right at the machine in an easy-to-use conversational
programming language. They are designed for milling, drilling and
boring machines, as well as for machining centers. The iTNC 530 can
control up to 12 axes. You can also change the angular position of the
spindle under program control.
An integrated hard disk provides storage for as many programs as you
like, even if they were created off-line. For quick calculations you can
call up the on-screen pocket calculator at any time.
Keyboard and screen layout are clearly arranged in such a way that the
functions are fast and easy to use.

Programming: HEIDENHAIN conversational,

smarT.NC and DIN/ISO formats
The HEIDENHAIN conversational programming format is an especially
easy method of writing programs. Interactive graphics illustrate the
individual machining steps for programming the contour. If a
production drawing is not dimensioned for NC, the HEIDENHAIN FK
free contour programming performs the necessary calculations
automatically. Workpiece machining can be graphically simulated
either during or before actual machining.
The smarT.NC operating mode offers TNC beginners an especially
simple possibility to quickly and without much training create
structured conversational dialog programs. Separate user
documentation is available for smarT.NC.
It is also possible to program the TNCs in ISO format or DNC mode.
You can also enter and test one program while the control is running
another.

Compatibility
The TNC can run all part programs that were written on HEIDENHAIN
controls TNC 150 B and later. In as much as old TNC programs contain
OEM cycles, the iTNC 530 must be adapted to them with the PC
software CycleDesign. For more information, contact your machine
tool builder or HEIDENHAIN.

70 Introduction
 2.2 Visual Display Unit and Keyboard
2.2 Visual Display Unit and
Keyboard
Visual display unit
The TNC is delivered with the BF 150 (TFT) color flat-panel display (see
figure).
1 8
1 Header
When the TNC is on, the selected operating modes are shown in
the screen header: the machining mode at the left and the
programming mode at right. The currently active mode is
displayed in the larger box, where the dialog prompts and TNC
7
messages also appear (unless the TNC is showing only graphics).
2 Soft keys
In the footer the TNC indicates additional functions in a soft-key
row. You can select these functions by pressing the keys 2
immediately below them. The lines immediately above the soft- 5
key row indicate the number of soft-key rows that can be called 6
1
with the black arrow keys to the right and left. The active soft-key
31
row is indicated by brightened bar.
4 4
3 Soft-key selection keys
4 Shift between soft-key rows
5 Sets the screen layout
6 Shift key for switchover between machining and programming
modes
7 Soft-key selection keys for machine tool builders
8 Switches soft-key rows for machine tool builders

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 71

2.2 Visual Display Unit and Keyboard
Sets the screen layout
You select the screen layout yourself: In the PROGRAMMING AND
EDITING mode of operation, for example, you can have the TNC show
program blocks in the left window while the right window displays
programming graphics. You could also display the program structure
in the right window instead, or display only program blocks in one large
window. The available screen windows depend on the selected
operating mode.
To change the screen layout:

Press the SPLIT SCREEN key: The soft-key row

shows the available layout options (see “Operating
Modes,” page 74).

Select the desired screen layout.

72 Introduction
 2.2 Visual Display Unit and Keyboard
Operating panel
The TNC is delivered with the TE 530 keyboard unit. The figure shows
the controls and displays of the TE 530 keyboard unit. 7

1 Alphabetic keyboard for entering texts and file names, and for ISO
programming.
Dual-processor version: Additional keys for Windows operation
1
2 „ File management
9
7
„ Calculator 2
1 5 6
„ MOD function
„ HELP function 3 8
3 Programming modes 4
1
4 Machine operating modes
5 Initiation of programming dialog
6 Arrow keys and GOTO jump command
7 Numerical input and axis selection
8 Touchpad: Only for operating the dual-processor version, soft
keys and smarT.NC
9 smarT.NC navigation keys
The functions of the individual keys are described on the inside front
cover.

Some machine manufacturers do not use the standard

operating panel from HEIDENHAIN. Please refer to your
machine manual in these cases.
Machine panel buttons, e.g. NC START or NC STOP, are
also described in the manual for your machine tool.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 73

2.3 Operating Modes
2.3 Operating Modes
Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel
The Manual Operation mode is required for setting up the machine
tool. In this mode of operation, you can position the machine axes
manually or by increments, set the datums, and tilt the working plane.
The Electronic Handwheel mode of operation allows you to move the
machine axes manually with the HR electronic handwheel.
Soft keys for selecting the screen layout (select as described
previously)

Window Soft key

Positions

Left: positions, right: status display

Left: positions, right: active collision objects

(FCL4 function).

Positioning with Manual Data Input

This mode of operation is used for programming simple traversing
movements, such as for face milling or pre-positioning.
Soft keys for selecting the screen layout
Window Soft key
Program

Left: program blocks, right: status display

Left: program blocks, right: active collision

objects (FCL4 function). If this view is selected,
then the TNC indicates a collision with a red
frame around the graphics window.

74 Introduction
 2.3 Operating Modes
Programming and Editing
In this mode of operation you can write your part programs. The FK
free programming feature, the various cycles and the Q parameter
functions help you with programming and add necessary information.
If desired, the programming graphics or the 3-D line graphics (FCL 2
function) display the programmed traverse paths.
Soft keys for selecting the screen layout

Window Soft key

Program

Left: program blocks, right: program structure

Left: program blocks, right: graphics

Left: program blocks, right: 3-D line graphics

Test Run
In the Test Run mode of operation, the TNC checks programs and
program sections for errors, such as geometrical incompatibilities,
missing or incorrect data within the program or violations of the work
space. This simulation is supported graphically in different display
modes.
With the dynamic collision monitoring (DCM) software option you can
test the program for potential collisions. As during program run, the
TNC takes into account all permanent machine components defined
by the machine manufacturer as well as all measured fixtures.
Soft keys for selecting the screen layout: see “Program Run, Full
Sequence and Program Run, Single Block,” page 76.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 75

2.3 Operating Modes
Program Run, Full Sequence and Program Run,
Single Block
In the Program Run, Full Sequence mode of operation the TNC
executes a part program continuously to its end or to a manual or
programmed stop. You can resume program run after an interruption.
In the Program Run, Single Block mode of operation you execute each
block separately by pressing the machine START button.
Soft keys for selecting the screen layout

Window Soft key

Program

Left: program, right: program structure

Left: program, right: status

Left: program, right: graphics

Graphics

Left: program blocks, right: active collision

objects (FCL4 function). If this view is selected,
then the TNC indicates a collision with a red
frame around the graphics window.

Active collision objects (FCL4 function) If this

view is selected, then the TNC indicates a
collision with a red frame around the graphics
window.

Soft keys for selecting the screen layout for pallet tables

Window Soft key

Pallet table

Left: program blocks, right: pallet table

Left: pallet table, right: status

Left: pallet table, right: graphics

76 Introduction
 2.4 Status Displays
2.4 Status Displays
“General” status display
The status display in the lower part of the screen informs you of the
current state of the machine tool. It is displayed automatically in the
following modes of operation:
„ Program Run, Single Block and Program Run, Full Sequence, except
if the screen layout is set to display graphics only, and
„ Positioning with Manual Data Input (MDI).
In the Manual mode and Electronic Handwheel mode the status
display appears in the large window.
Information in the status display

Symbol Meaning
ACTL. Actual or nominal coordinates of the current position

XYZ Machine axes; the TNC displays auxiliary axes in

lower-case letters. The sequence and quantity of
displayed axes is determined by the machine tool
builder. Refer to your machine manual for more
information.

FSM The displayed feed rate in inches corresponds to one

tenth of the effective value. Spindle speed S, feed
rate F and active M functions.

Program run started.

Axis is locked

Axis can be moved with the handwheel

Axes are moving under a basic rotation

Axes are moving in a tilted working plane

The M128 function or TCPM FUNCTION is active

The Dynamic Collision Monitoring function (DCM)

is active

The Adaptive Feed Function (AFC) is active

(software option)

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 77

2.4 Status Displays
Symbol Meaning
One or more global program settings are active
(software option)

Number of the active presets from the preset table.

If the datum was set manually, the TNC displays the
text MAN behind the symbol.

Additional status displays

The additional status displays contain detailed information on the
program run. They can be called in all operating modes except for the
Programming and Editing mode of operation.

To switch on the additional status display:

Call the soft-key row for screen layout.

Screen layout with additional status display: In the

right half of the screen, the TNC shows the Overview
status form.

To select an additional status display:

Shift the soft-key rows until the STATUS soft keys

appear.

Either select the additional status display, e.g.

positions and coordinates, or

use the soft keys to select the desired view.

With the soft keys or switch-over soft keys, you can choose directly
between the available status displays.

Please note that some of the status information described

below is not available unless the associated software
option is enabled on your TNC.

78 Introduction
 2.4 Status Displays
Overview
After switch-on, the TNC displays the Overview status form, provided
that you have selected the PROGRAM+STATUS screen layout (or
POSITION + STATUS). The overview form contains a summary of the
most important status information, which you can also find on the
various detail forms.
Soft key Meaning
Position display in up to 5 axes

Tool information

Active M functions

Active coordinate transformations

Active subprogram

Active program section repeat

Program called with PGM CALL

Current machining time

Name of the active main program

General program information (PGM tab)

Soft key Meaning

No direct Name of the active main program
selection
possible

Circle center CC (pole)

Dwell time counter

Machining time when the program was

completely simulated in the Test Run operating
mode

Current machining time in percent

Current time

Current/programmed contouring feed rate

Active programs

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 79

2.4 Status Displays General pallet information (PAL tab)

Soft key Meaning

No direct Number of the active pallet preset
selection
possible

Program section repeat/Subprograms (LBL tab)

Soft key Meaning

No direct Active program section repeats with block
selection number, label number, and number of
possible programmed repeats/repeats yet to be run

Active subprogram numbers with block number in

which the subprogram was called and the label
number that was called

Information on standard cycles (CYC tab)

Soft key Meaning

No direct Active machining cycle
selection
possible

Active values of Cycle G62 Tolerance

80 Introduction
 2.4 Status Displays
Active miscellaneous functions M (M tab)

Soft key Meaning

No direct List of the active M functions with fixed meaning
selection
possible

List of the active M functions that are adapted by

your machine manufacturer

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 81

2.4 Status Displays
Positions and coordinates (POS tab)

Soft key Meaning

Type of position display, e.g. actual position

Value traversed in virtual axis direction VT (only with

“global program settings” software option)

Tilt angle of the working plane

Angle of a basic rotation

Information on tools (TOOL tab)

Soft key Meaning

„ T: Tool number and name
„ RT: Number and name of a replacement tool

Tool axis

Tool lengths and radii

Oversizes (delta values) from the tool table (TAB) and

the TOOL CALL (PGM)

Tool life, maximum tool life (TIME 1) and maximum

tool life for TOOL CALL (TIME 2)

Display of the active tool and the (next) replacement

tool

82 Introduction
 2.4 Status Displays
Tool measurement (TT tab)

The TNC only displays the TT tab if the function is active

on your machine.

Soft key Meaning

No direct Number of the tool to be measured
selection
possible

Display whether the tool radius or the tool length

is being measured

MIN and MAX values of the individual cutting

edges and the result of measuring the rotating
tool (DYN = dynamic measurement)

Cutting edge number with the corresponding

measured value. If the measured value is
followed by an asterisk, the allowable tolerance in
the tool table was exceeded

Coordinate transformations (TRANS tab)

Soft key Meaning

Name of the active datum table

Active datum number (#), comment from the

active line of the active datum number (DOC) from
Cycle G53

Active datum shift (Cycle G54); The TNC displays

an active datum shift in up to 8 axes

Mirrored axes (Cycle G28)

Active basic rotation

Active rotation angle (Cycle G73)

Active scaling factor/factors (Cycles G72); The

TNC displays an active scaling factor in up to 6
axes

Scaling datum

For further information, refer to the User's Manual for Cycles,

"Coordinate Transformation Cycles."

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 83

2.4 Status Displays
Global program settings 1 (GPS1 tab, software option)

The TNC only displays the tab if the function is active on

your machine.

Soft key Meaning

No direct Swapped axes
selection
possible

Superimposed datum shift

Superimposed mirroring

Global program settings 2 (GPS2 tab, software option)

The TNC only displays the tab if the function is active on

your machine.

Soft key Meaning

No direct Locked axes
selection
possible

Superimposed basic rotation

Superimposed rotation

Active feed rate factor

84 Introduction
 2.4 Status Displays
Adaptive Feed Control (AFC tab, software option)

The TNC only displays the AFC tab if the function is active
on your machine.

Soft key Meaning

No direct Active mode in which adaptive feed control is
selection running
possible

Active tool (number and name)

Cut number

Current factor of the feed potentiometer in

percent

Active spindle load in percent

Reference load of the spindle

Current spindle speed

Current deviation of the speed

Current machining time

Line diagram, in which the current spindle load

and the value commanded by the TNC for the
feed-rate override are shown

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 85

2.5 Window Manager
2.5 Window Manager

The machine tool builder determines the scope of function

and behavior of the window manager. The machine tool
manual provides further information.

The TNC features the XFCE window manager. XFCE is a standard

application for UNIX-based operating systems, and is used to manage
graphical user interfaces. The following functions are possible with the
window manager:
„ Display a taskbar for switching between various applications (user
interfaces).
„ Manage an additional desktop, on which special applications from
your machine tool builder can run.
„ Control the focus between NC-software applications and those of
the machine tool builder.
„ The size and position of pop-up windows can be changed. It is also
possible to close, minimize and restore the pop-up windows.

The TNC shows a star in the upper left of the screen if an

application of the window manager or the window
manager itself has caused an error. In this case, switch to
the window manager and correct the problem. If required,
refer to your machine manual.

86 Introduction
 2.6 Accessories: HEIDENHAIN 3-D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels
2.6 Accessories: HEIDENHAIN 3-D
Touch Probes and Electronic
Handwheels
3-D touch probes
With the various HEIDENHAIN 3-D touch probe systems you can:
„ Automatically align workpieces
„ Quickly and precisely set datums
„ Measure the workpiece during program run
„ Measure and inspect tools

All of the touch probe functions are described in the

User’s Manual for Cycles. Please contact HEIDENHAIN if
you require a copy of this User’s Manual. ID: 670 388-xx.

TS 220, TS 640 and TS 440 touch trigger probes

These touch probes are particularly effective for automatic workpiece
alignment, datum setting and workpiece measurement. The TS 220
transmits the triggering signals to the TNC via cable and is a cost-
effective alternative for applications where digitizing is not frequently
required.
The TS 640 (see figure) and the smaller TS 440 feature infrared
transmission of the triggering signal to the TNC. This makes them
highly convenient for use on machines with automatic tool changers.
Principle of operation: HEIDENHAIN triggering touch probes feature a
wear resisting optical switch that generates an electrical signal as
soon as the stylus is deflected. This signal is transmitted to the
control, which stores the current position of the stylus as an actual
value.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 87

2.6 Accessories: HEIDENHAIN 3-D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels
TT 140 tool touch probe for tool measurement
The TT 140 is a triggering 3-D touch probe for tool measurement and
inspection. Your TNC provides three cycles for this touch probe with
which you can measure the tool length and radius automatically either
with the spindle rotating or stopped. The TT 140 features a particularly
rugged design and a high degree of protection, which make it
insensitive to coolants and swarf. The triggering signal is generated by
a wear-resistant and highly reliable optical switch.

HR electronic handwheels
Electronic handwheels facilitate moving the axis slides precisely by
hand. A wide range of traverses per handwheel revolution is available.
Apart from the HR 130 and HR 150 integral handwheels,
HEIDENHAIN also offers the HR 410 and HR 420 portable
handwheels. You will find a detailed description of HR 420 in Chapter
14 of this manual (see “HR 420 electronic handwheel” on page 435).

88 Introduction
Programming:
Fundamentals, File
Management
3.1 Fundamentals
3.1 Fundamentals
Position encoders and reference marks
Z
The machine axes are equipped with position encoders that register
the positions of the machine table or tool. Linear axes are usually Y
equipped with linear encoders, rotary tables and tilting axes with angle
encoders. X
When a machine axis moves, the corresponding position encoder
generates an electrical signal. The TNC evaluates this signal and
calculates the precise actual position of the machine axis.
If there is a power interruption, the calculated position will no longer
correspond to the actual position of the machine slide. To recover this
association, incremental position encoders are provided with
reference marks. The scales of the position encoders contain one or
more reference marks that transmit a signal to the TNC when they are
crossed over. From that signal the TNC can re-establish the
assignment of displayed positions to machine positions. For linear
encoders with distance-coded reference marks the machine axes
need to move by no more than 20 mm, for angle encoders by no more
than 20°.
With absolute encoders, an absolute position value is transmitted to
the control immediately upon switch-on. In this way the assignment XMP
of the actual position to the machine slide position is re-established
directly after switch-on.
X (Z,Y)
Reference system
A reference system is required to define positions in a plane or in
space. The position data are always referenced to a predetermined
point and are described through coordinates.
The Cartesian coordinate system (a rectangular coordinate system) is
based on the three coordinate axes X, Y and Z. The axes are mutually
perpendicular and intersect at one point called the datum. A
coordinate identifies the distance from the datum in one of these
directions. A position in a plane is thus described through two
coordinates, and a position in space through three coordinates.
Coordinates that are referenced to the datum are referred to as Z
absolute coordinates. Relative coordinates are referenced to any other
known position (reference point) you define within the coordinate
system. Relative coordinate values are also referred to as incremental
coordinate values. Y

90 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.1 Fundamentals
Reference system on milling machines
When using a milling machine, you orient tool movements to the
Cartesian coordinate system. The illustration at right shows how the
Cartesian coordinate system describes the machine axes. The figure
illustrates the right-hand rule for remembering the three axis +Y +Z
directions: the middle finger points in the positive direction of the tool +X
axis from the workpiece toward the tool (the Z axis), the thumb points
in the positive X direction, and the index finger in the positive Y
direction.
The iTNC 530 can control up to 9 axes. The axes U, V and W are
secondary linear axes parallel to the main axes X, Y and Z, respectively.
+Z
Rotary axes are designated as A, B and C. The illustration at lower right +X
shows the assignment of secondary axes and rotary axes to the main +Y
axes.

Y W+
C+
B+
V+ A+ X

U+

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 91

3.1 Fundamentals
Polar coordinates
If the production drawing is dimensioned in Cartesian coordinates, you Y
also write the part program using Cartesian coordinates. For parts
containing circular arcs or angles it is often simpler to give the
dimensions in polar coordinates. R
H
While the Cartesian coordinates X, Y and Z are three-dimensional and
H
can describe points in space, polar coordinates are two-dimensional R
and describe points in a plane. Polar coordinates have their datum at a R
H
circle center (CC), or pole. A position in a plane can be clearly defined 10 0°
by the: CC

„ Polar Radius, the distance from the circle center CC to the position,
and the X
„ Polar Angle, the value of the angle between the reference axis and 30
the line that connects the circle center CC with the position.

Setting the pole and the angle reference axis

The pole is set by entering two Cartesian coordinates in one of the
three planes. These coordinates also set the reference axis for the
polar angle H. Z Y
Coordinates of the pole
Reference axis of the angle
(plane)
Z
X/Y +X J
Y
Y/Z +Y I X
Z/X +Z Y
Z
K X
J

I X

92 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.1 Fundamentals
Absolute and incremental workpiece positions
Absolute workpiece positions
Absolute coordinates are position coordinates that are referenced to
the datum of the coordinate system (origin). Each position on the Y
workpiece is uniquely defined by its absolute coordinates.
Example 1: Holes dimensioned in absolute coordinates 3
30
Hole 1 Hole 2 Hole 3 2
X = 10 mm X = 30 mm X = 50 mm 20
Y = 10 mm Y = 20 mm Y = 30 mm 1
10

Incremental workpiece positions

Incremental coordinates are referenced to the last programmed X
nominal position of the tool, which serves as the relative (imaginary)
10 30 50
datum. When you write a part program in incremental coordinates,
you thus program the tool to move by the distance between the
previous and the subsequent nominal positions. Incremental
coordinates are therefore also referred to as chain dimensions.
To program a position in incremental coordinates, enter the function Y
G91 before the axis.
Example 2: Holes dimensioned in incremental coordinates 6
Absolute coordinates of hole 4
5

10
X = 10 mm
Y = 10 mm 4

10
Hole 5, with respect to 4 Hole 6, with respect to 5
G91 X = 20 mm G91 X = 20 mm 10
G91 Y = 10 mm G91 Y = 10 mm
10 20 20 X
Absolute and incremental polar coordinates
Absolute polar coordinates always refer to the pole and the reference
axis.
Incremental coordinates always refer to the last programmed nominal
position of the tool. Y

G91+R
R
G91+H G91+H R
R H
10 0°
CC

X
30

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 93

3.1 Fundamentals
Setting the datum
A production drawing identifies a certain form element of the
workpiece, usually a corner, as the absolute datum. When setting the
datum, you first align the workpiece along the machine axes, and then
move the tool in each axis to a defined position relative to the
workpiece. Set the display of the TNC either to zero or to a known
Z
position value for each position. This establishes the reference system MAX
for the workpiece, which will be used for the TNC display and your part Y
program.
If the production drawing is dimensioned in relative coordinates,
simply use the coordinate transformation cycles (see User’s Manual X
for Cycles, Cycles for Coordinate Transformation).
If the production drawing is not dimensioned for NC, set the datum at
a position or corner on the workpiece which is suitable for deducing
the dimensions of the remaining workpiece positions. MIN

The fastest, easiest and most accurate way of setting the datum is by
using a 3-D touch probe from HEIDENHAIN. See “Setting the Datum
with a 3-D Touch Probe” in the Touch Probe Cycles User’s Manual.
Y
Example
The workpiece drawing shows holes (1 to 4) whose dimensions are 7 150
shown with respect to an absolute datum with the coordinates X=0 3 4
0
Y=0. Holes 5 to 7 are dimensioned with respect to a relative datum 750 6
with the absolute coordinates X=450, Y=750. With the DATUM SHIFT 5 -150

300±0,1
cycle you can temporarily set the datum to the position X=450, Y=750,
to be able to program holes 5 to 7 without further calculations.

0
320
1 2

X
325 450 900
950

94 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.2 Creating and Writing Programs
3.2 Creating and Writing Programs
Organization of an NC program in DIN/ISO
A part program consists of a series of program blocks. The figure at
right illustrates the elements of a block.
The TNC numbers the blocks of a part program automatically
depending on MP7220. MP7220 defines the block number increment. Block
The first block of a program is identified by %, the program name and
N10 G00 G40 X+10 Y+5 F100 M3
the active unit of measure.
The subsequent blocks contain information on:
„ The workpiece blank Path function Words
„ Tool calls
„ Approaching a safe position Block number
„ Feed rates and spindle speeds, as well as
„ Path contours, cycles and other functions
The last block of a program is identified by N99999999 the program
name and the active unit of measure.

Risk of collision!
After each tool call, HEIDENHAIN recommends always
traversing to a safe position, from which the TNC can
position the tool for machining without causing a collision!

Define the blank: G30/G31

Immediately after initiating a new program, you define a cuboid
workpiece blank. If you wish to define the blank at a later stage, press
the SPEC FCT key and then the BLK FORM soft key. This definition is
needed for the TNC’s graphic simulation feature. The sides of the
workpiece blank lie parallel to the X, Y and Z axes and can be up to 100
000 mm long. The blank form is defined by two of its corner points:
„ MIN point G30: the smallest X, Y and Z coordinates of the blank
form, entered as absolute values
„ MAX point G31: the largest X, Y and Z coordinates of the blank form,
entered as absolute or incremental values

You only need to define the blank form if you wish to run
a graphic test for the program!

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 95

3.2 Creating and Writing Programs
Creating a new part program
You always enter a part program in the Programming and Editing
mode of operation. An example of program initiation:

Select the Programming and Editing operating mode.

Press the PGM MGT key to call the file manager.

Select the directory in which you wish to store the new program:

FILE NAME = OLD.H

Enter the new program name and confirm your entry

with the ENT key.

To select the unit of measure, press the MM or INCH

soft key. The TNC switches the screen layout and
initiates the dialog for defining the BLK FORM
(workpiece blank).

WORKING SPINDLE AXIS X/Y/Z?

Enter spindle axis, e.g. Z

DEF BLK FORM: MIN CORNER?

Enter in sequence the X, Y and Z coordinates of the

MIN point and confirm each of your entries with the
ENT key.

DEF BLK FORM: MAX CORNER?

Enter in sequence the X, Y and Z coordinates of the

MAX point and confirm each of your entries with the
ENT key.

96 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.2 Creating and Writing Programs
Example: Display the BLK form in the NC program
%NEW G71 * Program begin, name, unit of measure
N10 G30 G17 X+0 Y+0 Z-40 * Spindle axis, MIN point coordinates
N20 G31 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 * MAX point coordinates
N99999999 %NEW G71 * Program end, name, unit of measure

The TNC automatically generates the first and last blocks of the
program.

If you do not wish to define a blank form, cancel the dialog

at Working spindle axis X/Y/Z by pressing the DEL key!
The TNC can display the graphics only if the shortest side
is at least 50 µm long and the longest side is no longer
than 99 999.999 mm.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 97

3.2 Creating and Writing Programs
Programming tool movements in DIN/ISO
To program a block, select a DIN/ISO function key on the alphabetic
keyboard. You can also use the gray contouring keys to get the
corresponding G code.

You need only to make sure that capitalization is active.

Example of a positioning block

1 Start block.

COORDINATES?

Enter the target coordinate for the X axis.

10

Enter the target coordinate for the Y axis, and go to

20
the next question with ENT

PATH OF THE CUTTER CENTER

40 Select tool movement without radius compensation:

Confirm with the ENT key or

To move the tool to the left or to the right of the

contour, select function G41 (to the left) or G42 (to
the right) by soft key.

FEED RATE F=?

Enter a feed rate of 100 mm/min for this path contour;

100
go to the next question with ENT.

MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M?

Enter the miscellaneous function M3 “spindle ON.”

3
Pressing the ENT key terminates this dialog.

The program-block window displays the following line:

N30 G01 G40 X+10 Y+5 F100 M3 *

98 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.2 Creating and Writing Programs
Actual position capture
The TNC enables you to transfer the current tool position into the
program, for example during
„ Positioning-block programming
„ Cycle programming
„ Tool definition with G99
To transfer the correct position values, proceed as follows:
U Place the input box at the position in the block where you want to
insert a position value.
U Select the actual-position-capture function. In the soft-
key row the TNC displays the axes whose positions
can be transferred.
U Select the axis. The TNC writes the current position of
the selected axis into the active input box.

In the working plane the TNC always captures the

coordinates of the tool center, even though tool radius
compensation is active.
In the tool axis the TNC always captures the coordinates
of the tool tip and thus always takes the active tool length
compensation into account.
The TNC keeps the soft-key row for axis selection active
until you deactivate it by pressing the actual-position-
capture key again. This behavior remains in effect even if
you save the current block and open a new one with a path
function key. If you select a block element in which you
must choose an input alternative via soft key (e.g. for
radius compensation), then the TNC also closes the soft-
key row for axis selection.
The actual-position-capture function is not allowed if the
tilted working plane function is active.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 99

3.2 Creating and Writing Programs
Editing a program

You cannot edit a program while it is being run by the TNC

in a machine operating mode. The TNC allows you to place
the cursor in the block, but it does not save the changes
and responds instead with an error message.

While you are creating or editing a part program, you can select any
desired line in the program or individual words in a block with the
arrow keys or the soft keys:

Function Soft key/Keys

Go to previous page

Go to next page

Go to beginning of program

Go to end of program

Change the position of the current block on the

screen: Press this soft key to display additional
program blocks that are programmed before
the current block.

Change the position of the current block on the

screen: Press this soft key to display additional
program blocks that are programmed after the
current block.

Move from one block to the next

Select individual words in a block

To select a certain block, press the GOTO key,

enter the desired block number, and confirm
with the ENT key. Or: Enter any number and
press the N LINES soft key to jump up or down
the entered number of lines.

100 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.2 Creating and Writing Programs
Function Soft key/Key
Set the selected word to zero

Erase an incorrect number

Clear a (non-blinking) error message

Delete the selected word

Delete the selected block

Erase cycles and program sections

Insert the block that you last edited or deleted.

Inserting blocks at any desired location

U Select the block after which you want to insert a new block and
initiate the dialog.

Editing and inserting words

U Select a word in a block and overwrite it with the new one. The plain-
language dialog is available while the word is highlighted.
U To accept the change, press the END key.

If you want to insert a word, press the horizontal arrow key repeatedly
until the desired dialog appears. You can then enter the desired value.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 101

3.2 Creating and Writing Programs
Looking for the same words in different blocks
To use this function, set the AUTO DRAW soft key to OFF.

To select a word in a block, press the arrow keys

repeatedly until the highlight is on the desired word.

Select a block with the arrow keys.

The word that is highlighted in the new block is the same as the one
you selected previously.

If you have started a search in a very long program, the

TNC shows a progress display window. You then have the
option of canceling the search via soft key.

Finding any text

U To select the search function, press the FIND soft key. The TNC
displays the Find text: dialog prompt.
U Enter the text that you wish to find.
U To find the text, press the EXECUTE soft key.

102 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.2 Creating and Writing Programs
Marking, copying, deleting and inserting program sections
The TNC provides certain functions for copying program sections
within an NC program or into another NC program—see the table
below.
To copy a program section, proceed as follows:
U Select the soft-key row containing the marking functions.
U Select the first (last) block of the section you wish to copy.
U To mark the first (last) block, press the SELECT BLOCK soft key. The
TNC then highlights the first character of the block and the CANCEL
SELECTION soft key appears.
U Move the highlight to the last (first) block of the program section you
wish to copy or delete. The TNC shows the marked blocks in a
different color. You can end the marking function at any time by
pressing the CANCEL SELECTION soft key.
U To copy the selected program section, press the COPY BLOCK soft
key. To delete the selected section, press the DELETE BLOCK soft
key. The TNC stores the selected block.
U Using the arrow keys, select the block after which you wish to insert
the copied (deleted) program section.

To insert the section into another program, select the

corresponding program using the file manager and then
mark the block after which you wish to insert the copied
block.

U To insert the block, press the INSERT BLOCK soft key.

U To end the marking function, press the CANCEL SELECTION soft
key.

Function Soft key

Switch marking function on

Switch marking function off

Delete marked block

Insert block that is stored in the buffer memory

Copy marked block

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 103

3.2 Creating and Writing Programs
The TNC search function
With the search function of the TNC, you can search for any text within
a program and replace it by a new text, if required.

Searching for texts

U If required, select the block containing the word you wish to find.
U Select the search function. The TNC superimposes
the search window and displays the available search
functions in the soft-key row (see table of search
functions).
U Enter the text to be searched for. Please note that the
+40
search is case-sensitive.
U Start the search process: The TNC displays the
available search options in the soft-key row (see the
table of search options).
U If required, change the search options.

U Start the search process: The TNC moves to the next

block containing the text you are searching for.
U Repeat the search process: The TNC moves to the
next block containing the text you are searching for.
U End the search function.

Search functions Soft key

Show the pop-up window containing the last
search items. Use the arrow keys to select a
search item and confirm with the ENT key.

Show the pop-up window containing possible

search items of the current block. Use the arrow
keys to select a search item and confirm with the
ENT key.

Show the pop-up window containing a selection

of the most important NC functions. Use the
arrow keys to select a search item and confirm
with the ENT key.

Activate the Search/Replace function.

104 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.2 Creating and Writing Programs
Search options Soft key
Define the search direction.

Define the end of the search: With COMPLETE,

the search starts at the current block and
continues until it reaches it again.

Start a new search.

Find/Replace any text

The find/replace function is not possible if

„ a program is protected
„ the program is currently being run by the TNC
When using the REPLACE ALL function, ensure that you
do not accidentally replace text that you do not want to
change. Once replaced, such text cannot be restored.

U If required, select the block containing the word you wish to find.
U Select the Search function: The TNC superimposes
the search window and displays the available search
functions in the soft-key row.
U Activate the Replace function: The TNC superimposes
a window for entering the text to be inserted.
U Enter the text to be searched for. Please note that the
search is case-sensitive. Then confirm with the ENT
key.
U Enter the text to be inserted. Please note that the
entry is case-sensitive.
U Start the search process: The TNC displays the
available search options in the soft-key row (see the
table of search options).
U If required, change the search options.

U Start the search process: The TNC moves to the next

occurrence of the text you are searching for.
U To replace the text and then move to the next
occurrence of the text, press the REPLACE soft key.
To replace all text occurrences, press the REPLACE
ALL soft key. To skip the text and move to its next
occurrence press the DO NOT REPLACE soft key.
U End the search function.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 105

3.3 File Management: Fundamentals
3.3 File Management:
Fundamentals
Files

Files in the TNC Type

Programs
In HEIDENHAIN format .H
In DIN/ISO format .I

smarT.NC files
Structured unit program .HU
Contour descriptions .HC
Point tables for machining positions .HP

Tables for
Tools .T
Tool changers .TCH
Pallets .P
Datums .D
Points .PNT
Presets .PR
Cutting data .CDT
Cutting materials, workpiece materials .TAB
Dependent data (such as structure items) .DEP

Texts as
ASCII files .A
Help files .CHM

Drawing data as
ASCII files .DXF

Other files
Fixture templates .CFT
Parameterized fixtures .CFX
Dependent data (such as structure items) .DEP

When you write a part program on the TNC, you must first enter a file
name. The TNC saves the program to the hard disk as a file with the
same name. The TNC can also save texts and tables as files.
The TNC provides a special file management window in which you can
easily find and manage your files. Here you can call, copy, rename and
erase files.
You can manage nearly any number of files with the TNC, at least
25 GB (dual-processor version: 13 GB). A single NC program can be
up to 2 GB large.

106 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.3 File Management: Fundamentals
File names
When you store programs, tables and texts as files, the TNC adds an
extension to the file name, separated by a point. This extension
indicates the file type.

PROG20 .H
File name File type

File names should not exceed 25 characters, otherwise the TNC

cannot display the entire file name. The following characters are not
permitted in file names:
! “ ’ ( ) * + / ; < = > ? [ ] ^ ` { | } ~

The space (HEX 20) and delete (HEX 7F) characters are not
permitted in file names, either.
The maximum limit for the path and file name together is
256 characters (see “Paths” on page 108).

Data backup
We recommend saving newly written programs and files on a PC at
regular intervals.
The TNCremoNT data transmission freeware from HEIDENHAIN is a
simple and convenient method for backing up data stored on the TNC.
You additionally need a data medium on which all machine-specific
data, such as the PLC program, machine parameters, etc., are stored.
Ask your machine manufacturer for assistance, if necessary.

Saving the contents of the entire hard disk (> 2 GB) can
take up to several hours. In this case, it is a good idea to
save the data outside of work hours, e.g. during the night.
Take the time occasionally to delete any unneeded files so
that the TNC always has enough hard-disk space for
system files (such as the tool table).

Danger of losing data!

Depending on operating conditions (e.g., vibration load),
hard disks generally have a higher failure rate after three to
five years of service. HEIDENHAIN therefore
recommends having the hard disk inspected after three to
five years.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 107

3.4 Working with the File Manager
3.4 Working with the File Manager
Directories
To ensure that you can easily find your files, we recommend that you
organize your hard disk into directories. You can divide a directory into
further directories, which are called subdirectories. With the –/+ key or
ENT you can show or hide the subdirectories.

The TNC can manage up to 6 directory levels!

If you save more than 512 files in one directory, the TNC
no longer sorts them alphabetically!

Directory names
The maximum limit for the path, including the file name, is 256
characters (see “Paths” on page 108).

Paths
A path indicates the drive and all directories and subdirectories under
which a file is saved. The individual names are separated by a
backslash “\”.

The path, including all drive characters, directories and the

file name, cannot exceed 256 characters!

Example
The directory AUFTR1 was created on the TNC:\ drive. Then, in the
AUFTR1 directory, the directory NCPROG was created and the part TNC:\
program PROG1.H was copied into it. The part program now has the
following path: AUFTR1
TNC:\AUFTR1\NCPROG\PROG1.H NCPROG
The chart at right illustrates an example of a directory display with WZTAB
different paths.
A35K941
ZYLM
TESTPROG
HUBER
KAR25T

108 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.4 Working with the File Manager
Overview: Functions of the file manager

If you want to use the old file management system, you

must use the MOD function to switch to the old file
manager (see “Changing the PGM MGT setting” on page
535).

Function Soft key Page

Copy (and convert) individual files Page 115

Select target directory Page 115

Display a specific file type Page 111

Create new file Page 114

Display the last 10 files that were Page 118

selected

Delete a file or directory Page 119

Tag a file Page 120

Rename a file Page 122

Protect a file against editing and erasure Page 123

Cancel file protection Page 123

Open a smarT.NC program Page 113

Manage network drives Page 128

Copy a directory Page 118

Display all the directories of a particular

drive

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 109

3.4 Working with the File Manager
Calling the file manager

Press the PGM MGT key: The TNC displays the file
management window (see figure for default setting.
If the TNC displays a different screen layout, press
the WINDOW soft key.)

The narrow window on the left shows the available drives and
directories. Drives designate devices with which data are stored or
transferred. One drive is the hard disk of the TNC. Other drives are the
interfaces (RS232, RS422, Ethernet), which can be used, for example,
to connect a personal computer. A directory is always identified by a
folder symbol to the left and the directory name to the right.
Subdirectories are shown to the right of and below their parent
directories. A triangle in front of the folder symbol indicates that there
are further subdirectories, which can be shown with the –/+ or ENT
keys.
The wide window on the right shows you all files that are stored in the
selected directory. Each file is shown with additional information,
illustrated in the table below.

Display Meaning
File name Name with max. 25 characters

Type File type

Size File size in bytes

Changed Date and time that the file was last changed.
The date format can be set.

Status File properties:

E: Program is selected in the Programming
and Editing mode of operation.
S: Program is selected in the Test Run mode
of operation.
M: Program is selected in a Program Run
mode of operation.
P: File is protected against deletion and
editing.
+: Dependent files exist (structure file, tool-
usage file)

110 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.4 Working with the File Manager
Selecting drives, directories and files

Call the file manager

Use the arrow keys or the soft keys to move the highlight to the
desired position on the screen:

Moves the highlight from the left to the right window,

and vice versa.

Moves the highlight up and down within a window.

Moves the highlight one page up or down within a

window.

Step 1: Select drive

Move the highlight to the desired drive in the left window:

To select a drive, press the SELECT soft key, or

Press the ENT key.

Step 2: Select a directory

Move the highlight to the desired directory in the left-hand window—

the right-hand window automatically shows all files stored in the
highlighted directory.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 111

3.4 Working with the File Manager
Step 3: Select a file

Press the SELECT TYPE soft key

Press the soft key for the desired file type, or

Press the SHOW ALL soft key to display all files, or

4*.H Use wild card characters, e.g. to show all files of the
file type .H that begin with 4.

Move the highlight to the desired file in the right window

Press the SELECT soft key, or

Press the ENT key.

The TNC opens the selected file in the operating mode from which you
called the file manager.

112 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.4 Working with the File Manager
Select smarT.NC programs
Programs created in the smarT.NC operating mode can be opened in
the Programming and Editing mode with either the smarT.NC editor
or the conversational editor. By default the TNC always opens .HU and
.HC programs with the smarT.NC editor. If you want to open the
programs in the conversational editor, proceed as follows:

Call the file manager

With the arrow keys or the soft keys you can move the highlight to an
.HU or .HC file:

Moves the highlight from the left to the right window,

and vice versa.

Moves the highlight up and down within a window.

Moves the highlight one page up or down within a

window.

Shift the soft-key row.

Select the submenu for selecting the editor.

Open the .HU or .HC program with the conversational

editor.

Open the .HU program with the smarT.NC editor.

Open the .HC program with the smarT.NC editor.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 113

3.4 Working with the File Manager
Creating a new directory (only possible on the
drive TNC:\)

Move the highlight in the left window to the directory in which you
want to create a subdirectory.

NEW Enter the new file name, and confirm with ENT.

CREATE \NEW DIRECTORY?

Press the YES soft key to confirm, or

Abort with the NO soft key.

Creating a new file (only possible on the drive

TNC:\)

Select the directory in which you wish to create the new file.

NEW Enter the new file name with the file extension, and
confirm with ENT.

Open the dialog box for creating a new file.

NEW Enter the new file name with the file extension, and
confirm with ENT.

114 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.4 Working with the File Manager
Copying a single file
U Move the highlight to the file you wish to copy.
U Press the COPY soft key to select the copy function.
The TNC displays a soft-key row with soft keys for
different functions. You can also start the copy
process by pressing CTRL+C.
U Enter the name of the destination file and confirm your
entry with the ENT key or OK soft key: the TNC
copies the file to the active directory or to the
selected destination directory. The original file is
retained, or:
U Press the Target Directory soft key to call a pop-up
window in which you select the target directory by
pressing the ENT key or the OK soft key: the TNC
copies the file to the selected directory. The original
file is retained.

When the copying process has been started with ENT or

the OK soft key, the TNC displays a pop-up window with a
progress indicator.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 115

3.4 Working with the File Manager
Copying files into another directory
U Select a screen layout with two equally sized windows.
U To display directories in both windows, press the PATH soft key.
In the right window
U Move the highlight to the directory into which you wish to copy the
files, and display the files in this directory with the ENT key.
In the left window
U Select the directory with the files that you wish to copy and press
ENT to display the files in this directory.
U Call the file tagging functions

U Move the highlight to the file you want to copy and tag
it. You can tag several files in this way, if desired
U Copy the tagged files into the target directory

Additional marking functions: see “Tagging files,” page 120.

If you have tagged files in both the left and right windows, the TNC
copies from the directory in which the highlight is located.

Overwriting files
If you copy files into a directory in which other files are stored under
the same name, the TNC will ask whether the files in the target
directory should be overwritten:
U To overwrite all files, press the YES soft key, or
U To overwrite no files, press the NO soft key, or
U To confirm each file separately before overwriting it, press the
CONFIRM soft key.
If you wish to overwrite a protected file, this must also be confirmed
or aborted separately.

116 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.4 Working with the File Manager
Copying a table
If you are copying tables, you can overwrite individual lines or columns
in the target table with the REPLACE FIELDS soft key. Prerequisites:
„ The target table must already exist
„ The file to be copied must only contain the columns or lines you
want to replace.

The REPLACE FIELDS soft key does not appear when you
want to overwrite the table in the TNC with an external
data transfer software, such as TNCremoNT. Copy the
externally created file into a different directory, and then
copy the desired fields with the TNC file management.
The file extension of the externally created table should be
.A (ASCII). In these cases the table can contain any
number of lines. If you create a file of type *.T, then the
table must contain sequential line numbers beginning
with 0.

Example
With a tool presetter you have measured the length and radius of ten
new tools. The tool presetter then generates the tool table TOOL.A
with 10 lines (for the 10 tools) and the columns
„ Tool number (column T)
„ Tool length (column L)
„ Tool radius (column R)
U Copy this table from the external data medium to any directory.
U Copy the externally created table over the existing table using the
TNC file manager. The TNC asks if you wish to overwrite the
existing TOOL.T tool table:
U If you press the YES soft key, the TNC will completely overwrite the
current TOOL.T tool table. After this copying process the new
TOOL.T table consists of 10 lines. The only remaining columns in
the table are tool number, tool length and tool radius
U Or, if you press the REPLACE FIELDS soft key, the TNC merely
overwrites the first 10 lines of the number, length and radius
columns in the TOOL.T file. The data of the other lines and columns
is not changed.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 117

3.4 Working with the File Manager
Copying a directory

In order to copy directories, you must have set the view so

that the TNC displays directories in the window on the
right (see “Adapting the file manager” on page 124).
Please note that when copying directories, the TNC only
copies those files that are displayed by the current filter
settings.

U Move the highlight in the right window onto the directory you want
to copy.
U Press the COPY soft key: the TNC opens the window for selecting
the target directory.
U Select the target directory and confirm with ENT or the OK soft key.
The TNC copies the selected directory and all its subdirectories to
the selected target directory.

Choosing one of the last files selected

Call the file manager

Display the last 15 files selected: Press the LAST

FILES soft key.

Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the file you wish to select:
Moves the highlight up and down within a window.

To select the file, press the SELECT soft key, or

press the ENT key.

118 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.4 Working with the File Manager
Deleting a file

Danger of losing data!

Once you delete files they cannot be undeleted!

U Move the highlight to the file you want to delete.

U To select the erasing function, press the DELETE soft
key. The TNC inquires whether you really intend to
delete the file.
U To confirm, press the YES soft key
U To cancel deletion, press the NO soft key.

Deleting a directory

Danger of losing data!

Once you delete directories they cannot be undeleted!

U Move the highlight to the directory you want to delete.

U To select the erasing function, press the DELETE soft
key. The TNC inquires whether you really intend to
delete the directory and all its subdirectories and files
U To confirm, press the YES soft key
U To cancel deletion, press the NO soft key.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 119

3.4 Working with the File Manager
Tagging files

Tagging functions Soft key

Move cursor upward

Move cursor downward

Tag a single file

Tag all files in the directory

Untag a single file

Untag all files

Copy all tagged files

120 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.4 Working with the File Manager
Some functions, such as copying or erasing files, can not only be used
for individual files, but also for several files at once. To tag several files,
proceed as follows:

Move the highlight to the first file.

To display the tagging functions, press the TAG soft

key.

Tag a file by pressing the TAG FILE soft key.

Move the highlight to the next file you wish to tag:

Only works via soft keys. Do not use the arrow keys!

To tag further files, press the TAG FILES soft key, etc.

To copy the tagged files, press the COPY TAG soft

key, or

Delete the tagged files by pressing END to end the

tagging function, and then the DELETE soft key to
delete the tagged files.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 121

3.4 Working with the File Manager
Tagging files with shortcuts
U Move the highlight to the first file.
U Press and hold the CTRL key.
U Use the arrow keys to move the cursor frame to other files
U Press the spacebar to tag a file.
U When you have tagged all desired files: release the CTRL key and
perform the desired file operation.

CTRL+A tags all of the files in the current directory.

If you press the SHIFT key instead of the CTRL key, the
TNC automatically tags all files that you select with the
arrow keys.

Renaming a file
U Move the highlight to the file you want to rename.
U Select the renaming function.

U Enter the new file name; the file type cannot be

changed.
U To execute renaming, press the ENT key.

122 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.4 Working with the File Manager
Additional functions
Protecting a file / Canceling file protection
U Move the highlight to the file you want to protect.
U To select the additional functions, press the MORE
FUNCTIONS soft key.
U To activate file protection, press the PROTECT soft
key. The file now has status P.
U To cancel file protection, press the UNPROTECT soft
key.

Connecting/removing a USB device

U Move the highlight to the left window.
U To select the additional functions, press the MORE
FUNCTIONS soft key.
U Search for a USB device
U In order to remove the USB device, move the cursor
to the USB device
U Remove the USB device.

For more information, See “USB devices on the TNC (FCL 2

function),” page 129.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 123

3.4 Working with the File Manager
Adapting the file manager
You open the menu for adapting the file manager either by clicking the
path name or with soft keys:
U Press the PGM MGT soft key to call the file manager
U Select the third soft-key row
U Press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key.
U Press the OPTIONS soft key: the TNC displays the menu for
adapting the file manager.
U Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the desired setting.
U Activate or deactivate the desired setting with the space bar.
You can adapt the file manager as follows:
„ Bookmarks
You can use bookmarks to manage your favorite directories. You
can add or delete the current directory to or from the list, or delete
all bookmarks. All directories that you have added appear in the
bookmark list, making them available for rapid selection.
„ View
In the View menu you specify the type of information the TNC is to
display in the file window.
„ Date format
In the Date format menu you specify the format in which the TNC
displays the date in the Changed column.
„ Settings
If the cursor is in the directory tree: specify if the TNC is to switch
windows when the right arrow key is pressed, or if the TNC is to
open any subdirectories.

124 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.4 Working with the File Manager
Working with shortcuts
Shortcuts are commands triggered by certain key combinations.
Shortcuts always perform a function that you can also trigger via soft
key. The following shortcuts are available:
„ CTRL+S:
Select a file (see also “Selecting drives, directories and files” on
page 111)
„ CTRL+N:
Open a dialog box in order to create a new file or directory (see also
“Creating a new file (only possible on the drive TNC:\)” on page 114)
„ CTRL+C:
Open a dialog box in order to copy selected files or directories (see
also “Copying a single file” on page 115)
„ CTRL+R:
Open a dialog box in order to rename a selected file or directory (see
also “Renaming a file” on page 122)
„ DEL key:
Open a dialog box in order to delete selected files or directories (see
also “Deleting a file” on page 119)
„ CTRL+O:
Open an “Open with” dialog box (see also “Select smarT.NC
programs” on page 113)
„ CTRL+W:
Switch the split screen layout (see also “Data transfer to or from an
external data medium” on page 126)
„ CTRL+E:
Show functions for adapting the file manager (see also “Adapting
the file manager” on page 124)
„ CTRL+M:
Connect USB device (see also “USB devices on the TNC (FCL 2
function)” on page 129)
„ CTRL+K:
Disconnect USB device (see also “USB devices on the TNC (FCL 2
function)” on page 129)
„ SHIFT + UP or DOWN arrow key:
Mark several files or directories (see also “Tagging files” on page
120)
„ ESC key:
Cancel the function.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 125

3.4 Working with the File Manager
Data transfer to or from an external data
medium

Before you can transfer data to an external data medium,

you must set up the data interface (see “Setting the Data
Interfaces” on page 521).
Depending on the data transfer software you use,
problems can occur occasionally when you transmit data
over a serial interface. They can be overcome by repeating
the transmission.

Call the file manager

Select the screen layout for data transfer: press the

WINDOW soft key. In the left half of the screen the
TNC shows all files in the current directory. In the
right half of the screen it shows all files saved in the
root directory (TNC:\ ).

Use the arrow keys to highlight the file(s) that you want to transfer:
Moves the highlight up and down within a window.

Moves the highlight from the left to the right window,

and vice versa.
If you wish to copy from the TNC to the external data medium, move
the highlight in the left window to the file to be transferred.

126 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.4 Working with the File Manager
If you wish to copy from the external data medium to the TNC, move
the highlight in the right window to the file to be transferred.

To select another drive or directory: press the soft key

for choosing the directory. The TNC opens a pop-up
window. Select the desired directory in the pop-up
window by using the arrow keys and the ENT key.

Transfer a single file: Press the COPY soft key, or

Transfer several files: Press the TAG soft key (in the
second soft-key row, see “Tagging files,” page 120)

Confirm with the OK soft key or with the ENT key. A status window
appears on the TNC, informing about the copying progress, or

To end data transfer, move the highlight into the left

window and then press the WINDOW soft key. The
standard file manager window is displayed again.

To select another directory in the split-screen display,

press the soft key for choosing the directory. Select the
desired directory in the pop-up window by using the arrow
keys and the ENT key.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 127

3.4 Working with the File Manager
The TNC in a network

To connect the Ethernet card to your network, see

“Ethernet Interface,” page 525.
To connect the iTNC with Windows XP to your network,
see “Network Settings,” page 589.
The TNC logs error messages during network operation
see “Ethernet Interface,” page 525.

If the TNC is connected to a network, the directory window displays

up to 7 drives (see figure). All the functions described above (selecting
a drive, copying files, etc.) also apply to network drives, provided that
you have been granted the corresponding rights.

Connecting and disconnecting a network drive

U To select the program management: Press the PGM
MGT key. If necessary, press the WINDOW soft key
to set up the screen as it is shown at the upper right.
U To manage the network drives: Press the NETWORK
soft key (second soft-key row). In the right-hand
window the TNC shows the network drives available
for access. With the soft keys described below you
can define the connection for each drive.

Function Soft key

Establish network connection. If the connection is
active, the TNC shows an M in the Mnt column. You
can connect up to 7 additional drives with the
TNC.

Delete network connection.

Automatically establish network connection

whenever the TNC is switched on. The TNC
shows an A in the Auto column if the connection is
established automatically.

Do not establish network connection

automatically when the TNC is switched on.

It may take some time to mount a network device. At the upper right
of the screen the TNC displays [READ DIR] to indicate that a
connection is being established. The maximum transmission speed is
2 to 5 Mbps, depending on the type of file being transferred and how
busy the network is.

128 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

 3.4 Working with the File Manager
USB devices on the TNC (FCL 2 function)
Backing up data from or loading onto the TNC is especially easy with
USB devices. The TNC supports the following USB block devices:
„ Floppy disk drives with FAT/VFAT file system
„ Memory sticks with the FAT/VFAT file system
„ Hard disks with the FAT/VFAT file system
„ CD-ROM drives with the Joliet (ISO 9660) file system
The TNC automatically detects these types of USB devices when
connected. The TNC does not support USB devices with other file
systems (such as NTFS). The TNC displays the USB: TNC does not
support device error message when such a device is connected.

It should basically be possible to connect most USB block

devices with the above-mentioned file systems to the
control. It may happen that a USB device is not identified
correctly by the control, for example when the cable
between the control panel and the main computer is very
long. In such cases, use another USB device.

The USB devices appear as separate drives in the directory tree, so

you can use the file-management functions described in the earlier
chapters correspondingly.

Your machine tool builder can assign permanent names

for USB devices. The machine tool manual provides
further information.

In order to remove a USB device, you must proceed as follows:

U Press the PGM MGT soft key to call the file manager.

U Select the left window with the arrow key.

U Use the arrow keys to select the USB device to be

removed.
U Scroll through the soft-key row.

U Select additional functions.

U Select the function for removing USB devices. The

TNC removes the USB device from the directory tree.
U Exit the file manager.

In order to re-establish a connection with a USB device that has been

removed, press the following soft key:
U Select the function for reconnection of USB devices.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 129

3.4 Working with the File Manager

130 Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

Programming:
Programming Aids
4.1 Adding Comments
4.1 Adding Comments
Function
You can add comments to any desired block in the part program to
explain program steps or make general notes.

If the TNC cannot show the entire comment on the

screen, the >> sign is displayed.
The last character in a comment block must not have any
tilde (~).

There are three possibilities for adding comments:

Entering comments during programming

U Enter the data for a program block, then press the semicolon key “;”
on the alphabetic keyboard—the TNC displays the dialog prompt
COMMENT ?
U Enter your comment and conclude the block by pressing the END
key.

Inserting comments after program entry

U Select the block to which a comment is to be added.
U Select the last word in the block with the right arrow key: A
semicolon appears at the end of the block and the TNC displays the
dialog prompt COMMENT ?
U Enter your comment and conclude the block by pressing the END
key.

Entering a comment in a separate block

U Select the block after which the comment is to be inserted.
U Initiate the programming dialog with the semicolon key (;) on the
alphabetic keyboard.
U Enter your comment and conclude the block by pressing the END
key.

132 Programming: Programming Aids

 4.1 Adding Comments
Functions for editing of the comment

Function Soft key

Jump to beginning of comment.

Jump to end of comment.

Jump to the beginning of a word. Words must be

separated by a space.

Jump to the end of a word. Words must be

separated by a space.

Switch between insert mode and overwrite

mode.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 133

4.2 Structuring Programs
4.2 Structuring Programs
Definition and applications
This TNC function enables you to comment part programs in
structuring blocks. Structuring blocks are short texts with up to 37
characters and are used as comments or headlines for the subsequent
program lines.
With the aid of appropriate structuring blocks, you can organize long
and complex programs in a clear and comprehensible manner.
This function is particularly convenient if you want to change the
program later. Structuring blocks can be inserted into the part program
at any point. They can also be displayed in a separate window, and
edited or added to, as desired.
The inserted structure items are managed by the TNC in a separate file
(extension: .SEC.DEP). This speeds navigation in the program
structure window.

Displaying the program structure window /

Changing the active window
U To display the program structure window, select the
screen display PROGRAM+SECTS
U To change the active window, press the “Change
window” soft key

Inserting a structuring block in the (left) program

window
U Select the block after which the structuring block is to be inserted
U Press the INSERT SECTION soft key or the * key on
the ASCII keyboard
U Enter the structuring text with the alphabetic
keyboard
U If necessary, change the structure depth with the soft
key

Selecting blocks in the program structure

window
If you are scrolling through the program structure window block by
block, the TNC at the same time automatically moves the
corresponding NC blocks in the program window. This way you can
quickly skip large program sections.

134 Programming: Programming Aids

 4.3 Integrated Pocket Calculator
4.3 Integrated Pocket Calculator
Operation
The TNC features an integrated pocket calculator with the basic
mathematical functions.
U Use the CALC key to show and hide the on-line pocket calculator.
U The calculator is operated with short commands through the
alphabetic keyboard. The commands are shown in a special color in
the calculator window:

Mathematical function Command (key)

Addition +

Subtraction –

Multiplication *

Division :

Sine S

Cosine C

Tangent ING

Arc sine AS

Arc cosine AC

Arc tangent AT

Powers ^

Square root Q

Inversion /

Parenthetic calculations ()

pi (3.14159265359) P

Display result =

To transfer the calculated value into the program

U Use the arrow keys to select the word into which the calculated
value is to be transferred
U Superimpose the on-line calculator by pressing the CALC key and
perform the desired calculation
U Press the actual-position-capture key for the TNC to transfer the
calculated value into the active input box and to close the calculator

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 135

4.4 Programming Graphics
4.4 Programming Graphics
Generating / Not generating graphics during
programming:

While you are writing the part program, you can have the TNC
generate a 2-D pencil-trace graphic of the programmed contour.
U To switch the screen layout to displaying program blocks to the left
and graphics to the right, press the SPLIT SCREEN key and
PROGRAM + GRAPHICS soft key
U Set the AUTO DRAW soft key to ON. While you are
entering the program lines, the TNC generates each
path contour you program in the graphics window in
the right screen half
If you do not wish to have the TNC generate graphics during
programming, set the AUTO DRAW soft key to OFF.
Even when AUTO DRAW ON is active, graphics are not generated for
program section repeats.

Generating a graphic for an existing program

U Use the arrow keys to select the block up to which you want the
graphic to be generated, or press GOTO and enter the desired block
number
U To generate graphics, press the RESET + START soft
key

Additional functions:

Function Soft key

Generate a complete graphic

Generate programming graphic blockwise

Generate a complete graphic or complete it after

RESET + START

Stop the programming graphics. This soft key

only appears while the TNC is generating the
interactive graphics

Redraw the programming graphics, for example

if lines were deleted by intersections

136 Programming: Programming Aids

 4.4 Programming Graphics
Block number display ON/OFF

U Shift the soft-key row: see figure

U To show block numbers: Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK

NR. soft key to SHOW
U To omit block numbers: Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK
NR. soft key to OMIT

Erasing the graphic

U Shift the soft-key row: see figure

U Erase graphic: Press CLEAR GRAPHICS soft key

Magnifying or reducing a detail

You can select the graphics display. by selecting a detail with the
frame overlay. You can now magnify or reduce the selected detail.
U Select the soft-key row for detail magnification/reduction (second
row, see figure)
The following functions are available:

Function Soft key

Show and move the frame overlay. Press and
hold the desired soft key to move the frame
overlay

Reduce the frame overlay—press and hold the

soft key to reduce the detail

Enlarge the frame overlay—press and hold the

soft key to magnify the detail

U Confirm the selected area with the WINDOW DETAIL

soft key
With the WINDOW BLK FORM soft key, you can restore the original
section.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 137

4.5 3-D Line Graphics (FCL2 Function)
4.5 3-D Line Graphics (FCL2
Function)
Function
Use the 3-D line graphics to have the TNC show the programmed
traverse paths in three dimensions. A powerful zoom function is
available for recognizing details quickly.
You should especially use the 3-D line graphics to inspect programs
created externally for irregularities before machining, in order to avoid
undesirable traces of the machining process on the workpiece. Such
traces of machining can occur when points are output incorrectly by
the postprocessor.
In order to find the error location quickly, the TNC shows the currently
active block of the 3-D line graphics in a different color in the left
window (default setting: red).
U To switch the screen layout to displaying program blocks to the left
and 3-D line graphics to the right, press the SPLIT SCREEN key and
PROGRAM + 3D LINES soft key.

Functions of the 3-D line graphics

Function Soft key

Show and move the zoom frame up. Press and
hold the soft key to move the frame

Show and move the zoom frame down. Press

and hold the soft key to move the frame

Show and move the zoom frame to the left.

Press and hold the soft key to move the frame

Show and move the zoom to the right. Press and

hold the soft key to move the frame

Enlarge the frame overlay—press and hold the

soft key to magnify the detail

Reduce the frame overlay—press and hold the

soft key to reduce the detail

Reset detail magnification so that the workpiece

is displayed as it was programmed with BLK
FORM.

Select the isolated detail

Rotate workpiece clockwise

138 Programming: Programming Aids

 4.5 3-D Line Graphics (FCL2 Function)
Function Soft key
Rotate workpiece counterclockwise

Tilt workpiece backward

Tilt workpiece forward

Magnify the graphic stepwise. If the view is

magnified, the TNC shows the letter Z in the
footer of the graphic window

Reduce the graphic stepwise. If the view is

reduced, the TNC shows the letter Z in the footer
of the graphic window

Show workpiece at original size

Show workpiece in the last active view

Show/hide programmed end points with a dot on

the line

Do or do not highlight the selected NC block of

the 3-D line graphics in the left window

Do or do not show block numbers

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 139

4.5 3-D Line Graphics (FCL2 Function)
You can also use the mouse with the 3-D line graphics. The following
functions are available:
U In order to rotate the wire model shown in three dimensions: Hold
the right mouse button down and move the mouse. The TNC
displays a coordinate system showing the currently active
orientation of the workpiece. After you release the right mouse
button, the TNC orients the workpiece to the defined orientation
U In order to shift the wire model shown: Hold the center mouse
button or the wheel button down and move the mouse. The TNC
shifts the workpiece in the corresponding direction. After you
release the center mouse button, the TNC shifts the workpiece to
the defined position
U In order to zoom in on a certain area with the mouse: Draw a
rectangular zoom area while holding the left mouse button down.
After you release the left mouse button, the TNC zooms in on the
defined area of the workpiece
U In order to quickly zoom in and out with the mouse: Rotate the
wheel button forward or backward

Highlighting NC blocks in the graphics

U Shift the soft-key row

U To highlight the NC block selected in the left window

in the 3-D line graphics in the right window, set the
MARK THIS ELEMENT OFF / ON soft key to ON
U To not highlight the NC block selected in the left
window in the 3-D line graphics in the right window,
set the MARK THIS ELEMENT OFF / ON soft key to
OFF

Block number display ON/OFF

U Shift the soft-key row

U To show block numbers: Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK

NR. soft key to SHOW
U To omit block numbers: Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK
NR. soft key to OMIT

Erasing the graphic

U Shift the soft-key row

U Erase graphic: Press CLEAR GRAPHICS soft key

140 Programming: Programming Aids

 4.6 Immediate Help for NC Error Messages
4.6 Immediate Help for NC Error
Messages
Displaying error messages
The TNC automatically generates error messages when it detects
problems such as
„ Incorrect data input
„ Logical errors in the program
„ Contour elements that are impossible to machine
„ Incorrect use of touch probes
An error message that contains a program block number was caused
by an error in the indicated block or in the preceding block. The TNC
error messages can be canceled with the CE key, after the cause of
the error has been removed.
If you require more information on a particular error message, press
the HELP key. A pop-up window then appears, in which the cause of
the error is explained and suggestions are made for correcting the
error.

Display HELP
The TNC displays the Help text automatically if the error message is
blinking. The TNC needs to be restarted after blinking error messages.
To restart the TNC, press and hold the END key for two seconds.
U To display Help, press the HELP key
U Read the cause of error and any suggestions for
possible remedies. The TNC may show additional
information that can be helpful to trained
HEIDENHAIN personnel during troubleshooting.
Close the Help window with the CE key, thus
canceling the error message
U Remove the cause of the error as described in the
Help window

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 141

4.7 List of All Current Error Messages
4.7 List of All Current Error
Messages
Function
With this function you can show a pop-up window in which the TNC
shows all current error messages. The TNC shows errors both from
the NC as well as those from the machine tool builder.

Show error list

You can call the list as soon as at least one error message is present:
U To display the list, press the ERR key
U You can select one of the current error messages with
the arrow keys
U With the CE key or the DEL key you can delete the
error message from the pop-up window momentarily
selected. When you delete the last error message,
the pop-up window closes as well
U To close the pop-up window, press the ERR key again.
Current error messages are retained

Parallel to the error list you can also view the respective
help text in a separate window: Press the HELP key.

142 Programming: Programming Aids

 4.7 List of All Current Error Messages
Window contents

Column Meaning
Number Error number (–1: no error number defined),
issued by HEIDENHAIN or your machine tool
builder

Class Error class. Defines how the TNC processes

this error.
„ ERROR
Collective error class for errors that can
cause various error reactions depending on
the condition of the machine or the active
operating mode)
„ FEED HOLD
The feed-rate release is canceled
„ PGM HOLD
The program run is interrupted (the control-
in-operation symbol blinks)
„ PGM ABORT
The program run is interrupted (INTERNAL
STOP)
„ EMERG. STOP
EMERGENCY STOP is triggered
„ RESET
TNC executes a system restart
„ WARNING
Warning message, program run resumes
„ INFO
Info message, program run resumes

Group Group. Specifies from which section of the

operating system software the error message
was generated
„ OPERATING
„ PROGRAMMING
„ PLC
„ GENERAL

Error message Respective error text displayed by the TNC

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 143

4.7 List of All Current Error Messages
Calling the TNCguide help system
You can call the TNC’s help system via soft key. Immediately the help
system shows you the same error explanation that you receive by
pressing the HELP soft key.

If your machine manufacturer also provides a help

system, the TNC shows an additional MACHINE
MANUFACTURER soft key with which you can call this
separate help system. There you will find further, more
detailed information on the error message concerned.

U Call the help for HEIDENHAIN error messages

U Call the help for HEIDENHAIN error messages, if

available

144 Programming: Programming Aids

 4.7 List of All Current Error Messages
Generating service files
You can use this function to save all files relevant to service purposes
in a ZIP file. The appropriate data from the NC and PLC are saved by
the TNC in the file TNC:\service\service<xxxxxxxx>.zip. The TNC
determines the name of the file automatically. The character string
<xxxxxxxx> clearly indicates the system time.
The following possibilities exist for generating a service file:
„ By pressing the SAVE SERVICE FILES soft key after you have
pressed the ERR key
„ Externally via the data transmission software TNCremoNT
„ If the NC software crashes due to a serious error, the TNC
automatically generates a service file
„ In addition, your machine tool builder can have service files be
generated automatically for PLC error messages.
The following data (and other information) is saved in the service file:
„ Log
„ PLC log
„ Selected files (*.H/*.I/*.T/*.TCH/*.D) of all operating modes
„ *.SYS files
„ Machine parameters
„ Information and log files of the operating system (can be partially
activated via MP7691)
„ Contents of PLC memory
„ NC macros defined in PLC:\NCMACRO.SYS
„ Information about the hardware
In addition, the service department can help you save the control file
TNC:\service\userfiles.sys in ASCII format. The TNC will then
include the data defined there in the ZIP file.

The service file contains all NC data needed for

troubleshooting. By passing on the service file you declare
your consent to your machine tool builder or DR.
JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH to use these data for
diagnostic purposes.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 145

4.8 The Context-Sensitive Help System TNCguide (FCL3 Function)
4.8 The Context-Sensitive Help
System TNCguide (FCL3
Function)
Function

The TNCguide help system is only available if your control

hardware has as least 256 MB RAM and FCL3 is enabled.

The TNCguide context-sensitive help system includes the user

documentation in HTML format. The TNCguide is called with the
HELP key, and the TNC often immediately displays the information
specific to the condition from which the help was called (context-
sensitive call). Even if you are editing an NC block and press the HELP
key, you are usually brought to the exact place in the documentation
that describes the corresponding function.
The English and German documentation is shipped as standard with
each NC software level. HEIDENHAIN provides the remaining
conversational languages for cost-free download as soon as the
respective translations are available (see “Downloading current help
files” on page 151).

The TNC always tries to start the TNCguide in the

language that you have selected as the conversational
language on your TNC. If the files with this language are
not yet available on your TNC, it automatically opens the
English version.

The following user documentation is available in the TNCguide:

„ Conversational Programming User’s Manual (BHBKlartext.chm)
„ DIN/ISO User’s Manual (BHBIso.chm)
„ User’s Manual for Cycles (BHBcycles.chm)
„ User’s Manual for smarT.NC (BHBSmart.chm) (same format as a
“Pilot”)
„ List of All Error Messages (errors.chm)
In addition, the main.chm “book” file is available, with the contents
of all existing .chm files.

As an option, your machine tool builder can embed

machine-specific documentation in the TNCguide. These
documents then appear as a separate book in the
main.chm file.

146 Programming: Programming Aids

 4.8 The Context-Sensitive Help System TNCguide (FCL3 Function)
Working with the TNCguide
Calling the TNCguide
There are several ways to start the TNCguide:
U Press the HELP key if the TNC is not already showing an error
message
U Click the help symbol at the lower right of the screen beforehand,
then click the appropriate soft keys
U Use the file manager to open a help file (.chm file). The TNC can
open any .chm file, even if it is not saved on the TNC’s hard disk

If one or more error messages are waiting for your

attention, the TNC shows the help directly associated
with the error messages. To start the TNCguide, you first
have to acknowledge all error messages.
When the help system is called on the programming
station or the dual-processor version, the TNC starts the
internally defined standard browser (usually the Internet
Explorer), and on the single-processor version browser
adapted by HEIDENHAIN.

For many soft keys there is a context-sensitive call through which you
can go directly to the description of the soft key’s function. This
functionality requires using a mouse. Proceed as follows:
U Select the soft-key row containing the desired soft key
U Click with the mouse on the help symbol that the TNC displays just
above the soft-key row: The mouse pointer turns into a question
mark
U Move the question mark to the soft key for which you want an
explanation, and click: The TNC opens the TNCguide. If no specific
part of the help is assigned to the selected soft key, the TNC opens
the book file main.chm, in which you can use the search function
or the navigation to find the desired explanation manually
Even if you are editing an NC block, context-sensitive help is available:
U Select any NC block
U Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the block
U Press the HELP key: The TNC start the help system and shows a
description for the active function (does not apply to auxiliary
functions or cycles that were integrated by your machine tool
builder)

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 147

4.8 The Context-Sensitive Help System TNCguide (FCL3 Function)
Navigating in the TNCguide
It’s easiest to use the mouse to navigate in the TNCguide. A table of
contents appears on the left side of the screen. By clicking the
rightward pointing triangle you open subordinate sections, and by
clicking the respective entry you open the individual pages. It is
operated in the same manner as the Windows Explorer.
Linked text positions (cross references) are shown underlined and in
blue. Clicking the link opens the associated page.
Of course you can also operate the TNCguide through keys and soft
keys. The following table contains on overview of the corresponding
key functions.

The key functions described below are available only on

the single-processor version of the TNC.

Function Soft key

„ If the table of contents at left is active:
Select the entry above it or below it
„ If the text window at right is active:
Move the page downward or upward if texts or
graphics are not shown completely

„ If the table of contents at left is active:

Open a branch of the table of contents. If the
branch is at its end, jump into the window at
right
„ If the text window at right is active:
No function

„ If the table of contents at left is active:

Close a branch of the table of contents
„ If the text window at right is active:
No function

„ If the table of contents at left is active:

Use the cursor key to show the selected page
„ If the text window at right is active:
If the cursor is on a link, jump to the linked page

„ If the table of contents at left is active:

Switch the tab between the display of the table
of contents, display of the subject index, and
the full-text search function and switching to
the screen half at right
„ If the text window at right is active:
Jump back to the window at left

„ If the table of contents at left is active:

Select the entry above it or below it
„ If the text window at right is active:
Jump to the next link

148 Programming: Programming Aids

 4.8 The Context-Sensitive Help System TNCguide (FCL3 Function)
Function Soft key
Select the page last shown

Page forward if you have used the “select page

last shown” function

Move up by one page

Move down by one page

Display or hide table of contents

Switch between full-screen display and reduced

display. With the reduced display you can see
some of the rest of the TNC window

The focus is switched internally to the TNC

application so that you can operate the control
when the TNCguide is open. If the full screen is
active, the TNC reduces the window size
automatically before the change of focus

Close the TNCguide

Subject index
The most important subjects in the Manual are listed in the subject
index (Index tab). You can select them directly by mouse or with the
cursor keys.
The left side is active.
U Select the Index tab
U Activate the Keyword input field
U Enter the word for the desired subject and the TNC
synchronizes the index and creates a list in which you
can find the subject more easily, or
U Use the arrow key to highlight the desired keyword
U Use the ENT key to call the information on the
selected keyword

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 149

4.8 The Context-Sensitive Help System TNCguide (FCL3 Function)
Full-text search
In the Find tab you can search the entire TNCguide for a specific word.
The left side is active.
U Select the Find tab
U Activate the Find: input field
U Enter the desired word and confirm with the ENT key:
the TNC lists all sources containing the word
U Use the arrow key to highlight the desired source
U Press the ENT key to go to the selected source

The full-text search only works for single words.

If you activate the Search only in titles function (by
mouse or by using the cursor and the space key), the TNC
searches only through headings and ignores the body
text.

150 Programming: Programming Aids

 4.8 The Context-Sensitive Help System TNCguide (FCL3 Function)
Downloading current help files
You’ll find the help files for your TNC software on the HEIDENHAIN
home page www.heidenhain.de under:
U Services and Documentation
U Software
U iTNC 530 help system
U NC software number of your TNC, for example 34049x-05
U Select the desired language, for example English: You will see a ZIP
file with the appropriate help files
U Download the ZIP file and unzip it
U Move the unzipped CHM files to the TNC in the TNC:\tncguide\en
directory or into the respective language subdirectory (see also the
following table)

If you want to use TNCremoNT to transfer the CHM files

to the TNC, then in the
Extras>Configuration>Mode>Transfer in binary
format menu item you have to enter the extension .CHM.

Language TNC directory

German TNC:\tncguide\de

English TNC:\tncguide\en

Czech TNC:\tncguide\cs

French TNC:\tncguide\fr

Italian TNC:\tncguide\it

Spanish TNC:\tncguide\es

Portuguese TNC:\tncguide\pt

Swedish TNC:\tncguide\sv

Danish TNC:\tncguide\da

Finnish TNC:\tncguide\fi

Dutch TNC:\tncguide\nl

Polish TNC:\tncguide\pl

Hungarian TNC:\tncguide\hu

Russian TNC:\tncguide\ru

Chinese (simplified) TNC:\tncguide\zh

Chinese (traditional) TNC:\tncguide\zh-tw

Slovenian (software option) TNC:\tncguide\sl

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 151

4.8 The Context-Sensitive Help System TNCguide (FCL3 Function)
Language TNC directory
Norwegian TNC:\tncguide\no

Slovak TNC:\tncguide\sk

Latvian TNC:\tncguide\lv

Korean TNC:\tncguide\kr

Estonian TNC:\tncguide\et

Turkish TNC:\tncguide\tr

Romanian TNC:\tncguide\ro

Lithuanian TNC:\tncguide\lt

152 Programming: Programming Aids

Programming: Tools
5.1 Entering Tool-Related Data
5.1 Entering Tool-Related Data
Feed rate F
The feed rate F is the speed (in millimeters per minute or inches per
minute) at which the tool center point moves. The maximum feed
rates can be different for the individual axes and are set in machine S
parameters. Z
S
Input Y
You can enter the feed rate in the T block and in every positioning F
block (see “Programming tool movements in DIN/ISO” on page 98). X
In millimeter-programs you enter the feed rate in mm/min, and in inch-
programs, for reasons of resolution, in 1/10 inch/min.

Rapid traverse
If you wish to program rapid traverse, enter G00.

Duration of effect
A feed rate entered as a numerical value remains in effect until a block
with a different feed rate is reached. If the new feed rate is G00 (rapid
traverse), the last programmed feed rate is once again valid after the
next block with G01.

Changing during program run

You can adjust the feed rate during program run with the feed-rate
override knob F.

154 Programming: Tools

 5.1 Entering Tool-Related Data
Spindle speed S
The spindle speed S is entered in revolutions per minute (rpm) in a T
block. Instead, you can also define the cutting speed Vc in m/min.

Programmed change
In the part program, you can change the spindle speed in a T block by
entering the spindle speed only:
U To program the spindle speed, press the S key on the
alphabetic keyboard
U Enter the new spindle speed

Changing during program run

You can adjust the spindle speed during program run with the spindle-
speed override knob S.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 155

5.2 Tool Data
5.2 Tool Data
Requirements for tool compensation
You usually program the coordinates of path contours as they are
dimensioned in the workpiece drawing. To allow the TNC to calculate
the tool center path—i.e. the tool compensation—you must also enter
the length and radius of each tool you are using.
Tool data can be entered either directly in the part program with G99 or 1 8 12 13 18
separately in a tool table. In a tool table, you can also enter additional
data for the specific tool. The TNC will consider all the data entered for
the tool when executing the part program. Z 8

L
Tool numbers and tool names
R
Each tool is identified by a number between 0 and 32767. If you are
working with tool tables, you can also enter a tool name for each tool.
Tool names can have up to 16 characters. X
The tool number 0 is automatically defined as the zero tool with the
length L=0 and the radius R=0. In tool tables, tool T0 should also be
defined with L=0 and R=0.

Tool length L
You should always enter the tool length L as an absolute value based
on the tool reference point. The entire tool length is essential for the
TNC in order to perform numerous functions involving multi-axis Z
machining.
L3
Tool radius R L1
L2
You can enter the tool radius R directly.

156 Programming: Tools

 5.2 Tool Data
Delta values for lengths and radii
Delta values are offsets in the length and radius of a tool.
A positive delta value describes a tool oversize (DL, DR, DR2>0). If you
are programming the machining data with an allowance, enter the R R
oversize value in the T block of the part program.
A negative delta value describes a tool undersize (DL, DR, DR2<0). An
undersize is entered in the tool table for wear.
L DR<0
Delta values are usually entered as numerical values. In a T block, you
can also assign the values to Q parameters.
DR>0
Input range: You can enter a delta value with up to ± 99.999 mm.
DL<0
Delta values from the tool table influence the graphical
DL>0
representation of the tool. The representation of the
workpiece remains the same in the simulation.
Delta values from the T block change the represented size
of the workpiece during the simulation. The simulated
tool size remains the same.

Entering tool data into the program

The number, length and radius of a specific tool is defined in the G99
block of the part program.
U To select tool definition, press the TOOL DEF key.
U Tool number: Each tool is uniquely identified by its tool
number.
U Tool length: Compensation value for the tool length
U Tool radius: Compensation value for the tool radius

In the programming dialog, you can transfer the value for

tool length and tool radius directly into the input line by
pressing the desired axis soft key.

Example
N40 G99 T5 L+10 R+5 *

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 157

5.2 Tool Data
Entering tool data in the table
You can define and store up to 30 000 tools and their tool data in a tool
table. In Machine Parameter 7260, you can define how many tools are
to be stored by the TNC when a new table is set up. Also see the
Editing Functions later in this chapter. In order to be able to assign
various compensation data to a tool (indexing the tool number),
MP7262 must not be equal to 0.
You must use tool tables if
„ you wish to use indexed tools such as stepped drills with more than
one length compensation value (See page 162)
„ your machine tool has an automatic tool changer,
„ you want to measure tools automatically with the TT 130 touch
probe (see the Touch Probe Cycles User’s Manual),
„ you want to rough-mill the contour with Cycle G122, (see “User's
Manual for Cycles, ROUGH-OUT”).
„ you want to work with Cycles 251 to 254 (see “User's Manual for
Cycles,” Cycles 251 to 254)
„ you want to work with automatic cutting data calculations.

Tool table: Standard tool data

Abbr. Inputs Dialog
T Number by which the tool is called in the program (e.g. 5, indexed: -
5.2)

NAME Name by which the tool is called in the program (no more than 16 Tool name?
characters, all capitals, no spaces)

L Compensation value for tool length L Tool length?

R Compensation value for the tool radius R Tool radius R?

R2 Tool radius R2 for toroid cutters (only for 3-D radius compensation Tool radius R2?
or graphical representation of a machining operation with
spherical or toroid cutters)

DL Delta value for tool length L Tool length oversize?

DR Delta value for tool radius R Tool radius oversize?

DR2 Delta value for tool radius R2 Tool radius oversize R2?

LCUTS Tooth length of the tool for Cycle 22 Tooth length in the tool axis?

ANGLE Maximum plunge angle of the tool for reciprocating plunge-cut in Maximum plunge angle?
Cycles 22 and 208

TL Set tool lock (TL: for Tool Locked) Tool locked?

Yes = ENT / No = NO ENT

RT Number of a replacement tool, if available (RT: for Replacement Replacement tool?

Tool; see also TIME2

158 Programming: Tools

 5.2 Tool Data
Abbr. Inputs Dialog
TIME1 Maximum tool life in minutes. This function can vary depending Maximum tool age?
on the individual machine tool. Your machine manual provides
more information

TIME2 Maximum tool life in minutes during TOOL CALL: If the current tool Maximum tool age for TOOL CALL?
age exceeds this value, the TNC changes the tool during the next
TOOL CALL (see also CUR.TIME)

CUR.TIME Current age of the tool in minutes: The TNC automatically counts Current tool life?
the current tool life (CUR.TIME). A starting value can be entered for
used tools

DOC Comment on tool (up to 16 characters) Tool description?

PLC Information on this tool that is to be sent to the PLC PLC status?

PLC-VAL Value of this tool that is to be sent to the PLC PLC value?

PTYP Tool type for evaluation in the pocket table Tool type for pocket table?

NMAX Limits the spindle speed for this tool. The programmed value is Maximum speed [rpm]?
monitored (error message) as well as an increase in the shaft
speed via the potentiometer. Function inactive: Enter –

LIFTOFF Definition of whether the TNC should retract the tool in the Retract tool Y/N ?
direction of the positive tool axis at an NC stop in order to avoid
leaving dwell marks on the contour. If Y is entered, the TNC
retracts the tool from the contour by up to 30 mm, provided that
this function was activated in the NC program with M148 (see
“Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop:
M148” on page 317)

P1 ... P3 Machine-dependent function: Transfer of a value to the PLC. Value?

Refer to your machine manual

KINEMATIC Machine-dependent function: Kinematics description for vertical Additional kinematic description?
milling heads, which the TNC adds to the active machine
kinematics. Assign available kinematic descriptions by using the
ASSIGN KINEMATICS soft key (see also “Tool-carrier
kinematics” on page 164)

T-ANGLE Point angle of the tool. Is used by the Centering cycle (Cycle 240) Point angle (Type DRILL+CSINK)?
in order to calculate the centering depth from the diameter entry

PITCH Thread pitch of the tool (currently without function) Thread pitch (only type TAP)?

AFC Control setting for the adaptive feed control AFC that you have Feedback-control strategy?
defined in the NAME column of the AFC.TAB table. Apply the
feedback-control strategy with the ASSIGN AFC CONTROL
SETTING soft key (3rd soft-key row)

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 159

5.2 Tool Data
Tool table: Tool data required for automatic tool measurement

For a description of the cycles governing automatic tool

measurement, see the User's Manual for Cycles

Abbr. Inputs Dialog

CUT Number of teeth (20 teeth maximum) Number of teeth?

LTOL Permissible deviation from tool length L for wear detection. If the Wear tolerance: length?
entered value is exceeded, the TNC locks the tool (status L).
Input range: 0 to 0.9999 mm

RTOL Permissible deviation from tool radius R for wear detection. If the Wear tolerance: radius?
entered value is exceeded, the TNC locks the tool (status L).
Input range: 0 to 0.9999 mm

R2TOL Permissible deviation from tool radius R2 for wear detection. If Wear tolerance: Radius 2?
the entered value is exceeded, the TNC locks the tool (status L).
Input range: 0 to 0.9999 mm

DIRECT. Cutting direction of the tool for measuring the tool during rotation Cutting direction (M3 = –)?

TT:R-OFFS For tool length measurement: Tool offset between stylus center Tool offset: radius?
and tool center. Preset value: Tool radius R (NO ENT means R)

TT:L-OFFS Tool radius measurement: Tool offset in addition to MP6530 Tool offset: length?
between upper surface of stylus and lower surface of tool.
Default: 0

LBREAK Permissible deviation from tool length L for breakage detection. If Breakage tolerance: length?
the entered value is exceeded, the TNC locks the tool (status L).
Input range: 0 to 0.9999 mm

RBREAK Permissible deviation from tool radius R for breakage detection. If Breakage tolerance: radius?
the entered value is exceeded, the TNC locks the tool (status L).
Input range: 0 to 0.9999 mm

160 Programming: Tools

 5.2 Tool Data
Tool table: Tool data for automatic speed/feed rate calculation
Abbr. Inputs Dialog
TYPE Tool type: Press the ASSIGN TYPE soft key (3rd soft-key row); the Tool type?
TNC superimposes a window where you can select the type of
tool. Functions are currently only assigned to the DRILL and MILL
tool types

TMAT Tool material: Press the ASSIGN MATERIAL soft key (3rd soft-key Tool material?
row): The TNC superimposes a window where you can select the
type of cutting material

CDT Cutting data table: Press the SELECT CDT soft key (3rd soft-key Name of cutting data table?
row): The TNC displays a pop-up window where you can select a
cutting data table

Tool table: Tool data for 3-D touch trigger probe (only when bit 1
is set in MP7411 = 1, also see the Touch Probe Cycles Manual)
Abbr. Inputs Dialog
CAL-OF1 During calibration, the TNC stores in this column the center Center misalignmt. in ref. axis?
misalignment in the reference axis of the 3-D probe, if a tool
number is indicated in the calibration menu

CAL-OF2 During calibration, the TNC stores in this column the center Center misalignment minor axis?
misalignment in the minor axis of the 3-D probe, if a tool number
is indicated in the calibration menu

CAL-ANG During calibration, the TNC stores in this column the spindle angle Spindle angle for calibration?
at which the 3-D probe was calibrated, if a tool number is
indicated in the calibration menu

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 161

5.2 Tool Data
Editing tool tables
The tool table that is active during execution of the part program is
designated as TOOL.T. You can only edit TOOL.T in one of the
machine operating modes. Other tool tables that are to be archived or
used for test runs are given different file names with the extension .T.
To open the tool table TOOL.T:
U Select any machine operating mode
U Press the TOOL TABLE soft key to select the tool
table
U Set the EDIT soft key to ON

To open any other tool table

U Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation
U Call the file manager

U Press the SELECT TYPE soft key to select the file type
U To show type .T files, press the SHOW .T soft key
U Select a file or enter a new file name. Conclude your
entry with the ENT key or the SELECT soft key
When you have opened the tool table, you can edit the tool data by
moving the cursor to the desired position in the table with the arrow
keys or the soft keys. You can overwrite the stored values, or enter
new values at any position. The available editing functions are
illustrated in the table below.
If the TNC cannot show all positions in the tool table in one screen
page, the highlight bar at the top of the table will display the >> or <<
symbols.

Editing functions for tool tables Soft key

Select beginning of table

Select end of table

Select previous page in table

Select next page in table

Look for the tool name in the table

Show tool information in columns or show all

information on one tool on one screen page

Move to beginning of line

162 Programming: Tools

 5.2 Tool Data
Editing functions for tool tables Soft key
Move to end of line

Copy highlighted field

Insert copied field

Add the entered number of lines (tools) at the

end of the table

Insert a line for the indexed tool number after the

active line. The function is only active if you are
permitted to store multiple compensation data
for a tool (MP7262 not equal to 0). The TNC
inserts a copy of the tool data after the last
available index and increases the index by 1.
Application: e.g. stepped drill with more than one
length compensation value

Delete current line (tool). Deleting is not allowed

if the tool is registered in the pocket table!

Display / Do not display pocket numbers

Display all tools / only those tools that are stored

in the pocket table

Leaving the tool table

U Call the file manager and select a file of a different type, such as a
part program

Additional notes on tool tables

MP7266.x defines which data can be entered in the tool table and in
which sequence the data is displayed.

You can overwrite individual columns or lines of a tool

table with the contents of another file. Prerequisites:
„ The target file must exist
„ The file to be copied must contain only the columns (or
lines) you want to replace
To copy individual columns or lines, press the REPLACE
FIELDS soft key (see “Copying a single file” on page 115).

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 163

5.2 Tool Data
Tool-carrier kinematics

The TNC must be adapted by your machine tool builder to

be able to account for the tool carrier kinematics. In
particular, your machine tool builder must provide carrier
kinematic descriptions on the PLC partition or in the
TNC:\system\TOOLKINEMATICS directory. Refer to your
machine manual.

In the KINEMATIC column of the tool table TOOL.T you can assign each
tool with an additional tool carrier kinematic description.
In the simplest case, this carrier kinematics can simulate the taper
shank in order to include it in the dynamic collision monitoring. Also,
you can use this function to very easily integrate angle heads into the
complete machine kinematic description.
In the tool table, after you have pressed the SELECT KINEMATICS soft
key, the TNC shows a list of all available carrier kinematic descriptions.
The displayed list contains all carrier kinematic descriptions that your
machine tool builder has provided (TAB file format, located on the PLC
partition) and in addition carrier kinematic descriptions in file form CFX
that are saved in the TNC:\system\TOOLKINEMATICS directory. When
you select a carrier kinematic description in cfx format and assign it to
a tool, the TNC copies the carrier kinematic description from the TNC
partition to the PLC partition. At the same time, the TNC activates this
carrier kinematics description.

Danger of collision!
If you change the carrier kinematics by editing in the cfx
file, you have to assign the carrier kinematics description in
the tool table to a tool again. During the selection process
the TNC converts the cfx file into an internal format and
activates the corrected carrier kinematic description.

164 Programming: Tools

 5.2 Tool Data
Using an external PC to overwrite individual tool
data
The HEIDENHAIN data transfer software TNCremoNT provides an
especially convenient way to use an external PC to overwrite tool data
(see “Software for data transfer” on page 523). This applies when you
measure tool data on an external tool presetter and then want to
transfer the data to the TNC. Follow this procedure:
U Copy the tool table TOOL.T to the TNC, for example to TST.T
U Start the data transfer software TNCremoNT on the PC
U Establish a connection with the TNC
U Transfer the copied tool table TST.T to the PC
U Use any text editor to reduce TST.T to the lines and columns to be
changed (see figure). Make sure that the header is not changed and
the data is always flush in the column. The tool number (column T)
need not be consecutive
U In TNCremoNT, select the menu item <Extras> and <TNCcmd>:
This starts TNCcmd
U To transfer TST.T to the TNC, enter the following command and
confirm with the return key (see figure):
put tst.t tool.t /m

During transfer, only the tool data defined in the subfile

(e.g. TST.T) is overwritten. All other tool data of the table
TOOL.T remains unchanged.
The procedure for copying tool tables using the TNC file
manager is described in the section on file management
(see “Copying a table” on page 117).

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 165

5.2 Tool Data
Pocket table for tool changer

The machine tool builder adapts the functional range of

the pocket table to the requirements of your machine. The
machine tool manual provides further information.

For automatic tool changing you need the pocket table TOOL_P.TCH.
The TNC can manage several pocket tables with any file names. To
activate a specific pocket table for program run you must select it in
the file management of a Program Run mode of operation (status M).
In order to be able to manage various magazines in a tool-pocket table
(indexing the pocket number), Machine Parameters 7261.0 to 7261.3
must not be equal to 0.
The TNC can control up to 9999 magazine pockets in the pocket
table.

Editing a pocket table in a Program Run operating mode

U Press the TOOL TABLE soft key to select the tool
table
U Press the POCKET TABLE soft key to select the
pocket table
U Set the EDIT soft key to ON. On your machine this
might not be necessary or even possible. Refer to
your machine manual

166 Programming: Tools

 5.2 Tool Data
Selecting a pocket table in the Programming and
Editing operating mode
U Call the file manager

U Press the SELECT TYPE soft key to select the file type
U Press the soft key TCH FILES (second soft-key row) to
show files of the type .TCH.
U Select a file or enter a new file name. Conclude your
entry with the ENT key or the SELECT soft key

Abbr. Inputs Dialog

P Pocket number of the tool in the tool magazine -

T Tool number Tool number?

ST Special tool with a large radius requiring several pockets in the tool Special tool?
magazine. If your special tool takes up pockets in front of and behind its
actual pocket, these additional pockets need to be locked in column L
(status L)

F Fixed tool number. The tool is always returned to the same pocket in the tool Fixed pocket? Yes = ENT /
magazine No = NO ENT

L Locked pocket (see also column ST) Pocket locked Yes = ENT /
No = NO ENT

PLC Information on this tool pocket that is to be sent to the PLC PLC status?

TNAME Display of the tool name from TOOL.T -

DOC Display of the comment to the tool from TOOL.T -

PTYP Tool type. Function is defined by the machine tool builder. The machine tool Tool type for pocket
documentation provides further information. table?

P1 ... P5 Function is defined by the machine tool builder. The machine tool Value?
documentation provides further information.

RSV Pocket reservation for box magazines Pocket reserv.: Yes = ENT
/ No = NOENT

LOCKED_ABOVE Box magazine: Lock the pocket above Lock the pocket above?

LOCKED_BELOW Box magazine: Lock the pocket below Lock the pocket below?

LOCKED_LEFT Box magazine: Lock the pocket at left Lock the pocket at left?

LOCKED_RIGHT Box magazine: Lock the pocket at right Lock the pocket at right?

S1 ... S5 Function is defined by the machine tool builder. The machine tool Value?
documentation provides further information.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 167

5.2 Tool Data
Editing functions for pocket tables Soft key
Select beginning of table

Select end of table

Select previous page in table

Select next page in table

Reset pocket table

Reset tool number column T

Go to beginning of next line

Reset column to original state. Only applies to

the columns RSV, LOCKED_ABOVE, LOCKED_BELOW,
LOCKED_LEFT and LOCKED_RIGHT

168 Programming: Tools

 5.2 Tool Data
Calling tool data
A TOOL CALL block in the part program is defined with the following
data:
U Select the tool call function with the TOOL CALL key
U Tool number: Enter the number or name of the tool.
The tool must already be defined in a G99 block or in
the tool table. Press the TOOL NAME soft key to
enter the name. The TNC automatically places the
tool name in quotation marks. The tool name always
refers to the entry in the active tool table TOOL.T. If
you wish to call a tool with other compensation
values, also enter the index you defined in the tool
table after the decimal point. There is a SELECT soft
key for calling a window from which you can select a
tool defined in the tool table TOOL.T directly without
having to enter the number or name:See also “Editing
tool data in the selection window” on page 170
U Working spindle axis X/Y/Z: Enter the tool axis
U Spindle speed S: Enter the spindle speed directly or
allow the TNC to calculate the spindle speed if you are
working with cutting data tables. Press the S
CALCULATE AUTOMAT. soft key. The TNC limits the
spindle speed to the maximum value set in MP 3515.
Alternatively, you can define the cutting speed Vc in
m/min. Press the VC soft key
U Feed rate F: Enter the feed rate directly or allow the
TNC to calculate the feed rate if you are working with
cutting data tables. Press the F CALCULATE
AUTOMAT. soft key. The TNC limits the feed rate to
the maximum feed rate of the slowest axis (set in
MP1010). F is effective until you program a new feed
rate in a positioning or TOOL CALL block
U Tool length oversize DL: Enter the delta value for
the tool length
U Tool radius oversize DR: Enter the delta value for
the tool radius
U Tool radius oversize DR2: Enter the delta value for
the tool radius 2

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 169

5.2 Tool Data
Editing tool data in the selection window
In the pop-up window for tool selection you can also edit the displayed
tool data:
U Use the arrow keys to select the line and then the column of the
value to be edited: The light-blue background marks the editable
field
U Set the EDIT soft key to ON, enter the desired value and confirm
with the ENT key
U If needed, select further columns and repeat the described
procedure
U Press the ENT key to load the selected tool into the program

Example: Tool call

Call tool number 5 in the tool axis Z with a spindle speed of 2500 rpm
and a feed rate of 350 mm/min. The tool length is to be programmed
with an oversize of 0.2 mm, the tool radius 2 with an oversize of
0.05 mm, and the tool radius with an undersize of 1 mm.

N20 T 5.2 G17 S2500 DL+0.2 DR-1

The character D preceding L and R designates a delta value.

Tool preselection with tool tables

If you are working with tool tables, use G51 to preselect the next tool.
Simply enter the tool number or a corresponding Q parameter, or type
the tool name in quotation marks.

170 Programming: Tools

 5.2 Tool Data
Tool change

The tool change function can vary depending on the

individual machine tool. The machine tool manual
provides further information.

Tool change position

The tool change position must be approachable without collision. With
the miscellaneous functions M91 and M92, you can enter machine-
based (rather than workpiece-based) coordinates for the tool change
position. If T 0 is programmed before the first tool call, the TNC moves
the tool spindle in the tool axis to a position that is independent of the
tool length.

Manual tool change

To change the tool manually, stop the spindle and move the tool to the
tool change position:
U Move to the tool change position under program control.
U Interrupt program run (see “Interrupting machining,” page 502).
U Change the tool.
U Resume program run (see “Resuming program run after an
interruption,” page 505).

Automatic tool change

If your machine tool has automatic tool changing capability, the
program run is not interrupted. When the TNC reaches a T it replaces
the inserted tool by another from the tool magazine.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 171

5.2 Tool Data
Automatic tool change if the tool life expires: M101

The function of M101 can vary depending on the individual

machine tool. The machine tool manual provides further
information.
An automatic tool change with active radius
compensation is not possible if an NC program is used on
your machine for the tool change. The machine tool
manual provides further information.

The TNC automatically changes the tool if the tool life TIME1 expires
during program run. To use this miscellaneous function, activate M101
at the beginning of the program. M101 is reset with M102.
You enter the number of the replacement tool in the RT column of the
tool table. If no tool number is entered there, the TNC inserts a tool
that has the same name as the momentarily active one. The TNC
starts the search from the beginning of the tool table and inserts the
first tool it finds.
The tool is changed automatically
„ after the next NC block after expiration of the tool life, or
„ at latest one minute after tool life expires (calculation is for a
potentiometer setting of 100%). This only applies if the duration of
the NC block is less than one minute; otherwise the change occurs
after the NC block concludes.

If the tool life ends while M120 (look ahead) is active, the
TNC waits to change the tool until after the block in which
you canceled the radius compensation with an R0 block.
The TNC automatically changes the tool even if a fixed
cycle is being run.
The TNC does not automatically change the tool as long
as a tool change program is running.

Prerequisites for standard NC blocks with radius compensation

G40, G41, G42
The radius of the replacement tool must be the same as that of the
original tool. If the radii are not equal, the TNC displays an error
message and does not replace the tool.

Prerequisites for NC blocks with surface-normal vectors and 3-D

compensation
The radius of the replacement tool can differ from the radius of the
original tool. The tool radius is not included in program blocks
transmitted from CAM systems. You can enter the delta value (DR)
either in the tool table or in the T block.
If DR is greater than zero, the TNC displays an error message and does
not replace the tool. You can suppress this message with the
M function M107, and reactivate it with M108.

172 Programming: Tools

 5.2 Tool Data
Tool usage test

The tool usage test function must be enabled by your

machine manufacturer. Refer to your machine manual.

The following are prerequisites for a tool usage test:

„ Bit 2 of the machine parameter must be set to 7246=1
„ The machining timer must be active in the Test Run operating mode
„ A simulation of the plain language program must have been
completed in the Test Run mode
With the TOOL USAGE TEST soft key, you can check before starting
a program in a Program Run operating mode whether the tool being
used has enough service life remaining. Here the TNC compares the
actual values for service life in the tool table with the nominal values
from the tool requirement file.
After you have clicked the soft key, the TNC displays the results of the
tool usage test in a pop-up window. Use the CE key to close the pop-
up window.
The TNC saves the usage times in a separate file with the extension
pgmname.H.T.DEP (see “Changing the MOD setting for dependent
files” on page 536). The generated tool usage file has the following
information:

Column Meaning
TOKEN „ TOOL: Tool usage time per TOOL CALL. The
entries are listed in chronological order.
„ TTOTAL: Total usage time of a tool
„ STOTAL: Call of a subprogram (including
cycles); the entries are listed in
chronological order
„ TIMETOTAL: The total machining time of the
NC program is entered in the WTIME column.
In the PATH column the TNC saves the path
name of the corresponding NC programs.
The TIME column shows the sum of all TIME
entries (only when the spindle is on, and
without rapid traverse). The TNC sets all
other columns to 0.
„ TOOLFILE: In the PATH column, the TNC
saves the path name of the tool table with
which you conducted the Test Run. This
enables the TNC during the actual tool
usage test to detect whether you
performed the test run with the TOOL.T.

TNR Tool number (–1: No tool inserted yet)

IDX Tool index

NAME Tool name from the tool table

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 173

5.2 Tool Data
Column Meaning
TIME Tool-usage time in seconds (feed time)

WTIME Tool-usage time in seconds (total usage time

between tool changes)

RAD Tool radius R + Oversize of tool radius DR

from the tool table. The unit is 0.1 µm.

BLOCK Block number in which the TOOL CALL block

was programmed

PATH „ TOKEN = TOOL: Path name of the active main

program or subprogram
„ TOKEN = STOTAL: Path name of the
subprogram

T Tool number with tool index

There are two ways to run a tool usage test for a pallet file:
„ The highlight is on a pallet entry in the pallet file:
The TNC runs the tool usage test for the entire pallet.
„ The highlight is on a program entry in the pallet file:
The TNC runs the tool usage test for the selected program.

174 Programming: Tools

 5.2 Tool Data
Tool management

Tool management is a machine-dependent function,

which can also be completely deactivated. The machine
tool builder defines the exact range of functions, so refer
to your machine manual.
The following describes only those functions that are
available in TNC as standard features.

With the tool management, your machine tool builder can provide
many functions with regard to tool handling. Examples:
„ Easily readable and, if you desired, adaptable representation of the
tool data in fillable forms
„ Any description of the individual tool data in the new table view
„ Mixed representation of data from the tool table and the pocket
table
„ Fast sorting of all tool data by mouse
„ Use of graphic aids, e.g. color coding of tool or magazine status
„ Program-specific location diagram of all tools
„ Program-specific usage sequence of all tools

Calling tool management

U Press the TOOL TABLE soft key to select the tool
table
U Switch to the next soft-key row

U Select the TOOL MANAGEMENT soft key: The TNC

goes into the new table view (see figure at right)

In the new view, the TNC presents all tool information in the following
four card registers:
„ Tools:
Tool specific information
„ Tool pockets:
Pocket-specific information
„ T usage list:
List of all tools in the NC program that is selected in the Program
Run mode (only if you have already made a tool usage file, see “Tool
usage test,” page 173)
„ T usage order:
List of the sequence of all tools that are inserted in the program
selected in the Program Run mode (only if you have already made a
tool usage file, see “Tool usage test,” page 173)

You can edit the tool data only in the fillable form view,
which you can activate by pressing the FORM soft key or
the ENT key for the tool that is highlighted on the screen.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 175

5.2 Tool Data
Operating the tool management
The tool management can be operated by mouse or with the keys and
soft keys:
Editing functions for tool management Soft key
Select beginning of table

Select end of table

Select previous page in table

Select next page in table

Call the magazine management: Without

machine adaptation the magazine management
functions are not available

Call the fillable form view for the tool or magazine

pocket highlighted in the table

Show pocket-specific data (if Tools tab is active)

Show tool-specific data (if Pockets tab is active)

In addition, you can perform the following functions by mouse:

„ Sorting function
By clicking a column of the table head, you sort the data in
ascending or descending order
„ Moving columns
You can arrange the columns in any sequence you want by clicking
a column of the table head and then moving it with the mouse key
pressed down. The TNC does not save the current column
sequence when you exit the tool management
„ Calling the fillable form view
Double-click a line of the table to switch to the fillable form view
„ Showing additional information in the fillable form view
The TNC displays tool tips when you leave the mouse pointer on an
active input field for more than a second

176 Programming: Tools

 5.3 Tool Compensation
5.3 Tool Compensation
Introduction
The TNC adjusts the spindle path in the spindle axis by the
compensation value for the tool length. In the working plane, it
compensates the tool radius.
If you are writing the part program directly on the TNC, the tool radius
compensation is effective only in the working plane. The TNC
accounts for the compensation value in up to five axes including the
rotary axes.

If a part program generated by a CAM system contains

surface-normal vectors, the TNC can perform three-
dimensional tool compensation.

Tool length compensation

Length compensation becomes effective automatically as soon as a
tool is called and the spindle axis moves. To cancel length
compensation, call a tool with the length L=0.

Danger of collision!
If you cancel a positive length compensation with T 0 the
distance between tool and workpiece will be reduced.
After T the path of the tool in the spindle axis, as entered
in the part program, is adjusted by the difference between
the length of the previous tool and that of the new one.

For tool length compensation, the control takes the delta values from
both the T block and the tool table into account:
Compensation value = L + DLTOOL CALL + DLTAB where

L: is the tool length L from the G99 block or tool table

DL TOOL CALL is the oversize for length DL in the T 0 block (not
taken into account by the position display).
DL TAB is the oversize for length DL in the tool table.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 177

5.3 Tool Compensation
Tool radius compensation
The NC block for programming a tool movement contains: G41
G40
„ G41 or G42 for radius compensation
„ G43 or G44, for radius compensation in single-axis movements
„ G40 if there is no radius compensation
Radius compensation becomes effective as soon as a tool is called R
and is moved with a straight line block in the working plane with G41
or G42.
R
The TNC automatically cancels radius compensation if
you:
„ program a straight line block with G40
„ program a PGM CALL
„ select a new program with PGM MGT.

For radius compensation, the TNC takes the delta values from both the
T block and the tool table into account:
Compensation value = R + DRTOOL CALL + DRTAB where
R Tool radius R from the G99 block or tool table
DR TOOL CALL Oversize for radius DR in the T block (not taken
into account by the position display)
DR TAB: Oversize for radius DR in the tool table

Contouring without radius compensation: G40

The tool center moves in the working plane along the programmed
path or to the programmed coordinates.
Applications: Drilling and boring, pre-positioning.
Z
Y

X
Y

178 Programming: Tools

 5.3 Tool Compensation
Contouring with radius compensation: G42 and G41

G43 The tool moves to the right on the programmed contour Y

G42 The tool moves to the left on the programmed contour
The tool center moves along the contour at a distance equal to the
radius. “Right” or “left” are to be understood as based on the
direction of tool movement along the workpiece contour. See figures.

Between two program blocks with different radius G41

compensations G43 and G42 you must program at least
one traversing block in the working plane without radius
compensation (that is, with G40).
The TNC does not put radius compensation into effect
until the end of the block in which it is first programmed. X
You can also activate the radius compensation for
secondary axes in the working plane. Program the
secondary axes too in each following block, since
otherwise the TNC will execute the radius compensation
in the principal axis again.
Y

In the first block in which radius compensation is activated

with G42/G41 or canceled with G40 the TNC always
positions the tool perpendicular to the programmed
starting or end position. Position the tool at a sufficient
distance from the first or last contour point to prevent the
possibility of damaging the contour. G42

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 179

5.3 Tool Compensation
Entering radius compensation
Radius compensation is entered in a G01 block:

To select tool movement to the left of the

programmed contour, select function G41, or

To select tool movement to the right of the contour,

select function G42, or

To select tool movement without radius

compensation or to cancel radius compensation,
select function G40.

To terminate the block, press the END key.

180 Programming: Tools

 5.3 Tool Compensation
Radius compensation: Machining corners
„ Outside corners:
If you program radius compensation, the TNC moves the tool
around outside corners either on a transitional arc or on a spline
(selectable via MP7680). If necessary, the TNC reduces the feed
rate at outside corners to reduce machine stress, for example at
very great changes of direction.
„ Inside corners:
The TNC calculates the intersection of the tool center paths at inside
RL
corners under radius compensation. From this point it then starts
the next contour element. This prevents damage to the workpiece.
The permissible tool radius, therefore, is limited by the geometry of
the programmed contour.

Danger of collision!
To prevent the tool from damaging the contour, be careful
not to program the starting or end position for machining
inside corners at a corner of the contour.

Machining corners without radius compensation

If you program the tool movement without radius compensation, you
can change the tool path and feed rate at workpiece corners with the
miscellaneous function M90. see “Smoothing corners: M90,” page
304.

RL RL

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 181

5.3 Tool Compensation

182 Programming: Tools

Programming:
Programming Contours
6.1 Tool Movements
6.1 Tool Movements
Path functions G01
A workpiece contour is usually composed of several contour elements G01 CC
such as straight lines and circular arcs. With the path functions, you
can program the tool movements for straight lines and circular arcs. G01
G02
Miscellaneous functions M
With the TNC's miscellaneous functions you can affect
„ the program run, e.g., a program interruption
„ the machine functions, such as switching spindle rotation and
coolant supply on and off
„ the path behavior of the tool

Subprograms and program section repeats

If a machining sequence occurs several times in a program, you can
save time and reduce the chance of programming errors by entering
the sequence once and then defining it as a subprogram or program
section repeat. If you wish to execute a specific program section only
under certain conditions, you also define this machining sequence as
a subprogram. In addition, you can have a part program call a separate
program for execution.
Programming with subprograms and program section repeats is
described in Chapter 8.

184 Programming: Programming Contours

 6.1 Tool Movements
Programming with Q parameters
Instead of programming numerical values in a part program, you enter
markers called Q parameters. You assign the values to the
Q parameters separately with the Q parameter functions. You can use
the Q parameters for programming mathematical functions that
control program execution or describe a contour.
In addition, parametric programming enables you to measure with the
3-D touch probe during program run.
Programming with Q parameters is described in Chapter 9.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 185

6.2 Fundamentals of Path Functions
6.2 Fundamentals of Path
Functions
Programming tool movements for workpiece
Z
machining
You create a part program by programming the path functions for the
individual contour elements in sequence. You usually do this by Y
entering the coordinates of the end points of the contour
elements given in the production drawing. The TNC calculates the X
actual path of the tool from these coordinates, and from the tool data
and radius compensation.
The TNC moves all axes programmed in a single block simultaneously.
100
Movement parallel to the machine axes
The program block contains only one coordinate. The TNC thus moves
the tool parallel to the programmed axis.
Depending on the individual machine tool, the part program is
executed by movement of either the tool or the machine table on
which the workpiece is clamped. Nevertheless, you always program
path contours as if the tool moves and the workpiece remains
stationary. Z
Example:

N50 G00 X+100 * Y

X
N50 Block number 50
G00 Path function “straight line at rapid traverse”
X+100 Coordinate of the end point
The tool retains the Y and Z coordinates and moves to the position 70
X=100. See figure.

Movement in the main planes

The program block contains two coordinates. The TNC thus moves the
tool in the programmed plane.
Example:

N50 G00 X+70 Y+50 * Z

The tool retains the Z coordinate and moves in the XY plane to the
position X=70, Y=50 (see figure). Y
Three-dimensional movement X
The program block contains three coordinates. The TNC thus moves
the tool in space to the programmed position.
Example:
80
N50 G01 X+80 Y+0 Z-10 * -10

186 Programming: Programming Contours

 6.2 Fundamentals of Path Functions
Entering more than three coordinates
The TNC can control up to 5 axes simultaneously (software option).
Machining with 5 axes, for example, moves 3 linear and 2 rotary axes
simultaneously.
Such programs are too complex to program at the machine, however,
and are usually created with a CAM system.
Example:

N123 G01 G40 X+20 Y+10 Z+2 A+15 C+6 F100 M3 *

Circles and circular arcs

The TNC moves two axes simultaneously on a circular path relative to
the workpiece. You can define a circular movement by entering the
circle center CC.
When you program a circle, the control assigns it to one of the main
planes. This plane is defined automatically when you set the spindle
axis during a TOOL CALL:

Spindle axis Main plane

(G17) XY, also Y Y
UV, XV, UY

(G18) ZX, also

WU, ZU, WX
CC
YCC
(G19) YZ, also
VW, YW, VZ

You can program circles that do not lie parallel to a main X X

XCC
plane by using the function for tilting the working plane
(see User's Manual for Cycles, Cycle 19, WORKING
PLANE) or Q parameters (see “Principle and Overview,”
page 250).

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 187

6.2 Fundamentals of Path Functions
Direction of rotation DR for circular movements
When a circular path has no tangential transition to another contour
element, enter the direction of rotation as follows:
Z
Clockwise direction of rotation: G02/G12 13
Counterclockwise direction of rotation: G03/G13 G03/G
Y 12
G02/G
Radius compensation
The radius compensation must be in the block in which you move to X
the first contour element. You cannot activate radius compensation in
a circle block. Activate it beforehand in a straight-line block (see “Path
Contours—Cartesian Coordinates,” page 193).

Pre-positioning
Before running a part program, always pre-position the tool to prevent
the possibility of damaging it or the workpiece.

188 Programming: Programming Contours

 6.3 Contour Approach and Departure
6.3 Contour Approach and
Departure
Starting point and end point
The tool approaches the first contour point from the starting point. The
starting point must be:
„ Programmed without radius compensation Y
„ Approachable without danger of collision
„ Close to the first contour point
Example
Figure at upper right: If you set the starting point in the dark gray area,
the contour will be damaged when the first contour element is A
approached.

First contour point

You need to program a radius compensation for the tool movement to
the first contour point. S X
Approaching the starting point in the spindle axis
When the starting point is approached, the tool must be moved to the
working depth in the spindle axis. If danger of collision exists,
Y
approach the starting point in the spindle axis separately.
Example NC blocks

N30 G00 G40 X+20 Y+30 *

N40 Z-10 *

G41 X

Z
Y

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 189

6.3 Contour Approach and Departure
End point
The end point should be selected so that it is:
„ Approachable without danger of collision
Y
„ Near to the last contour point
„ In order to make sure the contour will not be damaged, the optimal
ending point should lie on the extended tool path for machining the
last contour element
Example
Figure at upper right: If you set the ending point in the dark gray area, A
the contour will be damaged when the end point is approached.
Depart the end point in the spindle axis:
Program the departure from the end point in the spindle axis
E
separately. See figure at center right. X
Example NC blocks

N50 G00 G40 X+60 Y+70 *

N60 Z+250 *

Common starting and end points

Do not program any radius compensation if the starting point and end
Z
point are the same.
In order to make sure the contour will not be damaged, the optimal Y
starting point should lie between the extended tool paths for
machining the first and last contour elements.
Example X
Figure at upper right: If you set the starting point in the dark gray area,
the contour will be damaged when the first contour element is
approached. E

E
X

190 Programming: Programming Contours

 6.3 Contour Approach and Departure
Tangential approach and departure
With G26 (figure at center right), you can program a tangential approach
to the workpiece, and with G27 (figure at lower right) a tangential
departure. In this way you can avoid dwell marks.
Y

Starting point and end point

The starting point and the end point lie outside the workpiece, close
to the first and last contour points. They are to be programmed
without radius compensation.

Approach A
U G26 is entered after the block in which the first contour element is

R
S
programmed: This will be the first block with radius compensation
G41/G42

Departure G40 G41 X

U G27 after the block in which the last contour element is
programmed: This will be the last block with radius compensation
G41/G42

The radius for G26 and G27 must be selected so that the Y
TNC can execute the circular path between the starting
point and the first contour point, as well as the last contour
point and the end point.

B
G41

E R

X
G40

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 191

6.3 Contour Approach and Departure
Example NC blocks

N50 G00 G40 G90 X-30 Y+50 * Starting point

N60 G01 G41 X+0 Y+50 F350 * First contour point
N70 G26 R5 * Tangential approach with radius R = 5 mm
. . .
PROGRAM CONTOUR BLOCKS
. . . Last contour point
N210 G27 R5 * Tangential departure with radius R = 5 mm
N220 G00 G40 X-30 Y+50 * End point

192 Programming: Programming Contours

 6.4 Path Contours—Cartesian Coordinates
6.4 Path Contours—Cartesian
Coordinates
Overview of path functions
Function Path function key Tool movement Required input Page
Line L Straight line Coordinates of the end Page 194
points of the straight line

Chamfer CHF Chamfer between two Chamfer side length Page 195
straight lines

Circle Center CC None Coordinates of the circle Page 197

center or pole

Circle C Circular arc around a circle Coordinates of the arc end Page 198
center CC to an arc end point, direction of rotation
point

Circular arc CR Circular arc with a certain Coordinates of the arc end Page 199
radius point, arc radius, direction
of rotation

Circular arc CT Circular arc with tangential Coordinates of the arc end Page 201
connection to the preceding point
and subsequent contour
elements

Corner Rounding RND Circular arc with tangential Rounding radius R Page 196
connection to the preceding
and subsequent contour
elements

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 193

6.4 Path Contours—Cartesian Coordinates
Straight line at rapid traverse G00
Straight Line with Feed Rate G01 F
The TNC moves the tool in a straight line from its current position to
the straight-line end point. The starting point is the end point of the Y
preceding block.
40
U Coordinates of the end point of the straight line, if
1
necessary

15
U Radius compensation RL/RR/R0

10
U Feed rate F
U Miscellaneous function M

Example NC blocks
N70 G01 G41 X+10 Y+40 F200 M3 * 20 X
10
N80 G91 X+20 Y-15 *
60
N90 G90 X+60 G91 Y-10 *

Actual position capture

You can also generate a straight-line block (G01 block) by using the
ACTUAL-POSITION-CAPTURE key:
U In the Manual Operation mode, move the tool to the position you
wish to capture.
U Switch the screen display to Programming and Editing.
U Select the program block after which you want to insert the L block.
U Press the ACTUAL-POSITION-CAPTURE key: The
TNC generates an L block with the actual position
coordinates

In the MOD function, you define the number of axes that

the TNC saves in a G01 block (see “Selecting the Axes for
Generating G01 Blocks,” page 543).

194 Programming: Programming Contours

 6.4 Path Contours—Cartesian Coordinates
Inserting a chamfer between two straight lines
The chamfer enables you to cut off corners at the intersection of two
straight lines.
„ The line blocks before and after the G24 block must be in the same
Y 12
working plane as the chamfer
„ The radius compensation before and after the G24 block must be the
same

12
5
„ The chamfer must be machinable with the current tool 30

U Chamfer side length: Length of the chamfer, and if

necessary:
U Feed rate F (effective only in G24 block)

Example NC blocks 5 X
N70 G01 G41 X+0 Y+30 F300 M3 * 40
N80 X+40 G91 Y+5 *
N90 G24 R12 F250 *
N100 G91 X+5 G90 Y+0 *

You cannot start a contour with a G24 block.

A chamfer is possible only in the working plane.
The corner point is cut off by the chamfer and is not part
of the contour.
A feed rate programmed in the CHF block is effective only
in that block. After the G24 block, the previous feed rate
becomes effective again.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 195

6.4 Path Contours—Cartesian Coordinates
Corner rounding G25
The G25 function is used for rounding off corners.
The tool moves on an arc that is tangentially connected to both the Y
preceding and subsequent contour elements.
The rounding arc must be machinable with the called tool.
40
U Rounding radius: Enter the radius, and if necessary:
25
U Feed rate F (effective only in G25 block) R5 25

Example NC blocks
5 L X+10 Y+40 RL F300 M3
5
6 L X+40 Y+25
7 RND R5 F100 X
10 40
8 L X+10 Y+5

In the preceding and subsequent contour elements, both

coordinates must lie in the plane of the rounding arc. If
you machine the contour without tool-radius
compensation, you must program both coordinates in the
working plane.
The corner point is cut off by the rounding arc and is not
part of the contour.
A feed rate programmed in the G25 block is effective only
in that block.G25 After the G25 block, the previous feed
rate becomes effective again.
You can also use an RND block for a tangential contour
approach.

196 Programming: Programming Contours

 6.4 Path Contours—Cartesian Coordinates
Circle center I, J
You can define a circle center for circles that you have programmed
with the G02, G03 or G05 function. This is done in the following ways:
„ Entering the Cartesian coordinates of the circle center in the
Z
working plane, or Y
„ Using the circle center defined in an earlier block, or
„ Capturing the coordinates with the ACTUAL-POSITION-CAPTURE CC
key
U Enter the coordinates for the circle center, or YCC X
If you want to use the last programmed position,
enter G29

Example NC blocks
X CC
N50 I+25 J+25 *

or

N10 G00 G40 X+25 Y+25 *

N20 G29 *

The program blocks 10 and 11 do not refer to the illustration.

Duration of effect
The circle center definition remains in effect until a new circle center
is programmed. You can also define a circle center for the secondary
axes U, V and W.
Entering the circle center incrementally
If you enter the circle center with incremental coordinates, you have
programmed it relative to the last programmed position of the tool.

The only effect of CC is to define a position as circle

center: The tool does not move to this position.
The circle center is also the pole for polar coordinates.
If you wish to define the pole in parallel axes, first press
the I (J) key on the ASCII keyboard, and then the orange
axis key for the corresponding parallel axis.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 197

6.4 Path Contours—Cartesian Coordinates
Circular path C around circle center CC
Before programming a circular arc, you must first enter the circle
center I, J. The last programmed tool position will be the starting
point of the arc. Y
Direction of rotation
„ In clockwise direction: G02
„ In counterclockwise direction: G03
„ Without programmed direction: G05. The TNC traverses the circular
arc with the last programmed direction of rotation E S
CC
U Move the tool to the circle starting point.
U Enter the coordinates of the circle center

U Coordinates of the arc end point, and if necessary:

3 X
U Feed rate F
U Miscellaneous function M

The TNC normally makes circular movements in the active

working plane. If you program circular arcs that do not lie
in the active working plane, for example G2 Z... X...
with a tool axis Z, and at the same time rotate this
movement, then the TNC moves the tool in a spatial
circular arc, which means a circular arc in 3 axes. Y

Example NC blocks
DR+
N50 I+25 J+25 *
N60 G01 G42 X+45 Y+25 F200 M3 * CC
25
N70 G03 X+45 Y+25 *

Full circle DR–

For the end point, enter the same point that you used for the starting
point. X
25 45
The starting and end points of the arc must lie on the
circle.
Input tolerance: up to 0.016 mm (selected with MP7431).
Smallest possible circle that the TNC can traverse:
0.0016 µm.

198 Programming: Programming Contours

 6.4 Path Contours—Cartesian Coordinates
Circular path G02/G03/G05 with defined radius
The tool moves on a circular path with the radius R.

Direction of rotation Y
„ In clockwise direction: G02
„ In counterclockwise direction: G03
„ Without programmed direction: G05. The TNC traverses the circular
arc with the last programmed direction of rotation R
E1=S
U Coordinates of the arc end point
3 S1=E
CC
U Radius R
Note: The algebraic sign determines the size of the
arc!
U Miscellaneous function M
X
U Feed rate F
Full circle
For a full circle, program two blocks in succession:
The end point of the first semicircle is the starting point of the second.
The end point of the second semicircle is the starting point of the first.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 199

6.4 Path Contours—Cartesian Coordinates
Central angle CCA and arc radius R
The starting and end points on the contour can be connected with four
arcs of the same radius: Y
Smaller arc: CCA<180°
Enter the radius with a positive sign R>0
1 DR–
Larger arc: CCA>180°
Enter the radius with a negative sign R<0
40 DR+
The direction of rotation determines whether the arc is curving ZW
outward (convex) or curving inward (concave): R R

Convex: Direction of rotation G02 (with radius compensation G41) 2

Concave: Direction of rotation G03 (with radius compensation G41)

Example NC blocks
X
40 70
N100 G01 G41 X+40 Y+40 F200 M3 *
N110 G02 X+70 Y+40 R+20 * (ARC 1)
3
or Y

N110 G03 X+70 Y+40 R+20 * (ARC 2) DR–

ZW

or
R R
N110 G02 X+70 Y+40 R-20 * (ARC 3) 40

or
4
N110 G03 X+70 Y+40 R-20 * (ARC 4) DR+

X
The distance from the starting and end points of the arc 40 70
diameter cannot be greater than the diameter of the arc.
The maximum radius is 99.9999 m.
You can also enter rotary axes A, B and C.

200 Programming: Programming Contours

 6.4 Path Contours—Cartesian Coordinates
Circular path G06 with tangential connection
The tool moves on an arc that starts tangentially to the previously
programmed contour element. Y
A transition between two contour elements is called tangential when
there is no kink or corner at the intersection between the two
contours—the transition is smooth.
The contour element to which the tangential arc connects must be
programmed immediately before the G06 block. This requires at least 30
two positioning blocks. 25
U Coordinates of the arc end point, and if necessary: 20
6
U Feed rate F
U Miscellaneous function M

Example NC blocks
X
25 45
N70 G01 G41 X+0 Y+25 F300 M3 *
N80 X+25 Y+30 *
N90 G06 X+45 Y+20 *
G01 Y+0 *

A tangential arc is a two-dimensional operation: the

coordinates in the G06 block and in the contour element
preceding it must be in the same plane of the arc!

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 201

6.4 Path Contours—Cartesian Coordinates
Example: Linear movements and chamfers with Cartesian coordinates

Y 10

3
95
2

10
20
1 4
5

20 X
5 9

%LINEAR G71 *
N10 G30 G17 X+0 Y+0 Z-20 * Define blank form for graphic workpiece simulation
N20 G31 G90 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 *
N30 G99 T1 L+0 R+10 * Define tool in the program
N40 T1 G17 S4000 * Call tool in the spindle axis and with the spindle speed S
N50 G00 G40 G90 Z+250 * Retract tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse
N60 X-10 Y-10 * Pre-position the tool
N70 G01 Z-5 F1000 M3 * Move to working depth at feed rate F = 1000 mm/min
N80 G01 G41 X+5 Y+5 F300 * Approach the contour at point 1, activate radius compensation G41
N90 G26 R5 F150 * Tangential approach
N100 Y+95 * Move to point 2
N110 X+95 * Point 3: first straight line for corner 3
N120 G24 R10 * Program chamfer with length 10 mm
N130 Y+5 * Point 4: 2nd straight line for corner 3, 1st straight line for corner 4
N140 G24 R20 * Program chamfer with length 20 mm
N150 X+5 * Move to last contour point 1, second straight line for corner 4
N160 G27 R5 F500 * Tangential exit
N170 G40 X-20 Y-20 F1000 * Retract tool in the working plane, cancel radius compensation
N180 G00 Z+250 M2 * Retract in the tool axis, end program
N99999999 %LINEAR G71 *

202 Programming: Programming Contours

 6.4 Path Contours—Cartesian Coordinates
Example: Circular movements with Cartesian coordinates

95
2 4 5

R3
85
R10 3

0
6
40

1 7
5

X
5 30 40 70 95

%CIRCULAR G71 *
N10 G30 G17 X+0 Y+0 Z-20 * Define blank form for graphic workpiece simulation
N20 G31 G90 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 *
N30 G99 T1 L+0 R+10 * Define tool in the program
N40 T1 G17 S4000 * Call tool in the spindle axis and with the spindle speed S
N50 G00 G40 G90 Z+250 * Retract tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse
N60 X-10 Y-10 * Pre-position the tool
N70 G01 Z-5 F1000 M3 * Move to working depth at feed rate F = 1000 mm/min
N80 G01 G41 X+5 Y+5 F300 * Approach the contour at point 1, activate radius compensation G41
N90 G26 R5 F150 * Tangential approach
N100 Y+85 * Point 2: first straight line for corner 2
N110 G25 R10 * Insert radius with R = 10 mm, feed rate: 150 mm/min
N120 X+30 * Move to point 3: Starting point of the arc
N130 G02 X+70 Y+95 R+30 * Move to point 4: end point of the arc with G02, radius 30 mm
N140 G01 X+95 * Move to point 5
N150 Y+40 * Move to point 6
N160 G06 X+40 Y+5 * Move to point 7: End point of the arc, circular arc with tangential
connection to point 6, TNC automatically calculates the radius

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 203

6.4 Path Contours—Cartesian Coordinates
N170 G01 X+5 * Move to last contour point 1
N180 G27 R5 F500 * Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection
N190 G40 X-20 Y-20 F1000 * Retract tool in the working plane, cancel radius compensation
N200 G00 Z+250 M2 * Retract tool in the tool axis, end of program
N99999999 %CIRCULAR G71 *

204 Programming: Programming Contours

 6.4 Path Contours—Cartesian Coordinates
Example: Full circle with Cartesian coordinates

CC
50

X
50

%C-CC G71 *
N10 G30 G17 X+0 Y+0 Z-20 * Definition of workpiece blank
N20 G31 G90 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 *
N30 G99 T1 L+0 R+12.5 * Tool definition
N40 T1 G17 S3150 * Tool call
N50 G00 G40 G90 Z+250 * Retract the tool
N60 I+50 J+50 * Define the circle center
N70 X-40 Y+50 * Pre-position the tool
N80 G01 Z-5 F1000 M3 * Move to working depth
N90 G41 X+0 Y+50 F300 * Approach starting point, radius compensation G41
N100 G26 R5 F150 * Tangential Approach
N110 G02 X+0 * Move to the circle end point (= circle starting point)
N120 G27 R5 F500 * Tangential exit
N130 G01 G40 X-40 Y-50 F1000 * Retract tool in the working plane, cancel radius compensation
N140 G00 Z+250 M2 * Retract tool in the tool axis, end of program
N99999999 %C-CC G71 *

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 205

6.5 Path Contours—Polar Coordinates
6.5 Path Contours—Polar
Coordinates
Overview
With polar coordinates you can define a position in terms of its angle
H and its distance R relative to a previously defined pole I, J.
Polar coordinates are useful with:
„ Positions on circular arcs
„ Workpiece drawing dimensions in degrees, e.g. bolt hole circles

Overview of path functions with polar coordinates

Function Path function key Tool movement Required input Page
Straight line G10, + Straight line Polar radius, polar angle of the Page 207
G11 straight-line end point

Circular arc G12, G13 + Circular path around circle Polar angle of the arc end Page 208
center/pole to arc end point point,

Circular arc G15 + Circular path corresponding to Polar angle of the circle end Page 208
active direction of rotation point

Circular arc G16 + Circular arc with tangential Polar radius, polar angle of the Page 209
connection to the preceding arc end point
contour element

Helical interpolation + Combination of a circular and Polar radius, polar angle of the Page 210
a linear movement arc end point, coordinate of
the end point in the tool axis

206 Programming: Programming Contours

 6.5 Path Contours—Polar Coordinates
Zero point for polar coordinates: pole I, J
You can define the pole CC anywhere in the part program before
Y
blocks containing polar coordinates. Set the pole in the same way as
you would program the circle center.
U Coordinates: Enter Cartesian coordinates for the pole
or, if you want to use the last programmed position,
enter G29. Before programming polar coordinates, Y=J
define the pole. You can only define the pole in
Cartesian coordinates. The pole remains in effect until
you define a new pole.

Example NC blocks
N120 I+45 J+45 * X
X=I

Straight line at rapid traverse G10

Straight line with feed rate G11 F
The tool moves in a straight line from its current position to the
straight-line end point. The starting point is the end point of the
preceding block. Y
U Polar coordinate radius R: Enter the distance from
11
the pole CC to the straight-line end point

30
U Polar coordinate angle PAH: Angular position of the 60°
straight-line end point between –360° and +360° 60°

The sign of H depends on the angle reference axis: 25

CC
„ If the angle from the angle reference axis to R is counterclockwise:
H>0
„ If the angle from the angle reference axis to R is clockwise: H<0
X
Example NC blocks 45
N120 I+45 J+45 *
N130 G11 G42 R+30 H+0 F300 M3 *
N140 H+60 *
N150 G91 H+60 *
N160 G90 H+180 *

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 207

6.5 Path Contours—Polar Coordinates
Circular path G12/G13/G15 around pole I, J
The polar coordinate radius R is also the radius of the arc. R is defined
by the distance from the starting point to the pole I, J. The last
programmed tool position will be the starting point of the arc. Y

Direction of rotation
„ In clockwise direction: G12
„ In counterclockwise direction: G13
0
R2
„ Without programmed direction: G15. The TNC traverses the circular 25
arc with the last programmed direction of rotation CC
U Polar-coordinates angle H: Angular position of the
13
arc end point between –99 999.9999° and
+99 999.9999°
U Direction of rotation DR X
25
Example NC blocks
N180 I+25 J+25 *
N190 G11 G42 R+20 H+0 F250 M3 *
N200 G13 H+180 *

208 Programming: Programming Contours

 6.5 Path Contours—Polar Coordinates
Circular path G16 with tangential connection
The tool moves on a circular path, starting tangentially from a
preceding contour element. Y
U Polar coordinate radius R: Enter the distance from
16
are end point to the pole I, J
U Polar coordinates angle H: Angular position of the 120°
arc end point

5
0
R3

R2
Example NC blocks 30°
35
N120 I+40 J+35 * CC

N130 G01 G42 X+0 Y+35 F250 M3 *

N140 G11 R+25 H+120 *
N150 G16 R+30 H+30 *
X
N160 G01 Y+0 * 40

The pole is not the center of the contour arc!

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 209

6.5 Path Contours—Polar Coordinates
Helical interpolation
A helix is a combination of a circular movement in a main plane and a
linear movement perpendicular to this plane. You program the circular
path in a main plane.
Z
A helix is programmed only in polar coordinates.
Y CC
Application
„ Large-diameter internal and external threads
X
„ Lubrication grooves

Calculating the helix

To program a helix, you must enter the total angle through which the
tool is to move on the helix in incremental dimensions, and the total
height of the helix.
For calculating a helix that is to be cut in an upward direction, you need
the following data:
Thread revolutions n Thread revolutions + thread overrun at
thread beginning and end
Total height h Thread pitch P times thread revolutions n
Incremental total Number of revolutions times 360° + angle for
angle H beginning of thread + angle for thread
overrun
Starting coordinate Z Pitch P times (thread revolutions + thread
overrun at start of thread)

Shape of the helix

The table below illustrates in which way the shape of the helix is
determined by the work direction, direction of rotation and radius
compensation.

Work Direction of
Internal thread Radius comp.
direction rotation
Right-handed Z+ G13 G41
Left-handed Z+ G12 G42

Right-handed Z– G12 G42

Left-handed Z– G13 G41

External thread
Right-handed Z+ G13 G42
Left-handed Z+ G12 G41

Right-handed Z– G12 G41

Left-handed Z– G13 G42

210 Programming: Programming Contours

 6.5 Path Contours—Polar Coordinates
Programming a helix

Always enter the same algebraic sign for the direction of

rotation and the incremental total angle G91 H. The tool
may otherwise move in a wrong path and damage the Z
contour.
Y
For the total angle G91 H you can enter a value of CC
R3
-99 999.9999° to +99 999.9999°.

5
270°

25 X
U Polar coordinates angle: Enter the total angle of
12
tool traverse along the helix in incremental
dimensions. After entering the angle, specify the 40
tool axis with an axis selection key.
U Coordinate: Enter the coordinate for the height of the
helix in incremental dimensions.
U radius compensation according to the table above
Example NC blocks: Thread M6 x 1 mm with 5 revolutions

N120 I+40 J+25 *

N130 G01 Z+0 F100 M3 *
N140 G11 G41 R+3 H+270 *
N150 G12 G91 H-1800 Z+5 *

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 211

6.5 Path Contours—Polar Coordinates
Example: Linear movement with polar coordinates

Y
100
3
2
60°

5
R4
CC
50 1 4

6 5
5

X
5 50 100

%LINEARPO G71 *
N10 G30 G17 X+0 Y+0 Z-20 * Definition of workpiece blank
N20 G31 G90 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 *
N30 G99 T1 L+0 R+7.5 * Tool definition
N40 T1 G17 S4000 * Tool call
N50 G00 G40 G90 Z+250 * Define the datum for polar coordinates
N60 I+50 J+50 * Retract the tool
N70 G10 R+60 H+180 * Pre-position the tool
N80 G01 Z-5 F1000 M3 * Move to working depth
N90 G11 G41 R+45 H+180 F250 * Approach the contour at point 1
N100 G26 R5 * Approach the contour at point 1
N110 H+120 * Move to point 2
N120 H+60 * Move to point 3
N130 H+0 * Move to point 4
N140 H-60 * Move to point 5
N150 H-120 * Move to point 6
N160 H+180 * Move to point 1
N170 G27 R5 F500 * Tangential exit

212 Programming: Programming Contours

 6.5 Path Contours—Polar Coordinates
N180 G40 R+60 H+180 F1000 * Retract tool in the working plane, cancel radius compensation
N190 G00 Z+250 M2 * Retract in the spindle axis, end of program
N99999999 %LINEARPO G71 *

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 213

6.5 Path Contours—Polar Coordinates
Example: Helix

Y
100

M64 x 1,5
CC
50

X
50 100

%HELIX G71 *
N10 G30 G17 X+0 Y+0 Z-20 * Definition of workpiece blank
N20 G31 G90 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 *
N30 G99 T1 L+0 R+5 * Tool definition
N40 T1 G17 S1400 * Tool call
N50 G00 G40 G90 Z+250 * Retract the tool
N60 X+50 Y+50 * Pre-position the tool
N70 G29 * Transfer the last programmed position as the pole
N80 G01 Z-12.75 F1000 M3 * Move to working depth
N90 G11 G41 R+32 H+180 F250 * Approach first contour point
N100 G26 R2 * Connection
N110 G13 G91 H+3240 Z+13.5 F200 * Helical interpolation
N120 G27 R2 F500 * Tangential exit
N170 G01 G40 G90 X+50 Y+50 F1000 * Retract in the tool axis, end program
N180 G00 Z+250 M2 *

214 Programming: Programming Contours

Programming: Data
Transfer from DXF Files
7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option)
7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software
Option)
Function
DXF files created in a CAD system can be opened directly by the TNC,
in order to extract contours or machining positions, and save them as
conversational programs or as point files. Plain-language programs
acquired in this manner can also be run by older TNC controls, since
these contour programs contain only L and CC-/C blocks.
If you process DXF files in the Programming and Editing operating
mode, the TNC generates contour programs with the file extension .H
and point files with the extension .PNT. If you process DXF files in the
smarT.NC operating mode, the TNC generates contour programs with
the file extension .HC and point files with the extension .HP.

The DXF files to be processed must be stored on the hard

disk of your TNC.
Before loading the file to the TNC, ensure that the name
of the DXF file does not contain any blank spaces or illegal
special characters.(see “File names” on page 107)
The DXF file to be opened must contain at least one layer.
The TNC supports the most common DXF format, R12
(equivalent to AC1009).
The TNC does not support binary DXF format. When
generating the DXF file from a CAD or drawing program,
make sure that you save the file in ASCII format.
The following DXF elements are selectable as contours:
„ LINE (straight line)
„ CIRCLE (complete circle)
„ ARC (circular arc)
„ POLYLINE

216 Programming: Data Transfer from DXF Files

 7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option)
Opening a DXF file
U Select the Programming and Editing operating mode

U Call the file manager

U In order to see the soft-key menu for selecting the file

type to be displayed, press the SELECT TYPE soft key
U In order to show all DXF files, press the SHOW DXF
soft key
U Select the directory in which the DXF file is saved
U Select the desired DXF file, and load it with the ENT
key. The TNC starts the DXF converter and shows the
contents of the DXF file on the screen. The TNC
shows the layers in the left window, and the drawing
in the right window.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 217

7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option)
Basic settings
The third soft-key row has various possibilities for settings:

Setting Soft key

Show/hide rulers: The TNC shows the rulers at
the left and top edges of the drawing. The values
shown on the ruler are based on the drawing
datum.

Show/hide status bar: The TNC shows the status

bar at the bottom edge of the drawing. The
following information is shown in the status bar:
„ Active unit of measurement (MM or INCH)
„ X and Y coordinates of the current mouse
position
„ In the SELECT CONTOUR mode, the TNC
shows whether the selected contour is open
(open contour) or closed (closed contour).

Unit of measure MM/INCH: Enter the unit of

measurement of the DXF file. The TNC then
outputs the contour program in this unit of
measurement.

The tolerance specifies how far apart

neighboring contour elements may be from each
other. You can use the tolerance to compensate
for inaccuracies that occurred when the drawing
was made. The default setting depends on the
extent of the entire DXF file.

The resolution specifies how many decimal

places the TNC should use when generating the
contour program. Default setting: 4 decimal
places (equivalent to resolution of 0.1 µm when
the unit of measure MM is active)

218 Programming: Data Transfer from DXF Files

 7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option)
Setting Soft key
The mode for point transfer on circles and circle
segments determines whether the TNC
automatically loads the circle center point when
selecting machining positions via mouse click
(OFF), or if additional points on the circle should
be shown as well.
„ OFF
Do not show additional points on the circle.
Assume the circle center point directly when
a circle or arc is clicked
„ Enable
Do show additional points on the circle.
Assume each desired circle point by clicking
it

Mode for point assumption: Specify whether the

TNC should display the tool path during selection
of machining positions.

Please note that you must set the correct unit of

measurement, since the DXF file does not contain any
such information.
If you want to generate programs for older TNC controls,
you must limit the resolution to three decimal places. In
addition, you must remove the comments that the DXF
converter inserts into the contour program.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 219

7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option)
Layer settings
As a rule, DXF files contain multiple layers, with which the designer
organizes the drawing. The designer uses the layers to create groups
of various types of elements, such as the actual workpiece contour,
dimensions, auxiliary and design lines, shadings, and texts.
So that as little unnecessary information as possible appears on the
screen during selection of the contours, you can hide all excessive
layers contained in the DXF file.

The DXF file to be processed must contain at least one

layer.
You can even select a contour if the designer has saved it
on different layers.

U If it has not already been activated, select the mode

for the layer settings. In the left window the TNC
shows all layers contained in the active DXF file
U To hide a layer, select the layer with the left mouse
button, and click its check box to hide it
U To show a layer, select the layer with the left mouse
button, and click its check box again to show it

220 Programming: Data Transfer from DXF Files

 7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option)
Specifying the reference point
The datum of the drawing for the DXF file is not always located in a
manner that lets you use it directly as a reference point for the
workpiece. Therefore, the TNC has a function with which you can shift
the drawing datum to a suitable location by clicking an element.
You can define a reference point at the following locations:
„ At the beginning, end or center of a straight line
„ At the beginning or end of a circular arc
„ At the transition between quadrants or at the center of a complete
circle
„ At the intersection between:
„ A straight line and a straight line, even if the intersection is actually
on the extension of one of the lines
„ A line and circular arc
„ A line and full circle
„ A circle and circle (regardless of whether a circular arc or a full
circle)

You must use the touchpad on the TNC keyboard or a

mouse attached via the USB port in order to specify a
reference point.
You can also change the reference point once you have
already selected the contour. The TNC does not calculate
the actual contour data until you save the selected
contour in a contour program.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 221

7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option)
Selecting a reference point on a single element
U Select the mode for specifying the reference point

U Click the element on which you want to set the

reference point with the left mouse button. The TNC
indicates possible locations for reference points on
the selected element with stars
U Click the star you want to select as reference point.
The TNC sets the reference-point symbol to the
selected location. Use the zoom function if the
selected element is too small

Selecting a reference point on the intersection of two elements

U Select the mode for specifying the reference point

U Click the first element (straight line, complete circle or

circular arc) with the left mouse button. The TNC
indicates possible locations for reference points on
the selected element with stars
U Click the second element (straight line, complete
circle or circular arc) with the left mouse button. The
TNC sets the reference-point symbol on the
intersection

The TNC calculates the intersection of two elements even

if it is on the extension of one of these elements.
If the TNC calculates multiple intersections, it selects the
intersection nearest the mouse-click on the second
element.
If the TNC cannot calculate an intersection, it rescinds the
marking of the first element.

Element information
At the bottom left of the screen, the TNC shows how far the reference
point you haven chosen is located from the drawing datum.

222 Programming: Data Transfer from DXF Files

 7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option)
Selecting and saving a contour

You must use the touchpad on the TNC keyboard or a

mouse attached via the USB port in order to select a
contour.
If you are not using the contour program in the smarT.NC
operating mode, you must specify the machining
sequence when selecting the contour that it matches the
desired machining direction.
Select the first contour element such that approach
without collision is possible.
If the contour elements are very close to one another, use
the zoom function.

U Select the mode for choosing a contour. The TNC

hides the layers shown in the left window, and the
right window becomes active for contour selection
U To select a contour element, click the desired contour
element with the left mouse button. The selected
contour element turns blue. At the same time, the
TNC marks the selected element with a symbol
(circle or line) in the left window.
U To select the next contour element, click the desired
contour element with the left mouse button. The
selected contour element turns blue. If further
contour elements in the selected machining
sequence are clearly selectable, these elements turn
green. Click on the last green element to assume all
elements into the contour program. The TNC shows
all selected contour elements in the left window. The
TNC displays elements that are still green in the NC
column without a check mark. The TNC does not save
these elements to the contour program
U If necessary you can also deselect elements that you
already selected, by clicking the element in the right
window again, but this time while pressing the CTRL
key

If you have selected polylines, the TNC shows a two-level

ID number in the left window. The first number is the
serial contour element number, the second element is the
element number of the respective polyline from the DXF
file.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 223

7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option)
U To save the selected contour elements in a plain-
language program, enter any file name in the pop-up
window displayed by the TNC. Default setting: Name
of the DXF file. If the name of the DXF file contains
special characters or spaces, the TNC replaces the
characters with underscores.
U Confirm the entry: The TNC saves the contour
program in the directory in which the DXF file is also
saved
U If you want to select more contours, press the
CANCEL SELECTED ELEMENTS soft key and select
the next contour as described above

The TNC also transfers two workpiece-blank definitions

(BLK FORM) to the contour program. The first definition
contains the dimensions of the entire DFX file. The
second one, which is the active one, contains only the
selected contour elements, so that an optimized size of
the workpiece blank results.
The TNC only saves elements that have actually been
selected (blue elements), which means that they have
been given a check mark in the left window.

224 Programming: Data Transfer from DXF Files

 7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option)
Dividing, extending and shortening contour elements
If contour elements to be selected in the drawing connect poorly, then
you must first divide the contour element. This function is
automatically available if you are in the mode for selecting a contour.
Proceed as follows:
U The poorly connecting contour element is selected, so it is colored
blue
U Click the contour element to be divided: The TNC shows the point
of intersection with a star in a circle, and the selectable end points
with simple stars
U Press the CTRL key and click the point of intersection: The TNC
divides the contour element at the point of intersection and the stars
disappear. If there is a gap, or the elements overlap, the TNC
extends or shortens these poorly connecting contour element to the
point of intersection of the two elements
U Click the divided contour element again: The TNC shows the end
points and points of intersection again
U Click the desired end point: The TNC now colors the divided element
blue
U Select the next contour element

If the contour element to be extended or shortened is a

straight line, then the TNC extends the contour element
along the same line. If the contour element to be
extended or shortened is a circular arc, then the TNC
extends the contour element along the same arc.
In order to use this function, at least two contour
elements must already be selected, so that the direction
is clearly determined.

Element information
At the bottom left of the screen, the TNC displays information about
the contour element that you last selected via mouse click in the left
or right window.
„ Straight line
End point of the straight line, and the starting point is grayed out
„ Circle or arc
Circle center point, circle end point, and direction of rotation. Grayed
out: the starting point and circle radius

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 225

7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option)
Selecting and storing machining positions

You must use the touchpad on the TNC keyboard or a

mouse attached via the USB port in order to select a
machining position.
If the positions to be selected are very close to one
another, use the zoom function.
If required, configure the basic settings so that the TNC
shows the tool paths (see “Basic settings” on page 218).

Three possibilities are available in the pattern generator for defining

machining positions:
„ Individual selection:
You select the desired machining position through individual mouse
clicks (see “Individual selection” on page 227)
„ Quick selection of hole positions in an area defined by the mouse:
By dragging the mouse to define an area, you can select all the hole
positions within it (see “Quick selection of hole positions in an area
defined by the mouse” on page 228)
„ Quick selection of hole positions by entering a diameter:
By entering a hole diameter, you can select all hole positions with
that diameter in the DXF file (see “Quick selection of hole positions
by entering a diameter” on page 229)

226 Programming: Data Transfer from DXF Files

 7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option)
Individual selection
U Select the mode for choosing a machining position.
The TNC hides the layers shown in the left window,
and the right window becomes active for position
selection
U In order to select a machining position, click the
desired element with the left mouse button. The TNC
indicates possible locations for machining positions
on the selected element with stars. Click one of the
stars: The TNC loads the selected position into the
left window (displays a point symbol). If you click a
circle, the TNC adopts the circle center as machining
position
U If necessary you can also deselect elements that you
already selected, by clicking the element in the right
window again, but this time while pressing the CTRL
key (click inside the marked area)
U If you want to specify the machining position at the
intersection of two elements, click the first element
with the right mouse button: the TNC displays stars
at the selectable machining positions
U Click the second element (straight line, complete
circle or circular arc) with the left mouse button. The
TNC loads the intersection of the elements into the
left window (displays a point symbol)
U To save the selected machining positions in a points
file, enter any file name in the pop-up window
displayed by the TNC. Default setting: Name of the
DXF file. If the name of the DXF file contains special
characters or spaces, the TNC replaces the
characters with underscores
U Confirm the entry: The TNC saves the contour
program in the directory in which the DXF file is also
saved
U If you want to select more machining positions in
order to save them in a different file, press the
CANCEL SELECTED ELEMENTS soft key and select
as described above

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 227

7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option)
Quick selection of hole positions in an area defined by the mouse
U Select the mode for choosing a machining position.
The TNC hides the layers shown in the left window,
and the right window becomes active for position
selection
U Press the shift key on the keyboard and drag the left
mouse key to define an area in which the TNC is to
adopt all included circle centers as hole positions: the
TNC opens a window in which you can filter the holes
by size
U Configure the filter settings (see “Filter settings” on
page 230) and click the Use button to confirm: The
TNC loads the selected positions into the left window
(displays a point symbol)
U If necessary you can also deselect elements that you
already selected, by dragging an area open again, but
this time while pressing the CTRL key
U To save the selected machining positions in a points
file, enter any file name in the pop-up window
displayed by the TNC. Default setting: Name of the
DXF file. If the name of the DXF file contains special
characters or spaces, the TNC replaces the
characters with underscores
U Confirm the entry: The TNC saves the contour
program in the directory in which the DXF file is also
saved
U If you want to select more machining positions in
order to save them in a different file, press the
CANCEL SELECTED ELEMENTS soft key and select
as described above

228 Programming: Data Transfer from DXF Files

 7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option)
Quick selection of hole positions by entering a diameter
U Select the mode for choosing a machining position.
The TNC hides the layers shown in the left window,
and the right window becomes active for position
selection
U Select the last soft-key row

U Open the dialog for diameter input: enter any diameter

in the pop-up window displayed by the TNC
U Enter the desired diameter and confirm it with the
ENT key: the TNC searches the DXF file for the
entered diameter and then shows a pop-up window
with the diameter selected that is closest to the
diameter you entered. Also, you can retroactively
filter the holes according to size
U If required, configure the filter settings (see “Filter
settings” on page 230) and click the Use button to
confirm: The TNC loads the selected positions into
the left window (displays a point symbol)
U If necessary you can also deselect elements that you
already selected, by dragging an area open again, but
this time while pressing the CTRL key
U To save the selected machining positions in a points
file, enter any file name in the pop-up window
displayed by the TNC. Default setting: Name of the
DXF file. If the name of the DXF file contains special
characters or spaces, the TNC replaces the
characters with underscores
U Confirm the entry: The TNC saves the contour
program in the directory in which the DXF file is also
saved
U If you want to select more machining positions in
order to save them in a different file, press the
CANCEL SELECTED ELEMENTS soft key and select
as described above

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 229

7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option)
Filter settings
After you have used the quick selection function to mark hole
positions, a pop-up window appears in which the smallest diameter
found is to the left and the largest diameter to the right. With the
buttons just below the diameter display you can adjust the smallest
diameter in the left area and largest in the right area so that you can
load the hole diameters that you want.
The following buttons are available:
Filter setting of smallest diameter Soft key
Display the smallest diameter found (default
setting)

Display the next smaller diameter found

Display the next larger diameter found

Display the largest diameter found The TNC sets

the filter for the smallest diameter to the value
set for the largest diameter

Filter setting of largest diameter Soft key

Display the smallest diameter found The TNC
sets the filter for the largest diameter to the value
set for the smallest diameter

Display the next smaller diameter found

Display the next larger diameter found

Display the largest diameter found (default

setting)

With the apply path optimization option on (default setting), the TNC
sorts the selected machining positions for the most efficient possible
tool path. You can have the tool path displayed by clicking the SHOW
TOOL PATH soft key (see “Basic settings” on page 218).

230 Programming: Data Transfer from DXF Files

 7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option)
Element information
At the bottom left of the screen, the TNC displays the coordinates of
the machining position that you last selected via mouse click in the left
or right window.

Undoing actions
You can undo the four most recent actions that you have taken in the
mode for selecting machining positions. The last soft key row provides
the following soft keys for this purpose:

Function Soft key

Undo the most recently conducted action

Repeat the most recently conducted action

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 231

7.1 Processing DXF Files (Software Option)
Zoom function
The TNC features a powerful zoom function for easy recognition of
small details during contour or point selection.

Function Soft key

Magnify workpiece. The TNC always magnifies
the center of the view currently being displayed.
Use the scroll bars to position the drawing in the
window so that the desired section appears after
the soft key has been pressed.

Reduce workpiece

Show workpiece at original size

Move zoomed area upward

Move zoomed area downward

Move zoomed area to the left

Move zoomed area to the right

If you have a wheel mouse, you can use it to zoom in and

out. The zooming center is the location of the mouse
pointer.

232 Programming: Data Transfer from DXF Files

Programming:
Subprograms and
Program Section
Repeats
8.1 Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats
8.1 Labeling Subprograms and
Program Section Repeats
Subprograms and program section repeats enable you to program a
machining sequence once and then run it as often as desired.

Labels
The beginnings of subprograms and program section repeats are
marked in a part program by labels (G98 L).
A LABEL is identified by a number between 1 and 999 or by a name
you define. Each LABEL number or LABEL name can be set only once
in the program with the LABEL SET key or by entering G98. The
number of label names you can enter is only limited by the internal
memory.

If a label name or number is set more than once, the TNC

sends an error message at the end of the G98 block. With
very long programs, you can limit the number of blocks to
be checked for repeated labels with MP7229.

Label 0 (G98 L0) is used exclusively to mark the end of a subprogram

and can therefore be used as often as desired.

234 Programming: Subprograms and Program Section Repeats

 8.2 Subprograms
8.2 Subprograms
Operating sequence
% ...
1 The TNC executes the part program up to the block in which a
1
subprogram is called with Ln,0
2 The subprogram is then executed from beginning to end. The
L1,0
subprogram end is marked G98 L0
3 The TNC then resumes the part program from the block after the 3 S
subprogram call Ln,0
G00 Z+100 M2
G98 L1 *
Programming notes
2 R
„ A main program can contain up to 254 subprograms
„ You can call subprograms in any sequence and as often as desired G98 L0 *
„ A subprogram cannot call itself N99999 % ...
„ Write subprograms at the end of the main program (behind the block
with M2 or M30)
„ If subprograms are located before the block with M2 or M30, they
will be executed at least once even if they are not called

Programming a subprogram
U To mark the beginning, press the LBL SET key
U Enter the subprogram number. If you want to use a
label name, press the LBL NAME soft key to switch
to text entry
U To mark the end, press the LBL SET key and enter the
label number “0”

Calling a subprogram
U To call a subprogram, press the LBL CALL key
U Label number: Enter the label number of the
subprogram you wish to call. If you want to use a label
name, press the LBL NAME soft key to switch to text
entry

G98 L 0 is not permitted (Label 0 is only used to mark the

end of a subprogram).

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 235

8.3 Program Section Repeats
8.3 Program Section Repeats
Label G98
The beginning of a program section repeat is marked by the label G98 % ...
L. The end of a program section repeat is identified by Ln,m.
1

Operating sequence G98 L1 *

2 R 2/1
1 The TNC executes the part program up to the end of the program
section (Ln,m)
2 Then the program section between the called LBL Ln,m is repeated L1,2 *
the number of times entered after M
3 The TNC then resumes the part program after the last repetition
N99999 % ...
Programming notes
„ You can repeat a program section up to 65 534 times in succession
„ The total number of times the program section is executed is always
one more than the programmed number of repeats

Programming a program section repeat

U To mark the beginning, press the LBL SET key and
enter a LABEL NUMBER for the program section you
wish to repeat. If you want to use a label name, press
the LBL NAME soft key to switch to text entry
U Enter the program section

Calling a program section repeat

U Press the LBL CALL key
U To call subprograms/section repeats: Enter the
label number of the subprogram to be called, then
confirm with the ENT key. If you want to use a label
name, press the key ” to switch to text entry
U Repeat REP: Enter the number of repeats, then
confirm with the ENT key

236 Programming: Subprograms and Program Section Repeats

 8.4 Separate Program as Subprogram
8.4 Separate Program as
Subprogram
Operating sequence
1 The TNC executes the part program up to the block in which
another program is called with %
2 Then the other program is run from beginning to end
% A G71 * % B G71 *
3 The TNC then resumes the first (calling) part program with the 1 S
block after the program call
2
%B
Programming notes 3
R
„ No labels are needed to call any program as a subprogram
N99999 % A G71 * N99999 % B G71 *
„ The called program must not contain the miscellaneous functions
M2 or M30. If you have defined subprograms with labels in the
called program, you can then use M2 or M30 with the D09 P01 +0
P02 +0 P03 99 jump function to force a jump over this program
section
„ The called program must not contain a % call into the calling program,
otherwise an infinite loop will result

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 237

8.4 Separate Program as Subprogram
Calling any program as a subprogram
U To select the functions for program call, press the
PGM CALL key
U Press the PROGRAM soft key
U Enter the complete path name of the program you
want to call and confirm your entry with the END key

The program you are calling must be stored on the hard

disk of your TNC.
You need only enter the program name if the program you
want to call is located in the same directory as the program
you are calling it from.
If the called program is not located in the same directory
as the program you are calling it from, you must enter the
complete path, e.g. TNC:\ZW35\SCHRUPP\PGM1.H
If you want to call a DIN/ISO program, enter the file type .I
after the program name.
You can also call a program with G39.
As a rule, Q parameters are effective globally with a %. So
please note that changes to Q parameters in the called
program can also influence the calling program.

Coordinate transformations that you define in the called

program remain in effect for the calling program too,
unless you reset them. The setting of machine parameter
MP7300 has no influence on this.

238 Programming: Subprograms and Program Section Repeats

 8.5 Nesting
8.5 Nesting
Types of nesting
„ Subprograms within a subprogram
„ Program section repeats within a program section repeat
„ Subprograms repeated
„ Program section repeats within a subprogram

Nesting depth
The nesting depth is the number of successive levels in which
program sections or subprograms can call further program sections or
subprograms.
„ Maximum nesting depth for subprograms: 8
„ Maximum nesting depth for main program calls: 6, where a G79 acts
like a main program call
„ You can nest program section repeats as often as desired

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 239

8.5 Nesting
Subprogram within a subprogram
Example NC blocks
%SUBPGMS G71 *
...
N17 L “UP1“,0 * Subprogram at label G98 L1 is called
...
N35 G00 G40 Z+100 M2 * Last program block of the
main program (with M2)
N36 G98 L “SP1“ Beginning of subprogram SP1
...
N39 L2,0 * Subprogram at label G98 L2 is called
...
N45 G98 L0 * End of subprogram 1
N46 G98 L2 * Beginning of subprogram 2
...
N62 G98 L0 * End of subprogram 2
N99999999 %SUBPGMS G71 *

Program execution
1 Main program SUBPGMS is executed up to block 17
2 Subprogram SP1 is called, and executed up to block 39
3 Subprogram 2 is called, and executed up to block 62. End of
subprogram 2 and return jump to the subprogram from which it
was called
4 Subprogram 1 is executed from block 40 up to block 45. End of
subprogram 1 and return jump to the main program SUBPGMS
5 Main program SUBPGMS is executed from block 18 up to block
35. Return jump to block 1 and end of program

240 Programming: Subprograms and Program Section Repeats

 8.5 Nesting
Repeating program section repeats
Example NC blocks
0 BEGIN PGM REPS MM
...
15 LBL 1 Beginning of program section repeat 1
...
20 LBL 2 Beginning of program section repeat 2
...
27 CALL LBL 2 REP 2 The program section between LBL 2 and this block
... (block 20) is repeated twice
35 CALL LBL 1 REP 1 The program section between LBL 1 and this block
... (block 15) is repeated once
50 END PGM REPS MM

%REPS G71 *
...
N15 G98 L1 * Beginning of program section repeat 1
...
N20 G98 L2 * Beginning of program section repeat 2
...
N27 L2,2 * Program section between this block and G98 L2
... (block N200) is repeated twice
N35 L1,1 * Program section between this block and G98 L1
... (block N150) is repeated once
N99999999 %REPS G71 *

Program execution
1 Main program REPS is executed up to block 27
2 Program section between block 20 and block 27 is repeated twice
3 Main program REPS is executed from block 28 to block 35
4 Program section between block 15 and block 35 is repeated once
(including the program section repeat between 20 and block 27)
5 Main program REPS is executed from block 36 to block 50 (end of
program)

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 241

8.5 Nesting
Repeating a subprogram
Example NC blocks
%SUBPGREP G71 *
...
N10 G98 L1 * Beginning of program section repeat 1
N11 L2,0 * Subprogram call
N12 L1,2 * Program section between this block and G98 L1
... (block N100) is repeated twice
N19 G00 G40 Z+100 M2 * Last block of the main program with M2
N20 G98 L2 * Beginning of subprogram
...
N28 G98 L0 * End of subprogram
N99999999 %SUBPGREP G71 *

Program execution
1 Main program UPGREP is executed up to block 11
2 Subprogram 2 is called and executed.
3 Program section between block 10 and block 12 is repeated twice.
Subprogram 2 is repeated twice.
4 Main program SPGREP is executed from block 13 to block 19. End
of program.

242 Programming: Subprograms and Program Section Repeats

 8.6 Programming Examples
8.6 Programming Examples

Example: Milling a contour in several infeeds

Program sequence
„ Pre-position the tool to the workpiece surface
„ Enter the infeed depth in incremental values
Y
„ Contour milling 100
„ Repeat downfeed and contour-milling 3
2
60°

5
R4
CC
50 1 4

6 5
5

X
5 50 100

%PGMWDH G71 *
N10 G30 G17 X+0 Y+0 Z-40 *
N20 G31 G90 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 *
N30 G99 T1 L+0 R+7.5 * Tool definition
N40 T1 G17 S3500 * Tool call
N50 G00 G40 G90 Z+250 * Retract the tool
N60 I+50 J+50 * Set pole
N70 G10 R+60 H+180 * Pre-position in the working plane
N80 G01 Z+0 F1000 M3 * Pre-position to the workpiece surface

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 243

8.6 Programming Examples
N90 G98 L1 * Set label for program section repeat
N100 G91 Z-4 * Infeed depth in incremental values (in space)
N110 G11 G41 G90 R+45 H+180 F250 * First contour point
N120 G26 R5 * Contour approach
N130 H+120 *
N140 H+60 *
N150 H+0 *
N160 H-60 *
N170 H-120 *
N180 H+180 *
N190 G27 R5 F500 * Contour departure
N200 G40 R+60 H+180 F1000 * Retract tool
N210 L1.4 * Return jump to label 1; section is repeated a total of 4 times
N220 G00 Z+250 M2 * Retract in the tool axis, end program
N99999999 %PGMREP G71 *

244 Programming: Subprograms and Program Section Repeats

 8.6 Programming Examples
Example: Groups of holes

Program sequence
„ Approach the groups of holes in the main
program Y
„ Call the group of holes (subprogram 1)
100
„ Program the group of holes only once in
subprogram 1

2
60

5
20

1 3

20
10

X
15 45 75 100

%UP1 G71 *
N10 G30 G17 X+0 Y+0 Z-40 *
N20 G31 G90 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 *
N30 G99 T1 L+0 R+2.5 * Tool definition
N40 T1 G17 S3500 * Tool call
N50 G00 G40 G90 Z+250 * Retract the tool
N60 G200 DRILLING Cycle definition: drilling
Q200=2 ;SETUP CLEARANCE
Q201=-30 ;DEPTH
Q206=300 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGN
Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q210=0 ;DWELL TIME AT TOP
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=2 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q211=0 ;DWELL TIME AT DEPTH

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 245

8.6 Programming Examples
N70 X+15 Y+10 M3 * Move to starting point for group 1
N80 L1.0 * Call the subprogram for the group
N90 X+45 Y+60 * Move to starting point for group 2
N100 L1.0 * Call the subprogram for the group
N110 X+75 Y+10 * Move to starting point for group 3
N120 L1.0 * Call the subprogram for the group
N130 G00 Z+250 M2 * End of main program

N140 G98 L1 * Beginning of subprogram 1: Group of holes

N150 G79 * Call cycle for 1st hole
N160 G91 X+20 M99 * Move to 2nd hole, call cycle
N170 Y+20 M99 * Move to 3rd hole, call cycle
N180 X-20 G90 M99 * Move to 4th hole, call cycle
N190 G98 L0 * End of subprogram 1
N99999999 %UP1 G71 *

246 Programming: Subprograms and Program Section Repeats

 8.6 Programming Examples
Example: Group of holes with several tools

Program sequence
„ Program the fixed cycles in the main program
Y Y
„ Call the entire hole pattern (subprogram 1)
„ Approach the groups of holes in subprogram 1, 100
call group of holes (subprogram 2)
„ Program the group of holes only once in
subprogram 2 2
60

5
20

1 3

20
10

X Z
15 45 75 100 -15

-20

%UP2 G71 *
N10 G30 G17 X+0 Y+0 Z-40 *
N20 G31 G90 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 *
N30 G99 T1 L+0 R+4 * Define tool: Center drill
N40 G99 T2 L+0 R+3 * Drill tool definition
N50 G99 T3 L+0 R+3.5 * Define tool: Reamer
N60 T1 G17 S5000 * Call tool: center drill
N70 G00 G40 G90 Z+250 * Retract the tool
N80 G200 DRILLING Cycle definition: CENTERING
Q200=2 ;SETUP CLEARANCE
Q201=-3 ;DEPTH
Q206=250 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGN
Q202=3 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q210=0 ;DWELL TIME AT TOP
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=10 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q211=0.2 ;DWELL TIME AT DEPTH
N90 L1.0 * Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 247

8.6 Programming Examples
N100 G00 Z+250 M6 * Tool change
N110 T2 G17 S4000 * Call tool: drill
N120 D0 Q201 P01 -25 * New depth for drilling
N130 D0 Q202 P01 +5 * New plunging depth for drilling
N140 L1.0 * Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern
N150 G00 Z+250 M6 * Tool change
N160 T3 G17 S500 * Call tool: reamer
N80 G201 REAMING Cycle definition: REAMING
Q200=2 ;SETUP CLEARANCE
Q201=-15 ;DEPTH
Q206=250 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q211=0.5 ;DWELL TIME AT DEPTH
Q208=400 ;RETRACTION FEED RATE
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=10 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
N180 L1.0 * Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern
N190 G00 Z+250 M2 * End of main program

N200 G98 L1 * Beginning of subprogram 1: Entire hole pattern

N210 G00 G40 G90 X+15 Y+10 M3 * Move to starting point for group 1
N220 L2.0 * Call subprogram 2 for the group
N230 X+45 Y+60 * Move to starting point for group 2
N240 L2.0 * Call subprogram 2 for the group
N250 X+75 Y+10 * Move to starting point for group 3
N260 L2.0 * Call subprogram 2 for the group
N270 G98 L0 * End of subprogram 1

N280 G98 L2 * Beginning of subprogram 2: Group of holes

N290 G79 * Call cycle for 1st hole
N300 G91 X+20 M99 * Move to 2nd hole, call cycle
N310 Y+20 M99 * Move to 3rd hole, call cycle
N320 X-20 G90 M99 * Move to 4th hole, call cycle
N330 G98 L0 * End of subprogram 2
N340 %UP2 G71 *

248 Programming: Subprograms and Program Section Repeats

Programming:
Q Parameters
9.1 Principle and Overview
9.1 Principle and Overview
You can program entire families of parts in a single part program. You
do this by entering variables called Q parameters instead of fixed
numerical values.
Q parameters can represent information such as:
Q6
„ Coordinate values
„ Feed rates
Q1 Q3
„ Spindle speeds
„ Cycle data Q4
Q2
Q parameters also enable you to program contours that are defined
with mathematical functions. You can also use Q parameters to make
the execution of machining steps depend on logical conditions. Q5

Q parameters are designated by letters and a number between 0 and

1999. Parameters that take effect in different manners are available.
Please refer to the following table:

Meaning Range
Freely applicable parameters, as long as no Q0 to Q99
overlapping with SL cycles can occur, globally
effective for all programs stored in the TNC
memory

Parameters for special TNC functions Q100 to Q199

Parameters that are primarily used for cycles, Q200 to Q1199

globally effective for all programs stored in the
TNC memory

Parameters that are primarily used for OEM Q1200 to Q1399

cycles, globally effective for all programs stored
in the TNC memory. This may require
coordination with the machine manufacturer or
supplier.

Parameters that are primarily used for call- Q1400 to Q1499

active OEM cycles, globally effective for all
programs that are stored in the TNC memory

Parameters that are primarily used for Def- Q1500 to Q1599

active OEM cycles, globally effective for all
programs that are stored in the TNC memory

250 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.1 Principle and Overview
Meaning Range
Freely applicable parameters, globally effective Q1600 to Q1999
for all programs stored in the TNC memory

Freely usable QL parameters, only effective QL0 to QL499

locally (within a program)

Freely usable QR parameters that are nonvolatile, QR0 to QR499

i.e. they remain in effect even after a power
interruption

QS parameters (the S stands for string) are also available on the TNC
and enable you to process texts. In principle, the same ranges are
available for QS parameters as for Q parameters (see table above).

Note that for the QS parameters the QS100 to QS199 range

is reserved for internal texts.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 251

9.1 Principle and Overview
Programming notes
You can mix Q parameters and fixed numerical values within a
program.
Q parameters can be assigned numerical values between
-999 999 999 and +999 999 999, meaning that up to nine digits plus
the algebraic sign are permitted. You can set the decimal point at any
position. Internally, the TNC can calculate up to a range of 57 bits
before and 7 bits after the decimal point (32-bit data width
corresponds to a decimal value of 4 294 967 296).
You can assign a maximum of 254 characters to QS parameters.

Some Q and QS parameters are always assigned the

same data by the TNC. For example, Q108 is always
assigned the current tool radius (see “Preassigned Q
Parameters,” page 283).
If you are using the parameters Q60 to Q99 in encoded
OEM cycles, use MP7251 to define whether the
parameters are only to be used locally in the OEM cycles
(.CYC file), or can be used globally for all programs.
With MP7300 you specify whether the TNC should reset
Q parameters at the end of the program, or if the values
should be saved. Make sure that this setting does not
have any effect on your Q parameter programs!

252 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.1 Principle and Overview
Calling Q-parameter functions
When you are writing a part program, press the “Q” key (in the
numeric keypad for numerical input and axis selection, below the +/–
key). The TNC then displays the following soft keys:

Function group Soft key Page

Basic arithmetic (assign, add, subtract, Page 255
multiply, divide, square root)

Trigonometric functions Page 257

If/then conditions, jumps Page 259

Other functions Page 261

Entering formulas directly Page 268

Function for machining complex Cycles

contours Manual

Function for string processing Page 272

The TNC opens the dialog for formula entry directly when
you press the Q key on the ASCII keyboard.
In order to define or assign QL local parameters, first press
the Q key in any dialog, and then press the L on the ASCII
keyboard.
In order to define or assign QR nonvolatile parameters, first
press the Q key in any dialog, and then press the R on the
ASCII keyboard.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 253

9.2 Part Families—Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values
9.2 Part Families—Q Parameters
in Place of Numerical Values
Function
The Q parameter function D0: ASSIGN assigns numerical values to Q
parameters. This enables you to use variables in the program instead
of fixed numerical values.

Example NC blocks
N150 D00 Q10 P01 +25 * Assign
... Q10 is assigned the value
25
N250 G00 X +Q10 * Corresponds to G00 X +25

You need write only one program for a whole family of parts, entering
the characteristic dimensions as Q parameters.
To program a particular part, you then assign the appropriate values to
the individual Q parameters.

Example
Cylinder with Q parameters
Cylinder radius R = Q1
Cylinder height H = Q2 Q1
Cylinder Z1 Q1 = +30
Q2 = +10
Cylinder Z2 Q1 = +10
Q2 = +50 Q1

Q2 Z2

Q2
Z1

254 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.3 Describing Contours through Mathematical Operations
9.3 Describing Contours through
Mathematical Operations
Function
The Q parameters listed below enable you to program basic
mathematical functions in a part program:
U Select a Q parameter function: Press the Q key (in the numerical
keypad at right). The Q parameter functions are displayed in a soft-
key row.
U To select the mathematical functions, press the BASIC
ARITHMETIC soft key. The TNC then displays the following soft
keys:

Overview

Function Soft key

D00: ASSIGN
Example: D00 Q5 P01 +60 *
Assigns a numerical value.

D01: ADDITION
Example: D01 Q1 P01 -Q2 P02 -5 *
Calculates and assigns the sum of two values.

D02: SUBTRACTION
Example: D02 Q1 P01 +10 P02 +5 *
Calculates and assigns the difference of two values.

D03: MULTIPLICATION
Example: D03 Q2 P01 +3 P02 +3 *
Calculates and assigns the product of two values.

D04: DIVISION
Example: D04 Q4 P01 +8 P02 +Q2 *
Calculates and assigns the quotient of two values.
Not permitted: Division by 0

D05: SQUARE ROOT

Example: D05 Q50 P01 4 *
Calculates and assigns the square root of a number.
Not permitted: Calculating the square root of a
negative value!

To the right of the “=” character you can enter the following:
„ Two numbers
„ Two Q parameters
„ A number and a Q parameter
The Q parameters and numerical values in the equations can be
entered with positive or negative signs.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 255

9.3 Describing Contours through Mathematical Operations
Programming fundamental operations
Example: Example: Program blocks in the TNC

N17 D00 Q5 P01 +10 *

Call the Q parameter functions by pressing the Q key
N17 D03 Q12 P01 +Q5 P02 +7 *

To select the mathematical functions, press the

BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key

To select the Q parameter function ASSIGN, press

the D0 X = Y soft key

PARAMETER NO. FOR RESULT?

5 Enter the number of the Q parameter, e.g. 5

1ST VALUE OR PARAMETER?

10 Assign the value 10 to Q5

Call the Q parameter functions by pressing the Q key

To select the mathematical functions, press the

BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key

To select the Q parameter function

MULTIPLICATION, press the D3 X * Y soft key

PARAMETER NO. FOR RESULT?

12 Enter the number of the Q parameter, e.g. 12

1ST VALUE OR PARAMETER?

Q5 Enter Q5 for the first value

2ND VALUE OR PARAMETER?

7 Enter 7 for the second value

256 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.4 Trigonometric Functions
9.4 Trigonometric Functions
Definitions
Sine, cosine and tangent are terms designating the ratios of sides of
right triangles. In this case:
Sine: sin α = a / c
Cosine: cos α = b / c
Tangent: tan α = a / b = sin α / cos α

where c
a
„ c is the side opposite the right angle
Þ
„ a is the side opposite the angle α
b
„ b is the third side.
The TNC can find the angle from the tangent:
α = arc tan (a / b) = arc tan (sin α / cos α)

Example:
a = 25 mm
b = 50 mm
α = arctan (a / b) = arctan 0.5 = 26.57°
Furthermore:
a² + b² = c² (where a² = a x a)
c = (a² + b²)

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 257

9.4 Trigonometric Functions
Programming trigonometric functions
Press the ANGLE FUNCTION soft key to call the angle functions. The
TNC then displays the following soft keys:
Programming: Compare “Example: Programming fundamental
operations.”

Function Soft key

D06: SINE
Example: D06 Q20 P01 -Q5 *
Calculates and assigns the sine of an angle in degrees
(°)

D07: COSINE
Example: D07 Q21 P01 -Q5 *
Calculates and assigns the cosine of an angle in
degrees (°)

D08: ROOT SUM OF SQUARES

Example: D08 Q10 P01 +5 P02 +4 *
Calculates and assigns length from two values.

D13: ANGLE
Example: D13 Q20 P01 +10 P02 -Q1 *
Calculates the angle from the arc tangent of two sides
or from the sine and cosine of the angle (0 < angle <
360°) and assigns it to a parameter.

258 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.5 If-Then Decisions with Q Parameters
9.5 If-Then Decisions with
Q Parameters
Function
The TNC can make logical If-Then decisions by comparing a
Q parameter with another Q parameter or with a numerical value. If
the condition is fulfilled, the TNC continues the program at the label
that is programmed after the condition (for information on labels, see
“Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats,” page 234). If
it is not fulfilled, the TNC continues with the next block.
To call another program as a subprogram, enter a % program call after
the block with the target label.

Unconditional jumps
An unconditional jump is programmed by entering a conditional jump
whose condition is always true. Example:
D09 P01 +10 P02 +10 P03 1 *

Programming If-Then decisions

Press the JUMP soft key to call the If-Then conditions. The TNC then
displays the following soft keys:

Function Soft key

D09: IF EQUAL, JUMP
Example: D09 P01 +Q1 P02 +Q3 P03 “SPCAN25” *
If the two values or parameters are equal, jump to the
given label.

D10: IF UNEQUAL, JUMP

Example: D10 P01 +10 P02 -Q5 P03 10 *
If the two values or parameters are unequal, jump to
the given label.

D11: IF GREATER, JUMP

Example: D11 P01 +Q1 P02 +10 P03 5 *
If the first value or parameter is greater than the
second, jump to the given label.

D12: IF LESS, JUMP

Example: D12 P01 +Q5 P02 +0 P03 “ANYNAME” *
If the first value or parameter is less than the second,
jump to the given label.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 259

9.6 Checking and Changing Q Parameters
9.6 Checking and Changing
Q Parameters
Procedure
You can check and edit Q parameters when writing, testing and
running programs in the Programming and Editing, Test Run, Program
Run Full Sequence, and Program Run Single Block modes.
U If you are in a program run, interrupt it if required (for example, by
pressing the machine STOPP button and the INTERNAL STOPP soft
key). If you are in a test run, interrupt it
U To call Q parameter functions: Press the Q key or the
Q INFO soft key in the Programming and Editing
mode of operation
U The TNC lists all parameters and their current values.
With the arrow keys or the soft keys, go pagewise to
the desired parameters
U If you would like to change the value, enter a new
value and confirm with the ENT key
U To leave the value unchanged, press the PRESENT
VALUE soft key or end the dialog with the END key

The parameters used internally or by the TNC in cycles are

provided with comments.
If you want to check or edit local, global or string
parameters, press the SHOW PARAMETERS Q QL QR QS
soft key. The TNC then displays all respective parameters
and the above described also apply.

260 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.7 Additional Functions
9.7 Additional Functions
Overview
Press the DIVERSE FUNCTION soft key to call the additional
functions. The TNC then displays the following soft keys:

Function Soft key Page

D14:ERROR Page 262
Output of error messages

D15:PRINT Page 267

Unformatted output of texts or
Q parameter values

D19:PLC Page 267

Send values to the PLC

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 261

9.7 Additional Functions
D14: ERROR: Displaying error messages
With the function D14 you can call messages under program control.
The messages are predefined by the machine tool builder or by
HEIDENHAIN. Whenever the TNC comes to a block with D14 in the
Program Run or Test Run mode, it interrupts the program run and
displays a message. The program must then be restarted. The error
numbers are listed in the table below.

Range of error numbers Standard dialog text

0 ... 299 FN 14: Error code 0 .... 299

300 ... 999 Machine-dependent dialog

1000 ... 1099 Internal error messages (see table at

right)

Example NC block
The TNC is to display the text stored under error number 254:

N180 D14 P01 254 *

Error message predefined by HEIDENHAIN

Error number Text
1000 Spindle?

1001 Tool axis is missing

1002 Tool radius too small

1003 Tool radius too large

1004 Range exceeded

1005 Start position incorrect

1006 ROTATION not permitted

1007 SCALING FACTOR not permitted

1008 MIRROR IMAGE not permitted

1009 Datum shift not permitted

1010 Feed rate is missing

1011 Input value incorrect

1012 Incorrect sign

1013 Entered angle not permitted

1014 Touch point inaccessible

1015 Too many points

262 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.7 Additional Functions
Error number Text
1016 Contradictory input

1017 CYCL incomplete

1018 Plane wrongly defined

1019 Wrong axis programmed

1020 Wrong rpm

1021 Radius comp. undefined

1022 Rounding-off undefined

1023 Rounding radius too large

1024 Program start undefined

1025 Excessive nesting

1026 Angle reference missing

1027 No fixed cycle defined

1028 Slot width too small

1029 Pocket too small

1030 Q202 not defined

1031 Q205 not defined

1032 Q218 must be greater than Q219

1033 CYCL 210 not permitted

1034 CYCL 211 not permitted

1035 Q220 too large

1036 Q222 must be greater than Q223

1037 Q244 must be greater than 0

1038 Q245 must not equal Q246

1039 Angle range must be < 360°

1040 Q223 must be greater than Q222

1041 Q214: 0 not permitted

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 263

9.7 Additional Functions
Error number Text
1042 Traverse direction not defined

1043 No datum table active

1044 Position error: center in axis 1

1045 Position error: center in axis 2

1046 Hole diameter too small

1047 Hole diameter too large

1048 Stud diameter too small

1049 Stud diameter too large

1050 Pocket too small: rework axis 1

1051 Pocket too small: rework axis 2

1052 Pocket too large: scrap axis 1

1053 Pocket too large: scrap axis 2

1054 Stud too small: scrap axis 1

1055 Stud too small: scrap axis 2

1056 Stud too large: rework axis 1

1057 Stud too large: rework axis 2

1058 TCHPROBE 425: length exceeds max

1059 TCHPROBE 425: length below min

1060 TCHPROBE 426: length exceeds max

1061 TCHPROBE 426: length below min

1062 TCHPROBE 430: diameter too large

1063 TCHPROBE 430: diameter too small

1064 No measuring axis defined

1065 Tool breakage tolerance exceeded

1066 Enter Q247 unequal 0

1067 Enter Q247 greater than 5

1068 Datum table?

1069 Enter Q351 unequal 0

1070 Thread depth too large

264 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.7 Additional Functions
Error number Text
1071 Missing calibration data

1072 Tolerance exceeded

1073 Block scan active

1074 ORIENTATION not permitted

1075 3-D ROT not permitted

1076 Activate 3-D ROT

1077 Enter a negative value for the depth

1078 Q303 not defined in measuring cycle

1079 Tool axis not allowed

1080 Calculated values incorrect

1081 Contradictory measuring points

1082 Clearance height entered incorrectly

1083 Contradictory type of plunging

1084 Machining cycle not permitted

1085 Line is write-protected

1086 Oversize greater than depth

1087 No point angle defined

1088 Contradictory data

1089 Slot position 0 not permitted

1090 Enter infeed unequal 0

1091 Switchover of Q399 not allowed

1092 Tool not defined

1093 Tool number not permitted

1094 Tool name not allowed

1095 Software option not active

1096 Kinematics cannot be restored

1097 Function not permitted

1098 Contradictory workpc. blank dim.

1099 Measuring position not allowed

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 265

9.7 Additional Functions
Error number Text
1100 Kinematic access not possible

1101 Meas. pos. not in traverse range

1102 Preset compensation not possible

266 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.7 Additional Functions
D15 PRINT: Output of texts or Q parameter
values

Setting the data interface: In the menu option PRINT or

PRINT-TEST, you must enter the path for storing the texts
or Q parameters. See “Assign,” page 522.

The function D15 transfers Q parameter values and error messages

through the data interface, for example to a printer. When you save
the data in the TNC memory or transfer them to a PC, the TNC stores
the data in the file %FN 15RUN.A (output in program run mode) or in
the file %FN15SIM.A (output in test run mode).
The data are transmitted from a buffer. Data output begins at the latest
by program end or when you stop the program. In the Single Block
mode of operation, data transfer begins at block end.

To output dialog texts and error messages with FN 15: PRINT

“numerical value”
Numerical values from 0 to 99: Dialog texts for OEM cycles
Numerical values 100 and above: PLC error messages

Example: Output of dialog text 20

N67 D15 P01 20 *

Outputting dialog texts and Q parameters with D15 PRINT

“Q parameter”
Application example: Recording workpiece measurement.
You can transfer up to six Q parameters and numerical values
simultaneously. The TNC separates them with slashes.

Example: Output of dialog text 1 and numerical value for Q1

N70 D15 P01 1 P02 Q1 *

D19 PLC: Transfer values to the PLC

The function D19 transfers up to two numerical values or Q parameters
to the PLC.
Increments and units: 0.1 µm or 0.0001°

Example: Transfer the numerical value 10 (which means 1 µm or

0.001°) to the PLC
N56 D19 P01 +10 P02 +Q3 *

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 267

9.8 Entering Formulas Directly
9.8 Entering Formulas Directly
Entering formulas
You can enter mathematical formulas that include several operations
directly into the part program by soft key.
Press the FORMULA soft key to call the mathematical functions. The
TNC displays the following soft keys in several soft-key rows:

Mathematical function Soft key

Addition
Example: Q10 = Q1 + Q5

Subtraction
Example: Q25 = Q7 – Q108

Multiplication
Example: Q12 = 5 * Q5

Division
Example: Q25 = Q1 / Q2

Opening parenthesis
Example: Q12 = Q1 * (Q2 + Q3)

Closing parenthesis
Example: Q12 = Q1 * (Q2 + Q3)

Square of a value
Example: Q15 = SQ 5

Square root
Example: Q22 = SQRT 25

Sine of an angle
Example: Q44 = SIN 45

Cosine of an angle
Example: Q45 = COS 45

Tangent of an angle
Example: Q46 = TAN 45

Arc sine
Inverse of the sine. Determines the angle from the
ratio of the side opposite the hypotenuse.
Example: Q10 = ASIN 0.75

Arc cosine
Inverse of the cosine. Determines the angle from the
ratio of the side adjacent to the hypotenuse.
Example: Q11 = ACOS Q40

268 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.8 Entering Formulas Directly
Mathematical function Soft key
Arc tangent
Inverse of the tangent. Determines the angle from the
ratio of the opposite to the adjacent side.
Example: Q12 = ATAN Q50

Powers of values
Example: Q15 = 3^3

Constant “pi” (3.14159)

Example: Q15 = PI

Natural logarithm (LN) of a number

Base 2.7183
Example: Q15 = LN Q11

Logarithm of a number, base 10

Example: Q33 = LOG Q22

Exponential function, 2.7183 to the power of n

Example: Q1 = EXP Q12

Negate (multiplication by –1)

Example: Q2 = NEG Q1

Truncate decimal places

(form an integer)
Example: Q3 = INT Q42

Absolute value of a number

Example: Q4 = ABS Q22

Truncate places before the decimal point

(form a fraction)
Example: Q5 = FRAC Q23

Check algebraic sign of a number

Example: Q12 = SGN Q50
If result for Q12 = 1, then Q50 >= 0
If result for Q12 = –1, then Q50 < 0

Calculate modulo value

Example: Q12 = 400 % 360
Result: Q12 = 40

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 269

9.8 Entering Formulas Directly
Rules for formulas
Mathematical formulas are programmed according to the following
rules:

Higher-level operations are performed first

12 Q1 = 5 * 3 + 2 * 10 = 35

1st calculation: 5 * 3 = 15
2nd calculation: 2 * 10 = 20
3rd calculation: 15 + 20 = 35

or
13 Q2 = SQ 10 - 3^3 = 73

1st calculation: 10 squared = 100

2nd calculation: 3 to the power of 3 = 27
3rd calculation: 100 – 27 = 73

Distributive law
for calculating with parentheses
a * (b + c) = a * b + a * c

270 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.8 Entering Formulas Directly
Programming example
Calculate an angle with the arc tangent from the opposite side (Q12)
and adjacent side (Q13); then store in Q25.

To select the formula entering function, press the Q

key and the FORMULA soft key, or use the shortcut:

Press the Q key on the ASCII keyboard

PARAMETER NO. FOR RESULT?

Enter the parameter number.

25

Shift the soft-key row and select the arc tangent

function.

Shift the soft-key row and open the parentheses.

Enter Q parameter number 12.

12

Select division.

Enter Q parameter number 13.

13

Close parentheses and conclude formula entry.

Example NC block
37 Q25 = ATAN (Q12/Q13)

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 271

9.9 String Parameters
9.9 String Parameters
String processing functions
You can use the QS parameters to create variable character strings.
You can assign a linear sequence of characters (letters, numbers,
special characters and spaces) up to a length of 256 characters to a
string parameter. You can also check and process the assigned or
imported values by using the functions described below. As in Q
parameter programming, you can use a total of 2000 QS parameters
(see also “Principle and Overview” on page 250).
The STRING FORMULA and FORMULA Q parameter functions
contain various functions for processing the string parameters.

STRING FORMULA functions Soft key Page

Assigning string parameters Page 273

Chain-linking string parameters Page 273

Converting a numerical value to a string Page 275

parameter

Copying a substring from a string Page 276

parameter

Copying system data to a string Page 277

parameter

FORMULA string functions Soft key Page

Converting a string parameter to a Page 279
numerical value

Checking a string parameter Page 280

Finding the length of a string parameter Page 281

Comparing alphabetic priority Page 282

When you use a STRING FORMULA, the result of the

arithmetic operation is always a string. When you use the
FORMULA function, the result of the arithmetic operation
is always a numeric value.

272 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.9 String Parameters
Assigning string parameters
You have to assign a string variable before you use it. Use the DECLARE
STRING command to do so.
U Show the soft-key row with special functions

U Select the menu for defining various plain-language

functions
U Select string functions

U Select the DECLARE STRING function

Example NC block:
N37 DECLARE STRING QS10 = “WORKPIECE”

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 273

9.9 String Parameters
Chain-linking string parameters
With the concatenation operator (string parameter ||) you can make a
chain of two or more string parameters.
U Show the soft-key row with special functions

U Select the menu for defining various plain-language

functions
U Select string functions

U Select the STRING FORMULA function

U Enter the number of the string parameter in which the
TNC is to save the concatenated string. Confirm with
the ENT key
U Enter the number of the string parameter in which the
first substring is saved. Confirm with the ENT key:
The TNC displays the concatenation symbol ||
U Confirm your entry with the ENT key
U Enter the number of the string parameter in which the
second substring is saved. Confirm with the ENT key
U Repeat the process until you have selected all the
required substrings. Conclude with the END key

Example: QS10 is to include the complete text of QS12, QS13 and

QS14
N37 QS10 = QS12 || QS13 || QS14

Parameter contents:
„ QS12: Workpiece
„ QS13: Status:
„ QS14: Scrap
„ QS10: Workpiece Status: Scrap

274 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.9 String Parameters
Converting a numerical value to a string
parameter
With the TOCHAR function, the TNC converts a numerical value to a
string parameter. This enables you to chain numerical values with
string variables.
U Select Q parameter functions.

U Select the STRING FORMULA function

U Select the function for converting a numerical value to

a string parameter
U Enter the number or the desired Q parameter to be
converted, and confirm with the ENT key
U If desired, enter the number of decimal places that the
TNC should convert, and confirm with the ENT key
U Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key
and confirm your entry with the END key

Example: Convert parameter Q50 to string parameter QS11, use

3 decimal places
N37 QS11 = TOCHAR ( DAT+Q50 DECIMALS3 )

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 275

9.9 String Parameters
Copying a substring from a string parameter
With the SUBSTR function you can copy a definable range from a string
parameter.
U Select Q parameter functions

U Select the STRING FORMULA function

U Enter the number of the string parameter in which the
TNC is to save the copied string. Confirm with the
ENT key
U Select the function for cutting out a substring
U Enter the number of the QS parameter from which the
substring is to be copied. Confirm with the ENT key
U Enter the number of the place starting from which to
copy the substring, and confirm with the ENT key
U Enter the number of characters to be copied, and
confirm with the ENT key
U Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key
and confirm your entry with the END key

Remember that the first character of a text sequence

starts internally with the zeroth place.

Example: A four-character substring (LEN4) is read from the

string parameter QS10 beginning with the third character (BEG2)
N37 QS13 = SUBSTR ( SRC_QS10 BEG2 LEN4 )

276 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.9 String Parameters
Copying system data to a string parameter
With the SYSSTR function you can copy system data to a string
parameter. At present only reading of the system time is available.
U Select Q parameter functions

U Select the STRING FORMULA function

U Enter the number of the string parameter in which the
TNC is to save the copied string. Confirm with the
ENT key
U Select the function for copying system data
U Enter the Number of the system key (ID321 for the
system time) that you want to copy, and confirm with
the ENT key
U Enter the Index for system key. It defines the format
for the system time to be output. Confirm with the
ENT key (see description below)
U Array index of the source to be read has no
function yet. Confirm with the NO ENT key
U Number to be converted to text has no function yet.
Confirm with the NO ENT key
U Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key
and confirm your entry with the END key

This function is prepared for future expansions. The

parameters IDX and DAT currently have no function.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 277

9.9 String Parameters
You can use the following formats to display the date:
„ 0: DD.MM.YYYY hh:mm:ss
„ 1: D.MM.YYYY h:mm:ss
„ 2: D.MM.YYYY h:mm
„ 3: D.MM.YY h:mm
„ 4: YYYY-MM-DD- hh:mm:ss
„ 5: YYYY-MM-DD- hh:mm
„ 6: YYYY-MM-DD h:mm
„ 7: YY-MM-DD- h:mm
„ 8: DD.MM.YYYY
„ 9: D.MM.YYYY
„ 10: D.MM.YY
„ 11: YYYY-MM-DD
„ 12: YY-MM-DD
„ 13: hh:mm:ss
„ 14: h:mm:ss
„ 15: h:mm

Example: read out the current system time in the format

DD.MM.YYYY hh:mm:ss, and save it in parameter QS13.
N70 QS13 = SYSSTR ( ID321 NR0)

278 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.9 String Parameters
Converting a string parameter to a numerical
value
The TONUMB function converts a string parameter to a numerical value.
The value to be converted should be only numerical.

The QS parameter must contain only one numerical value.

Otherwise the TNC will output an error message.

U Select Q parameter functions

U Select the FORMULA function

U Enter the number of the string parameter in which the
TNC is to save the numerical value. Confirm with the
ENT key
U Shift the soft-key row

U Select the function for converting a string parameter

to a numerical value
U Enter the number of the Q parameter to be converted,
and confirm with the ENT key
U Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key
and confirm your entry with the END key

Example: Convert string parameter QS11 to a numerical

parameter Q82
N37 Q82 = TONUMB ( SRC_QS11 )

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 279

9.9 String Parameters
Checking a string parameter
With the INSTR function you can check whether a string parameter is
contained in another string parameter.
U Select Q parameter functions

U Select the FORMULA function

U Enter the number of the Q parameter in which the
TNC is to save the place at which the search text
begins. Confirm with the ENT key
U Shift the soft-key row

U Select the function for checking a string parameter

U Enter the number of the QS parameter in which the
text to be searched for is saved. Confirm with the
ENT key
U Enter the number of the QS parameter to be
searched, and confirm with the ENT key
U Enter the number of the place starting from which the
TNC is to search the substring, and confirm with the
ENT key
U Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key
and confirm your entry with the END key

Remember that the first character of a text sequence

starts internally with the zeroth place.
If the TNC cannot find the required substring, it will save
the total length of the string to be searched (counting
starts at 1) in the result parameter.
If the substring is found in more than one place, the TNC
returns the first place at which it finds the substring.

Example: Search through QS10 for the text saved in parameter

QS13. Begin the search at the third place.
N37 Q50 = INSTR ( SRC_QS10 SEA_QS13 BEG2 )

280 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.9 String Parameters
Finding the length of a string parameter
The STRLEN function returns the length of the text saved in a selectable
string parameter.
U Select Q parameter functions

U Select the FORMULA function

U Enter the number of the Q parameter in which the
TNC is to save the ascertained string length. Confirm
with the ENT key
U Shift the soft-key row

U Select the function for finding the text length of a

string parameter
U Enter the number of the QS parameter whose length
the TNC is to ascertain, and confirm with the ENT key
U Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key
and confirm your entry with the END key

Example: Find the length of QS15

N37 Q52 = STRLEN ( SRC_QS15 )

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 281

9.9 String Parameters
Comparing alphabetic priority
With the STRCOMP function you can compare string parameters for
alphabetic priority.
U Select Q parameter functions

U Select the FORMULA function

U Enter the number of the Q parameter in which the
TNC is to save the result of comparison. Confirm with
the ENT key
U Shift the soft-key row

U Select the function for comparing string parameters

U Enter the number of the first QS parameter to be
compared, and confirm with the ENT key
U Enter the number of the second QS parameter to be
compared, and confirm with the ENT key
U Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key
and confirm your entry with the END key

The TNC returns the following results:

„ 0: The compared QS parameters are identical
„ +1: The first QS parameter precedes the second QS
parameter alphabetically
„ –1: The first QS parameter follows the second QS
parameter alphabetically

Example: QS12 and QS14 are compared for alphabetic priority

N37 Q52 = STRCOMP ( SRC_QS12 SEA_QS14 )

282 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.10 Preassigned Q Parameters
9.10 Preassigned Q Parameters
The Q parameters Q100 to Q199 are assigned values by the TNC. The
following are assigned to Q parameters:
„ Values from the PLC
„ Tool and spindle data
„ Data on operating status
„ Results of measurements from touch probe cycles etc.

Do not use preassigned Q parameters (or QS parameters)

between Q100 and Q199 (QS100 and QS199) as calculation
parameters in NC programs. Otherwise you might receive
undesired results.

Values from the PLC: Q100 to Q107

The TNC uses the parameters Q100 to Q107 to transfer values from
the PLC to an NC program.

WMAT block: QS100

The TNC saves the material defined in the WMAT block in parameter
QS100.

Active tool radius: Q108

The active value of the tool radius is assigned to Q108. Q108 is
calculated from:
„ Tool radius R (tool table or G99 block)
„ Delta value DR from the tool table
„ Delta value DR from the T block

The TNC remembers the current tool radius even if the

power is interrupted.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 283

9.10 Preassigned Q Parameters
Tool axis: Q109
The value of Q109 depends on the current tool axis:

Tool axis Parameter value

No tool axis defined Q109 = –1

X axis Q109 = 0

Y axis Q109 = 1

Z axis Q109 = 2

U axis Q109 = 6

V axis Q109 = 7

W axis Q109 = 8

Spindle status: Q110

The value of the parameter Q110 depends on the M function last
programmed for the spindle.

M function Parameter value

No spindle status defined Q110 = –1

M3: Spindle ON, clockwise Q110 = 0

M4: Spindle ON, counterclockwise Q110 = 1

M5 after M3 Q110 = 2

M5 after M4 Q110 = 3

Coolant on/off: Q111

M function Parameter value

M8: Coolant ON Q111 = 1

M9: Coolant OFF Q111 = 0

Overlap factor: Q112

The overlap factor for pocket milling (MP7430) is assigned to Q112.

284 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.10 Preassigned Q Parameters
Unit of measurement for dimensions in the
program: Q113
During nesting the PGM CALL, the value of the parameter Q113
depends on the dimensional data of the program from which the other
programs are called.

Dimensional data of the main program Parameter value

Metric system (mm) Q113 = 0

Inch system (inches) Q113 = 1

Tool length: Q114

The current value for the tool length is assigned to Q114.

The TNC remembers the current tool length even if the

power is interrupted.

Coordinates after probing during program run

The parameters Q115 to Q119 contain the coordinates of the spindle
position at the moment of contact during programmed measurement
with the 3-D touch probe. The coordinates refer to the datum point
that is active in the Manual operating mode.
The length of the stylus and the radius of the ball tip are not
compensated in these coordinates.

Coordinate axis Parameter value

X axis Q115

Y axis Q116

Z axis Q117

4th axis Q118

depending on MP100

5th axis Q119

depending on MP100

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 285

9.10 Preassigned Q Parameters
Deviation between actual value and nominal
value during automatic tool measurement with
the TT 130

Deviation of actual from nominal value Parameter value

Tool length Q115

Tool radius Q116

Tilting the working plane with mathematical

angles: rotary axis coordinates calculated by the
TNC

Coordinates Parameter value

A axis Q120

B axis Q121

C axis Q122

286 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.10 Preassigned Q Parameters
Measurement results from touch probe cycles
(see also User’s Manual for Touch Probe Cycles)

Measured actual values Parameter value

Angle of a straight line Q150

Center in reference axis Q151

Center in minor axis Q152

Diameter Q153

Pocket length Q154

Pocket width Q155

Length of the axis selected in the cycle Q156

Position of the centerline Q157

Angle of the A axis Q158

Angle of the B axis Q159

Coordinate of the axis selected in the cycle Q160

Measured deviation Parameter value

Center in reference axis Q161

Center in minor axis Q162

Diameter Q163

Pocket length Q164

Pocket width Q165

Measured length Q166

Position of the centerline Q167

Determined space angle Parameter value

Rotation about the A axis Q170

Rotation about the B axis Q171

Rotation about the C axis Q172

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 287

9.10 Preassigned Q Parameters
Workpiece status Parameter value
Good Q180

Rework Q181

Scrap Q182

Measured deviation with Cycle 440 Parameter value

X axis Q185

Y axis Q186

Z axis Q187

Markers for cycles Q188

Tool measurement with the BLUM laser Parameter value

Reserved Q190

Reserved Q191

Reserved Q192

Reserved Q193

Reserved for internal use Parameter value

Markers for cycles Q195

Markers for cycles Q196

Markers for cycles (machining patterns) Q197

Number of the last active measuring cycle Q198

Status of tool measurement with TT Parameter value

Tool within tolerance Q199 = 0.0

Tool is worn (LTOL/RTOL is exceeded) Q199 = 1.0

Tool is broken (LBREAK/RBREAK is Q199 = 2.0

exceeded)

288 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.11 Programming Examples
9.11 Programming Examples

Example: Ellipse

Program sequence
„ The contour of the ellipse is approximated by
many short lines (defined in Q7). The more Y
calculation steps you define for the lines, the
smoother the curve becomes.
„ The machining direction can be altered by 50
changing the entries for the starting and end
angles in the plane:

30
Clockwise machining direction:
starting angle > end angle
50
Counterclockwise machining direction:
starting angle < end angle
„ The tool radius is not taken into account.

X
50

%ELLIPSE G71 *
N10 D00 Q1 P01 +50 * Center in X axis
N20 D00 Q2 P01 +50 * Center in Y axis
N30 D00 Q3 P01 +50 * Semiaxis in X
N40 D00 Q4 P01 +30 * Semiaxis in Y
N50 D00 Q5 P01 +0 * Starting angle in the plane
N60 D00 Q6 P01 +360 * End angle in the plane
N70 D00 Q7 P01 +40 * Number of calculation steps
N80 D00 Q8 P01 +30 * Rotational position of the ellipse
N90 D00 Q9 P01 +5 * Milling depth
N100 D00 Q10 P01 +100 * Feed rate for plunging
N110 D00 Q11 P01 +350 * Feed rate for milling
N120 D00 Q12 P01 +2 * Set-up clearance for pre-positioning
N130 G30 G17 X+0 Y+0 Z-20 * Definition of workpiece blank
N140 G31 G90 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 *
N150 G99 T1 L+0 R+2,5 * Tool definition
N160 T1 G17 S4000 * Tool call
N170 G00 G40 G90 Z+250 * Retract the tool

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 289

9.11 Programming Examples
N180 L10.0 * Call machining operation
N190 G00 Z+250 M2 * Retract in the tool axis, end program
N200 G98 L10 * Subprogram 10: Machining operation
N210 G54 X+Q1 Y+Q2 * Shift datum to center of ellipse
N220 G73 G90 H+Q8 * Account for rotational position in the plane
N230 Q35 = ( Q6 - Q5 ) / Q7 * Calculate angle increment
N240 D00 Q36 P01 +Q5 * Copy starting angle
N250 D00 Q37 P01 +0 * Set counter
N260 Q21 = Q3 * COS Q36 * Calculate X coordinate for starting point
N270 Q22 = Q4 * SIN Q36 * Calculate Y coordinate for starting point
N280 G00 G40 X+Q21 Y+Q22 M3 * Move to starting point in the plane
N290 Z+Q12 * Pre-position in spindle axis to set-up clearance
N300 G01 Z-Q9 FQ10 * Move to working depth
N310 G98 L1 *
N320 Q36 = Q36 + Q35 * Update the angle
N330 Q37 = Q37 + 1 * Update the counter
N340 Q21 = Q3 * COS Q36 * Calculate the current X coordinate
N350 Q22 = Q4 * SIN Q36 * Calculate the current Y coordinate
N360 G01 X+Q21 Y+Q22 FQ11 * Move to next point
N370 D12 P01 +Q37 P02 +Q7 P03 1 * Unfinished? If not finished return to label 1
N380 G73 G90 H+0 * Reset the rotation
N390 G54 X+0 Y+0 * Reset the datum shift
N400 G00 G40 Z+Q12 * Move to set-up clearance
N410 G98 L0 * End of subprogram
N99999999 %ELLIPSE G71 *

290 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.11 Programming Examples
Example: Concave cylinder machined with spherical cutter

Program sequence
Z
„ This program functions only with a spherical
cutter. The tool length refers to the sphere R4
center. 0 X
„ The contour of the cylinder is approximated by
many short line segments (defined in Q13). The
more line segments you define, the smoother -50
the curve becomes. Y Y
„ The cylinder is milled in longitudinal cuts (here: 100
parallel to the Y axis).
„ The machining direction can be altered by
changing the entries for the starting and end
angles in space:
Clockwise machining direction:
starting angle > end angle
Counterclockwise machining direction:
starting angle < end angle
„ The tool radius is compensated automatically.
50 100 X Z

%CYLIN G71 *
N10 D00 Q1 P01 +50 * Center in X axis
N20 D00 Q2 P01 +0 * Center in Y axis
N30 D00 Q3 P01 +0 * Center in Z axis
N40 D00 Q4 P01 +90 * Starting angle in space (Z/X plane)
N50 D00 Q5 P01 +270 * End angle in space (Z/X plane)
N60 D00 Q6 P01 +40 * Cylinder radius
N70 D00 Q7 P01 +100 * Length of the cylinder
N80 D00 Q8 P01 +0 * Rotational position in the X/Y plane
N90 D00 Q10 P01 +5 * Allowance for cylinder radius
N100 D00 Q11 P01 +250 * Feed rate for plunging
N110 D00 Q12 P01 +400 * Feed rate for milling
N120 D00 Q13 P01 +90 * Number of cuts
N130 G30 G17 X+0 Y+0 Z-50 * Definition of workpiece blank
N140 G31 G90 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 *
N150 G99 T1 L+0 R+3 * Tool definition
N160 T1 G17 S4000 * Tool call
N170 G00 G40 G90 Z+250 * Retract the tool
N180 L10.0 * Call machining operation
N190 D00 Q10 P01 +0 * Reset allowance

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 291

9.11 Programming Examples
N200 L10.0 Call machining operation
N210 G00 G40 Z+250 M2 * Retract in the tool axis, end program
N220 G98 L10 * Subprogram 10: Machining operation
N230 Q16 = Q6 - Q10 - Q108 * Account for allowance and tool, based on the cylinder radius
N240 D00 Q20 P01 +1 * Set counter
N250 D00 Q24 P01 +Q4 * Copy starting angle in space (Z/X plane)
N260 Q25 = ( Q5 - Q4 ) / Q13 * Calculate angle increment
N270 G54 X+Q1 Y+Q2 Z+Q3 * Shift datum to center of cylinder (X axis)
N280 G73 G90 H+Q8 * Account for rotational position in the plane
N290 G00 G40 X+0 Y+0 * Pre-position in the plane to the cylinder center
N300 G01 Z+5 F1000 M3 * Pre-position in the tool axis
N310 G98 L1 *
N320 I+0 K+0 * Set pole in the Z/X plane
N330 G11 R+Q16 H+Q24 FQ11 * Move to starting position on cylinder, plunge-cutting obliquely into
the material
N340 G01 G40 Y+Q7 FQ12 * Longitudinal cut in Y+ direction
N350 D01 Q20 P01 +Q20 P02 +1 * Update the counter
N360 D01 Q24 P01 +Q24 P02 +Q25 * Update solid angle
N370 D11 P01 +Q20 P02 +Q13 P03 99 * Finished? If finished, jump to end
N380 G11 R+Q16 H+Q24 FQ11 * Move in an approximated “arc” for the next longitudinal cut
N390 G01 G40 Y+0 FQ12 * Longitudinal cut in Y– direction
N400 D01 Q20 P01 +Q20 P02 +1 * Update the counter
N410 D01 Q24 P01 +Q24 P02 +Q25 * Update solid angle
N420 D12 P01 +Q20 P02 +Q13 P03 1 * Unfinished? If not finished, return to LBL 1
N430 G98 L99 *
N440 G73 G90 H+0 * Reset the rotation
N450 G54 X+0 Y+0 Z+0 * Reset the datum shift
N460 G98 L0 * End of subprogram
N99999999 %CYLIN G71 *

292 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.11 Programming Examples
Example: Convex sphere machined with end mill

Program sequence
„ This program requires an end mill.
„ The contour of the sphere is approximated by Y Y
many short lines (in the Z/X plane, defined in
Q14). The smaller you define the angle 100
increment, the smoother the curve becomes.
„ You can determine the number of contour cuts
through the angle increment in the plane

5
5
R4

R4
(defined in Q18).
„ The tool moves upward in three-dimensional 50
cuts.
„ The tool radius is compensated automatically.

X Z
50 100 -50

%SPHERE G71 *
N10 D00 Q1 P01 +50 * Center in X axis
N20 D00 Q2 P01 +50 * Center in Y axis
N30 D00 Q4 P01 +90 * Starting angle in space (Z/X plane)
N40 D00 Q5 P01 +0 * End angle in space (Z/X plane)
N50 D00 Q14 P01 +5 * Angle increment in space
N60 D00 Q6 P01 +45 * Radius of the sphere
N70 D00 Q8 P01 +0 * Starting angle of rotational position in the X/Y plane
N80 D00 Q9 P01 +360 * End angle of rotational position in the X/Y plane
N90 D00 Q18 P01 +10 * Angle increment in the X/Y plane for roughing
N100 D00 Q10 P01 +5 * Allowance in sphere radius for roughing
N110 D00 Q11 P01 +2 * Set-up clearance for pre-positioning in the tool axis
N120 D00 Q12 P01 +350 * Feed rate for milling
N130 G30 G17 X+0 Y+0 Z-50 * Definition of workpiece blank
N140 G31 G90 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 *
N150 G99 T1 L+0 R+7,5 * Tool definition
N160 T1 G17 S4000 * Tool call
N170 G00 G40 G90 Z+250 * Retract the tool

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 293

9.11 Programming Examples
N180 L10.0 * Call machining operation
N190 D00 Q10 P01 +0 * Reset allowance
N200 D00 Q18 P01 +5 * Angle increment in the X/Y plane for finishing
N210 L10.0 * Call machining operation
N220 G00 G40 Z+250 M2 * Retract in the tool axis, end program
N230 G98 L10 * Subprogram 10: Machining operation
N240 D01 Q23 P01 +Q11 P02 +Q6 * Calculate Z coordinate for pre-positioning
N250 D00 Q24 P01 +Q4 * Copy starting angle in space (Z/X plane)
N260 D01 Q26 P01 +Q6 P02 +Q108 * Compensate sphere radius for pre-positioning
N270 D00 Q28 P01 +Q8 * Copy rotational position in the plane
N280 D01 Q16 P01 +Q6 P02 -Q10 * Account for allowance in the sphere radius
N290 G54 X+Q1 Y+Q2 Z-Q16 * Shift datum to center of sphere
N300 G73 G90 H+Q8 * Account for starting angle of rotational position in the plane
N310 G98 L1 * Pre-position in the tool axis
N320 I+0 J+0 * Set pole in the X/Y plane for pre-positioning
N330 G11 G40 R+Q26 H+Q8 FQ12 * Pre-position in the plane
N340 I+Q108 K+0 * Set pole in the Z/X plane, offset by the tool radius
N350 G01 Y+0 Z+0 FQ12 * Move to working depth
N360 G98 L2 *
N370 G11 G40 R+Q6 H+Q24 FQ12 * Move upward in an approximated “arc”
N380 D02 Q24 P01 +Q24 P02 +Q14 * Update solid angle
N390 D11 P01 +Q24 P02 +Q5 P03 2 * Inquire whether an arc is finished. If not finished, return to LBL 2

294 Programming: Q Parameters

 9.11 Programming Examples
N400 G11 R+Q6 H+Q5 FQ12 * Move to the end angle in space
N410 G01 G40 Z+Q23 F1000 * Retract in the tool axis
N420 G00 G40 X+Q26 * Pre-position for next arc
N430 D01 Q28 P01 +Q28 P02 +Q18 * Update rotational position in the plane
N440 D00 Q24 P01 +Q4 * Reset solid angle
N450 G73 G90 H+Q28 * Activate new rotational position
N460 D12 P01 +Q28 P02 +Q9 P03 1 * Unfinished? If not finished, return to label 1
N470 D09 P01 +Q28 P02 +Q9 P03 1 *
N480 G73 G90 H+0 * Reset the rotation
N490 G54 X+0 Y+0 Z+0 * Reset the datum shift
N500 G98 L0 * End of subprogram
N99999999 %SPHERE G71 *

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 295

9.11 Programming Examples

296 Programming: Q Parameters

Programming:
Miscellaneous Functions
10.1 Entering Miscellaneous Functions M and STOP
10.1 Entering Miscellaneous
Functions M and STOP
Fundamentals
With the TNC's miscellaneous functions—also called M functions—
you can affect
„ the program run, e.g., a program interruption
„ the machine functions, such as switching spindle rotation and
coolant supply on and off
„ the path behavior of the tool

The machine tool builder may add some M functions that

are not described in this User's Manual. Refer to your
machine manual.

You can enter up to two M functions at the end of a positioning block

or in a separate block. The TNC displays the following dialog question:
Miscellaneous function M ?
You usually enter only the number of the M function in the
programming dialog. Some M functions can be programmed with
additional parameters. In this case, the dialog is continued for the
parameter input.
In the Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel modes of
operation, the M functions are entered with the M soft key.

Please note that some M functions become effective at

the start of a positioning block, and others at the end,
regardless of their position in the NC block.
M functions come into effect in the block in which they are
called.
Some M functions are effective only in the block in which
they are programmed. Unless the M function is only
effective blockwise, either you must cancel it in a
subsequent block with a separate M function, or it is
automatically canceled by the TNC at the end of the
program.

298 Programming: Miscellaneous Functions

 10.1 Entering Miscellaneous Functions M and STOP
Entering an M function in a STOPP block
If you program a STOPP block, the program run or test run is
interrupted at the block, for example for tool inspection. You can also
enter an M function in a STOPP block:
U To program an interruption of program run, press the
STOPP key
U Enter a miscellaneous function M
Example NC blocks

N87 G36 M6

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 299

10.2 Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run Control, Spindle and Coolant
10.2 Miscellaneous Functions for
Program Run Control, Spindle
and Coolant
Overview

N Effect Effective at block... Start End

M0 Stop program run „
Spindle STOP
Coolant OFF

M1 Optional program STOP „

Spindle STOP
Coolant OFF

M2 Stop program run „

Spindle STOP
Coolant OFF
Go to block 1
Clear the status display (depends on
MP7300)

M3 Spindle ON clockwise „

M4 Spindle ON counterclockwise „

M5 Spindle STOP „

M6 Tool change „
Spindle STOP
Program run stop (depends on
MP7440)

M8 Coolant ON „

M9 Coolant OFF „

M13 Spindle ON clockwise „

Coolant ON

M14 Spindle ON counterclockwise „

Coolant ON

M30 Same as M2 „

300 Programming: Miscellaneous Functions

 10.3 Miscellaneous Functions for Coordinate Data
10.3 Miscellaneous Functions for
Coordinate Data
Programming machine-referenced coordinates:
M91/M92
Scale reference point
On the scale, a reference mark indicates the position of the scale
reference point.

Machine datum XMP

The machine datum is required for the following tasks:
„ Defining the limits of traverse (software limit switches) X (Z,Y)
„ Moving to machine-referenced positions (such as tool change
positions)
„ Setting the workpiece datum
The distance in each axis from the scale reference point to the
machine datum is defined by the machine tool builder in a machine
parameter.

Standard behavior
The TNC references coordinates to the workpiece datum (see “Datum
Setting without a 3-D Touch Probe,” page 442).

Behavior with M91—Machine datum

If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be referenced to
the machine datum, end the block with M91.

If you program incremental coordinates in an M91 block,

enter them with respect to the last programmed M91
position. If no M91 position is programmed in the active
NC block, then enter the coordinates with respect to the
current tool position.

The coordinate values on the TNC screen are referenced to the

machine datum. Switch the display of coordinates in the status display
to REF (see “Status Displays,” page 77).

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 301

10.3 Miscellaneous Functions for Coordinate Data
Behavior with M92—Additional machine datum

In addition to the machine datum, the machine tool builder

can also define an additional machine-based position as a
reference point.
For each axis, the machine tool builder defines the
distance between the machine datum and this additional
machine datum. Refer to the machine manual for more
information.

If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be based on the

additional machine datum, end the block with M92.

Radius compensation remains the same in blocks that are

programmed with M91 or M92. The tool length, however,
is not compensated.

Effect
M91 and M92 are effective only in the blocks in which they are
programmed.
M91 and M92 take effect at the start of block.

Workpiece datum
If you want the coordinates to always be referenced to the machine
datum, you can inhibit datum setting for one or more axes.
Z
If datum setting is inhibited for all axes, the TNC no longer displays the
SET DATUM soft key in the Manual Operation mode. Z
The figure shows coordinate systems with the machine datum and Y
workpiece datum.
Y
M91/M92 in the Test Run mode X
In order to be able to graphically simulate M91/M92 movements, you
need to activate working space monitoring and display the workpiece
blank referenced to the set datum (see “Showing the Workpiece in X
the Working Space,” page 538). M

302 Programming: Miscellaneous Functions

 10.3 Miscellaneous Functions for Coordinate Data
Activating the most recently entered datum:
M104
Function
When processing pallet tables, the TNC may overwrite your most
recently entered datum with values from the pallet table. With M104
you can reactivate the original datum.

Effect
M104 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed.
M104 becomes effective at the end of block.

The TNC does not change the active basic rotation when
running the M104 function.

Moving to positions in a non-tilted coordinate

system with a tilted working plane: M130
Standard behavior with a tilted working plane
The TNC places the coordinates in the positioning blocks in the tilted
coordinate system.

Behavior with M130

The TNC places coordinates in straight line blocks in the untilted
coordinate system.
The TNC then positions the (tilted) tool to the programmed
coordinates of the untilted system.

Danger of collision!
Subsequent positioning blocks or fixed cycles are carried
out in a tilted coordinate system. This can lead to problems
in fixed cycles with absolute pre-positioning.
The function M130 is allowed only if the tilted working
plane function is active.

Effect
M130 functions blockwise in straight-line blocks without tool radius
compensation.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 303

10.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior
10.4 Miscellaneous Functions for
Contouring Behavior
Smoothing corners: M90
Standard behavior
The TNC stops the tool briefly in positioning blocks without tool radius
compensation. This is called an exact stop. Y
In program blocks with radius compensation (RR/RL), the TNC
automatically inserts a transition arc at outside corners.

Behavior with M90

The tool moves at corners with constant speed: This provides a
smoother, more continuous surface. Machining time is also reduced.
Application example: Surface consisting of a series of straight line
segments.

Effect
M90 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed.
M90 becomes effective at the start of block. Operation with servo lag X
must be active.

Insert rounding arc between straight lines: M112

Compatibility Y
For reasons of compatibility, the M112 function is still available.
However, to define the tolerance for fast contour milling,
HEIDENHAIN recommends the use of the TOLERANCE cycle (see
User's Manual for Cycles, section 32 TOLERANCE).

304 Programming: Miscellaneous Functions

 10.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior
Do not include points when executing non-
compensated line blocks: M124
Standard behavior
The TNC runs all line blocks that have been entered in the active
program.

Behavior with M124

When running non-compensated line blocks with very small point
intervals, you can use parameter T to define a minimum point interval
up to which the TNC will not include points during execution.

Effect
M124 becomes effective at the start of block.
The TNC automatically resets M124 if you select a new program.

Programming M124
If you enter M124 in a positioning block, the TNC continues the dialog
for this block by asking you the minimum distance between points T.
You can also define T through Q parameters (see “Principle and
Overview” on page 250).

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 305

10.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior
Machining small contour steps: M97
Standard behavior
The TNC inserts a transition arc at outside corners. If the contour steps
are very small, however, the tool would damage the contour.
In such cases the TNC interrupts program run and generates the error Y
message “Tool radius too large.”

Behavior with M97

The TNC calculates the intersection of the contour elements—as at
inside corners—and moves the tool over this point.
Program M97 in the same block as the outside corner.

Instead of M97 you should use the much more powerful

function M120 LA (see “Calculating the radius-
compensated path in advance (LOOK AHEAD): M120” on
page 311). X

Effect
M97 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed.
Y
A corner machined with M97 will not be completely
finished. You may wish to rework the contour with a
smaller tool.
S S

13 16
17

14 15

306 Programming: Miscellaneous Functions

 10.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior
Example NC blocks
N50 G99 G01 ... R+20 * Large tool radius
...
N130 X ... Y ... F ... M97 * Move to contour point 13
N140 G91 Y-0.5 ... F ... * Machine small contour step 13 to 14
N150 X+100 ... * Move to contour point 15
N160 Y+0.5 ... F ... M97 * Machine small contour step 15 to 16
N170 G90 X ... Y ... * Move to contour point 17

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 307

10.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior
Machining open contours corners: M98
Standard behavior
The TNC calculates the intersections of the cutter paths at inside
corners and moves the tool in the new direction at those points.
If the contour is open at the corners, however, this will result in Y
incomplete machining.

Behavior with M98

With the miscellaneous function M98, the TNC temporarily suspends
radius compensation to ensure that both corners are completely
machined:

Effect
M98 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed. S S
M98 takes effect at the end of block.
X
Example NC blocks
Move to the contour points 10, 11 and 12 in succession:

N100 G01 G41 X ... Y ... F ... *

N110 X ... G91 Y ... M98 *
Y
N120 X+ ... *

10

11 12
X

308 Programming: Miscellaneous Functions

 10.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior
Feed rate factor for plunging movements: M103
Standard behavior
The TNC moves the tool at the last programmed feed rate, regardless
of the direction of traverse.

Behavior with M103

The TNC reduces the feed rate when the tool moves in the negative
direction of the tool axis. The feed rate for plunging FZMAX is
calculated from the last programmed feed rate FPROG and a factor
F%:
FZMAX = FPROG x F%

Programming M103
If you enter M103 in a positioning block, the TNC continues the dialog
by asking you the factor F.

Effect
M103 becomes effective at the start of block.
To cancel M103, program M103 once again without a factor.

M103 is also effective in an active tilted working plane.

The feed rate reduction is then effective during traverse in
the negative direction of the tilted tool axis.

Example NC blocks
The feed rate for plunging is to be 20% of the feed rate in the plane.

... Actual contouring feed rate (mm/min):

N170 G01 G41 X+20 Y+20 F500 M103 F20 * 500
N180 Y+50 * 500
N190 G91 Z–2.5 * 100
N200 Y+5 Z-5 * 141
N210 X+50 * 500
N220 G90 Z+5 * 500

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 309

10.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior
Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution:
M136
Standard behavior
The TNC moves the tool at the programmed feed rate F in mm/min.

Behavior with M136

In inch-programs, M136 is not permitted in combination

with the new alternate feed rate FU.
The spindle is not permitted to be controlled when M136
is active.

With M136, the TNC does not move the tool in mm/min, but rather at
the programmed feed rate F in millimeters per spindle revolution. If
you change the spindle speed by using the spindle override, the TNC
changes the feed rate accordingly.

Effect
M136 becomes effective at the start of block.
You can cancel M136 by programming M137.

Feed rate for circular arcs: M109/M110/M111

Standard behavior
The TNC applies the programmed feed rate to the path of the tool
center.

Behavior at circular arcs with M109

The TNC adjusts the feed rate for circular arcs at inside and outside
contours so that the feed rate at the tool cutting edge remains
constant.

Behavior at circular arcs with M110

The TNC keeps the feed rate constant for circular arcs at inside
contours only. At outside contours, the feed rate is not adjusted.

M110 is also effective for the inside machining of circular

arcs using contour cycles (special case).
If you define M109 or M110 before calling a machining
cycle with a number greater than 200, the adjusted feed
rate is also effective for circular arcs within these
machining cycles. The initial state is restored after
finishing or aborting a machining cycle.

Effect
M109 and M110 become effective at the start of block. To cancel
M109 and M110, enter M111.

310 Programming: Miscellaneous Functions

 10.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior
Calculating the radius-compensated path in
advance (LOOK AHEAD): M120
Standard behavior
If the tool radius is larger than the contour step that is to be machined
with radius compensation, the TNC interrupts program run and
generates an error message. M97 (see “Machining small contour
steps: M97” on page 306) inhibits the error message, but this results
in dwell marks and will also move the corner.
If the programmed contour contains undercut features, the tool may
damage the contour.

Behavior with M120

The TNC checks radius-compensated paths for contour undercuts and
tool path intersections, and calculates the tool path in advance from
the current block. Areas of the contour that might be damaged by the Y
tool are not machined (dark areas in figure). You can also use M120 to
calculate the radius compensation for digitized data or data created on
an external programming system. This means that deviations from the
theoretical tool radius can be compensated.
Use LA (Look Ahead) after M120 to define the number of blocks
(maximum: 99) that you want the TNC to calculate in advance. Note
that the larger the number of blocks you choose, the higher the block
processing time will be.

Input
If you enter M120 in a positioning block, the TNC continues the dialog
for this block by asking you the number of blocks LA that are to be X
calculated in advance.

Effect
M120 must be located in an NC block that also contains radius
compensation G41 or G42. M120 is then effective from this block until
„ radius compensation is canceled with G40
„ M120 LA0 is programmed, or
„ M120 is programmed without LA, or
„ another program is called with %
„ the working plane is tilted with Cycle G80 or the PLANE function
M120 becomes effective at the start of block.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 311

10.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior
Restrictions
„ After an external or internal stop, you can only re-enter the contour
with the function RESTORE POS. AT N. Before you start the block
scan, you must cancel M120, otherwise the TNC will output an error
message.
„ When using the path functions G25 and G24 the blocks before and
after G25 or G24 must contain only coordinates in the working plane
„ Before using the functions listed below, you have to cancel M120
and the radius compensation:
„ Cycle G60 Tolerance
„ Cycle G80 Working plane
„ PLANE function
„ M114
„ M128
„ M138
„ M144
„ TCPM FUNCTION (only conversational)
„ WRITE TO KINEMATIC (only conversational format)

312 Programming: Miscellaneous Functions

 10.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior
Superimposing handwheel positioning during
program run: M118
Standard behavior
In the program run modes, the TNC moves the tool as defined in the
part program.

Behavior with M118

M118 permits manual corrections by handwheel during program run.
Just program M118 and enter an axis-specific value (linear or rotary
axis) in millimeters.

Input
If you enter M118 in a positioning block, the TNC continues the dialog
for this block by asking you the axis-specific values. The coordinates
are entered with the orange axis direction buttons or the ASCII
keyboard.

Effect
Cancel handwheel positioning by programming M118 once again
without coordinate input.
M118 becomes effective at the start of block.

Example NC blocks
You want to be able to use the handwheel during program run to move
the tool in the working plane X/Y by ±1 mm and in the rotary axis B by
±5° from the programmed value:

N250 G01 G41 X+0 Y+38.5 F125 M118 X1 Y1 B5 *

M118 is always effective in the original coordinate system,

even if the working plane is tilted.
M118 also functions in the Positioning with MDI mode of
operation!
If M118 is active, the MANUAL TRAVERSE function is not
available after a program interruption.
M118 in combination with DCM collision monitoring is
only possible in stopped condition (blinking control-in-
operation symbol). If you try to move an axis during
handwheel superimposition, the TNC will generate an
error message.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 313

10.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior
Retraction from the contour in the tool-axis
direction: M140
Standard behavior
In the program run modes, the TNC moves the tool as defined in the
part program.

Behavior with M140

With M140 MB (move back) you can enter a path in the direction of
the tool axis for departure from the contour.

Input
If you enter M140 in a positioning block, the TNC continues the dialog
and asks for the desired path of tool departure from the contour. Enter
the requested path that the tool should follow when departing the
contour, or press the MB MAX soft key to move to the limit of the
traverse range.
In addition, you can program the feed rate at which the tool traverses
the entered path. If you do not enter a feed rate, the TNC moves the
tool along the entered path at rapid traverse.

Effect
M140 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed.
M140 becomes effective at the start of the block.

Example NC blocks
Block 250: Retract the tool 50 mm from the contour.
Block 251: Move the tool to the limit of the traverse range.

N250 G01 X+0 Y+38.5 F125 M140 MB50 *

N251 G01 X+0 Y+38.5 F125 M140 MB MAX *

M140 is also effective if the tilted-working-plane function,

M114 or M128 is active. On machines with tilting heads,
the TNC then moves the tool in the tilted coordinate
system.
With the FN18: SYSREAD ID230 NR6 function you can find
the distance from the current position to the limit of the
traverse range in the positive tool axis.
With M140 MB MAX you can only retract in positive direction.
Always define a TOOL CALL with a tool axis before
entering M140, otherwise the direction of traverse is not
defined.

314 Programming: Miscellaneous Functions

 10.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior
Danger of collision!
When dynamic collision monitoring (DCM) is active, the
TNC might move the tool only until it detects a collision
and, from there, complete the NC program without any
error message. This can result in tool paths different from
those programmed!

Suppressing touch probe monitoring: M141

Standard behavior
When the stylus is deflected, the TNC outputs an error message as
soon as you attempt to move a machine axis.

Behavior with M141

The TNC moves the machine axes even if the touch probe is
deflected. This function is required if you wish to write your own
measuring cycle in connection with measuring cycle 3 in order to
retract the stylus by means of a positioning block after it has been
deflected.

Danger of collision!
If you use M141, make sure that you retract the touch
probe in the correct direction.
M141 functions only for movements with straight-line
blocks.

Effect
M141 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed.
M141 becomes effective at the start of the block.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 315

10.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior
Delete modal program information: M142
Standard behavior
The TNC resets modal program information in the following situations:
„ Select a new program
„ Execute a miscellaneous function M2, M30, or an N99999999 %....
block (depending on MP7300)
„ Defining cycles for basic behavior with a new value

Behavior with M142

All modal program information except for basic rotation, 3-D rotation
and Q parameters is reset.

The function M142 is not permitted during mid-program

startup.

Effect
M142 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed.
M142 becomes effective at the start of the block.

Delete basic rotation: M143

Standard behavior
The basic rotation remains in effect until it is reset or is overwritten
with a new value.

Behavior with M143

The TNC erases a programmed basic rotation from the NC program.

The function M143 is not permitted during mid-program

startup.

Effect
M143 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed.
M143 becomes effective at the start of the block.

316 Programming: Miscellaneous Functions

 10.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior
Automatically retract tool from the contour at an
NC stop: M148
Standard behavior
At an NC stop the TNC stops all traverse movements. The tool stops
moving at the point of interruption.

Behavior with M148

The M148 function must be enabled by the machine tool

builder. The machine tool builder defines in a machine
parameter the path that TNC is to traverse for a LIFTOFF
command.

The TNC retracts the tool by up to 30 mm in the direction of the tool

axis if, in the LIFTOFF column of the tool table, you set the parameter
Y for the active tool (see “Tool table: Standard tool data” on page 158).
LIFTOFF takes effect in the following situations:
„ An NC stop triggered by you
„ An NC stop triggered by the software, e.g. if an error occurred in the
drive system
„ When a power interruption occurs

Danger of collision!
Remember that, especially on curved surfaces, the
surface can be damaged during return to the contour. Back
the tool off before returning to the contour!

Effect
M148 remains in effect until deactivated with M149.
M148 becomes effective at the start of block, M149 at the end of
block.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 317

10.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior
Suppress limit switch message: M150
Standard behavior
The TNC stops program run with an error message if the tool were to
leave the active working space during a positioning block. The error
message is output before the positioning block is executed.

Behavior with M150

If the end point of a positioning block with M150 is outside the current
working space, the TNC moves the tool to the edge of the working
space, and then continues the program run without an error message.

Danger of collision!
Keep in mind that the approach path to the position
programmed after the M150 block might be changed
significantly!
M150 is also effective on traverse range limits defined
with the MOD function.
M150 is effective even if you have the handwheel
superimposition function active. The TNC then moves the
tool by the defined maximum value of the handwheel
superimposition away from the limit switch.
When dynamic collision monitoring (DCM) is active, the
TNC might move the tool only until it detects a collision
and, from there, complete the NC program without any
error message. This can result in tool paths different from
those programmed!

Effect
M150 is effective only in straight-line blocks and the block in which it
is programmed.
M150 becomes effective at the start of block.

318 Programming: Miscellaneous Functions

 10.5 Miscellaneous Functions for Laser Cutting Machines
10.5 Miscellaneous Functions for
Laser Cutting Machines
Principle
The TNC can control the cutting efficiency of a laser by transferring
voltage values through the S-analog output. You can influence laser
efficiency during program run through the miscellaneous functions
M200 to M204.

Entering miscellaneous functions for laser cutting machines

If you enter an M function for laser cutting machines in a positioning
block, the TNC continues the dialog by asking you the required
parameters for the programmed function.
All miscellaneous functions for laser cutting machines become
effective at the start of the block.

Output the programmed voltage directly: M200

Behavior with M200
The TNC outputs the value programmed after M200 as the voltage V.
Input range: 0 to 9999 V

Effect
M200 remains in effect until a new voltage is output through M200,
M201, M202, M203 or M204.

Output voltage as a function of distance: M201

Behavior with M201
M201 outputs the voltage in dependence on the distance to be
covered. The TNC increases or decreases the current voltage linearly
to the value programmed for V.
Input range: 0 to 9999 V

Effect
M201 remains in effect until a new voltage is output through M200,
M201, M202, M203 or M204.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 319

10.5 Miscellaneous Functions for Laser Cutting Machines
Output voltage as a function of speed: M202
Behavior with M202
The TNC outputs the voltage as a function of speed. In the machine
parameters, the machine tool builder defines up to three characteristic
curves FNR in which specific feed rates are assigned to specific
voltages. Use miscellaneous function M202 to select the curve FNR
from which the TNC is to determine the output voltage.
Input range: 1 to 3

Effect
M202 remains in effect until a new voltage is output through M200,
M201, M202, M203 or M204.

Output voltage as a function of time (time-

dependent ramp): M203
Behavior with M203
The TNC outputs the voltage V as a function of the time TIME. The
TNC increases or decreases the current voltage linearly to the value
programmed for V within the time programmed for TIME.

Input range
Voltage V: 0 to 9999 Volt
TIME: 0 to 1 999 seconds
Effect
M203 remains in effect until a new voltage is output through M200,
M201, M202, M203 or M204.

Output voltage as a function of time (time-

dependent pulse): M204
Behavior with M204
The TNC outputs a programmed voltage as a pulse with a
programmed duration TIME.

Input range
Voltage V: 0 to 9999 Volt
TIME: 0 to 1999 seconds

Effect
M204 remains in effect until a new voltage is output through M200,
M201, M202, M203 or M204.

320 Programming: Miscellaneous Functions

Programming: Special
Functions
11.1 Overview of Special Functions
11.1 Overview of Special Functions
The TNC provides the following powerful special functions for a large
number of applications:

Function Description
Dynamic Collision Monitoring (DCM—software Page 325
option)

Global Program Settings (GS—software option) Page 340

Adaptive Feed Control Software Option (AFC— Page 351

software option)

Working with text files Page 362

Working with cutting data tables Page 367

Press the SPEC FCT and the corresponding soft keys to access further
special functions of the TNC. The following tables will give you an
overview of which functions are available.

Main menu for SPEC FCT special functions

U Select the special functions

Function Soft key Description

Define program defaults Page 323

Functions for contour and point Page 323

machining

Define the PLANE function Page 377

Define different DIN/ISO Page 324

functions

Define structure items Page 134

322 Programming: Special Functions

 11.1 Overview of Special Functions
Program defaults menu
U Select the program defaults menu

Function Soft key Description

Define the workpiece blank Page 95

Define the material Page 368

Select datum table See User’s Manual

for Cycles

Functions for contour and point machining

menu
U Select the menu for functions for contour and point
machining.

Function Soft key Description

Assign contour description See User’s Manual
for Cycles

Select a contour definition See User’s Manual

for Cycles

Define a complex contour See User’s Manual

formula for Cycles

Select the point file with See User’s Manual

machining positions for Cycles

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 323

11.1 Overview of Special Functions
Menu of various DIN/ISO functions
U Select the menu for defining various plain-language
functions

Function Soft key Description

Define string functions Page 272

324 Programming: Special Functions

 11.2 Dynamic Collision Monitoring (Software Option)
11.2 Dynamic Collision Monitoring
(Software Option)
Function

The Dynamic Collision Monitoring (DCM) must be adapted

by the machine manufacturer for the TNC and for the
machine. Refer to your machine manual.

The machine manufacturer can define any objects that are monitored
by the TNC during all machining operations and even in the Test Run
mode. If two objects monitored for collision come within a defined
distance of each other, the TNC outputs an error message during test
run and machining.
The TNC can display the defined collision objects graphically in all
machining modes and during test run (see “Graphic depiction of the
protected space (FCL4 function)” on page 330).
The TNC also monitors the current tool with the length and radius
entered in the tool table for collision (assuming a cylindrical tool).
Provided that you have defined a separate carrier kinematic
description for the respective tool, including a collision body
description, and have assigned it to the tool in the KINEMATIC
column, the TNC monitors this tool carrier also (see “Tool-carrier
kinematics” on page 164).
Also, you can integrate simple fixtures in the collision monitoring (see
“Fixture Monitoring (Software Option)” on page 332).

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 325

11.2 Dynamic Collision Monitoring (Software Option)
Keep these constraints in mind:
„ DCM helps to reduce the danger of collision. However,
the TNC cannot consider all possible constellations in
operation.
„ Collisions of defined machine components and the tool
with the workpiece are not detected by the TNC.
„ DCM can only protect those machine components from
collision that your machine tool builder has correctly
defined with regard to dimensions and position in the
machine coordinate system.
„ The TNC can monitor the tool only if a positive tool
radius has been defined in the tool table. The TNC
cannot monitor tools with a radius of 0 (as is often used
in drilling tools) and therefore issues an appropriate error
message.
„ The TNC can only monitor tools for which you have
defined positive tool lengths.
„ For certain tools (such as face milling cutters), the
diameter that would cause a collision can be greater than
the dimensions defined in the tool-compensation data.
„ The handwheel superimpositioning function (M118 and
global program settings) in combination with collision
monitoring is only possible in stopped condition (blinking
control-in-operation symbol). To be able to use M118
without limitations, you have to deselect DCM either by
soft key in the Collision Monitoring (DCM) menu, or
activate a kinematics model without collision monitored
objects (CMOs).
„ With the rigid-tapping cycles, DCM works only if the
exact interpolation of the tool axis with the spindle is
activated through MP7160.

326 Programming: Special Functions

 11.2 Dynamic Collision Monitoring (Software Option)
Collision monitoring in the manual operating
modes
In the Manual and Electronic Handwheel operating modes, the TNC
stops a motion if two objects monitored for collision approach each
other within a distance of less than 3 to 5 mm. In this case, the TNC
displays an error message naming the two objects causing collision.
If you have selected a screen layout in which positions are displayed
on the left and collision objects on the right, then the TNC additionally
marks the colliding objects in red.

Danger of collision!
Once a collision warning is displayed, machine motions via
the direction keys or handwheel are possible only if the
motion increases the distance between the collision
objects. For example, by pressing the axis direction key for
the opposite direction.
Motions that reduce the distance or leave it unchanged are
not allowed as long as collision monitoring is active.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 327

11.2 Dynamic Collision Monitoring (Software Option)
Deactivating Collision Monitoring
If you have to reduce the distance between collision-monitored
objects for lack of space, the collision monitoring function must be
deactivated.

Danger of collision!
If you have deactivated the collision monitoring, the
symbol for collision monitoring flashes (see following
table).

Function Symbol
Symbol that appears in the operating mode bar
when collision monitoring is not active.

U Shift the soft-key row if necessary.

U Select the menu for deactivating collision monitoring.

U Select the Manual Operation menu item.

U To deactivate collision monitoring, press the ENT key,
and the symbol for collision monitoring in the
operating mode display starts to blink.
U Move axes manually, pay attention to traverse direction
U To reactivate collision monitoring: Press the ENT key

328 Programming: Special Functions

 11.2 Dynamic Collision Monitoring (Software Option)
Collision monitoring in Automatic operation

The handwheel superimpositioning function with M118 in

combination with collision monitoring is only possible in
stopped condition (blinking control-in-operation symbol).
If collision monitoring is on, the TNC shows the symbol
in the position display.
If you have deactivated collision monitoring, the symbol for
collision monitoring flashes in the operating-mode bar.

Danger of collision!
The M140 (see “Retraction from the contour in the tool-
axis direction: M140” on page 314) and M150 (see
“Suppress limit switch message: M150” on page 318)
functions might cause non-programmed movements if the
TNC detects a collision when executing these functions!

The TNC monitors motions blockwise, i.e. it outputs a warning in the

block which would cause a collision, and interrupts program run. A
reduction of the feed rate, as with Manual Operation, does not occur.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 329

11.2 Dynamic Collision Monitoring (Software Option)
Graphic depiction of the protected space (FCL4
function)
You can use the split-screen layout key to have the machine-based
collision objects defined on your machine be shown in three
dimensions (see “Program Run, Full Sequence and Program Run,
Single Block” on page 76).
Press the right mouse button to rotate the overall view of the collision
objects. You can switch between the various views via soft key:

Function Soft key

Switch between wire-frame and solid-object view

Switch between solid and transparent view

Display/hide the coordinate systems that result

from transformations in the kinematics
description.

Functions for rotating in the X and Z axes, and

magnifying/reducing

330 Programming: Special Functions

 11.2 Dynamic Collision Monitoring (Software Option)
Collision monitoring in the Test Run mode of
operation
Function
With this feature you can test for collisions before actual machining.

Prerequisites

The graphic simulation testing must be enabled by your

machine tool builder in order to run.

Conducting a collision test

You specify the datum for the collision test in the

“workpiece blank in working space” function (see
“Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space” on page
538)!

U Select the Test Run operating mode

U Select the program that you want to check for collision
U Select the screen layout PROGRAM+KINEMATICS or
KINEMATICS
U Shift the soft-key row twice

U Set the collision testing to ON

U Shift the soft-key row back twice

U Start the test run

Press the right mouse button to rotate the overall view of the collision
objects. You can switch between the various views via soft key:
Function Soft key
Switch between wire-frame and solid-object view

Switch between solid and transparent view

Display/hide the coordinate systems that result

from transformations in the kinematics
description.

Functions for rotating in the X and Z axes, and

magnifying/reducing

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 331

11.3 Fixture Monitoring (Software Option)
11.3 Fixture Monitoring (Software
Option)
Fundamentals

Your machine tool builder must define permissible location

points in the kinematic description before you can use the
fixture monitoring. The machine tool manual provides
further information.
Your machine has to feature a 3-D touch probe for
workpiece measurement. Otherwise you cannot locate
the fixture on the machine.

Using the fixture management in the Manual operating mode, you can
place simple fixtures in the working space of the machine in order to
implement collision monitoring between the tool and the fixture.
Several work steps are required to place fixtures
„ Model the fixture template
HEIDENHAIN provides fixture templates such as vices or jaw
chucks in a fixture template library (see “Fixture templates” on page
333), that were created with the PC program KinematicsDesign. The
machine tool builder can model additional fixture templates and
provide you with them. The fixture templates have the file name
extension cft
„ Set the fixture parameter values: FixtureWizard
With the FixtureWizard you define the exact dimensions of the
fixture by entering parameters values in the fixture template. The
FixtureWizard is available as a stand-alone PC tool and as a
component of the TNC fixture monitoring feature. It generates a
placable fixture with concrete dimensions defined by you (see
“Setting parameters for the fixture: FixtureWizard” on page 334).
Placable fixture templates have the file name extension cfx
„ Place the fixture on the machine
In an interactive menu the TNC guides you through the actual
measurement process. The measurement process consists
essentially of the performance of various probing functions on the
fixture and entering variable sizes, for example the jaw gap of a vice
(see “Placing the fixture on the machine” on page 336)
„ Check the position of the measured fixture
After you have placed the fixture, you can have the TNC create a
measuring program as needed with which you can have the actual
position of the placed fixture compared with the nominal position. If
the deviations between the nominal and actual positions are too
large, the TNC issues an error message (see “Check the position of
the measured fixture” on page 338)

332 Programming: Special Functions

 11.3 Fixture Monitoring (Software Option)
Fixture templates
You can get fixture templates from HEIDENHAIN or from your
machine tool builder. These fixtures must be copied to the directory
TNC:\system\fixture\JH. From there you can then set parameters for
your fixture.

HEIDENHAIN is continuously expanding the fixture library.

If you cannot find an appropriate fixture template, please
inform us by e-mail. E-mail: service.nc-
[email protected].

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 333

11.3 Fixture Monitoring (Software Option)
Setting parameters for the fixture:
FixtureWizard
With the FixtureWizard you can use a fixture template to create a
fixture with exact dimensions. HEIDENHAIN provides fixture
templates on its web site. Your machine tool builder may also provide
fixture templates.

Before you start the FixtureWizard, you must have copied

the fixture template and its parameters to the TNC!
As an alternative, FixtureWizard is also available as a stand-
alone PC tool for when you do not want to set the
parameter values of your fixtures directly on the control.

U Call the fixture management

U Start the FixtureWizard: The TNC opens the menu for

parameterization of fixture templates
U Select the fixture template: The TNC opens the
window for selecting a fixture template (files with
extension CFT)
U Use the mouse to select the fixture template for
which you want to enter values and confirm with Open
U Enter the values of all the fixture parameters shown in
the left window. Use the arrow keys to move the
cursor to the next input field. After value entry, the
TNC updates the 3-D view of the fixture in the
window below. As far as is available, the TNC displays
an illustration in the upper right window graphically
showing the fixture parameter to be entered.
U Enter the name of the defined fixture in the Output
file input field and confirm with the Generate file
soft key. It is not necessary to enter the file extension
(CFX for parameterized)
U Exit FixtureWizard

334 Programming: Special Functions

 11.3 Fixture Monitoring (Software Option)
Operating FixtureWizard
FixtureWizard is operated primarily with the mouse. You can change
the screen layout by pulling the separator lines so that the Parameters,
Help graphics and 3-D graphic are displayed in the size you prefer.
You can change the depiction of the 3-D graphic as follows:
„ Enlarge/reduce the model:
Turning the mouse wheel enlarges or reduces the model
„ Move the model:
Pressing the mouse wheel and moving the mouse at the same
time moves the model
„ Rotate the model:
Pressing the mouse key and moving the mouse at the same time
rotates the model
In addition, buttons are available that perform the following function
when clicked:
Function Button
Exit FixtureWizard

Open a fixture template (files with the extension

CFT)

Switch between wire-frame and solid-object view

Switch between solid and transparent view

Restore the initial position of the 3-D view

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 335

11.3 Fixture Monitoring (Software Option)
Placing the fixture on the machine

Insert a touch probe before you place a fixture!

U Call the fixture management

U Select the fixture: The TNC opens the menu for fixture
selection and shows in the left window all fixtures
available in the active directory. Fixtures have the file
name extension CFX
U In the left window, use the mouse or arrow keys to
select a fixture. In the right window the TNC shows a
preview of the respectively selected fixture
U Load fixture: The TNC calculates the required
Sequence of measurement and displays it in the left
window. In the right window it shows the fixture.
Measurement points are marked with a colored
datum symbol
U Start the measurement process: The TNC shows a
soft-key row with permitted scanning functions for
the respective measuring process
U Select the required probing function: The TNC is in the
menu for manual probing. Description of the probing
functions: See “Overview,” page 461.
U At the end of the probing process the TNC displays
the measured values
U Load the measured values: The TNC ends the
measuring process, checks it off in the measurement
sequence and places the highlight on the subsequent
task
U If input of a value is required in the respective fixture,
the TNC shows a highlight at the lower end of the
screen. Enter the requested value, e.g. jaw width of a
vice, and confirm with the ACCEPT VALUE soft key
U When all measuring tasks are checked off by the TNC,
complete the measuring process with the
COMPLETE soft key

The sequence of measurement is specified in the fixture

template. You have to run through the sequence of
measurements step by step from top to bottom.
With multiple setup you have to place each fixture
separately.

336 Programming: Special Functions

 11.3 Fixture Monitoring (Software Option)
Editing fixtures

Risk of collision!
Only value input is editable. The position of the fixture on
the machine table cannot be corrected after placement. To
change the position of the fixture you have to remove it
first and then place it again!

U Call the fixture management

U Use the mouse or the arrow keys to select the fixture
that you want to edit. The TNC highlights the selected
fixture with color
U To change the selected fixture, in the measurement
sequence window the TNC shows the fixture
parameters that you can edit
U Confirm removal with the YES soft key or cancel it
with NO

Removing fixtures

Risk of collision!
If you remove a fixture, the TNC no longer monitors it,
even if it is still clamped on the machine table! Watch out
for possible collisions!

U Call the fixture management

U Use the mouse or the arrow keys to select the fixture
that you want to remove. The TNC highlights the
selected fixture with color
U Remove selected fixture
U Confirm removal with the YES soft key or cancel it
with NO

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 337

11.3 Fixture Monitoring (Software Option)
Check the position of the measured fixture
To inspect measured fixtures, you can have the TNC generate a test
program. You have to run the inspection program in the Full Sequence
operating mode. The TNC probes test points that are specified by the
fixture designer in the fixture template and evaluates them. It provides
the result of the inspection on screen and in a log file.

The TNC always saves inspection programs in the

TNC:\system\FixtureMes directory.

U Call the fixture management

U In the Place fixtures window, use the mouse to
mark the fixture to be inspected. The TNC displays
the marked fixture in a different color in the 3-D view
U Start the dialog for generating the inspection program.
The TNC opens the window for entering the Test
program parameters
U Manual positioning: Specify whether you want to
position the touch probe manually or automatically
between the individual inspection points:
1: Manual positioning. You have to move to each
inspection point with the axis-direction keys and
confirm the measuring process with NC start
0: After you have manually pre-positioned the touch
probe to clearance height, the test program runs
automatically
U Feed rate for measurement:
Touch probe feed rate in mm/min for the measuring
process. Input range 0 to 3000
U Feed rate for pre-positioning:
Positioning feed rate in mm/min for moving to the
individual measurement positions. Input range 0 to
99999.999

338 Programming: Special Functions

 11.3 Fixture Monitoring (Software Option)
U Set-up clearance:
Setup clearance to the measuring point that the TNC
should maintain during pre-positioning. Input range 0
to 99999.9999
U Tolerance:
Maximum permissible deviation between nominal
and actual position of the respective test points. Input
range 0 to 99999.999. If the test point is out of
tolerance, the TNC issues an error message
U Tool number/tool name:
Tool number (or name) of the touch probe. Input
range 0 to 32767.9 if a number is entered; maximum
16 characters if a name is entered. If entering a tool
name, enter it between single quotation marks
U Confirm the entries: The TNC generates the test
program, shows the name of the test program in a
pop-up window and asks whether you want to run the
test program
U Answer with NO if you want to run the test program
later, and with YES if you want to run it now
U If you have confirmed with YES, the TNC changes to
the Full Sequence mode and automatically selects
the generated program
U Start the test program: The TNC prompts you to
manually pre-position the touch probe so that it is
located at clearance height. Follow the instructions in
the pop-up window
U Start the measuring process: The TNC moves to each
test point one after the other. With a soft key you
specify the positioning strategy. Conform with NC
start each time
U At the end of the test program the TNC displays a pop-
up window with the deviations from the nominal
position. If a test point is out of tolerance, the TNC
issues an error message in the pop-up window

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 339

11.4 Global Program Settings (Software Option)
11.4 Global Program Settings
(Software Option)
Function
The global program settings, which are used in particular for large
molds and dies, are available in the Program Run mode and MDI
mode. You can use them to define various coordinate transformations
and settings that are globally effective and are superimposed on the
respectively selected NC program so that you do not need to edit the
NC program.
You can activate and deactivate global program settings, even in mid-
program if you have interrupted the program run (see “Interrupting
machining” on page 502). The TNC immediately accounts for the
values you have defined after you have restarted the NC program. The
control might move to the new position over the reapproach menu
(see “Returning to the contour” on page 509).
The following global program settings are available:

Functions Icon Page

Basic rotation Page 345

Swapping axes Page 346

Additional, additive datum shift Page 347

Superimposed mirroring Page 347

Superimposed rotation Page 348

Axis locking Page 348

Definition of a handwheel superimposition, Page 349

even in the virtual axis direction

Definition of a globally effective feed rate Page 348

factor

340 Programming: Special Functions

 11.4 Global Program Settings (Software Option)
You cannot use global program run settings if you have
used the M91/M92 function (moving to machine-referenced
positions) in your NC program.
„ Swapping axes
„ Locking axes
You can use the look-ahead function M120 if you have
activated the global program settings before starting the
program. If M120 is active and you change global settings
during the program, the TNC will show an error message
and stop any further machining.
If DCM collision monitoring is active you can only move
with handwheel superimposition if you have interrupted
the machining program with an external stop.
In the fillable form the TNC grays out any axes that are not
active on your machine.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 341

11.4 Global Program Settings (Software Option)
Technical prerequisites

The global program settings function is a software option

and must be enabled by your machine tool builder.

To be able to use the handwheel superimposition function,

HEIDENHAIN recommends the use of the HR 420 handwheel (see
“HR 420 electronic handwheel” on page 435). direct selection of the
virtual tool axis is possible with the HR 420.
In principle, you can then use the HR 410 handwheel, but your
machine tool builder must then assign a function key of the handwheel
to selection of the virtual tool axis and program it in his PLC program.

To be able to use all functions without limits, the following

machine parameters must be set:
„ MP7641, bit 4 = 1:
Permit selection of the virtual axis on the HR 420
„ MP7503 = 1:
Traverse in active tool-axis direction is active in the
Manual operating mode and during a program
interruption
„ MP7682, bit 9 = 1:
Automatically transfer the tilted condition from the
automatic mode to the Manual mode
„ MP7682, bit 10 = 1:
Permit 3-D compensation with active tilted working
plane and active M128 (TCPM)

342 Programming: Special Functions

 11.4 Global Program Settings (Software Option)
Activating/deactivating a function

Global program settings remain active until you manually

reset them.
If a global program setting is active, the TNC shows
the symbol in the position display.
If you use the file manager to select a program, the TNC
displays a warning message if global settings are active.
Then you can simply acknowledge the message with the
soft key or call the form directly to make the changes.
Global program settings have no effect in the smarT.NC
operating mode.

U Select the Program Run or Manual Data Input

operating mode
U Shift the soft-key row

U Call the global program settings form

U Activate the desired functions with the corresponding
values

If you activate more than one global program setting, the

TNC calculates the transformations internally in the
following sequence:
„ 1: Basic rotation
„ 2: Axis swapping
„ 3: Mirror image
„ 4: Shift
„ 5: Superimposed rotation

The remaining functions such as axis locking, handwheel

superimposition and feed rate factor act independently.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 343

11.4 Global Program Settings (Software Option)
The following functions help you to navigate in the form. You can also
use the mouse to use the form.

Key/Soft
Functions
key
Jump to previous function

Jump to next function

Select the next element

Select the previous element

Axis swapping function: Open the list of available

axes

Switch the function on/off if the cursor is on a check

box

Reset the global program settings:

„ Deactivate all functions
„ Set all entered values to 0, set feed rate factor to
100. Set basic rotation = 0 if no basic rotation is
active in the basic rotation menu or in the ROT
column of the active preset in the preset table.
Otherwise the TNC activates the basic rotation
entered there

Discard all changes since the form was last called

Deactivate all active functions. The entered or

adjusted values remain

Save all changes and close the form

344 Programming: Special Functions

 11.4 Global Program Settings (Software Option)
Basic rotation
The basic rotation function enables you to compensate a workpiece
misalignment. The effect corresponds to the basic rotation function
that you can define in the manual mode with the probing functions.
The TNC synchronizes the values entered in the basic rotation menu
or the ROT column of the preset table with the fillable form.
You can change the basic rotation values in the form, but the TNC
does not write them back into the basic rotation menu or the preset
table.
If you press the SET STANDARD VALUES soft key, the TNC restores
the basic rotation assigned to the active preset.

Remember that you may have to return to the contour after

activation of this function. The TNC then automatically calls
the return-to-contour menu after the form is closed (see
“Returning to the contour” on page 509).

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 345

11.4 Global Program Settings (Software Option)
Swapping axes
With the axis swapping function you can adapt the axes programmed
in any NC program to your machine’s axis configuration or to the
respective clamping situation.

After activation of the axis swapping function, all

subsequent transformations are applied to the swapped
axes.
Be sure to swap the axes appropriately. Otherwise the
TNC will display error messages.
Remember that you may have to return to the contour after
activation of this function. The TNC then automatically calls
the return-to-contour menu after the form is closed (see
“Returning to the contour” on page 509).

U In the global program settings form, move the cursor to EXCHANGE

ON/OFF, and use the SPACE key to activate the function
U With the downward arrow key, set the cursor to the line showing at
left the axis to be swapped
U Press the GOTO key to display the list of axes with which you can
exchange it
U With the downward arrow key, select the axes with which you wish
to exchange, and confirm with the ENT key
If you work with a mouse, you can select the desired axis directly by
clicking it in the respective pull-down menu.

346 Programming: Special Functions

 11.4 Global Program Settings (Software Option)
Superimposed mirroring
With the superimposed mirroring function you can mirror all active
axes.

The mirrored axes defined in the form work in addition to

the values already defined in the program through Cycle 8
(mirroring).
Remember that you may have to return to the contour after
activation of this function. The TNC then automatically calls
the return-to-contour menu after the form is closed (see
“Returning to the contour” on page 509).

U In the global program settings form, move the cursor to MIRRORING

ON/OFF, and use the SPACE key to activate the function
U With the downward arrow key, set the cursor to the axis that you
want to mirror
U Press the SPACE key to mirror the axis. Pressing the SPACE key
again cancels the function
If you work with a mouse, you can select the desired axis directly by
clicking it.

Additional, additive datum shift

With the additive datum shift function you can compensate any
offsets in all active axes.

The values defined in the form work in addition to the

values already defined in the program through Cycle 7
(datum shift).
Please note that the shifts defined when the working plane
is tilted are effective in the machine coordinate system.
Remember that you may have to return to the contour after
activation of this function. The TNC then automatically calls
the return-to-contour menu after the form is closed (see
“Returning to the contour” on page 509).

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 347

11.4 Global Program Settings (Software Option)
Axis locking
With this function you can lock all active axes. Then when you run a
program, the TNC does not move any of the axes you locked.

Risk of collision!
When you activate this function, ensure that the positions
of the locked axes cannot cause any collisions.

U In the global program settings form, move the cursor to LOCK

ON/OFF, and activate the function with the SPACE key
U With the downward arrow key, set the cursor to the axis that you
want to lock
U Press the SPACE key to lock the axis. Pressing the SPACE key again
cancels the function
If you work with a mouse, you can select the desired axis directly by
clicking it.

Superimposed rotation
With the superimposed rotation function you can define any rotation
of the coordinate system in the presently active working plane.

The superimposed rotation defined in the form works in

addition to the values already defined in the program
through Cycle 10 (rotation).
Remember that you may have to return to the contour after
activation of this function. The TNC then automatically calls
the return-to-contour menu after the form is closed (see
“Returning to the contour” on page 509).

Feed rate override

With the feed rate override function, you can decrease or increase the
programmed feed rate by a percentage. The input range is 1% to
1000%.

Remember that the TNC always applies the feed rate

factor to the current feed rate, which you may already have
changed through the feed rate override.

348 Programming: Special Functions

 11.4 Global Program Settings (Software Option)
Handwheel superimposition
The handwheel superimposition function enables you to use the
handwheel to move the axes while the TNC is running a program.
In the Max. val. column you define the maximum distance by which
you can move the axis by handwheel. As soon as you interrupt the
program run (control-in-operation signal is off), the TNC shows the
distances actually moved in each axis in the actual value column. The
actual value remains saved until you delete it, even after a power
interruption. You can also edit the actual value. If required, the TNC
decreases the value that you entered to the respective Max. val.

If a actual value is shown during activation, then when

the window closes, the TNC calls the “Return to contour”
function to move by the defined value (see “Returning to
the contour” on page 509).
The TNC overwrites a maximum traverse distance, already
defined in the NC program with M118 by the value entered
in the form. In turn, the TNC enters distances that have
already been traversed with the handwheel using M118 in
the actual value column of the form so that there is no
jump in the display during activation. If the distance already
traversed with M118 is greater than the maximum
permissible value in the form, then when the window
closes the TNC calls the “return to contour” function in
order to move by the difference value (see “Returning to
the contour” on page 509).
If you try to enter a actual value greater than the max.
value, the TNC shows an error message. Never enter an
actual value greater that the Max. value.
Do not enter too large a value for max. value. The TNC
reduces the useable traverse range in positive and
negative direction by the value you enter.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 349

11.4 Global Program Settings (Software Option)
Virtual axis VT
You can also carry out handwheel superimpositioning in the currently
active tool axis direction. You can use the Virtual Tool axis line (VT).
You can select the VT axis via the HR 420 handwheel in order to
traverse with superimpositioning in the virtual axis direction (see
“Selecting the axis to be moved” on page 436).
The TNC also shows the path traversed in the virtual axis in the
additional status display (POS tab) in the separate VT position display.

The TNC deactivates the value traversed in the virtual axis

direction as soon as you call a new tool.
You can only move with handwheel superimpositioning in
the virtual axis direction if DCM is inactive.
The TNC reduced the feed rate during superimposed rotary
axis movements depending on the maximum value
entered in the virtual axis VT. Otherwise, rapid traverse
could be exceeded when moving the rotary axes in the
linear axes X, Y or Z.

350 Programming: Special Functions

 11.5 Adaptive Feed Control Software Option (AFC)
11.5 Adaptive Feed Control
Software Option (AFC)
Function

The AFC feature must be enabled and adapted by the

machine tool builder. Refer to your machine manual.
Your machine tool builder may also have specified whether
the TNC uses the spindle power or any other value as the
input value for the feed control.

Adaptive feed control is not intended for tools with

diameters less than 5 mm. This limit diameter might also
be greater if the spindle’s rated power is very high.
Do not work with adaptive feed control in operations in
which the feed rate and spindle speed must be adapted to
each other, such as tapping.

In adaptive feed control the TNC automatically controls the feed rate
during program run as a function of the current spindle power
consumption. The spindle power required for each machining step is
to be recorded in a teach-in cut and saved by the TNC in a file
belonging to the part program. When each machining step is started,
which is normally when the spindle is switched on with M3, the TNC
controls the feed rate so that it remains within the limits that you have
defined.
This makes it possible to avoid negative effects on the tool, the
workpiece, and the machine that might be caused by changing cutting
conditions. Cutting conditions are changed particularly by:
„ Tool wear
„ Fluctuating cutting depths that occur especially with cast parts
„ Fluctuating hardness caused by material flaws

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 351

11.5 Adaptive Feed Control Software Option (AFC)
Adaptive feed control (AFC) offers the following benefits:
„ Optimization of machining time
By controlling the feed rate, the TNC tries to maintain the recorded
maximum spindle power during the entire machining time. It
shortens the machining time by increasing the feed rate in
machining zones with little material removal.
„ Tool monitoring
If the spindle power exceeds the recorded maximum value, the TNC
decreases the feed rate until the reference spindle power is
reattained. If the maximum spindle power is exceeded during
machining and at the same time the feed rate falls below the
minimum that you defined, the TNC reacts by shutting down. This
helps to prevent further damage after a tool breaks or is worn out.
„ Protection of the machine’s mechanical elements
Timely feed rate reduction and shutdown responses help to avoid
machine overload.

352 Programming: Special Functions

 11.5 Adaptive Feed Control Software Option (AFC)
Defining the AFC basic settings
You enter the settings for the TNC feed rate control in the table
AFC.TAB, which must be saved in the root directory TNC:\.
The data in this table are default values that were copied during a
teach-in cut into a file belonging to the respective program and serve
as the basis for control. The following data are to be defined in this
table:

Column Function
NR Consecutive line number in the table (has no further
functions)

AFC Name of the control setting. You enter this name in the
AFC column of the tool table. It specifies the assignment
of control parameters to the tool.

FMIN Feed rate at which the TNC is to conduct a shutdown

response. Enter the value in percent with respect to the
programmed feed rate. Input range: 50 to 100%

FMAX Maximum feed rate in the material up to which the TNC

can automatically increase the feed rate. Enter the value
in percent of the programmed feed rate.

FIDL Feed rate for traverse when the tool is not cutting (feed
rate in the air). Enter the value in percent of the
programmed feed rate.

FENT Feed rate for traverse when the tool moves into or out
of the material. Enter the value in percent with respect
to the programmed feed rate. Maximum input value:
100%

OVLD Desired reaction of the TNC to overload:

„ M: Execution of a macro defined by the machine tool
builder
„ S: Immediate NC stop
„ F: NC stop if the tool has been retracted
„ E: Just display an error message on the screen
„ -: No overload reaction
The TNC conducts a shutdown response if the
maximum spindle power is exceeded for more than one
second and at the same time the feed rate falls below
the minimum you defined. Enter the desired function via
the ASCII keyboard.

POUT Spindle power at which the TNC is to detect tool exit

from the workpiece. Enter the value in percent of the
learned reference load. Recommended input value: 8%

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 353

11.5 Adaptive Feed Control Software Option (AFC)
Column Function
SENS Sensitivity (aggressiveness) of regulation. A value
between 50 and 200 can be entered. 50 is for slow
control, 200 for a very aggressive control. An aggressive
control reacts quickly and with strong changes to the
values, but it tends to overshoot. Recommended value:
100

PLC Value that the TNC is to transfer to the PLC at the

beginning of a machining step. The machine tool builder
defines the function, so refer to your machine manual.

In the AFC.TAB table you can define as many control

settings (lines) as desired.
If there is no AFC.TAB table in the TNC:\ directory, the TNC
uses permanently defined internal control settings for the
teach-in cut. It is best, however, to work with the AFC.TAB
table.

Proceed as follows to create the AFC.TAB file (only necessary if the

file does not yet exist):
U Select the Programming and Editing operating mode
U Press the PGM MGT soft key to call the file manager
U Select the TNC:\ directory
U Make the new file AFC.TAB and confirm with the ENT key: The TNC
shows a list of table formats
U Select the AFC.TAB table format and confirm with the ENT key: The
TNC creates a table with the Standard control settings

354 Programming: Special Functions

 11.5 Adaptive Feed Control Software Option (AFC)
Recording a teach-in cut
In a teach-in cut, first the TNC copies for each machining step the
basic settings defined in the AFC.TAB table into the <name>.H.AFC.DEP
file. <Name> is the name of the NC program for which you have
recorded the teach-in cut. In addition, the TNC measures the
maximum spindle power consumed during the teach-in cut and saves
this value in the table.
Each line in the <name>.H.AFC.DEP file stands for a machining step that
you start with M3 (or. M4) and end with M5. You can edit all data of the
<name>.H.AFC.DEP file if you wish to optimize them. If you have
optimized the values in comparison with the values in the AFC.TAB
table, the TNC places an asterisk * in front of the control settings in
the AFC column. Besides the data from the AFC.TAB table (see
“Defining the AFC basic settings” on page 353), the TNC saves the
following additional information in the <name>.H.AFC.DEP file:

Column Function
NR Number of the machining step

TOOL Number or name of the tool with which the machining

step was made (not editable)

IDX Index of the tool with which the machining step was
made (not editable)

N Difference for tool call:

„ 0: Tool was called by its tool number.
„ 1: Tool was called by its tool name.

PREF Reference load of the spindle. The TNC measures the

value in percent with respect to the rated power of the
spindle.

ST Status of the machining step

„ L: In the next program run, a teach-in cut is recorded
for this machining step. The TNC overwrites any
existing values in this line.
„ C: The teach-in cut was successfully completed. The
next program run can be conducted with automatic
feed control.

AFC Name of the control setting

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 355

11.5 Adaptive Feed Control Software Option (AFC)
Remember the following before you record a teach-in cut:
„ If required, adapt the control settings in the AFC.TAB table
„ Enter the desired control setting for all tools in the AFC column of the
tool table TOOL.T.
„ Select the program for teach-in.
„ Activate the adaptive feed control by soft key (see
“Activating/deactivating AFC” on page 358).

When you are performing a teach-in cut, the TNC shows

the spindle reference power determined until this time in a
pop-up window.
You can reset the reference power at any time by pressing
the PREF RESET soft key. The TNC then restarts the
learning phase.
When you record a teach-in cut, the TNC internally sets the
spindle override to 100%. Then you can no longer change
the spindle speed.
During the teach-in cut, you can influence the measured
reference load by using the feed rate override to make any
changes to the contouring feed rate.
You do not have to run the entire machining step in the
learning mode. If the cutting conditions do not change
significantly, you can switch to the control mode
immediately. Press the EXIT LEARNING soft key, and the
status changes from L to C.
You can repeat a teach-in cut as often as desired. Manually
change the status from ST back to L. It may be necessary
to repeat the teach-in cut if the programmed feed rate is far
too fast, and forces you to sharply decrease the feed rate
override during the machining step.
The TNC changes the status from teach-in (L) to
controlling (C) only when the recorded reference load is
greater than 2%. Adaptive feed control is not possible for
smaller values.

You can teach any number of machining steps for a tool.

Your machine tool builder will either make a function
available for this, or will integrate this possibility in the
M3/M4 and M5 functions. The machine tool manual provides
further information.
You machine tool builder can provide a feature with which
the teach-in cut can be automatically ended after a
selectable time. The machine tool manual provides further
information.
In addition, your machine tool builder can integrate a
function with which you can directly enter the reference
power of the spindle, if it is known. In this case an teach-in
step is not required.

356 Programming: Special Functions

 11.5 Adaptive Feed Control Software Option (AFC)
Proceed as follows to select and, if required, edit the
<name>.H.AFC.DEP file:
U Select the Program Run, Full Sequence mode of
operation.

U Shift the soft-key row.

U Select the table of AFC settings.

U Make optimizations if required

Note that the <name>.H.AFC.DEP file is locked against

editing as long as the NC program <name>.H is running. The
TNC then displays the data in the table in red.
The TNC removes the editing lock if one of the following
functions has been executed:
„ M02
„ M30
„ END PGM

You can also edit the <name>.H.AFC.DEP file in the Programming and
Editing mode of operation. If necessary, you can even delete a
machining step (entire line) there.

In order to edit the <name>.H.AFC.DEP file, you must first

set the file manager so that the TNC can display dependent
files (see “Configuring PGM MGT” on page 535).

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 357

11.5 Adaptive Feed Control Software Option (AFC)
Activating/deactivating AFC
U Select the Program Run, Full Sequence mode of
operation.

U Shift the soft-key row.

U To activate the adaptive feed control: Set the soft key

to ON, and the TNC displays the AFC symbol in the
position display (see “Status Displays” on page 77).
U To deactivate the adaptive feed control: Set the soft
key to OFF.

The adaptive feed control remains active until you

deactivate it by soft key. The TNC remembers the setting
of the soft key even if the power is interrupted.
If the adaptive feed control is active in the control mode,
the TNC internally sets the spindle override to 100%. Then
you can no longer change the spindle speed.
If the adaptive feed control is active in the control mode,
the TNC takes over the feed rate override function:
„ If you increase the feed rate override, it has no influence
on the control.
„ If you decrease the feed rate override by more than 10%
with respect to the maximum setting, the TNC switches
the adaptive feed control off. In this case the TNC
displays a window to inform you.
In NC blocks containing FMAX, the adaptive feed control is
not active.
Mid-program startup is allowed during active feed control
and the TNC takes the cut number of the startup point into
account.
In the additional status display, the TNC displays various
information when the adaptive feed control is active (see
“Adaptive Feed Control (AFC tab, software option)” on
page 85). In addition, the TNC shows the symbol in the
position display.

358 Programming: Special Functions

 11.5 Adaptive Feed Control Software Option (AFC)
Log file
In a teach-in cut, the TNC saves for each machining step relevant data
in the <name>.H.AFC2.DEP file. <Name> is the name of the NC program
for which you have recorded the teach-in cut. During control, the TNC
updates the data and makes various evaluations. The following data
are to be saved in this table:

Column Function
NR Number of the machining step

TOOL Number or name of the tool with which the machining

step was made

IDX Index of the tool with which the machining step was
made

SNOM Nominal spindle speed [rpm]

SDIF Maximum difference of the spindle speed in % of the

nominal speed

LTIME Machining time for the teach-in cut

CTIME Machining time for the control cut

TDIFF Time difference in % between the machining time

during teach-in and control

PMAX Maximum recorded spindle power during machining.

The TNC displays the value in percent with respect to
the rated power of the spindle.

PREF Reference load of the spindle. The TNC shows the value
as a percent of the spindle’s rated power.

FMIN Smallest occurring feed factor. The TNC shows the

value as a percentage of the programmed feed rate.

OVLD Reaction by the TNC to overload:

„ M: A macro defined by the machine tool builder has
been run
„ S: Immediate NC stop was conducted
„ F: NC stop was conducted after the tool was been
retracted
„ E: An error message was displayed
„ -: There was no overload reaction

BLOCK Block number at which the machining step begins

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 359

11.5 Adaptive Feed Control Software Option (AFC)
The TNC records the total machining time for all teach-in
cuts (LTIME), all control cuts (CTIME) and the total time
difference (TDIFF), and enters it after the keyword TOTAL
in the last line of the log file.
The TNC can only calculate the time difference (TDIFF) if
you have completed the teach-in step. Otherwise the
column remains empty.

Proceed as follows to select the <name>.H.AFC2.DEP file:

U Select the Program Run, Full Sequence mode of
operation.

U Shift the soft-key row.

U Select the table of AFC settings.

U Show the log file.

360 Programming: Special Functions

 11.5 Adaptive Feed Control Software Option (AFC)
Tool breakage/tool wear monitoring

This feature must be enabled and adapted by the machine

tool builder. Refer to your machine manual.

With the breakage/wear monitor, a cut-based tool breakage detection

during active AFC can be realized.
Through the functions that can be defined by the machine tool builder
you can define a percentage value for wear or breakage detection with
respect to the rated power.
When the defined limit spindle power range is not maintained, the
TNC conducts an NC stop.

Spindle load monitoring

This feature must be enabled and adapted by the machine

tool builder. Refer to your machine manual.

With the spindle load monitoring function you can easily have the
spindle load monitored in order, for example, to detect overloading the
spindle power.
The function is independent of AFC, i.e. it is not cut-based and does
not depend on teach-in steps. Through the functions that can be
defined by the machine tool builder, you only need to define the
percentage value for spindle limit power with respect to the rated
power.
When the defined limit spindle power range is not maintained, the
TNC conducts an NC stop.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 361

11.6 Creating Text Files
11.6 Creating Text Files
Function
You can use the TNC’s text editor to write and edit texts. Typical
applications:
„ Recording test results
„ Documenting working procedures
„ Creating formula collections
Text files have the extension .A (for ASCII files). If you want to edit
other types of files, you must first convert them into type .A files.

Opening and exiting text files

U Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation
U Press the PGM MGT key to call the file manager
U To display type .A files, press the SELECT TYPE and then the SHOW
.A soft keys
U Select a file and open it with the SELECT soft key or ENT key, or
create a new file by entering the new file name and confirming your
entry with the ENT key
To leave the text editor, call the file manager and select a file of a
different file type, for example a part program.

Cursor movements Soft key

Move cursor one word to the right

Move cursor one word to the left

Go to next screen page

Go to previous screen page

Go to beginning of file

Go to end of file

Editing functions Key

Begin a new line

Erase the character to the left of the cursor

362 Programming: Special Functions

 11.6 Creating Text Files
Editing functions Key
Insert a blank space

Switch between upper and lower case letters

Editing texts
The first line of the text editor is an information headline displaying the
file name, and the location and writing mode of the cursor:
File: Name of the text file
Line: Line in which the cursor is presently located
Column: Column in which the cursor is presently located
INSERT: Insert new text, pushing the existing text to the right
OVERWRITE: Write over the existing text, erasing it by replacing it
with new text

The text is inserted or overwritten at the location of the cursor. You

can move the cursor to any desired position in the text file by pressing
the arrow keys.
The line in which the cursor is presently located is depicted in a
different color. A line can have up to 77 characters. To start a new line,
press the RET key or the ENT key.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 363

11.6 Creating Text Files
Deleting and inserting characters, words and
lines
With the text editor, you can erase words and even lines, and insert
them at any desired location in the text.
U Move the cursor to the word or line that you wish to erase and insert
at a different place in the text
U Press the DELETE WORD or DELETE LINE soft key. The text is
placed in the buffer memory
U Move the cursor to the location where you wish to insert the text,
and press the RESTORE LINE/WORD soft key

Function Soft key

Delete and temporarily store a line

Delete and temporarily store a word

Delete and temporarily store a character

Insert a line or word from temporary storage

364 Programming: Special Functions

 11.6 Creating Text Files
Editing text blocks
You can copy and erase text blocks of any size, and insert them at
other locations. Before any of these actions, you must first select the
desired text block:
U To select a text block, move the cursor to the first character of the
text you wish to select
U Press the SELECT BLOCK soft key

U Move the cursor to the last character of the text you

wish to select You can select whole lines by moving
the cursor up or down directly with the arrow keys—
the selected text is shown in a different color
After selecting the desired text block, you can edit the text with the
following soft keys:

Function Soft key

Delete the selected text and store temporarily

Store marked block temporarily without erasing

(copy)

If desired, you can now insert the temporarily stored block at a

different location:
U Move the cursor to the location where you want to insert the
temporarily stored text block
U Press the INSERT BLOCK soft key for the text block
to be inserted
You can insert the temporarily stored text block as often as desired

To transfer the selected text to a different file

U Select the text block as described previously
U Press the APPEND TO FILE soft key. The TNC
displays the dialog prompt Destination file =
U Enter the path and name of the target file. The TNC
appends the selected text to the specified file. If no
target file with the specified name is found, the TNC
creates a new file with the selected text.

To insert another file at the cursor position,

U Move the cursor to the location in the text where you wish to insert
another file
U Press the READ FILE soft key. The TNC displays the
dialog prompt File name =
U Enter the path and name of the file you want to insert

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 365

11.6 Creating Text Files
Finding text sections
With the text editor, you can search for words or character strings in a
text. Two functions are available:

Finding the current text

The search function is used for finding the next occurrence of the
word in which the cursor is presently located:
U Move the cursor to the desired word
U To select the search function, press the FIND soft key
U Press the FIND CURRENT WORD soft key
U To leave the search function, press the END soft key

Finding any text

U To select the search function, press the FIND soft key The TNC
displays the dialog prompt Find text:
U Enter the text that you wish to find
U To find the text, press the EXECUTE soft key
U To leave the search function, press the END soft key

366 Programming: Special Functions

 11.7 Working with Cutting Data Tables
11.7 Working with Cutting Data
Tables
Note

The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool

builder for the use of cutting data tables.
Some functions or additional functions described here
may not be provided on your machine tool. Refer to your
machine manual.

Applications
In cutting data tables containing various workpiece and cutting DATEI: TOOL.T MM
material combinations, the TNC can use the cutting speed VC and the T R CUT. TYP TMAT CDT
0 ... ... ... ... ...
tooth feed Z to calculate the spindle speed S and the feed rate F. This 1 ... ... ... ... ...
2 +5 4 MILL HSS PRO1
calculation is only possible if you defined the workpiece material in the 3 ... ... ... ... ...
program and various tool-specific features in the tool table. 4 ... ... ... ... ...

Before you let the TNC automatically calculate the cutting DATEI: PRO1.CDT
NR WMAT TMAT Vc1 F1
data, the tool table from which the TNC is to take the tool- 0 ... ... ... ...
specific data must be first be activated in the Test Run 1 ... ... ... ...
2 ST65 HSS 40 0.06
mode (status S). 3 ... ... ... ...
4 ... ... ... ...

Editing function for cutting data tables Soft key

0 BEGIN PGM xxx.H MM
1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20
Insert line 2 BLK FORM 0.2 Z X+100 Y+100 Z+0
3 WMAT "ST65"
4 ...
5 TOOL CALL 2 Z S1273 F305
Delete line

Go to beginning of next line

Sort the table

Copy the highlighted field (2nd soft-key row)

Insert the copied field (2nd soft-key row)

Edit the table format (2nd soft-key row)

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 367

11.7 Working with Cutting Data Tables
Table for workpiece materials
Workpiece materials are defined in the table WMAT.TAB (see figure).
WMAT.TAB is stored in the TNC:\ directory and can contain as many
materials as you want. The name of the material type can have up to
32 characters (including spaces). The TNC displays the contents of the
NAME column when you are defining the workpiece material in the
program (see the following section).

If you change the standard workpiece material table, you

must copy it into a new directory. Otherwise your changes
will be overwritten during a software update by the
HEIDENHAIN standard data. Define the path in the
TNC.SYS file with the code word WMAT= (see
“Configuration file TNC.SYS,” page 372).
To avoid losing data, save the WMAT.TAB file at regular
intervals.

Defining the workpiece material in the NC program

In the NC program select the workpiece material from the WMAT.TAB
table using the WMAT soft key:
U Show the soft-key row with special functions

U Program the workpiece material: In the Programming

and Editing operating mode, press the WMAT soft
key.
U The WMAT.TAB table is superimposed: Press the
SELECTION WINDOW soft key, and in a second
window the TNC displays the list of materials that are
stored in the WMAT.TAB table.
U Select your workpiece material by using the arrow
keys to move the highlight onto the material you wish
to select and confirming with the ENT key. The TNC
transfers the selected material to the WMAT block.
U To terminate the dialog, press the END key.

If you change the WMAT block in a program, the TNC

outputs a warning. Check whether the cutting data stored
in the TOOL CALL block are still valid.

368 Programming: Special Functions

 11.7 Working with Cutting Data Tables
Table for tool cutting materials
Tool cutting materials are defined in the TMAT.TAB table. TMAT.TAB
is stored in the TNC:\ directory and can contain as many material
names as you want (see figure). The name of the cutting material type
can have up to 16 characters (including spaces). The TNC displays the
NAME column when you are defining the tool cutting material in the
TOOL.T tool table.

If you change the standard tool cutting material table, you

must copy it into a new directory. Otherwise your changes
will be overwritten during a software update by the
HEIDENHAIN standard data. Define the path in the
TNC.SYS file with the code word TMAT= (see
“Configuration file TNC.SYS,” page 372).
To avoid losing data, save the TMAT.TAB file at regular
intervals.

Table for cutting data

Define the workpiece material/cutting material combinations with the
corresponding cutting data in a file table with the file name extension
.CDT; see figure. You can freely configure the entries in the cutting
data table. Besides the obligatory columns NR, WMAT and TMAT, the
TNC can also manage up to four cutting speed (VC) / feed rate (F)
combinations.
The standard cutting data table FRAES_2.CDT is stored in the
directory TNC:\. You can edit FRAES_2.CDT, or add as many new
cutting-data tables as you wish.

If you change the standard cutting data table, you must

copy it into a new directory. Otherwise your changes will
be overwritten during a software update by the
HEIDENHAIN standard data (see “Configuration file
TNC.SYS,” page 372).
All of the cutting data tables must be stored in the same
directory. If the directory is not the standard directory
TNC:\, then behind the code word PCDT= you must enter
the path in which your cutting data is stored.
To avoid losing data, save your cutting data tables at
regular intervals.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 369

11.7 Working with Cutting Data Tables
Creating a new cutting data table
U Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation
U Press the PGM MGT soft key to call the file manager
U Select the directory where the cutting data table is to be stored
U Enter any file name with the file name extension .CDT, and confirm
with ENT
U On the right half of the screen, the TNC opens a standard cutting
data table or displays various table formats (machine-dependent).
These tables differ from each other in the number of cutting
speed/feed rate combinations they allow. In this case use the arrow
keys to move the highlight onto the table format you wish to select
and confirm with ENT The TNC generates a new, empty cutting data
table

Data required for the tool table

„ Tool radius—column R (DR)
„ Number of teeth (only with tools for milling)—column CUT
„ Tool type—column TYPE
„ The tool type influences the calculation of the feed rate:
Milling tool: F = S · fZ · z
All other tools: F = S · fU
S: Spindle speed
fZ: Feed per tooth
fU: Feed per revolution
z: Number of teeth
„ Tool cutting material—column TMAT
„ Name of the cutting data table for which this tool will be used—
column CDT
„ In the tool table, select the tool type, tool cutting material and the
name of the cutting data table via soft key (see “Tool table: Tool data
for automatic speed/feed rate calculation,” page 161).

370 Programming: Special Functions

 11.7 Working with Cutting Data Tables
Working with automatic speed / feed rate
calculation
1 If it has not already been entered, enter the type of workpiece
material in the file WMAT.TAB.
2 If it has not already been entered, enter the type of cutting material
in the file TMAT.TAB.
3 If not already entered, enter all of the required tool-specific data in
the tool table:
„ Tool radius
„ Number of teeth
„ Tool type
„ Tool material
„ The cutting data table for each tool
4 If not already entered, enter the cutting data in any cutting data
table (CDT file).
5 Test Run operating mode: Activate the tool table from which the
TNC is to take the tool-specific data (status S).
6 In the NC program, set the workpiece material by pressing the
WMAT soft key.
7 In the NC program, let the T block automatically calculate the
spindle speed and feed rate via soft key.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 371

11.7 Working with Cutting Data Tables
Data transfer from cutting data tables
If you output a file type .TAB or .CDT via an external data interface, the
TNC also transfers the structural definition of the table. The structural
definition begins with the line #STRUCTBEGIN and ends with the line
#STRUCTEND. The meanings of the individual code words are shown
in the table “Structure Command”. Behind #STRUCTEND the TNC
saves the actual content of the table.

Configuration file TNC.SYS

You must use the configuration file TNC.SYS if your cutting data tables
are not stored in the standard directory TNC:\. In TNC.SYS you must
then define the paths in which you have stored your cutting data
tables.

The TNC.SYS file must be stored in the root directory

TNC:\.

Entries in TNC.SYS Meaning

WMAT= Path for workpiece material table

TMAT= Path for cutting material table

PCDT= Path for cutting data tables

Example of TNC.SYS
WMAT=TNC:\CUTTAB\WMAT_GB.TAB
TMAT=TNC:\CUTTAB\TMAT_GB.TAB
PCDT=TNC:\CUTTAB\

372 Programming: Special Functions

Programming: Multiple
Axis Machining
12.1 Functions for Multiple Axis Machining
12.1 Functions for Multiple Axis
Machining
The TNC functions for multiple axis machining are described in this
chapter.

TNC function Description Page

PLANE Define machining in the tilted working plane Page 375

PLANE/M128 Inclined-tool machining Page 396

M116 Feed rate of rotary axes Page 397

M126 Shortest-path traverse of rotary axes Page 398

M94 Reduce display value of rotary axes Page 399

M114 Define the behavior of the TNC when positioning the rotary axes Page 400

M128 Define the behavior of the TNC when positioning the rotary axes Page 401

M134 Exact stop for positioning with rotary axes Page 404

M138 Selection of tilted axes Page 404

M144 Calculate machine kinematics Page 405

374 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

 12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting
the Working Plane (Software
Option 1)
Introduction

The machine manufacturer must enable the functions for

tilting the working plane!
You can only use the PLANE function on machines which
have at least two rotary axes (head and/or table).
Exception: PLANE AXIAL can also be used if only a single
rotary axis is present or active on your machine.

The PLANE function is a powerful function for defining tilted working

planes in various manners.
All PLANE functions available on the TNC describe the desired working
plane independently of the rotary axes actually present on your
machine. The following possibilities are available:

Function Required parameters Soft key Page

SPATIAL Three space angles: SPA, Page 379
SPB, and SPC

PROJECTED Two projection angles: Page 381

PROPR and PROMIN and a
rotation angle ROT

EULER Three Euler angles: Page 383

precession (EULPR),
nutation (EULNU) and
rotation (EULROT)

VECTOR Norm vector for defining Page 385

the plane and base vector
for defining the direction of
the tilted X axis

POINTS Coordinates of any three Page 387

points in the plane to be
tilted

RELATIVE Single, incrementally Page 389

effective spatial angle

AXIAL Up to three absolute or Page 390

incremental axis angles
A, B, C

RESET Reset the PLANE function Page 378

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 375

12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
In order to make the differences between each definition possibility
more clear even before selecting the function, you can start an
animated sequence via soft key.

The parameter definition of the PLANE function is separated

into two parts:
„ The geometric definition of the plane, which is different
for each of the available PLANE functions.
„ The positioning behavior of the PLANE function, which is
independent of the plane definition and is identical for all
PLANE functions (see “Specifying the positioning
behavior of the PLANE function” on page 392).

The actual-position-capture function is not possible with

an active tilted working plane.
If you use the PLANE function when M120 is active, the TNC
automatically rescinds the radius compensation, which
also rescinds the M120 function.
Always use PLANE RESET to reset PLANE functions. Entering
0 in all PLANE parameters does not completely reset the
function.

376 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

 12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Define the PLANE function
U Show the soft-key row with special functions

U Select the PLANE function: Press the TILT MACHINING

PLANE soft key: The TNC displays the available
definition possibilities in the soft-key row
Selecting the function while animation is active
U Activate animation: Set the SELECT ANIMATION ON/OFF soft key
to ON
U Start an animation for one of the definition possibilities: Press one
of the available soft keys. The TNC highlights the soft key with a
different color and begins the appropriate animation
U To assume the currently active function: Press the ENT key or press
the soft key of the active function again. The TNC continues the
dialog and requests the required parameters
Selecting the function while animation is inactive
U Select the desired function directly via soft key. The TNC continues
the dialog and requests the required parameters

Position display
As soon as a PLANE function is active, the TNC shows the calculated
space angle in the additional status display (see figure). As a rule, the
TNC internally always calculates with space angles, independent of
which PLANE function is active.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 377

12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Reset the PLANE function
U Show the soft-key row with special functions Example: NC block

25 PLANE RESET MOVE SET-UP50 F1000

U Select special TNC functions: Press the SPECIAL TNC
FUNCTIONS soft key
U Select the PLANE function: Press the TILT
MACHINING PLANE soft key: The TNC displays the
available definition possibilities in the soft-key row
U Select the Reset function. This internally resets the
PLANE function, but does not change the current axis
positions
U Specify whether the TNC should automatically move
the rotary axes to the default setting (MOVE or TURN) or
not (STAY) (see “Automatic positioning:
MOVE/TURN/STAY (entry is mandatory)” on page 392)
U To terminate entry, press the END key

The PLANE RESET function resets the current PLANE

function—or an active G80—completely (angles = 0 and
function is inactive). It does not need to be defined more
than once.

378 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

 12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Defining the machining plane with space angles:
PLANE SPATIAL
Function
Space angles define a machining plane through up to three rotations
around the fixed machine coordinate system. The sequence of
rotations is firmly specified: first around the A axis, then B, and then C
(the function corresponds to Cycle 19, if the entries in Cycle 19 are set
to space angles).

Before programming, note the following

You must always define the three space angles SPA, SPB,
and SPC, even if one of them = 0.
The sequence of the rotations described above is
independent of the active tool axis.
Parameter description for the positioning behavior: See
“Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE
function,” page 392.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 379

12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Input parameters
U Spatial angle A?: Rotational angle SPA around the
fixed machine axis X (see figure at top right). Input
range from -359.9999° to +359.9999°
U Spatial angle B?: Rotational angle SPB around the
fixed machine axis Y (see figure at top right). Input
range from -359.9999° to +359.9999°
U Spatial angle C?: Rotational angle SPC around the
fixed machine axis Z (see figure at center right). Input
range from -359.9999° to +359.9999°
U Continue with the positioning properties (see
“Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE
function” on page 392)
Abbreviations used

Abbreviation Meaning
SPATIAL Spatial = in space

SPA Spatial A: rotation about the X axis

SPB Spatial B: rotation about the Y axis

SPC Spatial C: rotation about the Z axis

Example: NC block

5 PLANE SPATIAL SPA+27 SPB+0 SPC+45 .....

380 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

 12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Defining the machining plane with projection
angles: PROJECTED PLANE
Function
Projection angles define a machining plane through the entry of two
angles that you determine by projecting the first coordinate plane (Z/X
plane with tool axis Z) and the second coordinate plane (Y/Z with tool
axis Z) onto the machining plane to be defined.

Before programming, note the following

You can only use projection angles if the angle definitions
are given with respect to a rectangular cuboid. Otherwise
distortions could occur on the workpiece.
Parameter description for the positioning behavior: See
“Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE
function,” page 392.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 381

12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Input parameters
U Proj. angle 1st coordinate plane?: Projected angle
of the tilted machining plane in the 1st coordinate
plane of the fixed machine coordinate system (Z/X for
tool axis Z, see figure at top right). Input range: from
-89.9999° to +89.9999°. The 0° axis is the principal
axis of the active machining plane (X for tool axis Z.
See figure at top right for positive direction).
U Proj. angle 2nd coordinate plane?: Projected angle
in the 2nd coordinate plane of the fixed machine
coordinate system (Y/Z for tool axis Z, see figure at
top right). Input range: from -89.9999° to +89.9999°.
The 0° axis is the minor axis of the active machining
plane (Y for tool axis Z).
U ROT angle of the tilted plane?: Rotation of the
tilted coordinate system around the tilted tool axis
(corresponds to a rotation with Cycle 10 ROTATION).
The rotation angle is used to simply specify the
direction of the principal axis of the machining plane
(X for tool axis Z, Z for tool axis Y; see figure at bottom
right). Input range: from 0° to +360°.
U Continue with the positioning properties (see
“Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE
function” on page 392)
NC block

5 PLANE PROJECTED PROPR+24 PROMIN+24 PROROT+30 .....

Abbreviations used

Abbreviation Meaning
PROJECTED Projected

PROPR Principal plane

PROMIN Minor plane

PROROT Rotation

382 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

 12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Defining the machining plane with Euler angles:
EULER PLANE
Function
Euler angles define a machining plane through up to three rotations
about the respectively tilted coordinate system. The Swiss
mathematician Leonhard Euler defined these angles. When applied to
the machine coordinate system, they have the following meanings:

Precession angle Rotation of the coordinate system around the Z

EULPR axis
Nutation angle Rotation of the coordinate system around the X
EULNU axis already shifted by the precession angle
Rotation angle Rotation of the tilted machining plane around the
EULROT tilted Z axis

Before programming, note the following

The sequence of the rotations described above is
independent of the active tool axis.
Parameter description for the positioning behavior: See
“Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE
function,” page 392.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 383

12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Input parameters
U Rot. angle main coordinate plane?: Rotary angle
EULPR around the Z axis (see figure at top right).
Please note:
„ Input range: -180.0000° to +180.0000°
„ The 0° axis is the X axis.
U Tilting angle tool axis?: Tilting angle EULNUT of the
coordinate system around the X axis shifted by the
precession angle (see figure at center right). Please
note:
„ Input range: 0° to +180.0000°
„ The 0° axis is the Z axis.
U ROT angle of the tilted plane?: Rotation EULROT of
the tilted coordinate system around the tilted Z axis
(corresponds to a rotation with Cycle 10 ROTATION).
Use the rotation angle to simply define the direction
of the X axis in the tilted machining plane (see figure
at bottom right). Please note:
„ Input range: 0° to 360.0000°
„ The 0° axis is the X axis.
U Continue with the positioning properties (see
“Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE
function” on page 392)
NC block

5 PLANE EULER EULPR45 EULNU20 EULROT22 .....

Abbreviations used

Abbreviation Meaning
EULER Swiss mathematician who defined these angles

EULPR Precession angle: angle describing the rotation of

the coordinate system around the Z axis

EULNU Nutation angle: angle describing the rotation of

the coordinate system around the X axis shifted
by the precession angle

EULROT Rotation angle: angle describing the rotation of

the tilted machining plane around the tilted Z axis

384 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

 12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Defining the machining plane with two vectors:
VECTOR PLANE
Function
You can use the definition of a machining plane via two vectors if your
CAD system can calculate the base vector and normal vector of the
tilted machining plane. A normalized input is not necessary. The TNC
calculates the normal, so you can enter values between -99.999999
and +99.999999.
The base vector required for the definition of the machining plane is
defined by the components BX, BY and BZ (see figure at right). The
normal vector is defined by the components NX, NY and NZ.
The base vector defines the direction of the X axis in the tilted
machining plane, and the normal vector determines the direction of
the machining plane, and at the same time is perpendicular to it.

Before programming, note the following

The TNC calculates standardized vectors from the values
you enter.
Parameter description for the positioning behavior: See
“Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE
function,” page 392.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 385

12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Input parameters
U X component of base vector?: X component BX of the
base vector B (see figure at top right). Input range: -
99.9999999 to +99.9999999
U Y component of base vector?: Y component BY of the
base vector B (see figure at top right). Input range: -
99.9999999 to +99.9999999
U Z component of base vector?: Z component BZ of the
base vector B (see figure at top right). Input range: -
99.9999999 to +99.9999999
U X component of normal vector?: X component NX of
the normal vector N (see figure at center right). Input
range: -99.9999999 to +99.9999999
U Y component of normal vector?: Y component NY of
the normal vector N (see figure at center right). Input
range: -99.9999999 to +99.9999999
U Z component of normal vector?: Z component NZ of
the normal vector N (see figure at lower right). Input
range: -99.9999999 to +99.9999999
U Continue with the positioning properties (see
“Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE
function” on page 392)
NC block

5 PLANE VECTOR BX0.8 BY-0.4 BZ-

0.4472 NX0.2 NY0.2 NZ0.9592 .....

Abbreviations used

Abbreviation Meaning
VECTOR Vector

BX, BY, BZ Base vector: X, Y and Z components

NX, NY, NZ Normal vector: X, Y and Z components

386 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

 12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Defining the machining plane via three points:
POINTS PLANE
Function
A machining plane can be uniquely defined by entering any three
points P1 to P3 in this plane. This possibility is realized in the POINTS P3
PLANE function.
P2
Before programming, note the following
The connection from Point 1 to Point 2 determines the
direction of the tilted principal axis (X for tool axis Z).
P1 +Z
The direction of the tilted tool axis is determined by the
position of Point 3 relative to the connecting line between +X
Point 1 and Point 2. Use the right-hand rule (thumb = X
axis, index finger = Y axis, middle finger = Z axis (see +Y
figure at right)) to remember: thumb (X axis) points from
Point 1 to Point 2, index finger (Y axis) points parallel to the
tilted Y axis in the direction of Point 3. Then the middle
finger points in the direction of the tilted tool axis.
The three points define the slope of the plane. The
position of the active datum is not changed by the TNC.
Parameter description for the positioning behavior: See
“Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE
function,” page 392.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 387

12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Input parameters
U X coordinate of 1st plane point?: X coordinate P1X
of the 1st plane point (see figure at top right).
U Y coordinate of 1st plane point?: Y coordinate P1Y
of the 1st plane point (see figure at top right).
U Z coordinate of 1st plane point?: Z coordinate P1Z
of the 1st plane point (see figure at top right).
U X coordinate of 2nd plane point?: X coordinate P2X
of the 2nd plane point (see figure at center right).
U Y coordinate of 2nd plane point?: Y coordinate P2Y
of the 2nd plane point (see figure at center right).
U Z coordinate of 2nd plane point?: Z coordinate P2Z
of the 2nd plane point (see figure at center right).
U X coordinate of 3rd plane point?: X coordinate P3X
of the 3rd plane point (see figure at bottom right).
U Y coordinate of 3rd plane point?: Y coordinate P3Y
of the 3rd plane point (see figure at bottom right).
U Z coordinate of 3rd plane point?: Z coordinate P3Z
of the 3rd plane point (see figure at bottom right).
U Continue with the positioning properties (see
“Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE
function” on page 392)
NC block

5 PLANE POINTS P1X+0 P1Y+0 P1Z+20 P2X+30 P2Y+31 P2Z+20

P3X+0 P3Y+41 P3Z+32.5 .....

Abbreviations used

Abbreviation Meaning
POINTS

388 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

 12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Defining the machining plane with a single,
incremental space angle: PLANE RELATIVE
Function
Use the incremental space angle when an already active tilted
machining plane is to be tilted by another rotation. Example:
machining a 45° chamfer on a tilted plane.

Before programming, note the following

The defined angle is always effective in respect to the
active working plane, irrespective of the function you have
used to activate it.
You can program any number of PLANE RELATIVE functions
in a row.
If you want to return to the machining plane that was
active before the PLANE RELATIVE function, define the
PLANE RELATIVE function again with the same angle but
with the opposite algebraic sign.
If you use the PLANE RELATIVE function on an untilted
machining plane, then you simply rotate the untilted plane
about the space angle defined in the PLANE function.
Parameter description for the positioning behavior: See
“Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE
function,” page 392.

Input parameters
U Incremental angle?: Space angle about which the
active machining plane is to be rotated additionally
(see figure at right). Use a soft key to select the axis
to be rotated about. Input range: -359.9999° to
+359.9999°
U Continue with the positioning properties (see
“Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE
function” on page 392)
Abbreviations used

Abbreviation Meaning
RELATIVE

Example: NC block

5 PLANE RELATIVE SPB-45 .....

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 389

12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Tilting the working plane through axis angle:
PLANE AXIAL (FCL 3 function)
Function
The PLANE AXIAL function defines both the position of the working
plane and the nominal coordinates of the rotary axes. This function is
particularly easy to use on machines with Cartesian coordinates and
with kinematics structures in which only one rotary axis is active.

PLANE AXIAL can also be used if you have only one rotary
axis active on your machine.
You can use the PLANE RELATIVE function after PLANE
AXIAL if your machine allows space angle definitions. The
machine tool manual provides further information.

Before programming, note the following

Enter only axis angles that actually exist on your machine.
Otherwise the TNC generates an error message.
Rotary axis coordinates defined with PLANE AXIAL are
modally effective. Successive definitions therefore build
on each other. Incremental input is allowed.
Use PLANE RESET to reset the PLANE AXIAL function.
Resetting by entering 0 does not deactivate PLANE AXIAL.
SEQ, TABLE ROT and COORD ROT have no function in
conjunction with PLANE AXIAL.
Parameter description for the positioning behavior: See
“Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE
function,” page 392.

390 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

 12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Input parameters
U Axis angle A?: Axis angle to which the A axis is to
be moved. If entered incrementally, it is the angle by
which the A axis is to be moved from its current
position. Input range: -99999.9999° to +99999.9999°
U Axis angle B?: Axis angle to which the B axis is to
be moved. If entered incrementally, it is the angle by
which the B axis is to be moved from its current
position. Input range: -99999.9999° to +99999.9999°
U Axis angle C?: Axis angle to which the C axis is to
be moved. If entered incrementally, it is the angle by
which the C axis is to be moved from its current
position. Input range: -99999.9999° to +99999.9999°
U Continue with the positioning properties (see
“Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE
function” on page 392)
Abbreviations used
Example: NC block
Abbreviation Meaning
5 PLANE AXIAL B-45 .....
AXIAL

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 391

12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Specifying the positioning behavior of the
PLANE function
Overview
Independently of which PLANE function you use to define the tilted
machining plane, the following functions are always available for the
positioning behavior:
„ Automatic positioning
„ Selection of alternate tilting possibilities
„ Selection of the Type of Transformation

Automatic positioning: MOVE/TURN/STAY (entry is mandatory)

After you have entered all parameters for the plane definition, you
must specify how the rotary axes will be positioned to the calculated
axis values:
U The PLANE function is to automatically position the
rotary axes to the calculated position values. The
position of the tool relative to the workpiece is to
remain the same. The TNC carries out a
compensation movement in the linear axes.
U The PLANE function is to automatically position the
rotary axes to the calculated position values, but only
the rotary axes are positioned. The TNC does not
carry out a compensation movement in the linear
axes.
U You will position the rotary axes later in a separate
positioning block
If you have selected the MOVE (PLANE function is to position the axes
automatically), the following two parameters must still be defined:
Dist. tool tip – center of rot. and Feed rate? F=. If you have
selected the TURN option (PLANE function is to position the axes
automatically without any compensating movement), the following
parameter must still be defined: Feed rate? F= F=. As an alternative
to defining a feed rate F directly by numerical value, you can also
position with FMAX (rapid traverse) or FAUTO (feed rate from the T block).

If you use PLANE AXIAL together with STAY, you have to

position the rotary axes in a separated block after the
PLANE function.

392 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

 12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
U Dist. tool tip – center of rot. (incremental): The TNC tilts the
tool (or table) relative to the tool tip. The DISTANCE parameter shifts
the center of rotation of the positioning movement relative to the
current position of the tool tip.

Note:
„ If the tool is already at the given distance to the
workpiece before positioning, then relatively speaking
the tool is at the same position after positioning (see
figure at center right, 1 = SET UP) 1
„ If the tool is not at the given distance to the workpiece 1
before positioning, then relatively speaking the tool is
offset from the original position after positioning (see
figure at bottom right, 1= SET UP)

U Feed rate? F=: Contour speed at which the tool should be

positioned
Positioning the rotary axes in a separate block
Proceed as follows if you want to position the rotary axes in a separate
positioning block (option STAY selected):

Danger of collision!
Pre-position the tool to a position where there is no danger
of collision with the workpiece (clamping devices) during
positioning.

U Select any PLANE function, and define automatic positioning with the 1
STAY option. During program execution the TNC calculates the 1
position values of the rotary axes present on the machine, and
stores them in the system parameters Q120 (A axis), Q121 (B axis)
and Q122 (C axis)
U Define the positioning block with the angular values calculated by
the TNC
NC example blocks: Position a machine with a rotary table C and a
tilting table A to a space angle of B+45°.

...
12 L Z+250 R0 FMAX Position at clearance height.
13 PLANE SPATIAL SPA+0 SPB+45 SPC+0 STAY Define and activate the PLANE function
14 L A+Q120 C+Q122 F2000 Position the rotary axis with the values calculated by
the TNC
... Define machining in the tilted working plane

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 393

12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Selection of alternate tilting possibilities: SEQ +/– (entry
optional)
The position you define for the machining plane is used by the TNC to
calculate the appropriate positioning of the rotary axes present on the
machine. In general there are always two solution possibilities.
Use the SEQ switch to specify which possibility the TNC should use:
„ SEQ+ positions the master axis so that it assumes a positive angle.
The master axis is the 2nd rotary axis from the table, or the 1st axis
from the tool (depending on the machine configuration (see figure at
top right)).
„ SEQ- positions the master axis so that it assumes a negative angle.
If the solution you chose with SEQ is not within the machine’s range of
traverse, the TNC displays the Entered angle not permitted error
message.

When the PLANE AXIAL function is used, the PLANE RESET

switch is nonfunctional.

If you do not define SEQ, the TNC determines the solution as follows:
1 The TNC first checks whether both solution possibilities are within
the traverse range of the rotary axes.
2 If they are, then the TNC selects the shortest possible solution.
3 If only one solution is within the traverse range, the TNC selects
this solution.
4 If neither solution is within the traverse range, the TNC displays
the Entered angle not permitted error message.

394 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

 12.2 The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Example for a machine with a rotary table C and a tilting table A.
Programmed function: PLANE SPATIAL SPA+0 SPB+45 SPC+0

Starting Resulting axis

Limit switch SEQ
position position
None A+0, C+0 not prog. A+45, C+90

None A+0, C+0 + A+45, C+90

None A+0, C+0 – A–45, C–90

None A+0, C-105 not prog. A–45, C–90

None A+0, C-105 + A+45, C+90

None A+0, C-105 – A–45, C–90

–90 < A < +10 A+0, C+0 not prog. A–45, C–90

–90 < A < +10 A+0, C+0 + Error message

None A+0, C-135 + A+45, C+90

Selecting the type of transformation (entry optional)

On machines with C-rotary tables, a function is available for specifying
the type of transformation:
U COORD ROT specifies that the PLANE function should
only rotate the coordinate system to the defined
tilting angle. The rotary table is not moved; the
compensation is purely mathematical.
U TABLE ROT specifies that the PLANE function should
position the rotary table to the defined tilting angle.
Compensation results from rotating the workpiece.

When the PLANE AXIAL function is used, COORD ROT and

TABLE ROT are nonfunctional.
If you use the TABLE ROT function in conjunction with a
basic rotation and a tilting angle of 0, then the TNC tilts the
table to the angle defined in the basic rotation.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 395

12.3 Inclined-Tool Machining in the Tilted Plane
12.3 Inclined-Tool Machining in the
Tilted Plane
Function
In combination with M128 and the new PLANE functions, inclined-tool
machining in a tilted machining plane is now possible. Two
possibilities are available for definition:
„ Inclined-tool machining via incremental traverse of a rotary axis
„ Inclined-tool machining via normal vectors IB

Inclined-tool machining in a tilted machining plane only

functions with spherical cutters.
With 45° swivel heads and tilting tables you can also
define the incline angle as a space angle. Use the TCPM
FUNCTION.

Inclined-tool machining via incremental traverse

of a rotary axis
U Retract the tool
U Activate M128
U Define any PLANE function; consider the positioning behavior
U Via a straight-line block, traverse to the desired incline angle in the
appropriate axis incrementally

Example NC blocks:
...
N12 G00 G40 Z+50 M128 * Position at clearance height, activate M128
N13 PLANE SPATIAL SPA+0 SPB-45 SPC+0 MOVE ABST50 F900 * Define and activate the PLANE function
N14 G01 G91 F1000 B-17 * Set the incline angle
... Define machining in the tilted working plane

396 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

 12.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes
12.4 Miscellaneous Functions for
Rotary Axes
Feed rate in mm/min on rotary axes A, B, C:
M116 (software option 1)
Standard behavior
The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate of a rotary axis in
degrees/min (in mm programs and also in inch programs). The feed
rate therefore depends on the distance from the tool center to the
center of axis rotation.
The larger this distance becomes, the greater the contouring feed
rate.

Feed rate in mm/min on rotary axes with M116

The machine geometry must be specified by the machine

tool builder in the description of kinematics.
M116 works only on rotary tables. M116 cannot be used
with swivel heads. If your machine is equipped with a
table/head combination, the TNC ignores the swivel-head
rotary axes.
M116 is also effective in an active tilted working plane and
in combination with M128.

The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate of a rotary axis in

degrees/min (or 1/10 inch/min). In this case, the TNC calculates the
feed for the block at the start of each block. With a rotary axis, the feed
rate is not changed during execution of the block even if the tool
moves toward the center of the rotary axis.

Effect
M116 is effective in the working plane. With M117 you can reset
M116. M116 is also canceled at the end of the program.
M116 becomes effective at the start of block.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 397

12.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes
Shorter-path traverse of rotary axes: M126
Standard behavior
The standard behavior of the TNC while positioning rotary axes whose
display has been reduced to values less than 360° depends on
Machine Parameter 7682. MP7682 sets whether the TNC should
consider the difference between nominal and actual position, or
whether the TNC should always (even without M126) choose the
shortest path to the programmed position. Examples:

Actual position Nominal position Traverse

350° 10° –340°

10° 340° +330°

Behavior with M126

With M126, the TNC will move the axis on the shorter path of traverse
for rotary axes whose display is reduced to values less than 360°.
Examples:
Actual position Nominal position Traverse
350° 10° +20°

10° 340° –30°

Effect
M126 becomes effective at the start of block.
To cancel M126, enter M127. At the end of program, M126 is
automatically canceled.

398 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

 12.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes
Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less
than 360°: M94
Standard behavior
The TNC moves the tool from the current angular value to the
programmed angular value.
Example:

Current angular value: 538°

Programmed angular value: 180°
Actual distance of traverse: -358°

Behavior with M94

At the start of block, the TNC first reduces the current angular value to
a value less than 360° and then moves the tool to the programmed
value. If several rotary axes are active, M94 will reduce the display of
all rotary axes. As an alternative you can enter a rotary axis after M94.
The TNC then reduces the display only of this axis.

Example NC blocks
To reduce display of all active rotary axes:

N50 M94 *

To reduce display of the C axis only:

N50 M94 C *

To reduce display of all active rotary axes and then move the tool in
the C axis to the programmed value:

N50 G00 C+180 M94 *

Effect
M94 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed.
M94 becomes effective at the start of block.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 399

12.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes
Automatic compensation of machine geometry
when working with tilted axes: M114 (software
option 2)
Standard behavior
The TNC moves the tool to the positions given in the part program. If
the position of a tilted axis changes in the program, the resulting offset
in the linear axes must be calculated by a postprocessor and traversed
in a positioning block. As the machine geometry is also relevant, the
NC program must be calculated separately for each machine tool.

Behavior with M114

The machine geometry must be specified by the machine

tool builder in the description of kinematics.

If the position of a controlled tilted axis changes in the program, the

TNC automatically compensates the tool offset by a 3-D length
compensation. As the geometry of the individual machine tools is set
B
in machine parameters, the TNC also compensates machine-specific B
offsets automatically. Programs only need to be calculated by the Y dx dz
postprocessor once, even if they are being run on different machines
with TNC control.
If your machine tool does not have controlled tilted axes (head tilted
manually or positioned by the PLC), you can enter the current valid
swivel head position after M114 (e.g. M114 B+45, Q parameters
permitted).
The radius compensation must be calculated by a CAD system or by a dB
postprocessor. A programmed radius compensation RL/RR will result
in an error message.
If the tool length compensation is calculated by the TNC, the
X
programmed feed rate refers to the point of the tool. Otherwise it
refers to the tool datum.

If your machine tool is equipped with a swivel head that

can be tilted under program control, you can interrupt
program run and change the position of the tilted axis, for
example with the handwheel.
With the RESTORE POS. AT N function, you can then
resume program run at the block at which the part
program was interrupted. If M114 is active, the TNC
automatically calculates the new position of the tilted axis.
If you wish to use the handwheel to change the position
of the tilted axis during program run, use M118 in
conjunction with M128.

400 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

 12.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes
Effect
M114 becomes effective at the start of block, M115 at the end of
block. M114 is not effective when tool radius compensation is active.
To cancel M114, enter M115. At the end of program, M114 is
automatically canceled.

Maintaining the position of the tool tip when

positioning with tilted axes (TCPM): M128
(software option 2)
Standard behavior
The TNC moves the tool to the positions given in the part program. If
the position of a tilted axis changes in the program, the resulting offset
in the linear axes must be calculated, and traversed in a positioning
block.

Behavior with M128 (TCPM: Tool Center Point Management)

The machine geometry must be specified by the machine

tool builder in the description of kinematics.

If the position of a controlled tilted axis changes in the program, the B

position of the tool tip to the workpiece remains the same.
If you wish to use the handwheel to change the position of the tilted
axis during program run, use M128 in conjunction with M118. Z
Handwheel positioning in a machine-based coordinate system is
possible when M128 is active. X

Danger of collision for tilted axes with Hirth coupling! Z

Only change the position of the tilted axis after retracting
the tool. Otherwise you might damage the contour when
disengaging from the coupling.

After M128 you can program another feed rate, at which the TNC will
carry out the compensation movements in the linear axes. If you X
program no feed rate here, or if you program a larger feed rate than is
defined in MP7471, the feed rate from MP7471 will be effective.

Before positioning with M91 or M92 and before a T block,

reset M128.
To avoid contour gouging you must use only spherical
cutters with M128.
The tool length must refer to the spherical center of the
tool tip.
If M128 is active, the TNC shows the symbol in the
status display.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 401

12.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes
M128 on tilting tables
If you program a tilting table movement while M128 is active, the TNC
rotates the coordinate system accordingly. If, for example, you rotate
the C axis by 90° (through a positioning command or datum shift) and
then program a movement in the X axis, the TNC executes the
movement in the machine axis Y.
The TNC also transforms the defined datum, which has been shifted
by the movement of the rotary table.

M128 with 3-D tool compensation

If you carry out a 3-D tool compensation with active M128 and active
radius compensation G41/G42, the TNC will automatically position the
rotary axes for certain machine geometrical configurations .

Effect
M128 becomes effective at the start of block, M129 at the end of block.
M128 is also effective in the manual operating modes and remains
active even after a change of mode. The feed rate for the
compensation movement will be effective until you program a new
feed rate or until you cancel M128 with M129.
Enter M129 to cancel M128. The TNC also cancels M128 if you select a
new program in a program run operating mode.

Example NC blocks
Feed rate of 1000 mm/min for compensation movements.

N50 G01 G41 X+0 Y+38.5 IB-15 F125 M128 F1000 *

402 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

 12.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes
Inclined machining with noncontrolled rotary axes
If you have noncontrolled rotary axes (counting axes) on your machine,
then in combination with M128 you can also perform inclined
machining operations with these axes.
Proceed as follows:
1 Manually traverse the rotary axes to the desired positions. M128
must not be active!
2 Activate M128: The TNC reads the actual values of all rotary axes
present, calculates from this the new position of the tool center
point, and updates the position display.
3 The TNC performs the necessary compensating movement in the
next positioning block.
4 Carry out the machining operation.
5 At the end of program, reset M128 with M129, and return the
rotary axes to the initial positions.

As long as M128 is active, the TNC monitors the actual

positions of the noncontrolled rotary axes. If the actual
position deviates from the nominal position by a value
greater than that defined by the machine manufacturer,
the TNC outputs an error message and interrupts program
run.

Overlap between M128 and M114

M128 is a new development of function M114.
M114 calculates necessary compensation movements in the
geometry, before the respective NC block is executed. The TNC then
processes the compensating movement such that it is performed by
the end of the respective NC block.
M128 calculates all compensating movements in real time. The TNC
performs necessary compensating movements immediately as soon
as they become necessary after movement in a rotary axis.

M114 and M128 may not be active at the same time, since
overlaps of the two functions would occur, which could
lead to damage of the workpiece. The TNC outputs a
corresponding error message.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 403

12.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes
Exact stop at corners with nontangential
transitions: M134
Standard behavior
The standard behavior of the TNC during positioning with rotary axes
is to insert a transitional element in nontangential contour transitions.
The contour of the transitional element depends on the acceleration,
the rate of acceleration (jerk), and the defined tolerance for contour
deviation.

With MP7440 you can change the standard behavior of the

TNC so that M134 becomes active automatically
whenever a program is selected (see “General User
Parameters,” page 554).

Behavior with M134

The TNC moves the tool during positioning with rotary axes so as to
perform an exact stop at nontangential contour transitions.

Effect
M134 becomes effective at the start of block, M135 at the end of
block.
You can reset M134 with M135. The TNC also resets M134 if you
select a new program in a program run operating mode.

Selecting tilting axes: M138

Standard behavior
The TNC performs M114 and M128, and tilts the working plane, only
in those axes for which the machine tool builder has set the
appropriate machine parameters.

Behavior with M138

The TNC performs the above functions only in those tilting axes that
you have defined using M138.

Effect
M138 becomes effective at the start of block.
You can reset M138 by reprogramming it without entering any axes.

Example NC blocks
Perform the above-mentioned functions only in the tilting axis C:

N50 G00 Z+100 R0 M138 C *

404 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

 12.4 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes
Compensating the machine’s kinematics
configuration for ACTUAL/NOMINAL positions
at end of block: M144 (software option 2)
Standard behavior
The TNC moves the tool to the positions given in the part program. If
the position of a tilted axis changes in the program, the resulting offset
in the linear axes must be calculated, and traversed in a positioning
block.

Behavior with M144

The TNC calculates into the position value any changes in the
machine’s kinematics configuration which result, for example, from
adding a spindle attachment. If the position of a controlled tilted axis
changes, the position of the tool tip to the workpiece is also changed.
The resulting offset is calculated in the position display.

Positioning blocks with M91/M92 are permitted if M144 is

active.
The position display in the operating modes FULL
SEQUENCE and SINGLE BLOCK does not change until the
tilting axes have reached their final position.

Effect
M144 becomes effective at the start of the block. M144 does not
function in connection with M114, M128 or a tilted working plane.
You can cancel M144 by programming M145.

The machine geometry must be specified by the machine

tool builder in the description of kinematics.
The machine tool builder determines the behavior in the
automatic and manual operating modes. Refer to your
machine tool manual.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 405

12.5 Peripheral milling: 3-D radius compensation with workpiece orientation
12.5 Peripheral milling: 3-D radius
compensation with workpiece
orientation
Function
With peripheral milling, the TNC displaces the tool perpendicular to the
direction of movement and perpendicular to the tool direction by the
sum of the delta values DR (tool table and T block). Determine the
compensation direction with radius compensation G41/G42 (see figure
at upper right, traverse direction Y+).
Z
For the TNC to be able to reach the set tool orientation, you need to
activate the function M128 (see “Maintaining the position of the tool tip
when positioning with tilted axes (TCPM): M128 (software option 2)”
on page 401) and subsequently the tool radius compensation. The
TNC then positions the rotary axes automatically so that the tool can
reach the orientation defined by the coordinates of the rotary axes
with the active compensation.
RR X
This function is possible only on machines for which you RL
can define spatial angles for the tilting axis configuration.
Refer to your machine tool manual.
The TNC is not able to automatically position the rotary
axes on all machines. Refer to your machine manual.
Note that the TNC makes a compensating movement by
the defined delta values. The tool radius R defined in the
tool table has no effect on the compensation.

Danger of collision!
On machines whose rotary axes only allow limited
traverse, sometimes automatic positioning can require
the table to be rotated by 180°. In this case, make sure
that the tool head does not collide with the workpiece or
the clamps.

You can define the tool orientation in a G01 block as described below.

Example: Definition of the tool orientation with M128 and the

coordinates of the rotary axes
N10 G00 G90 X-20 Y+0 Z+0 B+0 C+0 * Pre-position
N20 M128 * Activate M128
N30 G01 G42 X+0 Y+0 Z+0 B+0 C+0 F1000 * Activate radius compensation
N40 X+50 Y+0 Z+0 B-30 C+0 * Position rotary axis (tool orientation)

406 Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

Programming: Pallet
Editor
13.1 Pallet Editor
13.1 Pallet Editor
Application

Pallet table management is a machine-dependent

function. The standard functional range will be described
below. Refer to your machine tool manual for more
information.

Pallet tables are used for machining centers with pallet changers: The
pallet table calls the part programs that are required for the different
pallets, and activates datum shifts or datum tables.
You can also use pallet tables to run in succession several programs
that have different reference points.
Pallet tables contain the following information:
„ PAL/PGM (entry obligatory):
Identification for pallet or NC program (select with ENT or NO ENT)
„ NAME (entry obligatory):
Pallet or program name. The machine tool builder determines the
pallet name (see your machine tool manual). The program name
must be stored in the same directory as the pallet table. Otherwise
you must enter the full path name for the program.
„ PALPRESET (entry optional):
Preset number from the pallet preset table. The TNC interprets the
preset number defined here as pallet datum (PAL entry in PAL/PGM
column). You can use the pallet preset to compensate mechanical
differences between the pallets. A pallet preset can also be
activated automatically when a pallet is added
„ PRESET (entry optional):
Preset number from the preset table. The preset number defined
here is interpreted by the TNC either as a pallet datum (PAL entry in
the PAL/PGM column) or as a workpiece datum (PGM entry in PAL/PGM
line). If there is a pallet preset table active on your machine, then use
the PRESET column only for workpiece datums
„ DATUM (entry optional):
Name of the datum table. The datum table must be stored in the
same directory as the pallet table. Otherwise you must enter the full
path name for the datum table. Datums from the datum table can be
activated in the NC program with Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT.

408 Programming: Pallet Editor

„ X, Y, Z (entry optional, other axes also possible):

13.1 Pallet Editor

For pallet names, the programmed coordinates are referenced to
the machine datum. For NC programs, the programmed coordinates
are referenced to the pallet datum. These entries overwrite the
datum that you last set in the Manual mode of operation. With the
miscellaneous function M104 you can reactivate the datum that was
last set. With the actual-position-capture key, the TNC opens a
window that enables you to have the TNC enter various points as
datums (see table below):

Position Meaning
Actual values Enter the coordinates of the current tool position
referenced to the active coordinate system.

Reference Enter the coordinates of the current tool position

values referenced to the machine datum.

ACTUAL Enter the coordinates referenced to the active

measured coordinate system of the datum last probed in
values the Manual operating mode.

REF measured Enter the coordinates referenced to the machine

values datum of the datum last probed in the Manual
operating mode.

With the arrow keys and ENT, select the position that you wish to
confirm. Then press the ALL VALUES soft key so that the TNC saves
the respective coordinates of all active axes in the pallet table. With
the PRESENT VALUE soft key, the TNC saves the coordinates of the
axis on which the highlight in the pallet table is presently located.

If you have not defined a pallet before an NC program, the

programmed coordinates are then referenced to the
machine datum. If you do not define an entry, the datum
that was set manually remains active.

Editing function Soft key

Select beginning of table

Select end of table

Select previous page in table

Select next page in table

Insert as last line in the table

Delete the last line in the table

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 409

13.1 Pallet Editor
Editing function Soft key
Go to beginning of next line

Add the number of lines that can be entered at

the end of the table

Copy the highlighted field (2nd soft-key row)

Insert the copied field (2nd soft-key row)

Selecting a pallet table

U Call the file manager in the Programming and Editing or Program
Run mode: Press the PGM MGT key
U To display all type .P files, press the soft keys SELECT TYPE and
SHOW .P
U Select a pallet table with the arrow keys, or enter a new file name
to create a new table
U Confirm your entry with the ENT key

Leaving the pallet file

U Press the PGM MGT soft key to call the file manager
U To select a different type of file, press the SELECT TYPE soft key
and the soft key for the desired file type, for example SHOW.H
U Select the desired file

410 Programming: Pallet Editor

 13.1 Pallet Editor
Pallet datum management with the pallet preset
table

The pallet preset table is configured by your machine tool

builder, see your machine tool manual.

A preset table for managing pallet datums is available in addition to the

preset table for managing workpiece datums. This makes it possible
now to manage the pallet datums independently of the workpiece
datums.
Pallet datums are an easy way to compensate mechanical differences
between individual pallets.
For determining the pallet datums, there is an additional soft key in the
manual probing functions with which you can also store the probing
results in the pallet preset table (see “Storing measured values in the
pallet preset table” on page 455).

Only one workpiece datum and one pallet datum can be

active at the same time. Both datums are effective in sum.
The TNC displays the number of the active pallet preset in
the additional status display (see “General pallet
information (PAL tab)” on page 80).

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 411

13.1 Pallet Editor
Working with the pallet preset table

Changes to the pallet reset table must always be made in

agreement with your machine tool builder!

If your machine tool builder has enabled the pallet preset table, you
can edit the pallet preset table in Manual mode:
U To select the Manual Operation or El. Handwheel mode of
operation:
U Open the preset table: Press the PRESET TABLE soft
key
U Scroll through the soft-key row
U Open the pallet preset table: Press the PALLET
PRESET TBL soft key. The TNC displays additional
soft keys (see table below)
The following editing functions are available:
Editing function in table mode Soft key
Select beginning of table

Select end of table

Select previous page in table

Select next page in table

Insert a single line as last line in the table

Delete the last line in the table

Switch editing on/off

Activate the pallet datum of the line currently

selected (2nd soft-key row)

Deactivate the currently active pallet datum (2nd

soft-key row)

Directly apply the actual position of a rotary axis:

This function only saves the datum in the rotary
axis which is currently highlighted. This function
is not permitted for linear axes (2nd soft-key row)

412 Programming: Pallet Editor

 13.1 Pallet Editor
Executing the pallet file

MP7683 defines whether the pallet table is to be

executed blockwise or continuously.
Provided that Machine Parameter 7246 is set so that the
tool usage test is active, you can monitor the tool service
life for all tools used in a pallet (see “Tool usage test” on
page 173).

U Select the file manager in the Program Run, Full Sequence or

Program Run, Single Block operating modes: Press the PGM MGT
key
U To display all type .P files, press the soft keys SELECT TYPE and
SHOW .P
U Select the pallet table with the arrow keys and confirm with ENT
U To execute the pallet table: Press the NC Start button. The TNC
executes the pallets as set in MP7683

Screen layout for executing pallet tables

You can have the TNC display the program contents and pallet file
contents on the screen together by selecting the screen layout
PROGRAM + PALLET. During execution, the TNC then shows
program blocks to the left and the pallet to the right. To check the
program contents before execution, proceed as follows:
U Select a pallet table
U With the arrow keys, choose the program you would like to check
U Press the OPEN PGM soft key: the TNC displays the selected
program on the screen. You can now page through the program with
the arrow keys
U To return to the pallet table, press the END PGM soft key

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 413

13.2 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining
13.2 Pallet Operation with Tool-
Oriented Machining
Application

Pallet management in combination with tool-oriented

machining is a machine-dependent function. The standard
functional range will be described below. Refer to your
machine tool manual for more information.

Pallet tables are used for machining centers with pallet changers: The
pallet table calls the part programs that are required for the different
pallets, and activates datum shifts or datum tables.
You can also use pallet tables to run in succession several programs
that have different reference points.
Pallet tables contain the following information:
„ PAL/PGM (entry obligatory):
The entry PAL identifies the pallet, FIX marks the fixture level and PGM
is used to enter the workpiece.
„ W-STATUS :
Current machining status. The machining status is used to
determine the current stage of machining. Enter BLANK for an
unmachined (raw) workpiece. During machining, the TNC changes
this entry to INCOMPLETE, and after machining has finished, to
ENDED. The entry EMPTY is used to identify a space at which no
workpiece is to be clamped or where no machining is to take place.
„ METHOD (entry obligatory):
Entry that determines the method of program optimization.
Machining is workpiece-oriented if WPO is entered. Machining of the
piece is tool-oriented if TO is entered. In order to include subsequent
workpieces in the tool-oriented machining, you must enter CTO
(continued tool oriented). Tool-oriented machining is also possible
with pallet fixtures, but not for multiple pallets.
„ NAME (entry obligatory):
Pallet or program name. The machine tool builder determines the
pallet name (see your machine tool manual). Programs must be
stored in the same directory as the pallet table. Otherwise you must
enter the full path and name for the program.

414 Programming: Pallet Editor

„ PALPRESET (entry optional):

13.2 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining

Preset number from the pallet preset table. The TNC interprets the
preset number defined here as pallet datum (PAL entry in PAL/PGM
column). You can use the pallet preset to compensate mechanical
differences between the pallets. A pallet preset can also be
activated automatically when a pallet is added
„ PRESET (entry optional):
Preset number from the preset table. The preset number defined
here is interpreted by the TNC either as a pallet datum (PAL entry in
the PAL/PGM column) or as a workpiece datum (PGM entry in the
PAL/PGM line). If there is a pallet preset table active on your machine,
then use the PRESET column only for workpiece datums
„ DATUM (entry optional):
Name of the datum table. The datum table must be stored in the
same directory as the pallet table. Otherwise you must enter the full
path name for the datum table. Datums from the datum table can be
activated in the NC program with Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT.
„ X, Y, Z (entry optional, other axes also possible):
For pallets and fixtures, the programmed coordinates are referenced
to the machine datum. For NC programs, the programmed
coordinates are referenced to the pallet or fixture datum. These
entries overwrite the datum that you last set in the Manual mode of
operation. With the miscellaneous function M104 you can reactivate
the datum that was last set. With the actual-position-capture key,
the TNC opens a window that enables you to have the TNC enter
various points as datums (see table below):

Position Meaning
Actual values Enter the coordinates of the current tool position
referenced to the active coordinate system.

Reference Enter the coordinates of the current tool position

values referenced to the machine datum.

ACTUAL Enter the coordinates referenced to the active

measured coordinate system of the datum last probed in
values the Manual operating mode.

REF measured Enter the coordinates referenced to the machine

values datum of the datum last probed in the Manual
operating mode.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 415

13.2 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining
With the arrow keys and ENT, select the position that you wish to
confirm. Then press the ALL VALUES soft key so that the TNC saves
the respective coordinates of all active axes in the pallet table. With
the PRESENT VALUE soft key, the TNC saves the coordinates of the
axis on which the highlight in the pallet table is presently located.

If you have not defined a pallet before an NC program, the

programmed coordinates are then referenced to the
machine datum. If you do not define an entry, the datum
that was set manually remains active.

„ SP-X, SP-Y, SP-Z (entry optional, other axes also possible):

Safety positions can be entered for the axes. These positions can be
read with SYSREAD FN18 ID510 NR 6 from NC macros. SYSREAD
FN18 ID510 NR 5 can be used to determine if a value was
programmed in the column. The positions entered are only
approached if these values are read and correspondingly
programmed in the NC macros.
„ CTID (entered by the TNC):
The context ID number is assigned by the TNC and contains
instructions about the machining progress. Machining cannot be
resumed if the entry is deleted or changed.

Editing function in table mode Soft key

Select beginning of table

Select end of table

Select previous page in table

Select next page in table

Insert as last line in the table

Delete the last line in the table

Go to beginning of next line

Add the number of lines that can be entered at

the end of the table

Edit the table format

416 Programming: Pallet Editor

 13.2 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining
Editing function in entry-form mode Soft key
Select previous pallet

Select next pallet

Select previous fixture

Select next fixture

Select previous workpiece

Select next workpiece

Switch to pallet level

Switch to fixture level

Switch to workpiece level

Select standard pallet view

Select detailed pallet view

Select standard fixture view

Select detailed fixture view

Select standard workpiece view

Select detailed workpiece view

Insert pallet

Insert fixture

Insert workpiece

Delete pallet

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 417

13.2 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining
Editing function in entry-form mode Soft key
Delete fixture

Delete workpiece

Delete buffer memory contents

Tool-optimized machining

Workpiece-optimized machining

Connect or separate the types of machining

Mark level as being empty

Mark level as being unmachined

418 Programming: Pallet Editor

 13.2 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining
Selecting a pallet file
U Call the file manager in the Programming and Editing or Program
Run mode: Press the PGM MGT key
U To display all type .P files, press the soft keys SELECT TYPE and
SHOW .P
U Select a pallet table with the arrow keys, or enter a new file name
to create a new table
U Confirm your entry with the ENT key

Setting up the pallet file with the entry form

Pallet operation with tool- or workpiece-oriented machining is divided
into three levels:
„ Pallet level PAL
„ Fixture level FIX
„ Workpiece level PGM
You can switch to a detail view in each level. Set the machining
method and the statuses for the pallet, fixture and workpiece in the
standard view. If you are editing an existing pallet file, the updated
entries are displayed. Use the detail view for setting up the pallet file.

Set up the pallet file according to the machine

configuration. If you only have one fixture with multiple
workpieces, then defining one fixture FIX with the
workpieces PGM is sufficient. However, if one pallet
contains several fixtures, or if a fixture is machined from
more than one side, you must define the pallet PAL with
the corresponding fixture levels FIX.
Use the screen layout button to switch between table
view and form view.
Graphic support for form entry is not yet available.

The various levels of the entry form can be reached with the
appropriate soft keys. The current level is highlighted in the status line
of the entry form. When you switch to table view with the screen
layout button, the cursor is placed in the same level as it was in the
form view.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 419

13.2 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining
Setting up the pallet level
„ Pallet ID: The pallet name is displayed
„ Method: You can choose between the WORKPIECE ORIENTED and the
TOOL ORIENTED machining methods. The selected method is
assumed for the workpiece level and overwrites any existing
entries. In tabular view, WORKPIECE ORIENTED appears as WPO and
TOOL ORIENTED appears as TO.

The TOOL/WORKPIECE ORIENT entry cannot be made via soft

key. It only appears when different machining methods
were chosen for the workpieces in the workpiece or
machining level.
If the machining method was determined in the fixture
level, the entries are transferred to the workpiece level,
where they overwrite any existing entries.

„ Status: The soft key BLANK identifies the pallet and the
corresponding fixtures and workpieces as not yet having been
machined, and enters BLANK in the Status field. Use the EMPTY
POSITION soft key if you want to skip the pallet during machining.
EMPTY appears in the Status field.

Setting up details in the pallet level

„ Pallet ID: Enter the pallet name
„ Preset No.: Enter the preset number for the pallet
„ Datum: Enter the pallet datum
„ Datum table: Enter the name and path of the datum table of the
workpiece. The data is transferred to the fixture and workpiece
levels.
„ Safe height (optional): Safe position for the individual axes
referenced to the pallet. The positions entered are only approached
if these values were read and correspondingly programmed in the
NC macros.

420 Programming: Pallet Editor

 13.2 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining
Setting up the fixture level
„ Fixture: The number of the fixture is displayed. The number of
fixtures within this level is shown after the slash.
„ Method: You can choose between the WORKPIECE ORIENTED and the
TOOL ORIENTED machining methods. The selected method is
assumed for the workpiece level and overwrites any existing
entries. In tabular view, WORKPIECE ORIENTED appears as WPO and
TOOL ORIENTED appears as TO.
Use the CONNECT/SEPARATE soft key to mark fixtures that are to be
included for calculating the machining process for tool-oriented
machining. Connected fixtures are indicated by a dashed line,
whereas separated fixtures are indicated by a solid line. Connected
workpieces are marked in tabular view with the entry CTO in the
METHOD column.

The TOOL/WORKPIECE ORIENTED entry cannot be made via

soft key. It only appears when different machining
methods were chosen for the workpieces in the
workpiece level.
If the machining method was determined in the fixture
level, the entries are transferred to the workpiece level,
where they overwrite any existing entries.

„ Status: The soft key BLANK identifies the fixture and the
corresponding workpieces as not yet having been machined, and
enters BLANK in the Status field. Use the EMPTY POSITION soft key
if you want to skip the fixture during machining. EMPTY appears in the
Status field.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 421

13.2 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining
Setting up details in the fixture level
„ Fixture: The number of the fixture is displayed. The number of
fixtures within this level is shown after the slash.
„ Datum: Enter the fixture datum.
„ Datum table: Enter the name and path of the datum table valid for
machining the workpiece. The data is transferred to the workpiece
level.
„ NC macro: In tool-oriented machining, the macro TCTOOLMODE is
carried out instead of the normal tool-change macro.
„ Safe height (optional): Safe position for the individual axes
referenced to the fixture.

Safety positions can be entered for the axes. These

positions can be read with SYSREAD FN18 ID510 NR 6
from NC macros. SYSREAD FN18 ID510 NR 5 can be used
to determine if a value was programmed in the column.
The positions entered are only approached if these values
are read and correspondingly programmed in the NC
macros.

422 Programming: Pallet Editor

 13.2 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining
Setting up the workpiece level
„ Workpiece: The number of the workpiece is displayed. The number
of workpieces within this fixture level is shown after the slash.
„ Method: You can choose between the WORKPIECE ORIENTED and
TOOL ORIENTED machining methods. In tabular view,
WORKPIECE ORIENTED appears as WPO, and TOOL ORIENTED
appears as TO.
Use the CONNECT/SEPARATE soft key to mark workpieces that are to
be included for calculating the machining process for tool-oriented
machining. Connected workpieces are indicated by a dashed line,
whereas separated workpieces are indicated by a solid line.
Connected workpieces are marked in tabular view with the entry
CTO in the METHOD column.
„ Status: The soft key BLANK identifies the workpiece as not yet
having been machined, and enters BLANK in the Status field. Use
the soft key EMPTY POSITION if you want to skip the workpiece during
machining. EMPTY appears in the Status field.

Enter the method and status in the pallet or fixture level.

Then the entry will be assumed for all corresponding
workpieces.
For several workpiece variants within one level, the
workpieces of one variant should be entered together.
This way, the workpieces of each variant can be marked
with the CONNECT/SEPARATE soft key, and can be
machined in groups.

Setting up details in the workpiece level

„ Workpiece: The number of the workpiece is displayed. The number
of workpieces within this fixture or pallet level is shown after the
slash.
„ Datum: Enter the workpiece datum.
„ Datum table: Enter the name and path of the datum table valid for
machining the workpiece. If you use the same datum table for all
workpieces, enter the name and path in the pallet or fixture levels.
The data is automatically transferred to the workpiece level.
„ NC program: Enter the path of the NC program that is necessary for
machining the workpiece.
„ Safe height (optional): Safe position for the individual axes
referenced to the workpiece. The positions entered are only
approached if these values were read and correspondingly
programmed in the NC macros.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 423

13.2 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining
Sequence of tool-oriented machining

The TNC only carries out tool-oriented machining if the

TOOL ORIENTED method was selected, and TO or CTO is
entered in the table.

„ The entry TO or CTO in the Method field tells the TNC that the
oriented machining is valid beyond these lines.
„ The pallet management starts the NC program given in the line with
the entry TO.
„ The first workpiece is machined until the next tool call is pending.
Departure from the workpiece is coordinated by a special tool-
change macro.
„ The entry in the column W-STATUS is changed from BLANK to
INCOMPLETE, and the TNC enters a hexadecimal value in the field
CTID.

The value entered in the field CTID is a unique identifier of

the machining progress for the TNC. If this value is deleted
or changed, machining cannot be continued, nor is mid-
program startup or resumption of machining possible.

„ All lines in the pallet file that contain the entry CTO in the Method
field are machined in the same manner as the first workpiece.
Workpieces in several fixtures can be machined.
„ The TNC uses the next tool for the following machining steps again
from the line with the entry TO if one of the following situations
applies:
„ If the entry PAL is in the PAL/PGM field in the next line.
„ If the entry TO or WPO is in the Method field in the next line.
„ If in the lines already machined there are entries under Method
which do not have the status EMPTY or ENDED.
„ The NC program is continued at the stored location based on the
value entered in the CTID field. Usually the tool is changed for the
first piece, but the TNC suppresses the tool change for the following
workpieces.
„ The entry in the CTID field is updated after every machining step. If
an END PGM or M2 is executed in an NC program, then an existing
entry is deleted and ENDED is entered in the Machining Status field.

424 Programming: Pallet Editor

„ If the entries TO or CTO for all workpieces within a group contain the

13.2 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining

status ENDED, the next lines in the pallet file are run.

In mid-program startup, only one tool-oriented machining

operation is possible. Subsequent pieces are machined
according to the method entered.
The value entered in the CTID field is stored for a
maximum of 2 weeks. Within this time the machining
process can be continued at the stored location. After this
time the value is deleted, in order to prevent large
amounts of unnecessary data on the hard disk.
The operating mode can be changed after executing a
group of entries with TO or CTO.
The following functions are not permitted:
„ Switching the traverse range
„ PLC datum shift
„ M118

Leaving the pallet file

U Press the PGM MGT soft key to call the file manager
U To select a different type of file, press the SELECT TYPE soft key
and the soft key for the desired file type, for example SHOW.H
U Select the desired file

Executing the pallet file

In MP7683, set whether the pallet table is to be executed

blockwise or continuously (see “General User
Parameters” on page 554).
Provided that Machine Parameter 7246 is set so that the
tool usage test is active, you can monitor the tool service
life for all tools used in a pallet (see “Tool usage test” on
page 510).

U Select the file manager in the Program Run, Full Sequence or

Program Run, Single Block operating modes: Press the PGM MGT
key
U To display all type .P files, press the soft keys SELECT TYPE and
SHOW .P
U Select the pallet table with the arrow keys and confirm with ENT
U To execute the pallet table: Press the NC Start button. The TNC
executes the pallets as set in MP7683

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 425

13.2 Pallet Operation with Tool-Oriented Machining
Screen layout for executing pallet tables
You can have the TNC display the program contents and pallet file
contents on the screen together by selecting the screen layout
PROGRAM + PALLET. During execution, the TNC then shows
program blocks to the left and the pallet to the right. To check the
program contents before execution, proceed as follows:
U Select a pallet table
U With the arrow keys, choose the program you would like to check
U Press the OPEN PGM soft key: the TNC displays the selected
program on the screen. You can now page through the program with
the arrow keys
U To return to the pallet table, press the END PGM soft key

426 Programming: Pallet Editor

Manual Operation and
Setup
14.1 Switch-On, Switch-Off
14.1 Switch-On, Switch-Off
Switch-on

Switch-on and crossing over the reference points can vary

depending on the machine tool. Refer to your machine
tool manual.

Switch on the power supply for control and machine. The TNC then
displays the following dialog:

MEMORY TEST

The TNC memory is checked automatically

POWER INTERRUPTED

TNC message that the power was interrupted—clear

the message

COMPILE PLC PROGRAM

The PLC program of the TNC is compiled automatically

RELY EXT. DC VOLTAGE MISSING

Switch on external dc voltage The TNC checks the

functioning of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit

MANUAL OPERATION
TRAVERSE REFERENCE POINTS

Cross the reference points manually in the displayed

sequence: For each axis press the machine START
button, or

Cross the reference points in any sequence: Press

and hold the machine axis direction button for each
axis until the reference point has been traversed.

428 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.1 Switch-On, Switch-Off
If your machine is equipped with absolute encoders, you
can leave out crossing the reference marks. In such a
case, the TNC is ready for operation immediately after the
machine control voltage is switched on.
If your machine is equipped with incremental encoders,
you can activate traverse range monitoring even before
reference mark traverse by pressing the SW LIMIT
MONITORING soft key. Your machine tool builder can
provide this function axis-specifically. Remember that by
pressing the soft key, traverse range monitoring is not
necessarily active in all axes. The machine tool manual
provides further information.

The TNC is now ready for operation in the Manual Operation mode.

The reference points need only be crossed if the machine

axes are to be moved. If you intend only to write, edit or
test programs, you can select the Programming and
Editing or Test Run modes of operation immediately after
switching on the control voltage.
You can cross the reference points later by pressing the
PASS OVER REFERENCE MARK soft key in the Manual
Operation mode.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 429

14.1 Switch-On, Switch-Off
Crossing the reference point in a tilted working plane
The reference point of a tilted coordinate system can be crossed by
pressing the machine axis direction buttons. The “tilting the working
plane” function must be active in the Manual Operation mode, see
“Activating manual tilting,” page 474. The TNC then interpolates the
corresponding axes.

Make sure that the angle values entered in the menu for
tilting the working plane match the actual angles of the
tilted axis.

If available, you can also traverse the axes in the direction of the
current tool axis (see “Setting the current tool-axis direction as the
active machining direction (FCL 2 function)” on page 475).

If you use this function, then for non-absolute encoders

you must confirm the positions of the rotary axes, which
the TNC displays in a pop-up window. The position
displayed is the last active position of the rotary axes
before switch-off.

If one of the two functions that were active before is active now, the
NC START button has no function. The TNC outputs a corresponding
error message.

430 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.1 Switch-On, Switch-Off
Switch-off

iTNC 530 with Windows XP: See “Switching Off the iTNC
530,” page 586.

To prevent data from being lost at switch-off, you need to shut down
the operating system of the TNC as follows:
U Select the Manual Operation mode
U Select the function for shutting down, confirm again
with the YES soft key
U When the TNC displays the message Now you can
switch off the TNC in a pop-up window, you may cut
off the power supply to the TNC

Inappropriate switch-off of the TNC can lead to data loss!

Remember that pressing the END key after the control
has been shut down restarts the control. Switch-off
during a restart can also result in data loss!

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 431

14.2 Moving the Machine Axes
14.2 Moving the Machine Axes
Note

Traversing with the machine axis direction buttons can

vary depending on the machine tool. The machine tool
manual provides further information.

To traverse with the machine axis direction

buttons:

Select the Manual Operation mode.

Press the machine axis direction button and hold it as

long as you wish the axis to move, or

Move the axis continuously: Press and hold the

machine axis direction button, then press the
machine START button.

To stop the axis, press the machine STOP button.

You can move several axes at a time with these two methods. You can
change the feed rate at which the axes are traversed with the F soft
key, see “Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions
M,” page 440.

432 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.2 Moving the Machine Axes
Incremental jog positioning
With incremental jog positioning you can move a machine axis by a
preset distance.
Z
Select the Manual Operation or Electronic Handwheel
mode.

Shift the soft-key row.

8 8

Select incremental jog positioning: Switch the

X
INCREMENT soft key to ON. 8 16

JOG INCREMENT =

Enter the jog increment in mm, and confirm with the

ENT key.

Press the machine axis direction button as often as

desired.

The maximum permissible value for infeed is 10 mm.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 433

14.2 Moving the Machine Axes
Traversing with the HR 410 electronic
handwheel
The portable HR 410 handwheel is equipped with two permissive
buttons. The permissive buttons are located below the star grip. 1

You can only move the machine axes when a permissive button is
depressed (machine-dependent function). 2

The HR 410 handwheel features the following operating elements:

1 EMERGENCY STOP button 3
2 Handwheel 4
4
3 Permissive buttons
6 5
4 Axis address keys
5 Actual-position-capture key 7
8
6 Keys for defining the feed rate (slow, medium, fast; the feed rates
are set by the machine tool builder)
7 Direction in which the TNC moves the selected axis
8 Machine function (set by the machine tool builder)

The red indicator lights show the axis and feed rate you have selected.
It is also possible to move the machine axes with the handwheel
during program run if M118 is active.

Procedure

Select the Electronic Handwheel operating mode.

Press and hold a permissive button.

Select the axis.

Select the feed rate.

Move the active axis in the positive direction, or

Move the active axis in the negative direction.

434 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.2 Moving the Machine Axes
HR 420 electronic handwheel

Handwheel HR 420 is mandatory if you want to use the 1

handwheel positioning in virtual axis function (see “Virtual
axis VT” on page 350). 2

Unlike the HR 410, the HR 420 portable handwheel is equipped with 3

6 4
a display. In addition, you can use the handwheel soft keys for 5
important setup functions, e.g. datum setting or entering and running 6
7 7
M functions. 8
11
As soon as you have activated the handwheel with the handwheel 9 12
activation key, the operating panel is locked. This is indicated by a pop- 10
13
up window on the TNC screen.
14
The HR 420 handwheel features the following operating elements:
1 EMERGENCY STOP button 15
16
2 Handwheel display for status display and function selection
3 Soft keys
4 Axis address keys
5 Handwheel activation key
6 Arrow keys for defining handwheel sensitivity
7 Key for TNC traverse direction of the selected axis
8 Switch-on spindle (machine-dependent function)
9 Switch-off spindle (machine-dependent function)
10 “Generate NC block” key
11 NC start
12 NC stop
13 Permissive button
14 Handwheel
15 Spindle speed potentiometer
16 Feed rate potentiometer

It is also possible to move the machine axes with the handwheel

during program run if M118 is active.

Your machine tool builder can make additional functions

of the HR420 available. Refer to your machine tool
manual.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 435

14.2 Moving the Machine Axes
Display
The handwheel display has four lines (see figure). The TNC shows the
following information there:
1 NOML X+1.563: Type of position display and position of the
selected axis
2 *: STIB (control is in operation) 1 2
3 4 to 7
3 S1000: Current spindle speed 8 9
4 F500: Feed rate at which the selected axis is moving 10
5 E: There is an error
6 3D: Tilted-working-plane function is active
7 2D: Basic rotation function is active
8 RES 5.0: Active handwheel resolution. Distance in mm/rev (°/rev
for rotary axes) that the selected axis moves for one handwheel
revolution
9 STEP ON or OFF: Incremental jog active or inactive. If the function
is active, the TNC also displays the active jog increment
10 Soft-key row: Selection of various functions, described in the
following sections

Selecting the axis to be moved

You can activate directly through the axis address keys the principal
axes X, Y, Z and two other axes defined by the machine tool builder. If
you want to select the virtual axis VT, or your machine has more axes,
proceed as follows:
U Press the handwheel soft key F1 (AX): The TNC displays all active
axes on the handwheel display. The currently active axis blinks
U Select the desired axis with the handwheel soft keys F1 (->) or F2
(<-) and confirm with the handwheel soft key F3 (OK)

Setting the handwheel sensitivity

The handwheel sensitivity specifies the distance an axis moves per
handwheel revolution. The sensitivity levels are pre-defined and are
selectable with the handwheel arrow keys (unless incremental jog is
not active).
Selectable sensitivity levels: 0.01/0.02/0.05/0.1/0.2/0.5/1/2/5/10/20
[mm/revolution or degrees/revolution]

436 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.2 Moving the Machine Axes
Moving the axes

Activate the handwheel: Press the handwheel key on

the HR 420. Now the TNC can be operated only
through the HR 420. A pop-up window with a text to
this effect appears on the TNC screen.

Select the desired operating mode via the OPM soft key, if necessary
(see “Changing the modes of operation” on page 439)

If required, press and hold the permissive button

Use the handwheel to select the axis to be moved.

Select the additional axes via soft key

Move the active axis in the positive direction, or

Move the active axis in the negative direction

Deactivate the handwheel: Press the handwheel key

on the HR 420. The TNC can now again be operated
from the control panel

Potentiometer settings
The potentiometers of the machine operating panel continue to be
active after you have activated the handwheel. If you want to use the
potentiometers on the handwheel, proceed as follows:
U Press the CTRL and Handwheel keys in the HR 420. The TNC shows
the soft-key menu for selecting the potentiometers on the
handwheel display
U Press the HW soft key to activate the handwheel potentiometers
If you have activated the potentiometers on the handwheel, you must
reactivate the potentiometers of the machine operating panel before
deselecting the handwheel. Proceed as follows:
U Press the CTRL and Handwheel keys in the HR 420. The TNC shows
the soft-key menu for selecting the potentiometers on the
handwheel display
U Press the KBD soft key to activate the potentiometers of the
machine operating panel

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 437

14.2 Moving the Machine Axes
Incremental jog positioning
With incremental jog positioning the TNC moves the currently active
handwheel axis by a preset distance defined by you.
U Press the handwheel soft key F2 (STEP)
U Activate incremental jog positioning: Press handwheel soft key 3
(ON)
U Select the desired jog increment by pressing the F1 or F2 key. If you
press and hold the respective key, each time it reaches an order of
magnitude, the TNC changes the counting increment by a factor of
10. If in addition you press the CTRL key, the counting increment
increases to 1. The smallest possible jog increment is 0.0001 mm.
The largest possible is 10 mm
U Confirm the selected jog increment with soft key 4 (OK)
U With the + or – handwheel key, move the active handwheel axis in
the corresponding direction

Entering miscellaneous functions M

U Press the handwheel soft key F3 (MSF)
U Press the handwheel soft key F1 (M)
U Select the desired M function number by pressing the F1 or F2 key
U Execute the M function with the NC start key

Entering the spindle speed S

U Press the handwheel soft key F3 (MSF)
U Press the handwheel soft key F2 (S)
U Select the desired speed by pressing the F1 or F2 key. If you press
and hold the respective key, each time it reaches an order of
magnitude, the TNC changes the counting increment by a factor of
10. If in addition you press the CTRL key, the counting increment
increases to 1000
U Activate the new speed S with the NC start key

Entering the feed rate F

U Press the handwheel soft key F3 (MSF)
U Press the handwheel soft key F3 (F)
U Select the desired feed rate by pressing the F1 or F2 key. If you
press and hold the respective key, each time it reaches an order of
magnitude, the TNC changes the counting increment by a factor of
10. If in addition you press the CTRL key, the counting increment
increases to 1000
U Confirm the new feed rate F with the handwheel soft key F3 (OK)

Datum setting
U Press the handwheel soft key F3 (MSF)
U Press the handwheel soft key F4 (PRS)
U If required, select the axis in which the datum is to be set
U Reset the axis with the handwheel soft key F3 (OK) or with F1 and
F2 set the desired value and then confirm with F3 (OK). By also
pressing the CTRL key, you can increase the counting increment
to 10

438 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.2 Moving the Machine Axes
Changing the modes of operation
With the handwheel soft key F4 (OPM) you can use the handwheel to
switch the mode of operation, provided that the current status of the
control allows a mode change.
U Press the handwheel soft key F4 (OPM)
U Select the desired operating mode by handwheel soft key
„ MAN: Manual Operation
„ MDI: Positioning with Manual Data Input
„ SGL: Program Run, Single Block
„ RUN: Program Run, Full Sequence

Generating a complete L Block

Use the MOD function to define the axis values to be

taken into an NC block (see “Selecting the Axes for
Generating G01 Blocks” on page 543).
If no axes are selected, the TNC displays the error
message No axes selected.

U Select the Positioning with MDI operating mode

U If required, use the arrow keys on the TNC keyboard to select the
NC block after which the new L block is to be inserted
U Actuate the handwheel
U Press the “Generate NC block” handwheel key: The TNC inserts a
complete L block containing all axis positions selected through the
MOD function

Features in the Program Run modes of operation

You can use the following functions in the Program Run modes of
operation:
„ NC start (handwheel NC-start key)
„ NC stop (handwheel NC-stop key)
„ After the NC-stop key has been pressed: Internal stop (handwheel
soft keys MOP and then STOP)
„ After the NC-stop key has been pressed: Manual axis traverse
(handwheel soft keys MOP and then MAN)
„ Returning to the contour after the axes were moved manually during
a program interruption (handwheel soft keys MOP and then REPO).
Operation is by handwheel soft keys, which function similarly to the
control-screen soft keys (see “Returning to the contour” on page
509)
„ On/off switch for the Tilted Working Plane function (handwheel soft
keys MOP and then 3D)

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 439

14.3 Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M
14.3 Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F
and Miscellaneous Functions M
Function
In the Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel operating modes,
you can enter the spindle speed S, feed rate F and the miscellaneous
functions M with soft keys. The miscellaneous functions are
described in Chapter 7 “Programming: Miscellaneous Functions.”

The machine tool builder determines which

miscellaneous functions M are available on your control
and what effects they have.

Entering values
Spindle speed S, miscellaneous function M

To enter the spindle speed, press the S soft key.

SPINDLE SPEED S =

1000 Enter the desired spindle speed and confirm your

entry with the machine START button.

The spindle speed S with the entered rpm is started with a

miscellaneous function M. Proceed in the same way to enter a
miscellaneous function M.
Feed rate F
After entering a feed rate F, you must confirm your entry with the ENT
key instead of the machine START button.
The following is valid for feed rate F:
„ If you enter F=0, then the lowest feed rate from MP1020 is effective
„ F is not lost during a power interruption

440 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.3 Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M
Changing the spindle speed and feed rate
With the override knobs you can vary the spindle speed S and feed
rate F from 0% to 150% of the set value.

The override knob for spindle speed is only functional on

machines with infinitely variable spindle drive.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 441

14.4 Datum Setting without a 3-D Touch Probe
14.4 Datum Setting without a 3-D
Touch Probe
Note

Datum setting with a 3-D touch probe: (See page 461).

You fix a datum by setting the TNC position display to the coordinates
of a known position on the workpiece.

Preparation
U Clamp and align the workpiece
U Insert the zero tool with known radius into the spindle
U Ensure that the TNC is showing the actual position values

442 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.4 Datum Setting without a 3-D Touch Probe
Workpiece presetting with axis keys

Safety measures for the workpiece. Y

If the workpiece surface must not be scratched, you can

lay a metal shim of known thickness d on it. Then enter a
tool axis datum value that is larger than the desired datum
by the value d. Z
-R X
-R
Y
Select the Manual Operation mode

Move the tool slowly until it touches (scratches) the

workpiece surface

Select an axis (all axes can also be selected via the

ASCII keyboard)

DATUM SETTING Z=

Zero tool in spindle axis: Set the display to a known

workpiece position (here, 0) or enter the thickness d
of the shim. In the tool axis, offset the tool radius

Repeat the process for the remaining axes.

If you are using a preset tool, set the display of the tool axis to the
length L of the tool or enter the sum Z=L+d

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 443

14.4 Datum Setting without a 3-D Touch Probe
Datum management with the preset table

You should definitely use the preset table if:

„ Your machine is equipped with rotary axes (tilting table
or swivel head) and you work with the function for tilting
the working plane
„ Your machine is equipped with a spindle-head changing
system
„ Up to now you have been working with older TNC
controls with REF-based datum tables
„ You wish to machine identical workpieces that are
differently aligned
The preset table can contain any number of lines
(datums). To optimize the file size and the processing
speed, you should use only as many lines as you need for
datum management.
For safety reasons, new lines can be inserted only at the
end of the preset table.

Saving the datums in the preset table

The preset table has the name PRESET.PR, and is saved in the directory
TNC:\. PRESET.PR is editable only in the Manual Operation and
Electronic Handwheel modes. In the Programming and Editing mode
you can only read the table, not edit it.
It is permitted to copy the preset table into another directory (for data
backup). Lines that were written by your machine tool builder are also
always write-protected in the copied tables. You therefore cannot edit
them.
Never change the number of lines in the copied tables! That could
cause problems when you want to reactivate the table.
To activate a preset table copied to another directory you have to copy
it back to the directory TNC:\.
There are several methods for saving datums and/or basic rotations in
the preset table:
„ Through probing cycles in the Manual Operation or Electronic
Handwheel modes (see Chapter 14)
„ Through the probing cycles 400 to 402 and 410 to 419 in automatic
mode (see User’s Manual, Cycles, Chapters 14 and 15)
„ Manual entry (see description below)

444 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.4 Datum Setting without a 3-D Touch Probe
Basic rotations from the preset table rotate the coordinate
system about the preset, which is shown in the same line
as the basic rotation.
When setting a preset, the TNC checks whether the
positions of the tilting axes match the corresponding
values of the 3D ROT menu (depending on the setting in
the kinematics table). Therefore:
„ If the “Tilt working plane” function is not active, the
position display for the rotary axes must be = 0° (zero
the rotary axes if necessary).
„ If the “Tilt working plane” function is active, the
position displays for the rotary axes must match the
angles entered in the 3-D ROT menu.
The machine manufacturer can lock any lines in the preset
table in order to place fixed datums there (e.g. a center
point for a rotary table). Such lines in the preset table are
shown in a different color (default: red).
The line 0 in the preset table is write protected. In line 0,
the TNC always saves the datum that you most recently
set manually via the axis keys or via soft key. If the datum
set manually is active, the TNC displays the text PR MAN(0)
in the status display.
If you automatically set the TNC display with the touch-
probe cycles for presetting, then the TNC does not store
these values in line 0.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 445

14.4 Datum Setting without a 3-D Touch Probe
Manually saving the datums in the preset table
In order to set datums in the preset table, proceed as follows:

Select the Manual Operation mode.

Move the tool slowly until it touches (scratches) the

workpiece surface, or position the measuring dial
correspondingly.

Displaying the preset table: The TNC opens the

preset table and sets the cursor to the active table
row.

Select functions for entering the presets: The TNC

displays the available possibilities for entry in the soft-
key row. See the table below for a description of the
entry possibilities.

Select the line in the preset table that you want to

change (the line number is the preset number).

If needed, select the column (axis) in the preset table

that you want to change.

Use the soft keys to select one of the available entry

possibilities (see the following table).

446 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.4 Datum Setting without a 3-D Touch Probe
Function Soft key
Directly transfer the actual position of the tool (the
measuring dial) as the new datum: This function
only saves the datum in the axis which is currently
highlighted.

Assign any value to the actual position of the tool

(the measuring dial): This function only saves the
datum in the axis which is currently highlighted.
Enter the desired value in the pop-up window.

Incrementally shift a datum already stored in the

table: This function only saves the datum in the
axis which is currently highlighted. Enter the
desired corrective value with the correct sign in
the pop-up window. If inch display is active: enter
the value in inches, and the TNC will internally
convert the entered values to mm.

Directly enter the new datum without calculation

of the kinematics (axis-specific). Only use this
function if your machine has a rotary table, and
you want to set the datum to the center of the
rotary table by entering 0. This function only saves
the datum in the axis which is currently
highlighted. Enter the desired value in the pop-up
window. If inch display is active: enter the value in
inches, and the TNC will internally convert the
entered values to mm.

Write the currently active datum to a selectable

line in the table: This function saves the datum in
all axes, and then activates the appropriate row in
the table automatically. If inch display is active:
enter the value in inches, and the TNC will
internally convert the entered values to mm.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 447

14.4 Datum Setting without a 3-D Touch Probe
Explanation of values saved in the preset table
„ Simple machine with three axes without tilting device
The TNC saves in the preset table the distance from the workpiece
datum to the reference point (with the correct algebraic sign).
„ Machine with swivel head
The TNC saves in the preset table the distance from the workpiece
datum to the reference point (with the correct algebraic sign).
„ Machine with rotary table
The TNC saves in the preset table the distance from the workpiece
datum to the center of the rotary table (with the correct algebraic
sign).
„ Machine with rotary table and swivel head
The TNC saves in the preset table the distance from the workpiece
datum to the center of the rotary table.

Danger of collision!
Keep in mind that moving an indexing feature on your
machine table (realized by changing the kinematics
description) requires you to redefine any workpiece-based
presets.

448 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.4 Datum Setting without a 3-D Touch Probe
Editing the preset table

Editing function in table mode Soft key

Select beginning of table

Select end of table

Select previous page in table

Select next page in table

Select the functions for preset entry

Activate the datum of the selected line of the

preset table

Add the entered number of lines to the end of the

table (2nd soft-key row)

Copy the highlighted field (2nd soft-key row)

Insert the copied field (2nd soft-key row)

Reset the selected line: The TNC enters—in all

columns (2nd soft-key row)

Insert a single line at the end of the table (2nd soft-

key row)

Delete a single line at the end of the table (2nd

soft-key row)

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 449

14.4 Datum Setting without a 3-D Touch Probe
Activating a datum from the preset table in the Manual Operation
mode

When activating a datum from the preset table, the TNC

resets the active datum shift.
However, a coordinate transformation that was
programmed in Cycle 19 Tilted Working Plane, or through
the PLANE function, remains active.
If you activate a preset that does not contain values in all
coordinates, the last effective reference point remains
active in these axes.

Select the Manual Operation mode.

Display the preset table.

Select the datum number that you want to activate, or

With the GOTO key, select the datum number that

you want to activate. Confirm with the ENT key

Activate the preset

Confirm activation of the datum The TNC sets the

display and—if defined—the basic rotation

Leave the preset table

Activating the datum from the preset table in an NC program

To activate datums from the preset table during program run, use
Cycle 247. In Cycle 247 you define the number of the datum that you
want to activate (see User’s Manual, Cycles, Cycle 247 SET DATUM).

450 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.5 Using the 3-D Touch Probe
14.5 Using the 3-D Touch Probe
Overview
The following touch probe cycles are available in the Manual Operation
mode:

Function Soft key Page

Calibrate the effective length Page 456

Calibrate the effective radius Page 457

Measure a basic rotation using a line Page 459

Set the datum in any axis Page 461

Set a corner as datum Page 462

Set a circle center as datum Page 463

Set a center line as datum Page 464

Measure a basic rotation using two Page 465

holes/cylindrical studs

Set the datum using four Page 465

holes/cylindrical studs

Set a circle center using three Page 465

holes/cylindrical studs

Selecting probe cycles

U To select the Manual Operation or El. Handwheel mode of operation
U Select the touch probe functions by pressing the
TOUCH PROBE soft key. The TNC displays additional
soft keys: see table above
U To select the probe cycle, press the appropriate soft
key, for example PROBING ROT, and the TNC
displays the associated menu

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 451

14.5 Using the 3-D Touch Probe
Recording measured values from the touch
probe cycles

The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool

builder for use of this function. The machine tool manual
provides further information.

After executing any selected probe cycle, the TNC displays the soft
key PRINT. If you press this soft key, the TNC will record the current
values determined in the active touch probe cycle. You can then use
the PRINT function in the menu for setting the data interface (see the
User's Manual Chapter 12, “MOD Functions, Setting the Data
Interfaces”) to define whether the TNC is to
„ print the measuring result,
„ store the measuring results on the TNC’s hard disk, or
„ store the measuring results on a PC.
If you store the measuring results, the TNC creates the ASCII file
%TCHPRNT.A. Unless you define a specific path and interface in the
interface configuration menu, the TNC will store the %TCHPRNT file
in the main directory TNC:\.

When you press the PRINT soft key, the %TCHPRNT.A

file must not be active in the Programming and Editing
mode of operation. The TNC will otherwise display an error
message.
The TNC stores the measured data in the %TCHPRNT.A
file only. If you execute several touch probe cycles in
succession and want to store the resulting measured data,
you must make a backup of the contents stored in
%TCHPRNT.A between the individual cycles by copying
or renaming the file.
Format and contents of the %TCHPRNT file are preset by
the machine tool builder.

452 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.5 Using the 3-D Touch Probe
Writing the measured values from touch probe
cycles in datum tables

This function is active only if you have datum tables active

on your TNC (bit 3 in Machine Parameter 7224.0 =0).
Use this function if you want to save measured values in
the workpiece coordinate system. If you want to save
measured values in the machine-based coordinate system
(REF coordinates), press the ENTER IN PRESET TABLE
soft key (see “Writing the measured values from touch
probe cycles in the preset table” on page 454).

With the ENTER IN DATUM TABLE soft key, the TNC can write the
values measured during a touch probe cycle in a datum table:

Note that during an active datum shift the TNC always

bases the probed value on the active preset (or on the
reference point most recently set in the Manual operating
mode), although the datum shift is included in the position
display.

U Select any probe function

U Enter the desired coordinates of the datum in the appropriate input
boxes (depends on the touch probe cycle being run)
U Enter the datum number in the Number in table= input box
U Enter the name of the datum table (complete path) in the Datum
table input box
U Press the ENTER IN DATUM TABLE soft key. The TNC saves the
datum in the indicated datum table under the entered number

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 453

14.5 Using the 3-D Touch Probe
Writing the measured values from touch probe
cycles in the preset table

Use this function if you want to save measured values in

the machine-based coordinate system (REF coordinates).
If you want to save measured values in the workpiece
coordinate system, press the ENTER IN DATUM TABLE
soft key(see “Writing the measured values from touch
probe cycles in datum tables” on page 453).

With the ENTER IN PRESET TABLE soft key, the TNC can write the
values measured during a probe cycle in the preset table. The
measured values are then stored referenced to the machine-based
coordinate system (REF coordinates). The preset table has the name
PRESET.PR, and is saved in the directory TNC:\.

Note that during an active datum shift the TNC always

bases the probed value on the active preset (or on the
reference point most recently set in the Manual operating
mode), although the datum shift is included in the position
display.

U Select any probe function

U Enter the desired coordinates of the datum in the appropriate input
boxes (depends on the touch probe cycle being run)
U Enter the preset number in the Number in table: input box
U Press the ENTER IN PRESET TABLE soft key. The TNC saves the
datum in the preset table under the entered number

If you overwrite the active datum, the TNC shows a

warning. If you really want to overwrite it, press the ENT
key. If not, press the NO ENT key.

454 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.5 Using the 3-D Touch Probe
Storing measured values in the pallet preset
table

You use this function for determining pallet datums. This

function must be enabled by your machine tool builder.
In order to store a measured value in the pallet preset
table, you must activate a zero preset before probing. A
zero preset consists of the entry 0 in all axes of the preset
table!

U Select any probe function

U Enter the desired coordinates of the datum in the appropriate input
boxes (depends on the touch probe cycle being run)
U Enter the preset number in the Number in table: input box
U Press the ENTER IN PALLET PRES. TAB. soft key. The TNC saves
the datum in the preset table under the number entered

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 455

14.6 Calibrating a 3-D Touch Probe
14.6 Calibrating a 3-D Touch Probe
Introduction
In order to precisely specify the actual trigger point of a 3-D touch
probe, you must calibrate the touch probe, otherwise the TNC cannot
provide precise measuring results.

Always calibrate a touch probe in the following cases:

„ Commissioning
„ Stylus breakage
„ Stylus exchange
„ Change in the probe feed rate
„ Irregularities caused, for example, when the machine
heats up
„ Change of active tool axis

During calibration, the TNC finds the “effective” length of the stylus
and the “effective” radius of the ball tip. To calibrate the 3-D touch
probe, clamp a ring gauge of known height and known internal radius
to the machine table.

Calibrating the effective length

The effective length of the touch probe is always

referenced to the tool datum. The machine tool builder
usually defines the spindle tip as the tool datum.
Z
U Set the datum in the spindle axis such that for the machine tool table
Z=0.
U To select the calibration function for the touch probe Y
length, press the TOUCH PROBE and CAL. L soft
keys. The TNC then displays a menu window with
four input fields 5
X
U Enter the tool axis (with the axis key)
U Datum: Enter the height of the ring gauge
U The menu items Effective ball radius and Effective
length do not require input
U Move the touch probe to a position just above the ring
gauge
U ?To change the traverse direction (if necessary), press
a soft key or an arrow key
U To probe the upper surface of the ring gauge, press
the machine START button

456 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.6 Calibrating a 3-D Touch Probe
Calibrating the effective radius and
compensating center misalignment
After the touch probe is inserted, it normally needs to be aligned
exactly with the spindle axis. The calibration function determines the
misalignment between touch probe axis and spindle axis and
computes the compensation.
The calibration routine varies depending on the setting of Machine Z
Parameter 6165 (spindle orientation active/inactive). If the function for
orienting the infrared touch probe to the programmed probe direction
is active, the calibration cycle is executed after you have pressed NC Y
Start once. If the function is not active, you can decide whether you
want to compensate the center misalignment by calibrating the
effective radius. X
The TNC rotates the 3-D touch probe by 180° for calibrating the center 10
misalignment. The rotation is initiated by a miscellaneous function that
is set by the machine tool builder in Machine Parameter 6160.
Proceed as follows for manual calibration:
U In the Manual Operation mode, position the ball tip in the bore of the
ring gauge
U To select the calibration function for the ball-tip radius
and the touch probe center misalignment, press the
CAL. R soft key
U Select the tool axis and enter the radius of the ring
gauge
U To probe the workpiece, press the machine START
button four times. The 3-D touch probe contacts a
position on the hole in each axis direction and
calculates the effective ball-tip radius
U If you want to terminate the calibration function at this
point, press the END soft key

In order to be able to determine ball-tip center

misalignment, the TNC needs to be specially prepared by
the machine manufacturer. The machine tool manual
provides further information.

U If you want to determine the ball-tip center

misalignment, press the 180° soft key. The TNC
rotates the touch probe by 180°
U To probe the workpiece, press the machine START
button four times. The 3-D touch probe contacts a
position on the hole in each axis direction and
calculates the ball-tip center misalignment

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 457

14.6 Calibrating a 3-D Touch Probe
Displaying calibration values
The TNC stores the effective length and radius, as well as the center
misalignment, for use when the touch probe is needed again. You can
display the values on the screen with the soft keys CAL. L and CAL. R.

If you want to use several touch probes or calibration data

blocks: See “Managing more than one block of calibrating
data,” page 458.

Managing more than one block of calibrating

data
If you use several touch probes or measuring contacts arranged in a
cross shape on your machine, you must also use several blocks of
calibration data.
To be able to use more than one block of calibration data, you must set
Machine Parameter 7411=1. To find the calibration data, proceed in
the same way as is done with one single touch probe. When exiting
the Calibration menu, press the ENT key to confirm the entry of the
calibration data in the tool table and for the TNC to save the calibration
data in the tool table. The line of the tool table, to which the TNC saves
the data, is determined by the active tool number.

Make sure that you have activated the correct tool number
before using the touch probe, regardless of whether you
wish to run the touch probe cycle in automatic mode or
manual mode.

458 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.7 Compensating Workpiece Misalignment with a 3-D Touch Probe
14.7 Compensating Workpiece
Misalignment with a 3-D Touch
Probe
Introduction
The TNC electronically compensates workpiece misalignment by
computing a “basic rotation.”
For this purpose, the TNC sets the rotation angle to the desired angle
with respect to the reference axis in the working plane. See figure at
right. Y Y
Select the probe direction perpendicular to the angle
reference axis when measuring workpiece misalignment.
To ensure that the basic rotation is calculated correctly
during program run, program both coordinates of the PA
working plane in the first positioning block.
You can also use a basic rotation in conjunction with the X X
PLANE function. In this case, first activate the basic A B
rotation and then the PLANE function.
If you change the basic rotation, the TNC asks you if you
also want to save the changed basic rotation in the active
line of the Preset table when you exit the menu. In this
case, confirm with the ENT key.

If your machine has been prepared for it, the TNC can also
conduct a real, three-dimensional set-up compensation. If
necessary, contact your machine tool builder.

Measuring the basic rotation

U Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING
ROT soft key
U Position the touch probe at a position near the first
touch point
U Select the probe direction perpendicular to the angle
reference axis: Select the axis by soft key
U To probe the workpiece, press the machine START
button
U Position the touch probe at a position near the second
touch point
U To probe the workpiece, press the machine START
button. The TNC determines the basic rotation and
displays the angle after the dialog Rotation angle =

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 459

14.7 Compensating Workpiece Misalignment with a 3-D Touch Probe
Saving the basic rotation in the preset table
U After the probing process, enter the preset number in which the
TNC is to save the active basic rotation in the Number in table:
input box
U Press the ENTRY IN PRESET TABLE soft key to save the basic
rotation in the preset table

Saving the basic rotation in the pallet preset

table

In order to store a basic rotation in the pallet preset table,

you must activate a zero preset before probing. A zero
preset consists of the entry 0 in all axes of the preset
table!

U After the probing process, enter the preset number in which the
TNC is to save the active basic rotation in the Number in table:
input box
U Press the ENTRY IN PALLET PRES. TAB. soft key to save the basic
rotation in the preset table
The TNC shows an active pallet preset in the additional status display
(see “General pallet information (PAL tab)” on page 80).

Displaying a basic rotation

The angle of the basic rotation appears after ROTATION ANGLE
whenever PROBING ROT is selected. The TNC also displays the
rotation angle in the additional status display (STATUS POS.)
In the status display a symbol is shown for a basic rotation whenever
the TNC is moving the axes according to a basic rotation.

Canceling a basic rotation

U Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING ROT soft key
U Enter a rotation angle of zero and confirm with the ENT key
U Terminate the probe function by pressing the END key

460 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.8 Datum Setting with a 3-D Touch Probe
14.8 Datum Setting with a 3-D Touch
Probe
Overview
The following soft-key functions are available for setting the datum on
an aligned workpiece:
Soft key Function Page
Datum setting in any axis Page 461

Set a corner as datum Page 462

Set a circle center as datum Page 463

Center line as datum Page 464

Note that during an active datum shift the TNC always

bases the probed value on the active preset (or on the
reference point most recently set in the Manual operating
mode), although the datum shift is included in the position
display.

Datum setting in any axis

U Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING
POS soft key.
U Move the touch probe to a position near the touch
point.
U Select the probe axis and direction in which you wish Z
to set the datum, such as Z in direction Z–. Selection
is made via soft keys. Y
U To probe the workpiece, press the machine START
button.
X
U Datum: Enter the nominal coordinate and confirm your
entry with the SET DATUM soft key, or write the
value to a table (see “Writing the measured values
from touch probe cycles in datum tables,” page 453,
or see “Writing the measured values from touch
probe cycles in the preset table,” page 454, or see
“Storing measured values in the pallet preset table,”
page 455).
U To terminate the probe function, press the END key.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 461

14.8 Datum Setting with a 3-D Touch Probe
Corner as datum—using points that were
already probed for a basic rotation
U Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING P
soft key.
U Touch points of basic rotation ?: Press ENT to Y Y
transfer the touch point coordinates.
U Position the touch probe at a position near the first
touch point of the side that was not probed for basic
rotation.
U Select the probe direction by soft key. Y=?
P P
U To probe the workpiece, press the machine START
button.
X X
U Position the touch probe near the second touch point X=?
on the same workpiece edge.
U To probe the workpiece, press the machine START
button.
U Datum: Enter both coordinates of the datum in the
menu window, confirm with the SET DATUM soft
key, or write the values to a table (see “Writing the
measured values from touch probe cycles in datum
tables,” page 453, or see “Writing the measured
values from touch probe cycles in the preset table,”
page 454, or see “Storing measured values in the
pallet preset table,” page 455).
U To terminate the probe function, press the END key.

Corner as datum—without using points that

were already probed for a basic rotation
U Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING P soft key
U Touch points of basic rotation?: Press NO ENT to ignore the
previous touch points. (The dialog question only appears if a basic
rotation was made previously)
U Probe both workpiece sides twice
U Datum: Enter the coordinates of the datum and confirm your entry
with the SET DATUM soft key, or write the values to a table (see
“Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in datum
tables,” page 453, or see “Writing the measured values from touch
probe cycles in the preset table,” page 454, or see “Storing
measured values in the pallet preset table,” page 455)
U To terminate the probe function, press the END key

462 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.8 Datum Setting with a 3-D Touch Probe
Circle center as datum
With this function, you can set the datum at the center of bore holes,
circular pockets, cylinders, studs, circular islands, etc. Y
Inside circle:
The TNC automatically probes the inside wall in all four coordinate axis
directions. Y+

For incomplete circles (circular arcs) you can choose the appropriate
probing direction. X– X+

U Position the touch probe approximately in the center of the circle

U Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING
CC soft key Y–

U To probe the workpiece, press the machine START

button four times. The touch probe touches four X
points on the inside of the circle
U If you are probing to find the stylus center (only
available on machines with spindle orientation,
depending on MP6160), press the 180° soft key and
Y
probe another four points on the inside of the circle Y–
U If you are not probing to find the stylus center, press
the END key X+

U Datum: In the menu window, enter both coordinates of

the circle center, confirm with the SET DATUM soft
key, or write the values to a table (see “Writing the
measured values from touch probe cycles in datum
tables,” page 453, or see “Writing the measured X–
values from touch probe cycles in the preset table,”
page 454)
U To terminate the probe function, press the END key
Y+ X
Outside circle:
U Position the touch probe at a position near the first touch point
outside of the circle
U Select the probe direction by soft key
U To probe the workpiece, press the machine START button
U Repeat the probing process for the remaining three points See
figure at lower right
U Datum: Enter the coordinates of the datum and confirm your entry
with the SET DATUM soft key, or write the values to a table (see
“Writing the measured values from touch probe cycles in datum
tables,” page 453, or see “Writing the measured values from touch
probe cycles in the preset table,” page 454, or see “Storing
measured values in the pallet preset table,” page 455)
U To terminate the probe function, press the END key

After the probing procedure is completed, the TNC displays the

coordinates of the circle center and the circle radius PR

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 463

14.8 Datum Setting with a 3-D Touch Probe
Center line as datum
U Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING
soft key Y
U Position the touch probe at a position near the first
touch point
U Select the probing direction by soft key
U To probe the workpiece, press the machine START X– X+
button
U Position the touch probe at a position near the second
touch point
U To probe the workpiece, press the machine START
button
U Datum: Enter the coordinate of the datum in the menu X
window, confirm with the SET DATUM soft key, or
write the value to a table (see “Writing the measured
values from touch probe cycles in datum tables,”
page 453, or see “Writing the measured values from
touch probe cycles in the preset table,” page 454, or Y
see “Storing measured values in the pallet preset
table,” page 455)
U To terminate the probe function, press the END key

X+ X–

464 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.8 Datum Setting with a 3-D Touch Probe
Setting datum points using holes/cylindrical
studs
A second soft-key row provides soft keys for using holes or cylindrical
studs to set a reference point

Define whether a hole or stud is to be probed

The default setting is for probing holes.
U Select the probe function by pressing the TOUCH
PROBE soft key, shift the soft-key row
U Select the probe function: For example, press the
PROBING ROT soft key
U Circular studs are to be probed. Define by soft key

U Holes are to be probed. Define by soft key

Probing holes
Pre-position the touch probe approximately in the center of the hole.
After you have pressed the external START key, the TNC automatically
probes four points on the wall of the hole.
Move the touch probe to the next hole repeat the probing process. and
have the TNC repeat the probing procedure until all the holes have
been probed to set reference points.

Probing cylindrical studs

Position the ball tip at a starting position near the first touch point of
the stud. Select the probing direction by soft key and press the
machine START button to start probing. Perform the above procedure
four times.

Overview

Cycle Soft key

Basic rotation using 2 holes:
The TNC measures the angle between the line
connecting the centers of two holes and a nominal
position (angle reference axis).

Datum using 4 holes:

The TNC calculates the intersection of the line
connecting the first two probed holes with the line
connecting the last two probed holes. You need to
probe diagonally opposite holes one after another (as
shown on the soft key), as otherwise the datum
calculated by the TNC will be incorrect.

Circle center using 3 holes:

The TNC calculates a circle that intersects the centers
of all three holes, and finds the center.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 465

14.8 Datum Setting with a 3-D Touch Probe
Measuring Workpieces with a 3-D Touch Probe
You can also use the touch probe in the Manual Operation and El.
Handwheel operating modes to make simple measurements on the
workpiece. Numerous programmable probe cycles are available for
complex measuring tasks (see User’s Manual, Cycles, Chapter 16,
Checking workpieces automatically). With a 3-D touch probe you can
determine:
„ position coordinates, and from them,
„ dimensions and angles on the workpiece.

To find the coordinate of a position on an aligned workpiece:

U Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING
POS soft key.
U Move the touch probe to a position near the touch
point.
U Select the probe direction and axis of the coordinate.
Use the corresponding soft keys for selection.
U To probe the workpiece, press the machine START
button.
The TNC shows the coordinates of the touch point as reference point.

Finding the coordinates of a corner in the working plane

Find the coordinates of the corner point: See “Corner as datum—
without using points that were already probed for a basic rotation,”
page 462. The TNC displays the coordinates of the probed corner as
reference point.

466 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.8 Datum Setting with a 3-D Touch Probe
Measuring workpiece dimensions
U Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING
POS soft key.
Z
U Position the touch probe at a position near the first
touch point A.
U Select the probing direction by soft key.
U To probe the workpiece, press the machine START
button.
A
U If you will need the current datum later, write down Y
the value that appears in the Datum display.
B X
U Datum: Enter “0”.
l
U To terminate the dialog, press the END key.
U Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING
POS soft key.
U Position the touch probe at a position near the second
touch point B.
U Select the probe direction with the soft keys: Same
axis but from the opposite direction.
U To probe the workpiece, press the machine START
button.
The value displayed as datum is the distance between the two points
on the coordinate axis.
To return to the datum that was active before the length
measurement:
U Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING POS soft key
U Probe the first touch point again
U Set the datum to the value that you wrote down previously
U To terminate the dialog, press the END key
Measuring angles
You can use the 3-D touch probe to measure angles in the working
plane. You can measure
„ the angle between the angle reference axis and a workpiece edge,
or
„ the angle between two sides
The measured angle is displayed as a value of maximum 90°.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 467

14.8 Datum Setting with a 3-D Touch Probe
Finding the angle between the angle reference axis and a
workpiece edge
U Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING
ROT soft key.
U Rotation angle: If you need the current basic rotation
later, write down the value that appears under
Rotation angle.
U Make a basic rotation with workpiece edge to be
compared (see “Compensating Workpiece
Misalignment with a 3-D Touch Probe” on page 459)
U Press the PROBING ROT soft key to display the angle
between the angle reference axis and the workpiece
edge as the rotation angle.
PA
U Cancel the basic rotation, or restore the previous basic
rotation.
U This is done by setting the rotation angle to the value
that you previously wrote down.
To measure the angle between two workpiece sides:
Z
U Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING ROT soft key
U Rotation angle: If you need the current basic rotation later, write L?
Y
down the displayed rotation angle
U Make a basic rotation with first workpiece edge (see a?
100
“Compensating Workpiece Misalignment with a 3-D Touch Probe” X
on page 459) a?
U Probe the second edge as for a basic rotation, but do not set the
rotation angle to zero!
U Press the PROBING ROT soft key to display the angle PA between
100
the two workpiece edges as the rotation angle –10
U Cancel the basic rotation, or restore the previous basic rotation by
setting the rotation angle to the value that you wrote down
previously

468 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.8 Datum Setting with a 3-D Touch Probe
Using the touch probe functions with
mechanical probes or dial gauges
If you do not have an electronic 3-D touch probe on your machine, you
can also use all the previously described manual touch probe functions
(exception: calibration function) with mechanical probes or by simply
touching the workpiece with the tool.
In place of the electronic signal generated automatically by a 3-D touch
probe during probing, you can manually initiate the trigger signal for
capturing the probing position by pressing a key. Proceed as follows:
U Select any touch probe function by soft key
U Move the mechanical probe to the first position to be
captured by the TNC
U Confirm the position: Press the actual-position-
capture key for the TNC to save the current position
U Move the mechanical probe to the next position to be
captured by the TNC
U Confirm the position: Press the actual-position-
capture key for the TNC to save the current position
U If required, move to additional positions and capture
as described previously
U Datum: In the menu window, enter the coordinates of
the new datum, confirm with the SET DATUM soft
key, or write the values to a table (see “Writing the
measured values from touch probe cycles in datum
tables,” page 453, or see “Writing the measured
values from touch probe cycles in the preset table,”
page 454)
U To terminate the probe function, press the END key

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 469

14.9 Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
14.9 Tilting the Working Plane
(Software Option 1)
Application, function

The functions for tilting the working plane are interfaced to

the TNC and the machine tool by the machine tool builder.
With some swivel heads and tilting tables, the machine
tool builder determines whether the entered angles are Y
interpreted as coordinates of the rotary axes or as angular Z
components of a tilted plane. Refer to your machine tool
manual. B

The TNC supports the tilting functions on machine tools with swivel
heads and/or tilting tables. Typical applications are, for example, 10°
oblique holes or contours in an oblique plane. The working plane is
always tilted around the active datum. The program is written as usual
in a main plane, such as the X/Y plane, but is executed in a plane that X
is tilted relative to the main plane.
There are three functions available for tilting the working plane:
„ 3-D ROT soft key in the Manual Operation mode and Electronic
Handwheel mode, see “Activating manual tilting,” page 474.
„ Tilting under program control, Cycle G80 in the part program (see
User’s Manual, Cycles, Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE)
„ Tilting under program control, PLANE function in the part program
(see “The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software
Option 1)” on page 375).
The TNC functions for "tilting the working plane" are coordinate
transformations. The working plane is always perpendicular to the
direction of the tool axis.

470 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.9 Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
When tilting the working plane, the TNC differentiates between two
machine types:
„ Machine with tilting table
„ You must tilt the workpiece into the desired position for
machining by positioning the tilting table, for example with an L
block.
„ The position of the transformed tool axis does not change in
relation to the machine-based coordinate system. Thus if you
rotate the table—and therefore the workpiece—by 90° for
example, the coordinate system does not rotate. If you press the
Z+ axis direction button in the Manual Operation mode, the tool
moves in Z+ direction.
„ In calculating the transformed coordinate system, the TNC
considers only the mechanically influenced offsets of the
particular tilting table (the so-called “translational” components).
„ Machine with swivel head
„ You must bring the tool into the desired position for machining by
positioning the swivel head, for example with an L block.
„ The position of the transformed tool axis changes in relation to the
machine-based coordinate system. Thus if you rotate the swivel
head of your machine—and therefore the tool—in the B axis by
90° for example, the coordinate system rotates also. If you press
the Z+ axis direction button in the Manual Operation mode, the
tool moves in X+ direction of the machine-based coordinate
system.
„ In calculating the transformed coordinate system, the TNC
considers both the mechanically influenced offsets of the
particular swivel head (the so-called “translational” components)
and offsets caused by tilting of the tool (3-D tool length
compensation).

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 471

14.9 Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Traversing the reference points in tilted axes
With tilted axes, you use the machine axis direction buttons to cross
over the reference points. The TNC interpolates the corresponding
axes. Be sure that the function for tilting the working plane is active in
the Manual Operation mode and that the actual angle of the tilted axis
was entered in the menu field.

Setting the datum in a tilted coordinate system

After you have positioned the rotary axes, set the datum in the same
manner as for a non-tilted system. The behavior of the TNC during
datum setting depends on the settings of Machine Parameter 7500 in
your kinematics table:
„ MP7500, bit 5=0
With an active tilted working plane, the TNC checks during datum
setting in the X, Y and Z axes whether the current coordinates of the
rotary axes agree with the tilt angles that you defined (3D-ROT
menu). If the tilted working plane function is not active, the TNC
checks whether the rotary axes are at 0° (actual positions). If the
positions do not agree, the TNC will display an error message.
„ MP7500, bit 5=1
The TNC does not check whether the current coordinates of the
rotary axes (actual positions) agree with the tilt angles that you
defined.

Always set a reference point in all three reference axes.

If your machine tool is not equipped with axis control, you
must enter the actual position of the rotary axis in the
menu for manual tilting: The actual positions of one or
several rotary axes must match the entry. Otherwise the
TNC will calculate an incorrect datum.

Datum setting on machines with rotary tables

If you use a rotary table to align the workpiece, for example with
probing cycle 403, you must set the table position value to zero after
alignment and before setting the datum in the linear axes X, Y and Z.
Otherwise, the TNC generates an error message. Cycle 403 provides
you with an input parameter for this purpose (see User’s Manual for
Touch Probe Cycles, “Basic Rotation Compensation via Rotary Axis”).

Datum setting on machines with spindle-head

changing systems
If your machine is equipped with a spindle head changer, you should
use the preset table to manage your datums. Datums saved in preset
tables account for the active machine kinematics (head geometry). If
you exchange heads, the TNC accounts for the new head dimensions
so that the active datum is retained.

472 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.9 Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Position display in a tilted system
The positions displayed in the status window (ACTL. and NOML.) are
referenced to the tilted coordinate system.

Limitations on working with the tilting function

„ The probing function for basic rotation is not available if you have
activated the working plane function in the Manual Operation mode.
„ The actual-position-capture function is not allowed if the tilted
working plane function is active.
„ PLC positioning (determined by the machine tool builder) is not
possible.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 473

14.9 Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Activating manual tilting

To select manual tilting, press the 3-D ROT soft key.

Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the

Manual Operation menu item.

To activate manual tilting, press the ACTIVE soft key.

Use the arrow keys to position the highlight on the

desired rotary axis.

Enter the tilt angle

To conclude entry, press the END key

To reset the tilting function, set the desired operating modes in the
menu “Tilt working plane” to inactive.
If the tilted working plane function is active and the TNC moves the
machine axes in accordance with the tilted axes, the status display
shows the symbol.
If you activate the “Tilt working plane” function for the Program Run
operating mode, the tilt angle entered in the menu becomes active in
the first block of the part program. If you use Cycle G80 or the PLANE
function in the part program, the angle values defined there are in
effect. Angle values entered in the menu will be overwritten.

474 Manual Operation and Setup

 14.9 Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)
Setting the current tool-axis direction as the
active machining direction (FCL 2 function)

This function must be enabled by your machine

manufacturer. Refer to your machine tool manual.

In the Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel modes of

operation you can use this function to move the tool via the external
direction keys or with the handwheel in the direction that the tool axis
is currently pointed. Use this function if
„ You want to retract the tool in the direction of the tool axis during
program interrupt of a 5-axis machining program.
„ You want to machine with an inclined tool using the handwheel or
the external direction keys in the Manual Operation mode.

To select manual tilting, press the 3-D ROT soft key.

Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the

Manual Operation menu item.

To activate the current tool-axis direction as the active

machining direction, press the TOOL AXIS soft key.

To conclude entry, press the END key.

To reset the tilting function, set the Manual Operation menu item in
the “Tilt working plane” menu to inactive.
The symbol appears in the status display when the Move in tool-
axis direction function is active.

This function is even available when you interrupt

program run and want to move the axes manually.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 475

 14.9 Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)

476
Manual Operation and Setup
Positioning with Manual
Data Input
15.1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations
15.1 Programming and Executing
Simple Machining Operations
The Positioning with Manual Data Input mode of operation is
particularly convenient for simple machining operations or pre-
positioning of the tool. It enables you to write a short program in
HEIDENHAIN conversational programming or in DIN/ISO format, and
execute it immediately. You can also call TNC cycles. The program is
stored in the file $MDI. In the Positioning with MDI mode of operation,
the additional status displays can also be activated.

Positioning with Manual Data Input (MDI)

Select the Positioning with MDI mode of operation.

Program the file $MDI as you wish

To start program run, press the machine START key

Limitation
FK free contour programming, programming graphics and Z
program run graphics cannot be used.
Y
The $MDI file must not contain a program call (%).

Example 1
A hole with a depth of 20 mm is to be drilled into a single workpiece. X
50
After clamping and aligning the workpiece and setting the datum, you
can program and execute the drilling operation in a few lines.

50

478 Positioning with Manual Data Input

 15.1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations
First you pre-position the tool with straight-line blocks to the hole
center coordinates at a setup clearance of 5 mm above the workpiece
surface. Then drill the hole with Cycle G200.

%$MDI G71 *
N10 G99 T1 L+0 R+5 * Define tool: zero tool, radius 5
N20 T1 G17 S2000 * Call tool: tool axis Z
Spindle speed 2000 rpm
N30 G00 G40 G90 Z+200 * Retract tool (rapid traverse)
N40 X+50 Y+50 M3 * Move the tool at rapid traverse to a position above
the hole. Spindle on.
N50 G01 Z+2 F2000 * Position tool to 2 mm above hole
N60 G200 DRILLING * Define Cycle G200 Drilling
Q200=2 ;SETUP CLEARANCE Set-up clearance of the tool above the hole
Q201=-20 ;DEPTH Total hole depth (algebraic sign=working direction)
Q206=250 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGN Feed rate for drilling
Q202=10 ;PLUNGING DEPTH Depth of each infeed before retraction
Q210=0 ;DWELL TIME AT TOP Dwell time at top for chip release (in seconds)
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE Workpiece surface coordinate
Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE Position after the cycle, with respect to Q203
Q211=0.5 ;DWELL TIME AT DEPTH Dwell time in seconds at the hole bottom
N70 G79 * Call Cycle G200 PECKING
N80 G00 G40 Z+200 M2 * Retract the tool
N9999999 %$MDI G71 * End of program

Straight-line function: See “Straight line at rapid traverse G00 Straight

Line with Feed Rate G01 F,” page 194, DRILLING cycle: See User’s
Manual, Cycles, Cycle 200 DRILLING.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 479

15.1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations
Example 2: Correcting workpiece misalignment on machines
with rotary tables

Use the 3-D touch probe to rotate the coordinate system. See “Touch
Probe Cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel Operating
Modes,” section “Compensating workpiece misalignment,” in the
Touch Probe Cycles User’s Manual.

Write down the rotation angle and cancel the basic rotation

Select operating mode: Positioning with MDI

Select the rotary table axis, enter the rotation angle

and feed rate you wrote down, for example: G01 G40
G90 C+2.561 F50

Conclude entry

Press the machine START button: The rotation of the

table corrects the misalignment

480 Positioning with Manual Data Input

 15.1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations
Protecting and erasing programs in $MDI
The $MDI file is generally intended for short programs that are only
needed temporarily. Nevertheless, you can store a program, if
necessary, by proceeding as described below:

Select the Programming and Editing mode of

operation

Press the PGM MGT key (program management) to

call the file manager

Mark the $MDI file

To select the file copying function, press the COPY

soft key

TARGET FILE =

HOLE Enter the name under which you want to save the
current contents of the $MDI file

Copy the file

Press the END soft key to close the file manager

Erasing the contents of the $MDI file is done in a similar way: Instead
of copying the contents, however, you erase them with the DELETE
soft key. The next time you select the Positioning with MDI operating
mode, the TNC will display an empty $MDI file.

If you wish to delete $MDI, then

„ You must not have selected the Positioning with MDI
mode (not even in the background)
„ You must not have selected the $MDI file in the
Programming and Editing mode

For more information: see “Copying a single file,” page 115.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 481

 15.1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations

482
Positioning with Manual Data Input
Test Run and Program
Run
16.1 Graphics
16.1 Graphics
Application
In the program run modes of operation as well as in the Test Run
mode, the TNC provides the following three display modes: Using soft
keys, select whether you desire:
„ Plan view
„ Projection in three planes
„ 3-D view
The TNC graphic depicts the workpiece as if it were being machined
with a cylindrical end mill. If a tool table is active, you can also simulate
the machining operation with a spherical cutter. For this purpose,
enter R2 = R in the tool table.
The TNC will not show a graphic if
„ the current program has no valid blank form definition
„ no program is selected

Using the new 3-D graphics in the Test Run mode, you can
now also graphically display machining operations in the
tilted working plane as well as multi-sided machining
operations, provided that you have already simulated the
program in another view. You need at least the MC 422 B
hardware in order to use this function. In order to increase
the speed of the test graphics on older hardware versions,
bit 5 of MP7310 should be set to 1. This deactivates
functions which were implemented specifically for the 3-
D graphics.
The TNC graphic does not show a radius oversize DR that
has been programmed in the T block.

Graphic simulation for special applications

NC programs usually contain a tool call with a defined tool number,
which automatically determines the tool data for graphic simulation.
For special applications that do not require any tool data (e.g. laser
cutting, laser drilling or waterjet cutting), you can set Machine
Parameters 7315 to 7317 such that the TNC will run a graphic
simulation even if no tool data are activated. However, you always
need a tool call with the definition of the tool axis orientation (e.g. G17).
The tool number does not need to be entered.

484 Test Run and Program Run

 16.1 Graphics
Setting the speed of the test run

You can set the speed of the test run only if the “Display
of machining time” function is active (see “Activating the
stopwatch function” on page 493). The TNC otherwise
always performs the test run at the maximum possible
speed.
The most recently set speed remains active, even if the
power is interrupted, until you change it.

After you have started a program, the TNC displays the following soft
keys with which you can set the simulation speed.

Functions Soft key

Execute test run at the same speed at which the
program will be executed (programmed feed rates
are taken into account).

Increase the test speed incrementally.

Decrease the test speed incrementally.

Test run at the maximum possible speed (default

setting).

You can also set the simulation speed before you start a program:
U Switch to the next soft-key row

U Select the function for setting the simulation speed

U Select the desired function via soft key, e.g.

incrementally increasing the test speed

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 485

16.1 Graphics
Overview of display modes
The control displays the following soft keys in the Program Run and
Test Run modes of operation:

View Soft key

Plan view

Projection in three planes

3-D view

Limitations during program run

A graphical representation of a running program is not

possible if the microprocessor of the TNC is already
occupied with complicated machining tasks or if large
areas are being machined. Example: Multipass milling
over the entire blank form with a large tool. The TNC
interrupts the graphics and displays the text ERROR in the
graphics window. The machining process is continued,
however.
In the test run graphics, the TNC does not depict multi-axis
operations during machining. The error message Axis
cannot be shown appears in the graphics window in such
cases.

Plan view
This is the fastest of the graphic display modes.

If your machine has a mouse, the status bar shows the

depth of any location on the workpiece when you move
the mouse pointer over it.

U Press the soft key for plan view

U Regarding depth display, remember: The deeper the
surface, the darker the shade

486 Test Run and Program Run

 16.1 Graphics
Projection in 3 planes
Similar to a workpiece drawing, the part is displayed with a plan view
and two sectional planes. A symbol to the lower left indicates whether
the display is in first angle or third angle projection according to ISO
6433 (selected with MP7310).
Details can be isolated in this display mode for magnification (see
“Magnifying details,” page 491).
In addition, you can shift the sectional planes with the corresponding
soft keys:
U Select the soft key for projection in three planes

U Shift the soft-key row until the soft key for the
functions for shifting the sectional plane appears
U Select the functions for shifting the sectional plane.
The TNC offers the following soft keys:

Function Soft keys

Shift the vertical sectional plane to the right
or left

Shift the vertical sectional plane forward or

backward

Shift the horizontal sectional plane upwards

or downwards

The positions of the sectional planes are visible during shifting.

The default setting of the sectional plane is selected such that it lies in
the working plane in the workpiece center and in the tool axis on the
top surface.

Coordinates of the line of intersection

At the bottom of the graphics window, the TNC displays the
coordinates of the line of intersection, referenced to the workpiece
datum. Only the coordinates of the working plane are shown. This
function is activated with MP7310.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 487

16.1 Graphics
3-D view
The workpiece is displayed in three dimensions. If you have the
appropriate hardware, then with its high-resolution 3-D graphics the
TNC can also display machining operations in the tilted working plane
as well as multi-sided machining operations.
You can rotate the 3-D display about the vertical and horizontal axes
via soft keys. If there is a mouse attached to your TNC, you can also
perform this function by holding down the right mouse button and
dragging the mouse.
The shape of the workpiece blank can be depicted by a frame overlay
at the beginning of the graphic simulation.
In the Test Run mode of operation you can isolate details for
magnification, see “Magnifying details,” page 491.
U Press the soft key for 3-D view. Press the soft key
twice to switch to the high-resolution 3-D graphics.
This switch is only possible once the simulation has
finished. The high-resolution graphics show more
surface details of the workpiece being machined.

The speed of the 3-D graphics depends on the tooth

length (LCUTS column in the tool table). If LCUTS is defined
as 0 (basic setting), the simulation calculates an infinitely
long tooth length, which leads to a long processing time.
If you do not want to define LCUTS, then set MP7312 to a
value between 5 and 10. This way the TNC internally limits
the tooth length to a value which is calculated from
MP7312 times the tool diameter.

488 Test Run and Program Run

 16.1 Graphics
Rotating and magnifying/reducing the 3-D view
U Shift the soft-key row until the soft key for the rotating
and magnification/reduction appears
U Select functions for rotating and magnifying/reducing:

Function Soft keys

Rotate in 5° steps about the vertical axis

Rotate in 5° steps about the horizontal axis

Magnify the graphic stepwise. If the view is

magnified, the TNC shows the letter Z in
the footer of the graphic window.

Reduce the graphic stepwise. If the view is

reduced, the TNC shows the letter Z in the
footer of the graphic window.

Reset image to programmed size

If there is a mouse attached to your TNC, you can also perform the
functions described above with the mouse.
U In order to rotate the graphic shown in three dimensions: Hold the
right mouse button down and move the mouse. In the high
resolution 3-D graphics the TNC displays the coordinate system
showing the currently active alignment of the workpiece. In the
normal 3-D view the entire workpiece rotates as well. After you
release the right mouse button, the TNC orients the workpiece to
the defined orientation
U In order to shift the graphic shown: Hold the center mouse button
or the wheel button down and move the mouse. The TNC shifts the
workpiece in the corresponding direction. After you release the
center mouse button, the TNC shifts the workpiece to the defined
position
U In order to zoom in on a certain area with the mouse: Draw a
rectangular zoom area while holding the left mouse button down.
After you release the left mouse button, the TNC zooms in on the
defined area of the workpiece
U In order to quickly zoom in and out with the mouse: Rotate the
wheel button forward or backward

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 489

16.1 Graphics
Switch the frame overlay display for the workpiece blank on/off:
U Shift the soft-key row until the soft key for the rotating and
magnification/reduction appears
U Select functions for rotating and magnifying/reducing:

U Show the frame for the BLK FORM: Set the highlight
in the soft key to SHOW
U Hide the frame for the BLK FORM: Set the highlight in
the soft key to OMIT

490 Test Run and Program Run

 16.1 Graphics
Magnifying details
You can magnify details in all display modes in the Test Run mode and
a Program Run mode.
The graphic simulation or the program run, respectively, must first
have been stopped. A detail magnification is always effective in all
display modes.

Changing the detail magnification

The soft keys are listed in the table
U Interrupt the graphic simulation, if necessary
U Shift the soft-key row in the Test Run mode, or in a Program Run
mode, respectively, until the soft key for detail enlargement appears
U Shift the soft-key row until the soft-key for the detail
magnification functions appears
U Select the functions for detail magnification
U Press the corresponding soft key to select the
workpiece surface (see table below)
U To reduce or magnify the blank form, press and hold
the MINUS or PLUS soft key, respectively
U Restart the test run or program run by pressing the
START soft key (RESET + START returns the
workpiece blank to its original state)

Function Soft keys

Select the left/right workpiece surface

Select the front/back workpiece surface

Select the top/bottom workpiece surface

Shift the sectional plane to reduce or

magnify the blank form

Select the isolated detail

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 491

16.1 Graphics
Cursor position during detail magnification
During detail magnification, the TNC displays the coordinates of the
axis that is currently being isolated. The coordinates describe the area
determined for magnification. To the left of the slash is the smallest
coordinate of the detail (MIN point), to the right is the largest (MAX
point).
If a graphic display is magnified, this is indicated with MAGN at the lower
right of the graphics window.
If the workpiece blank cannot be further enlarged or reduced, the TNC
displays an error message in the graphics window. To clear the error
message, reduce or enlarge the workpiece blank.

Repeating graphic simulation

A part program can be graphically simulated as often as desired, either
with the complete workpiece or with a detail of it.

Function Soft key

Restore workpiece blank to the detail magnification
in which it was last shown.

Reset detail magnification so that the machined

workpiece or workpiece blank is displayed as it was
programmed with BLK FORM.

With the WINDOW BLK FORM soft key, you return the
displayed workpiece blank to its originally programmed
dimensions, even after isolating a detail without
TRANSFER DETAIL.

Displaying the tool

You can display the tool during simulation in the plan view and in the
projection in 3 planes. The TNC depicts the tool in the diameter
defined in the tool table.

Function Soft key

Do not display the tool during simulation

Display the tool during simulation

492 Test Run and Program Run

 16.1 Graphics
Measuring the machining time
Program Run modes of operation
The timer counts and displays the time from program start to program
end. The timer stops whenever machining is interrupted.

Test Run
The timer displays the time that the TNC calculates for the duration of
tool movements that are executed at feed rate. Dwell times are
included in the calculation by the TNC. The time calculated by the TNC
can only conditionally be used for calculating the production time
because the TNC does not account for the duration of machine-
dependent interruptions, such as tool change.
If you have switched the "find machining time" function on, you can
generate a file listing the usage times of all tools used in the program
(see “Tool usage test” on page 510).

Activating the stopwatch function

U Shift the soft-key row until the soft-key for the
stopwatch functions appears.
U Select the stopwatch functions.

U Select the desired function via soft key, e.g. saving the
displayed time.

Stopwatch functions Soft key

Enable (ON) or disable (OFF) the “measure the
machining time” function.

Store displayed time

Display the sum of stored time

and displayed time

Clear displayed time

During the Test Run, the TNC resets the machining time
as soon as a new BLK form G30/G3 is evaluated.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 493

16.2 Functions for Program Display
16.2 Functions for Program Display
Overview
In the program run modes of operation as well as in the Test Run
mode, the TNC provides the following soft keys for displaying a part
program in pages:

Functions Soft key

Go back in the program by one screen

Go forward in the program by one screen

Go to the beginning of the program

Go to the end of the program

494 Test Run and Program Run

 16.3 Test Run
16.3 Test Run
Application
In the Test Run mode of operation you can simulate programs and
program sections to reduce programming errors during program run.
The TNC checks the programs for the following:
„ Geometrical incompatibilities
„ Missing data
„ Impossible jumps
„ Violation of the machine’s working space
„ Collisions between collision-monitored components (DCM software
option is required, see “Collision monitoring in the Test Run mode
of operation,” page 331)
The following functions are also available:
„ Blockwise test run
„ Interrupt test at any block
„ Optional block skip
„ Functions for graphic simulation
„ Measuring the machining time
„ Additional status display

If your machine has the DCM (Dynamic Collision

Monitoring) software option, you can check for collisions
in the Test Run mode before actually machining a part,
(see “Collision monitoring in the Test Run mode of
operation” on page 331)

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 495

16.3 Test Run
The TNC cannot graphically simulate all traverse motions
actually performed by the machine. These include
„ traverse motions during tool change, if the machine
manufacturer defined them in a tool-change macro or via
the PLC,
„ positioning movements that the machine manufacturer
defined in an M-function macro,
„ positioning movements that the machine manufacturer
performs via the PLC, and
„ positioning movements that lead to a pallet change.
HEIDENHAIN therefore recommends proceeding with
caution for every new program, even when the program
test did not output any error message, and no visible
damage to the workpiece occurred.
After a tool call, the TNC always starts a program test at
the following position:
„ In the machining plane at the position X=0, Y=0
„ In the tool axis, 1 mm above the MAX point defined in the
BLK FORM.
If you call the same tool, the TNC resumes program
simulation from the position last programmed before the
tool call.
In order to ensure unambiguous behavior during program
run, after a tool change you should always move to a
position from which the TNC can position the tool for
machining without causing a collision.

Your machine tool builder can also define a tool-change

macro for the Test Run operating mode. This macro will
simulate the exact behavior of the machine. Please refer
to your machine tool manual.

496 Test Run and Program Run

 16.3 Test Run
Running a program test
If the central tool file is active, a tool table must be active (status S) to
run a program test. Select a tool table via the file manager (PGM MGT)
in the Test Run mode of operation.
With the MOD function BLANK IN WORK SPACE, you can activate
work space monitoring for the test run (see “Showing the Workpiece
in the Working Space,” page 538).
U Select the Test Run operating mode
U Call the file manager with the PGM MGT key and
select the file you wish to test, or
U Go to the program beginning: Select line 0 with the
GOTO key and confirm your entry with the ENT key.
The TNC then displays the following soft keys:
Functions Soft key
Reset the blank form and test the entire program

Test the entire program

Test each program block individually

Halt program test (soft key only appears once you

have started the program test)

You can interrupt the program test and continue it again at any point—
even within a machining cycle. In order to continue the test, the
following actions must not be performed:
„ Selecting another block with the arrow keys or the GOTO key
„ Making changes to the program
„ Switching the operating mode
„ Selecting a new program

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 497

16.3 Test Run
Running a program test up to a certain block
With the STOP AT N function the TNC does a test run only up to the
block with block number N.
U Go to the beginning of program in the Test Run mode of operation
U To run a program test up to a specific block,
press the STOP AT N soft key
U Stop at N: Enter the block number at which you wish
the test to stop
U Program: Enter the name of the program that contains
the block with the selected block number. The TNC
displays the name of the selected program. If the test
run is to be interrupted in a program that was called
with PGM CALL, you must enter this name
U Start-up at: P: If you want to start in a point table,
enter here the line number at which you want to start
U Table (PNT): If you want to start in a point table, enter
here the name of the point table in which you want to
start
U Repetitions: If N is located in a program section
repeat, enter the number of repeats that you want to
run
U To test a program section, press the START soft key.
The TNC will test the program up to the entered block

498 Test Run and Program Run

 16.3 Test Run
Selecting the kinematics for Test Run

This function must be enabled by your machine

manufacturer.

You can use this function to test programs whose kinematics does not
match the active machine kinematics (e.g. on machines with head
change or traverse range switchover).
If your machine manufacturer saved different kinematic configurations
in your machine, you can activate one of these kinematics
configurations with the MOD function and use it for a test run. The
active machine kinematics will remain unchanged.
U Select the Test Run operating mode
U Choose the program you want to test
U Select MOD functions.

U Show the available kinematics configurations in a pop-

up window (shift the soft-key row, if necessary).
U Select the desired kinematics configuration with the
arrow keys and confirm your selection with the ENT
key.

After switching on the control, the machine kinematics is

always active in the Test Run mode. After switch-on,
select the desired kinematics for the test run.
If you select a kinematics configuration with the keyword
kinematic, the TNC switches the machine kinematics and
the test kinematics.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 499

16.4 Program Run
16.4 Program Run
Application
In the Program Run, Full Sequence mode of operation the TNC
executes a part program continuously to its end or up to a program
stop.
In the Program Run, Single Block mode of operation you must start
each block separately by pressing the machine START button.
The following TNC functions are available in the program run modes
of operation:
„ Interrupt program run
„ Start program run from a certain block
„ Optional block skip
„ Editing the tool table TOOL.T
„ Check and change Q parameters
„ Superimpose handwheel positioning
„ Functions for graphic simulation
„ Additional status display

500 Test Run and Program Run

 16.4 Program Run
Running a part program
Preparation
1 Clamp the workpiece to the machine table.
2 Set the datum.
3 Select the necessary tables and pallet files (status M).
4 Select the part program (status M)

You can adjust the feed rate and spindle speed with the
override knobs.
It is possible to reduce the rapid traverse speed when
starting the NC program using the FMAX soft key. The
reduction applies to all rapid traverse and feed rate
movements. The value you enter is no longer in effect
after the machine has been turned off and on again. In
order to re-establish the respectively defined maximum
feed rate after switch-on, you need to re-enter the
corresponding value.

Program Run, Full Sequence

U Start the part program with the machine START button

Program Run, Single Block

U Start each block of the part program individually with the machine
START button

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 501

16.4 Program Run
Interrupting machining
There are several ways to interrupt a program run:
„ Programmed interruptions
„ Pressing the machine STOP button
„ Switching to program run "Single step"
„ Programming of noncontrolled axes (counter axes)
If the TNC registers an error during program run, it automatically
interrupts the machining process.

Programmed interruptions
You can program interruptions directly in the part program. The TNC
interrupts the program run at a block containing one of the following
entries:
„ G38 (with and without miscellaneous function)
„ Miscellaneous functions M0, M2 or M30
„ Miscellaneous function M6 (defined by the machine tool builder)

Interruption through the machine STOP button

U Press the machine STOP button: The block which the TNC is
currently executing is not completed. The asterisk in the status
display blinks
U If you do not wish to continue the machining process, you can reset
the TNC with the INTERNAL STOP soft key. The asterisk in the
status display goes out. In this case, the program must be restarted
from the program beginning

Interrupting the machining process by switching to the Program

Run, Single Block mode of operation
You can interrupt a program that is being run in the Program Run, Full
Sequence mode of operation by switching to the Program Run, Single
Block mode. The TNC interrupts the machining process at the end of
the current block.

502 Test Run and Program Run

 16.4 Program Run
Programming of noncontrolled axes (counter axes)

This function must be adapted by your machine

manufacturer. Refer to your machine tool manual.

The TNC automatically interrupts the program run as soon as an axis

is programmed in a positioning block that was defined by the machine
tool builder as an open-loop axis (counter axis). In this condition you
can move the open-loop axis manually to the desired position. In the
left window, the TNC shows all nominal positions programmed in this
block. For open-loop axes the TNC additionally displays the distance
remaining.
As soon as all axes are in the correct position, you can use NC Start to
resume program run.
U Select the desired axis sequence and start each with
NC Start. Manually position the open-loop axes. The
TNC shows the distance remaining to the nominal
position in this axis (see “Returning to the contour”
on page 509).
U If required, choose whether the closed-loop axes are
to be moved in the tilted or non-tilted coordinate
system.
U If required, move the closed-loop axes by handwheel
or with the axis-direction buttons.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 503

16.4 Program Run
Moving the machine axes during an interruption
You can move the machine axes during an interruption in the same
way as in the Manual Operation mode.

Danger of collision!
If you interrupt program run while the working plane is
tilted, you can switch the coordinate system between
tilted and non-tilted, as well as to the active tool axis
direction, by pressing the 3-D ROT soft key.
The functions of the axis direction buttons, the electronic
handwheel and the positioning logic for returning to the
contour are then evaluated by the TNC. When retracting
the tool make sure the correct coordinate system is active
and the angular values of the tilt axes are entered in the 3-
D ROT menu, if necessary.

Application example:
Retracting the spindle after tool breakage
U Interrupt machining
U Enable the external direction keys: Press the MANUAL TRAVERSE
soft key
U If necessary, press the 3-D ROT soft key in order to activate the soft
key in which you want to traverse
U Move the axes with the machine axis direction buttons

On some machines you may have to press the machine

START button after the MANUAL OPERATION soft key to
enable the axis direction buttons. Refer to your machine
tool manual.
Your machine tool builder can define whether in a program
interruption you always move the axes in the currently
active (tilted or non-tilted) coordinate system. Refer to
your machine manual.

504 Test Run and Program Run

 16.4 Program Run
Resuming program run after an interruption

If a program run is interrupted during a fixed cycle, the

program must be resumed from the beginning of the
cycle. This means that some machining operations will be
repeated.

If you interrupt a program run during execution of a subprogram or

program section repeat, use the RESTORE POS AT N function to
return to the position at which the program run was interrupted.
When a program run is interrupted, the TNC stores:
„ The data of the last defined tool
„ Active coordinate transformations (e.g. datum shift, rotation,
mirroring)
„ The coordinates of the circle center that was last defined

Note that the stored data remain active until they are reset
(e.g. if you select a new program).

The stored data are used for returning the tool to the contour after
manual machine axis positioning during an interruption (RESTORE
POSITION soft key).

Resuming program run with the START button

You can resume program run by pressing the machine START button
if the program was interrupted in one of the following ways:
„ The machine STOP button was pressed.
„ Programmed interruption

Resuming program run after an error

If the error message is not blinking:
U Remove the cause of the error
U To clear the error message from the screen, press the CE key
U Restart the program, or resume program run where it was
interrupted

If the error message is blinking:

U Press and hold the END key for two seconds. This induces a TNC
system restart
U Remove the cause of the error
U Start again

If you cannot correct the error, write down the error message and
contact your repair service agency.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 505

16.4 Program Run
Mid-program startup (block scan)

The RESTORE POS AT N feature must be enabled and

adapted by the machine tool builder. Refer to your
machine manual.

With the RESTORE POS AT N feature (block scan) you can start a part
program at any block you desire. The TNC scans the program blocks
up to that point. Machining can be graphically simulated.
If you have interrupted a part program with an INTERNAL STOP, the
TNC automatically offers the interrupted block N for mid-program
startup.
If the program was interrupted by one of the conditions listed below,
the TNC saves the point of interruption.
„ EMERGENCY STOP
„ Power interruption
„ Control software crash
After you have called the mid-program startup function, you can press
the soft key SELECT LAST N to reactivate the point of interruption and
approach it with an NC start. After switch-on the TNC then shows the
message NC program was interrupted.

Mid-program startup must not begin in a subprogram.

All necessary programs, tables and pallet files must be
selected in a program run mode of operation (status M).
If the program contains a programmed interruption before
the startup block, the block scan is interrupted. Press the
machine START button to continue the block scan.
After a block scan, return the tool to the calculated position
with RESTORE POSITION.
Tool length compensation does not take effect until after
the tool call and a following positioning block. This also
applies if you have only changed the tool length.
The additional functions M142 (delete modal program
information) and M143 (delete basic rotation) are not
permitted during a mid-program startup.

506 Test Run and Program Run

 16.4 Program Run
If you are working with nested programs, you can use
MP7680 to define whether the block scan is to begin at
block 0 of the main program or at block 0 of the last
interrupted program.
With the 3-D ROT soft key you can switch the coordinate
system between tilted and non-tilted in order to move to
the start-up position.
If you want to use the block scan feature in a pallet table,
select the program in which a mid-program startup is to be
performed from the pallet table by using the arrow keys.
Then press the RESTORE POS AT N soft key.
The TNC skips all touch probe cycles in a mid-program
startup. Result parameters that are written to from these
cycles might therefore remain empty.
The M142, M143 and M120 functions are not allowed during
a mid-program startup.
Before beginning the mid-program start-up, the TNC
deletes traverse movements that you performed during
the program with M118 (handwheel superimpositioning).

Danger of collision!
If you perform a mid-program startup in a program
containing M128, then the TNC performs any
compensation movements necessary. The compensation
movements are superimposed over the approach
movement.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 507

16.4 Program Run
U To go to the first block of the current program to start a block scan,
enter GOTO “0”
U To select block scan, press the BLOCK SCAN soft key,
or
U Start-up at N: Enter the block number N at which the
block scan should end
U Program: Enter the name of the program containing
block N
U Start-up at: P: Enter the number P at which the
block scan should end if you want to start in a point
table
U Table (PNT): Enter the name of the point table in
which the block scan should end
U Repetitions: If block N is located in a program section
repeat or in a subprogram that is to be run repeatedly,
enter the number of repetitions to be calculated in the
block scan
U To start the block scan, press the machine START
button
U Contour approach (see following section)

Entering a program with the GOTO key

If you use the GOTO block number key for going into a
program, neither the TNC nor the PLC will execute any
functions that ensure a safe start.
If you use the GOTO block number key for going into a
subprogram, the TNC will skip the end of the subprogram
(G98 L0)! In such cases you must always use the mid-
program startup function.

508 Test Run and Program Run

 16.4 Program Run
Returning to the contour
With the RESTORE POSITION function, the TNC returns to the
workpiece contour in the following situations:
„ Return to the contour after the machine axes were moved during a
program interruption that was not performed with the INTERNAL
STOP function.
„ Return to the contour after a block scan with RESTORE POS AT N,
for example after an interruption with INTERNAL STOP.
„ Depending on the machine, if the position of an axis has changed
after the control loop has been opened during a program
interruption.
„ If a non-controlled axis is also programmed in a positioning block
(see “Programming of noncontrolled axes (counter axes)” on page
503)
U To select a return to contour, press the RESTORE POSITION soft
key
U Restore machine status, if required
U To move the axes in the sequence that the TNC suggests on the
screen, press the machine START button
U To move the axes in any sequence, press the soft keys RESTORE
X, RESTORE Z, etc., and activate each axis with the machine START
key
U To resume machining, press the machine START key

Entering a program with the GOTO key

You can also use the GOTO key for starting program run at defined
points within an NC program. Please note:

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 509

16.4 Program Run
Tool usage test

The tool usage test function must be enabled by your

machine manufacturer. Refer to your machine manual.

The following are prerequisites for a tool usage test:

„ Bit 2 of the machine parameter must be set to 7246=1
„ The machining timer must be active in the Test Run operating mode
„ A simulation of the plain language program must have been
completed in the Test Run mode
With the TOOL USAGE TEST soft key, you can check before starting
a program in a Program Run operating mode whether the tool being
used has enough service life remaining. Here the TNC compares the
actual values for service life in the tool table with the nominal values
from the tool requirement file.
After you have clicked the soft key, the TNC displays the results of the
tool usage test in a pop-up window. Use the CE key to close the pop-
up window.
The TNC saves the usage times in a separate file with the extension
pgmname.H.T.DEP (see “Changing the MOD setting for dependent
files” on page 536). The generated tool usage file has the following
information:

Column Meaning
TOKEN „ TOOL: Tool usage time per TOOL CALL. The
entries are listed in chronological order.
„ TTOTAL: Total usage time of a tool
„ STOTAL: Call of a subprogram (incl. cycles);
the entries are listed in chronological order
„ TIMETOTAL: The total machining time of the
NC program is entered in the WTIME column.
In the PATH column the TNC saves the path
name of the corresponding NC programs.
The TIME column shows the sum of all TIME
entries (only when the spindle is on, and
without rapid traverse). The TNC sets all
other columns to 0.
„ TOOLFILE: In the PATH column, the TNC
saves the path name of the tool table with
which you conducted the Test Run. This
enables the TNC during the actual tool
usage test to detect whether you
performed the test run with the TOOL.T.

TNR Tool number (–1: No tool inserted yet)

IDX Tool index

NAME Tool name from the tool table

510 Test Run and Program Run

 16.4 Program Run
Column Meaning
TIME Tool-usage time in seconds (feed time)

WTIME Tool-usage time in seconds (total usage time

between tool changes)

RAD Tool radius R + Oversize of tool radius DR

from the tool table. The unit is 0.1 µm.

BLOCK Block number in which the TOOL CALL block

was programmed

PATH „ TOKEN = TOOL: Path name of the active main

program or subprogram
„ TOKEN = STOTAL: Path name of the
subprogram

T Tool number with tool index

There are two ways to run a tool usage test for a pallet file:
„ The highlight is on a pallet entry in the pallet file:
The TNC runs the tool usage test for the entire pallet.
„ The highlight is on a program entry in the pallet file:
The TNC runs the tool usage test for the selected program.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 511

16.5 Automatic Program Start
16.5 Automatic Program Start
Application

The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool

builder for use of the automatic program start function.
Refer to your machine manual.

In a Program Run operating mode, you can use the AUTOSTART soft
key (see figure at upper right) to define a specific time at which the
program that is currently active in this operating mode is to be started:
U Show the window for entering the starting time (see
figure at center right).
U Time (h:min:sec): Time of day at which the program
is to be started.
U Date (DD.MM.YYYY): Date at which the program is to
be started.
U To activate the start, set the AUTOSTART soft key to
ON.

512 Test Run and Program Run

 16.6 Optional Block Skip
16.6 Optional Block Skip
Application
In a test run or program run, the control can skip over blocks that begin
with a slash “/”:
U To run or test the program without the blocks
preceded by a slash, set the soft key to ON.
U To run or test the program with the blocks preceded
by a slash, set the soft key to OFF

This function does not work for TOOL DEF blocks.

After a power interruption the control returns to the most
recently selected setting.

Erasing the “/” character

U In the Programming and Editing mode you select the block in which
the character is to be erased
U Erase the “/” character

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 513

16.7 Optional Program-Run Interruption
16.7 Optional Program-Run
Interruption
Application
The TNC optionally interrupts program run at blocks containing M1. If
you use M1 in the Program Run mode, the TNC does not switch off
the spindle or coolant.
U Do not interrupt Program Run or Test Run at blocks
containing M1: Set soft key to OFF
U Interrupt Program Run or Test Run at blocks
containing M1: Set soft key to ON

514 Test Run and Program Run

MOD Functions
17.1 Selecting MOD Functions
17.1 Selecting MOD Functions
The MOD functions provide additional input possibilities and displays.
The available MOD functions depend on the selected operating mode.

Selecting the MOD functions

Call the operating mode in which you wish to change the MOD
functions.
U Press the MOD key to select the MOD functions. The
figures at right show typical screen menus in
Programming and Editing mode (figure at upper right),
Test Run mode (figure at lower right) and in a machine
operating mode (see figure on next page).

Changing the settings

U Select the desired MOD function in the displayed menu with the
arrow keys
There are three possibilities for changing a setting, depending on the
function selected:
„ Enter a numerical value directly, e.g. when determining the traverse
range limit
„ Change a setting by pressing the ENT key, e.g. when setting
program input
„ Change a setting via a selection window. If more than one possibility
is available for a particular setting, you can superimpose a window
listing all of the given possibilities by pressing the GOTO key. Select
the desired setting directly by pressing the corresponding numerical
key (to the left of the colon), or by using the arrow keys and then
confirming with ENT. If you don’t want to change the setting, close
the window again with END

Exiting the MOD functions

U Close the MOD functions with the END key or END soft key

516 MOD Functions

 17.1 Selecting MOD Functions
Overview of MOD functions
The functions available depend on the momentarily selected operating
mode:
Programming and Editing:
„ Display software numbers
„ Enter code number
„ Set data interface
„ Diagnostic functions, if applicable
„ Machine-specific user parameters, if applicable
„ Display HELP files, if applicable
„ Select machine kinematics, if applicable
„ Load service packs
„ Set the time zone
„ Start file-system check
„ Legal information
Test run:
„ Display software numbers
„ Enter code number
„ Set the data interface
„ Show the workpiece in the working space
„ Machine-specific user parameters, if applicable
„ Display HELP files, if applicable
„ Select machine kinematics, if applicable
„ Set the time zone
„ License info
In all other modes:
„ Display software numbers
„ Display code digits for installed options
„ Select position display
„ Unit of measurement (mm/inches)
„ Programming language for MDI
„ Select the axes for actual position capture
„ Axis traverse limits
„ Display reference points
„ Display operating times
„ Display HELP files, if applicable
„ Set the time zone
„ Select machine kinematics, if applicable
„ License info

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 517

17.2 Software Numbers
17.2 Software Numbers
Function
The following software numbers are displayed on the TNC screen
after the MOD functions have been selected:
„ NC: Number of the NC software (managed by HEIDENHAIN)
„ PLC: Number and name of the PLC software (managed by your
machine tool builder)
„ Feature Content Level (FCL): Development level of the software
installed on the control (see “Feature content level (upgrade
functions)” on page 9). The TNC displays --- on the programming
station, since there is no Feature Content Level there.
„ DSP1 to DSP3: Number of the speed controller software
(managed by HEIDENHAIN)
„ ICTL1 and ICTL3: Number of the current controller software
(managed by HEIDENHAIN)

518 MOD Functions

 17.3 Entering Code Numbers
17.3 Entering Code Numbers
Function
The TNC requires a code number for the following functions:

Function Code number

Select user parameters 123

Configure an Ethernet card (not NET123

iTNC 530 with Windows XP)

Enable special functions for 555343

Q parameter programming

In addition, you can use the keyword version to create a file containing
all current software numbers of your control:
U Enter the keyword version and confirm with the ENT key
U The TNC displays all current software numbers on the screen
U To terminate the version overview, press the END key

If necessary, you can output the file version.a saved in

the directory TNC:, and send it to your machine
manufacturer or HEIDENHAIN for diagnostic purposes.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 519

17.4 Loading Service Packs
17.4 Loading Service Packs
Function

We strongly recommend contacting your machine tool

builder before you install a service pack.
The TNC restarts the system after the installation
procedure is completed. Before loading the service pack,
put the machine in the EMERGENCY STOP condition.
Connect the network drive from which you want to import
the service pack (if not already done).

This function provides a simple way of updating the software of your

TNC
U Select the Programming and Editing operating mode
U Press the MOD key
U To start the software update, press the “Load Service Pack” soft
key. The TNC then displays a pop-up window for selecting the
update file
U Use the arrow keys to select the directory in which the service pack
is stored. The respective subdirectories can be shown by pressing
the ENT key
U To select the file: Press the ENT key twice on the selected directory.
The TNC switches from the directory window to the file window
U To start the updating process, press the ENT key to select the file.
The TNC unpacks all required files and then restarts the control. This
process may take several minutes

520 MOD Functions

 17.5 Setting the Data Interfaces
17.5 Setting the Data Interfaces
Function
To setup the data interfaces, press the RS 232 RS 422 SETUP soft key
to call a menu for setting the data interfaces:

Setting the RS-232 interface

The mode of operation and baud rates for the RS-232 interface are
entered in the upper left of the screen.

Setting the RS-422 interface

The mode of operation and baud rates for the RS-422 interface are
entered in the upper right of the screen.

Setting the OPERATING MODE of the external

device

The functions “Transfer all files,” “Transfer selected file,”

and “Transfer directory” are not available in the operating
mode EXT.

Setting the baud rate

You can set the BAUD RATE (data transfer speed) from 110 to 115 200
baud.

Operating
External device Symbol
mode
PC with HEIDENHAIN data FE1
transfer software TNCremo NT

HEIDENHAIN floppy disk units

FE 401 B FE1
FE 401 from program no. FE1
230 626-03

Non-HEIDENHAIN devices such EXT1, EXT2

as printers, scanners, punchers,
PC without TNCremo NT

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 521

17.5 Setting the Data Interfaces
Assign
This function sets the destination for the transferred data.
Applications:
„ Transferring values with Q parameter function FN15
„ Transferring values with Q parameter function FN16
The TNC mode of operation determines whether the PRINT or PRINT
TEST function is used:
TNC mode of operation Transfer function
Program Run, Single Block PRINT

Program Run, Full Sequence PRINT

Test Run PRINT TEST

You can set PRINT and PRINT TEST as follows:

Function Path
Output data via RS-232 RS232:\....

Output data via RS-422 RS422:\....

Save data to the TNC’s hard disk TNC:\....

Save data to a server connected servername:\....

to the TNC

Save the data in the same - vacant -

directory as the program with
FN15/FN16.

File names
Data Operating mode File name
Values with D15 Program Run %FN15RUN.A

Values with D15 Test Run %FN15SIM.A

522 MOD Functions

 17.5 Setting the Data Interfaces
Software for data transfer
For transfer of files to and from the TNC, we recommend using the
HEIDENHAIN TNCremoNT data transfer software. With TNCremoNT,
data transfer is possible with all HEIDENHAIN controls via the serial
interface or the Ethernet interface.

You can download the current version of TNCremoNT free

of charge from the HEIDENHAIN Filebase
(www.heidenhain.de, <Services and Documentation>,
<Software>, <PC Software>, <TNCremoNT>).

System requirements for TNCremoNT:

„ PC with 486 processor or higher
„ Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP or Windows Vista operating system
„ 16 MB RAM
„ 5 MB free memory space on your hard disk
„ An available serial interface or connection to the TCP/IP network

Installation under Windows

U Start the SETUP.EXE installation program with the File Manager
(Explorer)
U Follow the setup program instructions

Starting TNCremoNT under Windows

U Click <Start>, <Programs>, <HEIDENHAIN Applications>,
<TNCremoNT>
When you start TNCremoNT for the first time, TNCremoNT
automatically tries to set up a connection with the TNC.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 523

17.5 Setting the Data Interfaces
Data transfer between the TNC and TNCremoNT

Before you transfer a program from the TNC to the PC,

you must make absolutely sure that you have already
saved the program currently selected on the TNC. The
TNC saves changes automatically when you switch the
mode of operation on the TNC, or when you select the file
manager via the PGM MGT key.

Check whether the TNC is connected to the correct serial port on your
PC or to the network.
Once you have started TNCremoNT, you will see a list of all files that
are stored in the active directory in the upper section of the main
window 1. Using the menu items <File> and <Change directory>, you
can change the active directory or select another directory on your PC.
If you want to control data transfer from the PC, establish the
connection with your PC in the following manner:
U Select <File>, <Setup connection>. TNCremoNT now receives the
file and directory structure from the TNC and displays this at the
bottom left of the main window 2
U To transfer a file from the TNC to the PC, select the file in the TNC
window with a mouse click and drag and drop the highlighted file
into the PC window 1
U To transfer a file from the PC to the TNC, select the file in the PC
window with a mouse click and drag and drop the highlighted file
into the TNC window 2
If you want to control data transfer from the TNC, establish the
connection with your PC in the following manner:
U Select <Extras>, <TNCserver>. TNCremoNT is now in server mode.
It can receive data from the TNC and send data to the TNC
U You can now call the file management functions on the TNC by
pressing the PGM MGT key (see “Data transfer to or from an
external data medium” on page 126) and transfer the desired files

End TNCremoNT
Select the menu items <File>, <Exit>

Refer also to the TNCremoNT context-sensitive help texts

where all of the functions are explained in more detail. The
help texts must be called with the F1 key.

524 MOD Functions

 17.6 Ethernet Interface
17.6 Ethernet Interface
Introduction
The TNC is shipped with a standard Ethernet card to connect the
control as a client in your network. The TNC transmits data via the
Ethernet card with
„ the smb protocol (server message block) for Windows operating
systems, or
„ the TCP/IP protocol family (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol) and with support from the NFS (Network File System). The
TNC also supports the NFS V3 protocol, which permits higher data
transfer rates

Connection possibilities
You can connect the Ethernet card in your TNC to your network
through the RJ45 connection (X26, 100BaseTX or 10BaseT), or directly
to a PC. The connection is metallically isolated from the control
electronics.
For a 100BaseTX or 10BaseT connection you need a Twisted Pair
cable to connect the TNC to your network.
TNC
The maximum cable length between TNC and a node
depends on the quality grade of the cable, the sheathing PC
and the type of network (100BaseTX or 10BaseT).
If you connect the TNC directly with a PC, you must use a
crossed cable. 10BaseT / 100BaseTx

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 525

17.6 Ethernet Interface
Connecting the iTNC directly with a Windows PC
You don’t need any large effort or special networking knowledge to
attach the iTNC 530 directly to a PC that has an Ethernet card. You
simply have to enter some settings on the TNC and the corresponding
settings on the PC.

Settings on the iTNC

U Connect the iTNC (connection X26) and the PC with a crossed
Ethernet cable (trade names: crossed patch cable or STP cable)
U In the Programming and Editing mode of operation, press the MOD
key. Enter the keyword NET123. The iTNC will then display the main
screen for network configuration (see figure at top right)
U Press the DEFINE NET soft key to enter the network setting for a
specific device (see figure at center right)
U Enter any network address. Network addresses consist of four
numbers separated by periods, e.g. 160.1.180.23
U Press the right arrow key to select the next column, and enter the
subnet mask. The subnet mask also consists of four numbers
separated by periods, e.g. 255.255.0.0
U Press the END key to leave the network configuration screen
U Press the DEFINE MOUNT soft key to enter the network settings
for a specific PC (see figure at bottom right)
U Define the PC name and drive that you want to access, beginning
with two slashes, e.g. //PC3444/C
U Press the right arrow key to select the next column, and enter the
name that the iTNC’s file manager uses to display the PC, e.g.
PC3444:
U Press the right arrow key to select the next column, and enter the
file system type smb
U Press the right arrow key to select the next column and enter the
following information (depending on the PC operating system):
ip=160.1.180.1,username=abcd,workgroup=SALES,password=uvwx
U To exit the network configuration, press the END key twice. The
iTNC restarts automatically

Not all Windows operating systems require entry of the

username, workgroup and password parameters.

526 MOD Functions

 17.6 Ethernet Interface
Settings on a PC with Windows XP

Prerequisite:
The network card must already be installed on the PC and
ready for operation.
If the PC that you want to connect the iTNC to is already
integrated in your company network, then keep the PC’s
network address and adapt the TNC’s network address
accordingly.

U To open the Network Connections, click <Start> and then

<Network Connections>
U Right-click the <LAN connection> symbol, and then <Properties> in
the menu that appears
U Double-click <Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)> to change the IP settings
(see figure at top right)
U If it is not yet active, select the <Use the following IP address>
option
U In the <IP address> input field, enter the same IP address that you
entered for the PC network settings on the iTNC, e.g. 160.1.180.1
U Enter 255.255.0.0 in the <Subnet mask> input field
U Confirm the settings with <OK>
U Save the network configuration with <OK>. You may have to restart
Windows now

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 527

17.6 Ethernet Interface
Configuring the TNC

To configure the dual-processor version: See “Network

Settings,” page 589.
Make sure that the person configuring your TNC is a
network specialist.
Please note that the TNC performs an automatic reset if
you change the IP address of the TNC.

U In the Programming and Editing mode of operation, press the MOD

key. Enter the keyword NET123. The TNC will then display the main
screen for network configuration

528 MOD Functions

 17.6 Ethernet Interface
General network settings
U Press the DEFINE NET soft key to enter the general network
settings. The Computer name tab is active:

Setting Meaning
Primary Name of the Ethernet interface to be
interface integrated in your company network. Only
active if a second, optional Ethernet interface
is available on the control hardware

Computer name Name displayed for the TNC in your company

network

Host file Only required for special applications:

Name of a file in which the assignments of IP
addresses to computer names is defined

U Select the Interfaces tab to enter the interface settings:

Setting Meaning
Interface list List of the active Ethernet interfaces. Select
one of the listed interfaces (via mouse or arrow
keys)
„ Activate button:
Activate the selected interface (anXappears
in the Active column)
„ Deactivate button:
Deactivate the selected interface (a hyphen
(-) appears in the Active column)
„ Configuration button:
Open the Configuration menu

IP forwarding This function must be kept deactivated.

Only activate this function if external access via
the second, optional Ethernet interface of the
TNC is necessary for diagnostic purposes. Only
do so after instruction by our Service
department

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 529

17.6 Ethernet Interface
U Press the Configuration button to open the Configuration menu:

Setting Meaning
Status „ Interface active
Connection status of the selected Ethernet
interface
„ Name
Name of the interface you are currently
configuring
„ Plug connection
Number of the plug connection of this
interface on the logic unit of the control

Profile Here you can create or select a profile in which

all settings shown in this window are stored.
HEIDENHAIN provides two standard profiles:
„ LAN-DHCP
Settings for the standard TNC Ethernet
interface, should work in a standard company
network
„ MachineNet
Settings for the second, optional Ethernet
interface; for configuration of the machine
network
Press the corresponding buttons to save, load
and delete profiles

IP address „ Automatically procure IP address option:

The TNC is to procure the IP address from the
DHCP server
„ Set the IP address manually option:
Manually define the IP address and subnet
mask. Input: Four numerical values separated
by points, in each field, e.g. 160.1.180.20 and
255.255.0.0

530 MOD Functions

 17.6 Ethernet Interface
Setting Meaning
Domain Name „ Automatically procure DNS option:
Server (DNS) The TNC is to automatically procure the IP
address of the domain name server
„ Manually configure the DNS option:
Manually enter the IP addresses of the
servers and the domain name
Default „ Automatically procure default gateway
gateway option:
The TNC is to automatically procure the
default gateway
„ Manually configure the default gateway
option:
Manually enter the IP addresses of the default
gateway

U Apply the changes with the OK button, or discard them with the
Cancel button
U The Internet tab currently has no function.
U Select the Ping/Routing tab to enter the ping and routing settings:

Setting Meaning
Ping In the Address: field, enter the IP number for
which you want to check the network
connection. Input: Four numerical values
separated by periods, e.g. 160.1.180.20. As an
alternative, you can enter the name of the
computer whose connection you want to check
„ Press the Start button to begin the test. The
TNC shows the status information in the Ping
field
„ Press the Stop button to conclude the test

Routing For network specialists: Status information of

the operating system for the current routing
„ Press the Update button to refresh the routing
information

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 531

17.6 Ethernet Interface
Network settings specific to the device
U Press the soft key DEFINE MOUNT to enter the network settings
for a specific device. You can define any number of network
settings, but you can manage only seven at one time

Setting Meaning
MOUNTDEVICE „ Connection via NFS:
Name of the directory that is to be
logged on. This is formed by the network
address of the server, a colon and the
name of the directory to be mounted.
Input: four numerical values separated
by points. Ask your network specialist for
the values, e.g. 160.1.13.4. Directory of
the NFS server that you wish to connect
to the TNC. Be sure to differentiate
between small and capital letters when
entering the path
„ Connection via smb:
Enter the network name and the share
name of the computer, e.g.
//PC1791NT/C

MOUNTPOINT Name that the TNC shows in the file

manager for a connected device.
Remember that the name must end with a
colon. Maximum length = 8 characters; the
special characters _ - $ % & # are
permitted

FILESYSTEMTYPE File system type.

NFS: Network File System
SMB: Server Message Block (Windows
protocol)

532 MOD Functions

 17.6 Ethernet Interface
Setting Meaning
OPTIONS for Data without spaces, separated by
FILESYSTEMTYPE= commas, and written in sequence. Switch
nfs between upper and lower case letters.
RSIZE=: Packet size in bytes for data
reception. Input range: 512 to 8192
WSIZE=: Packet size in bytes for data
transmission. Input range: 512 to 8192
TIME0=: Time in tenths of a second, after
which the TNC repeats a Remote
Procedure Call not answered by the server.
Input range: 0 to 100 000. If there is no
entry, the standard value 7 is used. Use
higher values only if the TNC must
communicate with the server through
several routers. Ask your network
specialist for the proper value.
SOFT=: Definition of whether the TNC
should repeat the Remote Procedure Call
until the NFS server answers.
“soft” entered: Do not repeat the Remote
Procedure Call.
“soft” not entered: Always repeat the
Remote Procedure Call.

OPTIONS for Data without spaces, separated by

FILESYSTEMTYPE= commas, and written in sequence. Switch
smb for direct between upper and lower case letters.
connection to ip=: IP address of PC to which the TNC is
Windows networks to be connected
username=: User name under which the
TNC is to log on
workgroup=: Work group under which the
TNC is to log on
password=: Password with which the TNC
is to log on (up to 80 characters)

AM Definition of whether the TNC upon

switch-on should automatically connect
with the network drive.
0: Do not automatically connect
1: Connect automatically

The entries username, workgroup and password in the

OPTIONS column may not be necessary in Windows 95
and Windows 98 networks.
With the ENCODE PASSWORD soft key, you can encode
the password defined under OPTIONS.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 533

17.6 Ethernet Interface
Defining a network identification
U Press the soft key DEFINE UID / GID to enter the network
identification.

Setting Meaning
TNC USER ID Definition of which user identification the end
user uses to access files in the network. Ask
your network specialist for the proper value.

OEM USER ID Definition of which user identification the

machine tool builder uses to access files in the
network. Ask your network specialist for the
proper value.

TNC GROUP ID Definition of the group identification with

which you access files in the network. Ask
your network specialist for the proper value.
The group identification is the same for end
users and machine manufacturers.

UID for mount Defines the user identification (UID) for the
log-on procedure.
USER: The user logs on with the USER
identification.
ROOT: The user logs on with the ID of the
ROOT user, value = 0.

Test network connection

U Press the PING soft key
U In the HOST line, enter the Internet address of the computer for
which you want to check the network connection
U Confirm your entry with the ENT key. The TNC transmits data
packets until you exit the test monitor by pressing the END key
In the TRY line the TNC shows the number of data packets that were
transmitted to the previously defined addressee. Behind the number
of transmitted data packets the TNC shows the status:

Status display Meaning

HOST RESPOND Data packet was received again, connection is
OK

TIMEOUT Data packet was not received, check the

connection

CAN NOT ROUTE Data packet could not be transmitted. Check

the Internet address of the server and of the
router to the TNC

534 MOD Functions

 17.7 Configuring PGM MGT
17.7 Configuring PGM MGT
Function
Use the MOD functions to specify which directories or files are to be
displayed by the TNC:
„ PGM MGT setting: Choose the new, mouse-operated file manager, or
the old file manager
„ Dependent files setting: Specify whether dependent files are
displayed. The Manual setting shows dependent files, the Automatic
setting does not

For more information: See “Working with the File

Manager,” page 108.

Changing the PGM MGT setting

U Press the MOD key to select the MOD function.
U Press the SETUP RS232 RS422 soft key.
U To select the PGM MGT setting: Using the arrow keys, move the
highlight onto the PGM MGT setting and use the ENT key to switch
between ENHANCED 1 and ENHANCED 2
The new file manager (Enhanced 2 setting) offers the following
benefits:
„ The mouse can be used for all operations, in addition to the
keyboard
„ Sorting function available
„ Text input moves the cursor to the next possible file name
„ Favorites management
„ Possibility of configuring the information to be displayed
„ The date format can be set
„ Flexible setting of window sizes
„ Keyboard commands for easy operation

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 535

17.7 Configuring PGM MGT
Dependent files
In addition to the file extension, dependent files also have the
extension .SEC.DEP (SECtion, DEPendent). The following different
types are available:
„ .H.SEC.DEP
The TNC creates files with the .SEC.DEP extension if you work with
the structure function. The file contains information needed by the
TNC to rapidly jump from one structure point to the next.
„ .T.DEP: Tool usage file for individual conversational-format
programs (see “Tool usage test” on page 173)
„ .P.T.DEP: Tool usage file for a complete pallet
The TNC creates files with the .P.T.DEP ending if, in a Program Run
mode, you run the tool usage test (see “Tool usage test” on page
173) for a pallet entry of the active pallet file. This file then lists the
sum of all tool usage times of all tools that you use within a pallet.
„ .H.AFC.DEP: File in which the TNC saves the control parameters for
the adaptive feed control (AFC) (see “Adaptive Feed Control
Software Option (AFC)” on page 351).
„ .H.AFC2.DEP: File in which the TNC saves the static data of the
adaptive feed control (AFC) (see “Adaptive Feed Control Software
Option (AFC)” on page 351).

Changing the MOD setting for dependent files

U To select the file manager in the Programming and Editing mode of
operation, press the PGM MGT key
U Press the MOD key to select the MOD function.
U To select the Dependent files setting: Using the arrow keys, move
the highlight onto the Dependent files setting and use the ENT key
to switch between AUTOMATIC and MANUAL.

Dependent files are only visible in the file manager if you

selected the MANUAL setting.
If dependent files exist for a file, then the TNC displays a +
character in the status column of the file manager (only if
Dependent files is set to AUTOMATIC).

536 MOD Functions

 17.8 Machine-Specific User Parameters
17.8 Machine-Specific User
Parameters
Function
To enable you to set machine-specific functions, your machine tool
builder can define up to 16 machine parameters as user parameters.

This function is not available on all TNCs. Refer to your

machine manual.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 537

17.9 Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space
17.9 Showing the Workpiece in the
Working Space
Function
This MOD function enables you to graphically check the position of the
workpiece blank in the machine’s working space and to activate work
space monitoring in the Test Run mode of operation.
The TNC displays a transparent cuboid for the working space. Its
dimensions are shown in the Traverse range table (standard color is
green). The TNC takes the dimensions for the working space from the
machine parameters for the active traverse range. Since the traverse
range is defined in the reference system of the machine, the datum of
the cuboid is also the machine datum. You can see the position of the
machine datum in the cuboid by pressing the soft key M91 in the 2nd
soft-key row.
Another transparent cuboid represents the workpiece blank. Its
dimensions are shown in the BLK FORM table (standard color is blue).
The TNC takes the dimensions from the workpiece blank definition of
the selected program. The workpiece cuboid defines the coordinate
system for input. Its datum lies within the traverse-range cuboid. You
can view the position of the active datum within the traverse range by
pressing the “Show tool datum” soft-key (2nd soft-key row).
For a test run it normally does not matter where the workpiece blank
is located within the working space. However, if you test programs
that contain movements with M91 or M92, you must graphically shift
the workpiece blank to prevent contour damage. Use the soft keys
shown in the following table.

If you want to perform a graphical collision test (software

option), you may need to graphically shift the reference
point in such a manner that no collision warnings are
generated.
Press the “Show the workpiece datum in the working
space” to see the position of the workpiece blank in the
machine coordinate system. You must then place your
workpiece at these coordinates on the machine table in
order to ensure then same conditions during machining as
during the collision test.

538 MOD Functions

 17.9 Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space
You can also activate the working-space monitor for the Test Run
mode in order to test the program with the current datum and the
active traverse ranges (see table below, last line).

Function Soft key

Move workpiece blank to the left

Move workpiece blank to the right

Move workpiece blank forward

Move workpiece blank backward

Move workpiece blank upward

Move workpiece blank downward

Show workpiece blank referenced to the set datum

Show the entire traversing range referenced to the

displayed workpiece blank

Show the machine datum in the working space

Show a position determined by the machine tool

builder (e.g. tool change position) in the working
space

Show the workpiece datum in the working space

Enable (ON) or disable (OFF) working-space

monitoring

Rotate the entire image

The third soft-key row provides functions with which you can rotate
and tilt the entire image:
Function Soft keys
Rotate the image about the vertical axis

Tilt the image about the horizontal axis

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 539

17.10 Position Display Types
17.10 Position Display Types
Function
In the Manual Operation mode and in the Program Run modes of
operation, you can select the type of coordinates to be displayed.
The figure at right shows the different tool positions:
„ Starting position
„ Target position of the tool
„ Workpiece datum
„ Machine datum
The TNC position displays can show the following coordinates:
Function Display
Nominal position: the value presently NOML
commanded by the TNC

Actual position; current tool position ACTL.

Reference position; the actual position relative to REF

the machine datum

Distance remaining to the programmed position; DIST.

difference between actual and target positions

Servo lag; difference between nominal and actual LAG

positions (following error)

Deflection of the measuring touch probe DEFL.

Traverses that were carried out with handwheel M118

superimpositioning (M118)
(only Position display 2)

With the MOD function Position display 1, you can select the position
display in the status display.
With Position display 2, you can select the position display in the
additional status display.

540 MOD Functions

 17.11 Unit of Measurement
17.11 Unit of Measurement
Function
This MOD function determines whether the coordinates are displayed
in millimeters (metric system) or inches.
„ To select the metric system (e.g. X = 15.789 mm), set the Change
mm/inches function to mm. The value is displayed to 3 decimal
places.
„ To select the inch system (e.g. X = 0.6216 inches), set the Change
mm/inches function to inches. The value is displayed to 4 decimal
places.
If you would like to activate the inch display, the TNC shows the feed
rate in inch/min. In an inch program you must enter the feed rate larger
by a factor of 10.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 541

17.12 Selecting the Programming Language for $MDI
17.12 Selecting the Programming
Language for $MDI
Function
The Program input MOD function lets you decide whether to program
the $MDI file in HEIDENHAIN conversational dialog or in ISO format.
„ To program the $MDI.H file in conversational dialog,
set the Program input function to HEIDENHAIN
„ To program the $MDI.I file according to ISO,
set the Program input function to ISO

542 MOD Functions

 17.13 Selecting the Axes for Generating G01 Blocks
17.13 Selecting the Axes for
Generating G01 Blocks
Function
The axis selection input field enables you to define the current tool
position coordinates that are transferred to the G01 block. To generate
a separate G01 block, press the ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE soft
key. The axes are selected by bit-oriented definition similar to
programming the machine parameters:
Axis selection %11111: Transfer the X, Y, Z, IV, and V axes
Axis selection %01111: Transfer the X, Y, Z, and IV axes
Axis selection %00111: Transfer the X, Y and Z axes
Axis selection %00011: Transfer the X and Y axes
Axis selection %00001: Transfer the X axis

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 543

17.14 Entering the Axis Traverse Limits, Datum Display
17.14 Entering the Axis Traverse
Limits, Datum Display
Function
The AXIS LIMIT MOD function allows you to set limits to axis traverse
within the machine’s actual working envelope.
Z
Possible application: Protecting an indexing fixture against tool
collision.
The maximum range of traverse of the machine tool is defined by
software limit switches. This range can be additionally limited through Z max
the TRAVERSE RANGE MOD function. With this function, you can Z min
enter the maximum and minimum traverse positions for each axis,
Y
referenced to the machine datum. If several traverse ranges are
possible on your machine, you can set the limits for each range
Xmin
separately using the soft keys TRAVERSE RANGE (1) to TRAVERSE Ymax
RANGE (3).
Xmax Ymin

Working without additional traverse limits X

To allow a machine axis to use its full range of traverse, enter the
maximum traverse of the TNC (+/- 99 999 mm) as the TRAVERSE
RANGE.

Find and enter the maximum traverse

U Set the position display MOD function to REF

U Move the spindle to the positive and negative end positions of the
X, Y and Z axes
U Write down the values, including the algebraic sign
U To select the MOD functions, press the MOD key
U Enter the limits for axis traverse: Press the TRAVERSE
RANGE soft key. and enter the values that you wrote
down as limits in the corresponding axes
U To exit the MOD function, press the END soft key

Active tool radius compensations are not taken into

account in the axis traverse limit values.
The traverse range limits and software limit switches
become active as soon as the reference points are
traversed.

544 MOD Functions

 17.14 Entering the Axis Traverse Limits, Datum Display
Datum display
The values shown at the top right of the screen define the currently
active datum. The datum can have been set manually or can have been
activated from the preset table. The datum cannot be changed in the
screen menu.

The displayed values depend on your machine

configuration. Refer to the notes in Chapter 2 (see
“Explanation of values saved in the preset table” on page
448).

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 545

17.15 Displaying HELP Files
17.15 Displaying HELP Files
Function
Help files can aid you in situations in which you need clear instructions
before you can continue (for example, to retract the tool after an
interruption of power). The miscellaneous functions may also be
explained in a help file. The figure at right shows the screen display of
a help file.

HELP files are not provided on every machine. Your

machine tool builder can provide you with further
information on this feature.

Selecting HELP files

U Press the MOD key to select the MOD function
U To select the last active HELP file, press the HELP soft
key
U Call the file manager (PGM MGT key) and select a
different help file, if necessary

546 MOD Functions

 17.16 Displaying Operating Times
17.16 Displaying Operating Times
Function
The MACHINE TIME soft key enables you to see various types of
operating times:

Operating time Meaning

Control on Operating time of the control since being
put into service

Machine on Operating time of the machine tool since

being put into service

Program run Duration of controlled operation since being

put into service

The machine tool builder can provide further operating

time displays. The machine tool manual provides further
information.
At the bottom of the screen you can enter a code number
to have the TNC reset the displayed times. The machine
tool builder defines exactly which times the TNC resets,
so refer to your machine manual for more information.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 547

17.17 Checking the Data Carrier
17.17 Checking the Data Carrier
Function
Press the CHECK THE FILE SYSTEM soft key to check the TNC and
PLC partitions on the hard disk, and have them automatically be
repaired if necessary.

The TNC’s system partition is automatically checked each

time the control is started. If any errors are found on the
system partition, the TNC reports this with an error
message.

Performing the data carrier check

Caution: Danger to the machine!

Before starting the data carrier check, put the machine in
the EMERGENCY STOP condition. The TNC restarts the
software before performing the check!

U Press the MOD key to select the MOD function.

U To select the diagnostic functions, press the
DIAGNOSIS soft key
U To start the data carrier test, press the CHECK THE
FILE SYSTEM soft key
U Press the YES soft key again to confirm that the check
should be started. This function shuts down the TNC
software and starts checking the data carrier. This
check can take some time, depending on the number
and size of the files that you have stored on the hard
disk
U At the end of the test the TNC displays a window with
the results of the test. The TNC also writes the results
to the system log
U In order to restart the TNC software, press the ENT
key

548 MOD Functions

 17.18 Setting the System Time
17.18 Setting the System Time
Function
You can set the time zone, the date and the system time with the SET
DATE/TIME soft key.

Selecting appropriate settings

The TNC must be reset after you change the time zone,
date or system time. In such cases the TNC displays a
warning when the window closes.

U Press the MOD key to select the MOD function.

U Switch to the next soft-key row
U To display the time zone window, press the SET TIME
ZONE soft key.
U In the left side of the pop-up window, use the mouse
to set the year, month and date
U In the right side under “time zone,” click your correct
time zone
U If required, edit the time of day through the keyboard
U To save the settings, click the OK button
U To discard the changes and cancel the dialog, click the
Cancel button

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 549

17.19 TeleService
17.19 TeleService
Function

The TeleService functions are enabled and adapted by the

machine tool builder. The machine tool manual provides
further information.
The TNC provides two soft keys for TeleService, making it
possible to configure two different service agencies.

The TNC allows you to carry out TeleService. To be able to use this
feature, your TNC should be equipped with an Ethernet card which
achieves a higher data transfer rate than the serial RS232-C interface.
With the HEIDENHAIN TeleService software, your machine tool
builder can then establish a connection to the TNC via an ISDN modem
and carry out diagnostics. The following functions are available:
„ On-line screen transfer
„ Polling of machine states
„ Data transfer
„ Remote control of the TNC

Calling/exiting TeleService
U Select any machine mode of operation.
U Press the MOD key to select the MOD function.
U Establish a connection to the service agency: Set the
SERVICE or SUPPORT soft key to ON. The TNC
breaks the connection automatically if no new data
have been transferred for a time set by the machine
tool builder (default: 15 min)
U To break the connection to the service agency: Set the
SERVICE or SUPPORT soft key to OFF. The TNC
terminates the connection after approx. one minute

550 MOD Functions

 17.20 External Access
17.20 External Access
Function

The machine tool builder can configure TeleService

settings with the LSV-2 interface. The machine tool
manual provides further information.

The soft key SERVICE can be used to grant or restrict access through
the LSV-2 interface.
With an entry in the configuration file TNC.SYS you can protect a
directory and its subdirectories with a password. The password is
requested when data from this directory is accessed from the LSV-2
interface. Enter the path and password for external access in the
configuration file TNC.SYS.

The TNC.SYS file must be stored in the root directory

TNC:\.
If you only supply one entry for the password, then the
entire drive TNC:\ is protected.
You should use the updated versions of the HEIDENHAIN
software TNCremo or TNCremoNT to transfer the data.

Entries in TNC.SYS Meaning

REMOTE.PERMISSION= Permit LSV-2 access only for
defined computers. Define the
list of computer names.

REMOTE.TNCPASSWORD= Password for LSV-2 access

REMOTE.TNCPRIVATEPATH= Path to be protected

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 551

17.20 External Access
Example of TNC.SYS
REMOTE.PERMISSION=PC2225;PC3547
REMOTE.TNCPASSWORD=KR1402
REMOTE.TNCPRIVATEPATH=TNC:\RK

Permitting/Restricting external access

U Select any machine mode of operation
U Press the MOD key to select the MOD function
U Permit a connection to the TNC: Set the EXTERNAL
ACCESS soft key to ON. The TNC will then permit
data access through the LSV-2 interface. The
password is requested when a directory that was
entered in the configuration file TNC.SYS is accessed
U Block connections to the TNC: Set the EXTERNAL
ACCESS soft key to OFF. The TNC will then block
access through the LSV-2 interface

552 MOD Functions

Tables and Overviews
18.1 General User Parameters
18.1 General User Parameters
General user parameters are machine parameters affecting TNC
settings that the user may want to change in accordance with his
requirements.
Some examples of user parameters are:
„ Dialog language
„ Interface behavior
„ Traversing speeds
„ Sequence of machining
„ Effect of overrides

Input possibilities for machine parameters

Machine parameters can be programmed as
„ Decimal numbers
Enter only the number
„ Pure binary numbers
Enter a percent sign (%) before the number
„ Hexadecimal numbers
Enter a dollar sign ($) before the number

Example:
Instead of the decimal number 27 you can also enter the binary
number %11011 or the hexadecimal number $1B.
The individual machine parameters can be entered in the different
number systems.
Some machine parameters have more than one function. The input
value for these machine parameters is the sum of the individual
values. For these machine parameters the individual values are
preceded by a plus sign.

Selecting general user parameters

General user parameters are selected with code number 123 in the
MOD functions.

The MOD functions also include machine-specific user

parameters.

554 Tables and Overviews

 18.1 General User Parameters
List of general user parameters
External data transfer
Adjusting TNC interfaces EXT1 (5020.0) and MP5020.x
EXT2 (5020.1) to an external device 7 data bits (ASCII code, 8th bit = parity): Bit 0 = 0
8 data bits (ASCII code, 9th bit = parity): Bit 0 = 1

Block Check Character (BCC) any: Bit 1 = 0

Block Check Character (BCC) control character not permitted: Bit 1 = 1

Transmission stop through RTS active: Bit 2 = 1

Transmission stop through RTS inactive: Bit 2 = 0

Transmission stop through DC3 active: Bit 3 = 1

Transmission stop through DC3 inactive: Bit 3 = 0

Character parity even: Bit 4 = 0

Character parity odd: Bit 4 = 1

Character parity undesired: Bit 5 = 0

Character parity desired: Bit 5 = 1

Number of stop bits that are transmitted at the end of a character:

1 stop bit: Bit 6 = 0
2 stop bits: Bit 6 = 1
1 stop bit: Bit 7 = 1
1 stop bit: Bit 7 = 0
Example:
Use the following setting to adjust the TNC interface EXT2 (MP 5020.1) to
an external non-HEIDENHAIN device:
8 data bits, any BCC, transmission stop through DC3, even character
parity, character parity desired, 2 stop bits
Input for MP 5020.1: %01101001

Interface type for EXT1 (5030.0) and MP5030.x

EXT2 (5030.1) Standard transmission: 0
Interface for blockwise transfer: 1

3-D touch probes

Select signal transmission MP6010
Touch probe with cable transmission: 0
Touch probe with infrared transmission: 1

Probing feed rate for triggering touch MP6120

probes 1 to 3 000 [mm/min]

Maximum traverse to first probe point MP6130

0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm]

Safety clearance to probing point during MP6140

automatic measurement 0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm]

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 555

18.1 General User Parameters
3-D touch probes
Rapid traverse for triggering touch probes MP6150
1 to 300 000 [mm/min]

Pre-position at rapid traverse MP6151

Pre-position with speed from MP6150: 0
Pre-position at rapid traverse: 1

Measure center misalignment of the stylus MP6160

when calibrating a triggering touch probe No 180° rotation of the 3-D touch probe during calibration: 0
M function for 180° rotation of the touch probe during calibration: 1 to 999

M function for orienting the infrared sensor MP6161

before each measuring cycle Function inactive: 0
Orientation directly through the NC: -1
M function for orienting the touch probe: 1 to 999

Angle of orientation for the infrared sensor MP6162

0 to 359.9999 [°]

Difference between the current angle of MP6163

orientation and the angle of orientation set 0 to 3.0000 [°]
in MP 6162; when the entered difference is
reached, an oriented spindle stop is to be
carried out.

Automatic operation: Automatically orient MP6165

the infrared sensor before probing to the Function inactive: 0
programmed probing direction Orient infrared sensor: 1

Manual operation: Compensate the probe MP6166

direction taking an active basic rotation into Function inactive: 0
account Take basic rotation into account: 1

Multiple measurement for programmable MP6170

probe function 1 to 3

Confidence range for multiple MP6171

measurement 0.001 to 0.999 [mm]

Automatic calibration cycle: Center of the MP6180.0 (traverse range 1) to MP6180.2 (traverse range3)
calibration ring in the X axis referenced to 0 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
the machine datum

Automatic calibration cycle: Center of the MP6181.x (traverse range 1) to MP6181.2 (traverse range3)
calibration ring in the Y axis referenced to 0 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
the machine datum

Automatic calibration cycle: Upper edge of MP6182.x (traverse range 1) to MP6182.2 (traverse range 3)
the calibration ring in the Z axis referenced 0 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
to the machine datum

Automatic calibration cycle: Distance below MP6185.x (traverse range 1) to MP6185.2 (traverse range 3)
the upper edge of the ring where the 0.1 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
calibration is carried out by the TNC

556 Tables and Overviews

 18.1 General User Parameters
3-D touch probes
Radius measurement with the TT 130 touch MP6505.0 (traverse range 1) to 6505.2 (traverse range 3)
probe: Probing direction Positive probing direction in the angle reference axis (0° axis): 0
Positive probing direction in the +90° axis: 1
Negative probing direction in the angle reference axis (0° axis): 2
Negative probing direction in the +90° axis: 3

Probing feed rate for second measurement MP6507

with TT 130, stylus shape, corrections in Calculate feed rate for second measurement with TT 130,
TOOL.T with constant tolerance: Bit 0 = 0
Calculate feed rate for second measurement with TT 130,
with variable tolerance: Bit 0 = 1
Constant feed rate for second measurement with TT 130: Bit 1 = 1

Maximum permissible measuring error MP6510.0

with TT 130 during measurement with 0.001 to 0.999 [mm] (recommended input value: 0.005 mm)
rotating tool
MP6510.1
Required for calculating the probing feed rate in 0.001 to 0.999 [mm] (recommended input value: 0.01 mm)
connection with MP6570

Feed rate for probing a stationary tool with MP6520

the TT 130 1 to 3 000 [mm/min]

Radius measurement with the TT 130: MP6530.0 (traverse range 1) to MP6530.2 (traverse range 3)
Distance from lower edge of tool to upper 0.001 to 99.9999 [mm]
edge of stylus

Set-up clearance in the tool axis above the MP6540.0

stylus of the TT 130 for pre-positioning 0.001 to 30 000.000 [mm]

Clearance zone in the machining plane MP6540.1

around the stylus of the TT 130 for pre- 0.001 to 30 000.000 [mm]
positioning

Rapid traverse for TT 130 in the probe cycle MP6550

10 to 10 000 [mm/min]

M function for spindle orientation during MP6560

individual tooth measurement 0 to 999
–1: Function inactive

Measuring rotating tools: Permissible MP6570

rotational speed at the circumference of the 1.000 to 120.000 [m/min]
milling tool
Required for calculating rpm and probe feed
rate

Measuring rotating tools: Permissible MP6572

rotational rpm 0.000 to 1000.000 [rpm]
If you enter 0, the speed is limited to 1000 rpm

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 557

18.1 General User Parameters
3-D touch probes
Coordinates of the TT 120 stylus center MP6580.0 (traverse range 1)
relative to the machine datum X axis

MP6580.1 (traverse range 1)

Y axis

MP6580.2 (traverse range 1)

Z axis

MP6581.0 (traverse range 2)

X axis

MP6581.1 (traverse range 2)

Y axis

MP6581.2 (traverse range 2)

Z axis

MP6582.0 (traverse range 3)

X axis

MP6582.1 (traverse range 3)

Y axis

MP6582.2 (traverse range 3)

Z axis

Monitoring the position of rotary axes and MP6585

parallel axes Function inactive: 0
Monitor axis positions, definable bit-coded for each axis: 1

Defining the rotary axes and parallel axes to MP6586.0

be monitored Do not monitor the position of the A axis: 0
Monitor the position of the A axis: 1
MP6586.1
Do not monitor the position of the B axis: 0
Monitor the position of the B axis: 1
MP6586.2
Do not monitor the position of the C axis: 0
Monitor the position of the C axis: 1
MP6586.3
Do not monitor the position of the U axis: 0
Monitor the position of the U axis: 1
MP6586.4
Do not monitor the position of the V axis: 0
Monitor the position of the V axis: 1
MP6586.5
Do not monitor the position of the W axis: 0
Monitor the position of the W axis: 1

558 Tables and Overviews

 18.1 General User Parameters
3-D touch probes
KinematicsOpt: Tolerance limit for error MP6600
message in Optimization mode 0.001 to 0.999

KinematicsOpt: Maximum permitted MP6601

deviation from entered calibration sphere 0.01 to 0.1
radius

TNC displays, TNC editor

Cycles 17, 18 and 207: MP7160
Oriented spindle stop Oriented spindle stop: 0
at beginning of cycle No oriented spindle stop: 1

Programming station MP7210

TNC with machine: 0
TNC as programming station with active PLC: 1
TNC as programming station with inactive PLC: 2

Acknowledgment of MP7212
POWER INTERRUPTED Acknowledge with key: 0
after switch-on Acknowledge automatically: 1

ISO programming: MP7220

Set the block number 0 to 150
increment

Disabling the selection MP7224.0

of file types All file types selectable via soft key: %0000000
Disable selection of HEIDENHAIN programs (soft key SHOW .H): Bit 0 = 1
Disable selection of DIN/ISO programs (soft key SHOW .I): Bit 1 = 1
Disable selection of tool tables (soft key SHOW .T): Bit 2 = 1
Disable selection of datum tables (soft key SHOW .D): Bit 3 = 1
Disable selection of pallet tables (soft key SHOW .P): Bit 4 = 1
Disable selection of text files (soft key SHOW .A): Bit 5 = 1
Disable selection of point tables (soft key SHOW .PNT): Bit 6 = 1

Disabling the editor for MP7224.1

certain file types Do not disable editor: %0000000
Disable editor for
Note:
„ HEIDENHAIN programs: Bit 0 = 1
If a particular file type is
inhibited, the TNC will „ DIN/ISO programs: Bit 1 = 1
erase all files of this type. „ Tool tables: Bit 2 = 1
„ Datum tables: Bit 3 = 1
„ Pallet tables: Bit 4 = 1
„ Text files: Bit 5 = 1
„ Point tables: Bit 6 = 1

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 559

18.1 General User Parameters
TNC displays, TNC editor
Locking soft key for MP7224.2
tables Do not lock the EDITING ON/OFF soft key: %0000000
Lock the EDITING ON/OFF soft key for
„ Without function: Bit 0 = 1
„ Without function: Bit 1 = 1
„ Tool tables: Bit 2 = 1
„ Datum tables: Bit 3 = 1
„ Pallet tables: Bit 4 = 1
„ Without function: Bit 5 = 1
„ Point tables: Bit 6 = 1

Configure pallet files MP7226.0

Pallet table inactive: 0
Number of pallets per pallet table: 1 to 255

Configure datum files MP7226.1

Datum table inactive: 0
Number of datums per datum table: 1 to 255

Program length up to MP7229.0

which the LBL Blocks 100 to 9999
numbers are checked

Program length up to MP7229.1

which FK blocks are Blocks 100 to 9999
checked

Dialog language MP7230.0 to MP7230.3

English: 0
German: 1
Czech: 2
French: 3
Italian: 4
Spanish: 5
Portuguese: 6
Swedish: 7
Danish: 8
Finnish: 9
Dutch: 10
Polish: 11
Hungarian: 12
Reserved: 13
Russian (Cyrillic character set): 14 (only on the MC 422 B)
Chinese (simplified): 15 (only on the MC 422 B)
Chinese (traditional): 16 (only on the MC 422 B)
Slovenian: 17 (only as of MC 422 B, software option)
Norwegian: 18 (only as of MC 422 B, software option)
Slovak: 19 (only as of MC 422 B, software option)
Latvian: 20 (only as of MC 422 B, software option)
Korean: 21 (only as of MC 422 B, software option)
Estonian: 22 (only as of MC 422 B, software option)
Turkish: 23 (only as of MC 422 B, software option)
Romanian: 24 (only as of MC 422 B, software option)
Lithuanian: 25 (only as of MC 422 B, software option)

560 Tables and Overviews

 18.1 General User Parameters
TNC displays, TNC editor
Configure tool tables MP7260
Inactive: 0
Number of tools generated by the TNC when a new tool table is opened:
1 to 254
If you require more than 254 tools, you can expand the tool table with the function APPEND N
LINES (see “Tool Data,” page 156)

Configure pocket MP7261.0 (magazine 1)

tables MP7261.1 (magazine 2)
MP7261.2 (magazine 3)
MP7261.3 (magazine 4)
MP7261.4 (magazine 5)
MP7261.5 (magazine 6)
MP7261.6 (magazine 7)
MP7261.7 (magazine 8)
Inactive: 0
Number of pockets in the tool magazine: 1 to 9999
If the value 0 is entered in MP7261.1 through MP7261.7, the TNC uses only one tool magazine.

Index tool numbers in MP7262

order to be able to Do not index: 0
assign different Number of permissible indices: 1 to 9
compensation data to
each tool number

Configuration of tool MP7263

table and pocket table Configuration settings for tool table and pocket table: %0000
„ Show the POCKET TABLE soft key in the tool table: Bit 0 = 0
„ Do not show the POCKET TABLE soft key in the tool table: Bit 0 = 1
„ External data transmission: Only transmit displayed columns: Bit 1 = 0
„ External data transmission: Transmit all columns: Bit 1 = 1
„ Show the EDIT ON/OFF soft key in the pocket table: Bit 2 = 0
„ Do not show the EDIT ON/OFF soft key in the pocket table: Bit 2 = 1
„ RESET COLUMN T and RESET POCKET TABLE soft keys active: Bit 3 = 0
„ RESET COLUMN T and RESET POCKET TABLE soft keys not active: Bit 3 = 1

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 561

18.1 General User Parameters
TNC displays, TNC editor
Configure tool table MP7266.0
(To omit from the Tool name – NAME: 0 to 42; column width: 16 characters
table: enter 0); Column MP7266.1
number in the tool Tool length – L: 0 to 42; column width: 11 characters
table for MP7266.2
Tool radius – R: 0 to 42; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.3
Tool radius 2 – R2: 0 to 42; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.4
Oversize length – DL: 0 to 42; column width: 8 characters
MP7266.5
Oversize radius – DR: 0 to 42; column width: 8 characters
MP7266.6
Oversize radius 2 – DR2: 0 to 42; column width: 8 characters
MP7266.7
Tool locked – TL: 0 to 42; column width: 2 characters
MP7266.8
Replacement tool – RT: 0 to 42; column width: 3 characters
MP7266.9
Maximum tool life – TIME1: 0 to 42; column width: 5 characters
MP7266.10
Maximum tool life for TOOL CALL – TIME2: 0 to 42; column width: 5 characters
MP7266.11
Current tool life – CUR. TIME: 0 to 42; column width: 8 characters
MP7266.12
Tool comment – DOC: 0 to 42; column width: 16 characters
MP7266.13
Number of teeth – CUT.: 0 to 42; column width: 4 characters
MP7266.14
Tolerance for wear detection in tool length – LTOL: 0 to 42; column width: 6 characters
MP7266.15
Tolerance for wear detection in tool radius – RTOL: 0 to 42; column width: 6 characters
MP7266.16
Cutting direction – DIRECT.: 0 to 42; column width: 7 characters
MP7266.17
PLC status – PLC: 0 to 42; column width: 9 characters
MP7266.18
Offset of the tool in the tool axis in addition to MP6530 – TT:L-OFFS: 0 to 42
column width: 11 characters
MP7266.19
Offset of the tool between stylus center and tool center – TT:R-OFFS: 0 to 42
column width: 11 characters

562 Tables and Overviews

 18.1 General User Parameters
TNC displays, TNC editor
Configure tool table MP7266.20
(To omit from the Tolerance for break detection in tool length – LBREAK: 0 to 42; column width: 6 characters
table: enter 0); Column MP7266.21
number in the tool Tolerance for break detection in tool radius – RBREAK: 0 to 42; column width: 6 characters
table for MP7266.22
Tooth length (Cycle 22) – LCUTS: 0 to 42; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.23
Maximum plunge angle (Cycle 22) – ANGLE.: 0 to 42; column width: 7 characters
MP7266.24
Tool type –TYP: 0 to 42; column width: 5 characters
MP7266.25
Tool material – TMAT: 0 to 42; column width: 16 characters
MP7266.26
Cutting data table – CDT: 0 to 42; column width: 16 characters
MP7266.27
PLC value – PLC-VAL: 0 to 42; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.28
Center misalignment in reference axis – CAL-OFF1: 0 to 42; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.29
Center misalignment in minor axis – CAL-OFF2: 0 to 42; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.30
Spindle angle for calibration – CALL-ANG: 0 to 42; column width: 11 characters
MP7266.31
Tool type for the pocket table – PTYP: 0 to 42; column width: 2 characters
MP7266.32
Limitation of spindle speed – NMAX: 0 to 42; Column width: 6 characters
MP7266.33
Retraction at NC stop – LIFTOFF: 0 to 42; column width is 1 character
MP7266.34
Machine-dependent function – P1: 0 to 42; column width: 10 characters
MP7266.35
Machine-dependent function – P2: 0 to 42; column width: 10 characters
MP7266.36
Machine-dependent function – P3: 0 to 42; column width: 10 characters
MP7266.37
Tool-specific kinematics description – KINEMATIC: 0 to 42; column width: 16 characters
MP7266.38
Point angle – T_ANGLE: 0 to 42; column width: 9 characters
MP7266.39
Thread pitch – PITCH: 0 to 42; column width: 10 characters
MP7266.40
Adaptive feed control – AFC: 0 to 42; column width: 10 characters
MP7266.41
Tolerance for wear detection in tool radius 2 – R2TOL: 0 to 42; column width: 6 characters

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 563

18.1 General User Parameters
TNC displays, TNC editor
Configure tool pocket MP7267.0
table (to omit from the Tool number – T: 0 to 20
table: enter 0); Column MP7267.1
number in the pocket Special tool – ST: 0 to 20
table for MP7267.2
Fixed pocket – F: 0 to 20
MP7267.3
Pocket locked – L: 0 to 20
MP7267.4
PLC status – PLC: 0 to 20
MP7267.5
Tool name from tool table – TNAME: 0 to 20
MP7267.6
Comment from tool table – DOC: 0 to 20
MP7267.7
Tool type – PTYP: 0 to 20
MP7267.8
Value for PLC – P1: 0 to 20
MP7267.9
Value for PLC – P2: 0 to 20
MP7267.10
Value for PLC – P3: 0 to 20
MP7267.11
Value for PLC – P4: 0 to 20
MP7267.12
Value for PLC – P5: 0 to 20
MP7267.13
Reserved pocket – RSV: 0 to 20
MP7267.14
Pocket above locked – LOCKED_ABOVE: 0 to 20
MP7267.15
Pocket below locked – LOCKED_BELOW: 0 to 20
MP7267.16
Pocket at left locked – LOCKED_LEFT: 0 to 20
MP7267.17
Pocket at right locked – LOCKED_RIGHT: 0 to 20
MP7267.18
S1 value for PLC – P6: 0 to 20
MP7267.19
S2 value for PLC – P7: 0 to 20

Manual Operation MP7270

mode: Display of feed Display feed rate F only if an axis direction button is pressed: 0
rate Display feed rate F even if no axis direction button is pressed (feed rate defined via soft key F or
feed rate of the “slowest” axis): 1

Decimal character MP7280

The decimal character is a comma: 0
The decimal character is a point: 1

Position display in the MP7285

tool axis Display is referenced to the tool datum: 0
Display in the tool axis is referenced to the
tool face: 1

564 Tables and Overviews

 18.1 General User Parameters
TNC displays, TNC editor
Display step for the MP7289
spindle position 0.1 °: 0
0.05 °: 1
0.01 °: 2
0.005 °: 3
0.001 °: 4
0.0005 °: 5
0.0001 °: 6

Display step MP7290.0 (X axis) to MP7290.13 (14th axis)

0.1 mm: 0
0.05 mm: 1
0.01 mm: 2
0.005 mm: 3
0.001 mm: 4
0.0005 mm: 5
0.0001 mm: 6

Disable datum setting MP7294

in the preset table Do not disable datum setting: %00000000000000
Disable datum setting in the X axis: Bit 0 = 1
Disable datum setting in the Y axis: Bit 1 = 1
Disable datum setting in the Z axis: Bit 2 = 1
Disable datum setting in the IVth axis: Bit 3 = 1
Disable datum setting in the Vth axis: Bit 4 = 1
Disable datum setting in the 6th axis: Bit 5 = 1
Disable datum setting in the 7th axis: Bit 6 = 1
Disable datum setting in the 8th axis: Bit 7 = 1
Disable datum setting in the 9th axis: Bit 8 = 1
Disable datum setting in the 10th axis: Bit 9 = 1
Disable datum setting in the 11th axis: Bit 10 = 1
Disable datum setting in the 12th axis: Bit 11 = 1
Disable datum setting in the 13th axis: Bit 12 = 1
Disable datum setting in the 14th axis: Bit 13 = 1

Disable datum setting MP7295

Do not disable datum setting: %00000000000000
Disable datum setting in the X axis: Bit 0 = 1
Disable datum setting in the Y axis: Bit 1 = 1
Disable datum setting in the Z axis: Bit 2 = 1
Disable datum setting in the IVth axis: Bit 3 = 1
Disable datum setting in the Vth axis: Bit 4 = 1
Disable datum setting in the 6th axis: Bit 5 = 1
Disable datum setting in the 7th axis: Bit 6 = 1
Disable datum setting in the 8th axis: Bit 7 = 1
Disable datum setting in the 9th axis: Bit 8 = 1
Disable datum setting in the 10th axis: Bit 9 = 1
Disable datum setting in the 11th axis: Bit 10 = 1
Disable datum setting in the 12th axis: Bit 11 = 1
Disable datum setting in the 13th axis: Bit 12 = 1
Disable datum setting in the 14th axis: Bit 13 = 1

Disable datum setting MP7296

with the orange axis Do not disable datum setting: 0
keys Disable datum setting with the orange axis keys: 1

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 565

18.1 General User Parameters
TNC displays, TNC editor
Reset status display, MP7300
Q parameters, tool Reset all when a program is selected: 0
data and machining Reset all when a program is selected and with M2, M30, END PGM: 1
time Reset only status display and tool data when a program is selected: 2
Reset only status display, machining time and tool data when a program is selected and with M2,
M30, END PGM: 3
Reset status display, machining time and Q parameters when a program is selected: 4
Reset status display, machining time, and Q parameters when a program is selected and with
M2, M30, END PGM: 5
Reset status display and machining time when a program is selected: 6
Reset status display and machining time when a program is selected and with M2, M30, END
PGM: 7

Graphic display mode MP7310

Projection in three planes according to DIN 6, Part 1, projection method 1: Bit 0 = 0
Projection in three planes according to DIN 6, Part 1, projection method 2: Bit 0 = 1
Display new BLK FORM in Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT referenced to the old datum: Bit 2 = 0
Display new BLK FORM in Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT referenced to the new datum: Bit 2 = 1
Do not show cursor position during projection in three planes: Bit 4 = 0
Do not show cursor position during projection in three planes: Bit 4 = 1
Software functions of the new 3-D graphics active: Bit 5 = 0
Software functions of the new 3-D graphics not active: Bit 5 = 1

Limitation of a tool’s MP7312

tooth length to be 0 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
simulated. Only Factor by which the tool diameter is multiplied in order to increase the simulation speed. If 0 is
effective if LCUTS is entered, the TNC assumes an infinitely long tooth length, which significantly increases the time
not defined. required for the simulation.

Graphic simulation MP7315

without programmed 0 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
tool axis: Tool radius

Graphic simulation MP7316

without programmed 0 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
tool axis: Penetration
depth

Graphic simulation MP7317.0

without programmed 0 to 88 (0: Function inactive)
tool axis: M function
for start

Graphic simulation MP7317.1

without programmed 0 to 88 (0: Function inactive)
tool axis: M function
for end

Screen saver MP7392.0

0 to 99 [min]
Time in minutes until the screen saver switches on (0: Function not active)
MP7392.1
No screen saver is active: 0
Standard screen saver of the X server: 1
3-D line pattern: 2

566 Tables and Overviews

 18.1 General User Parameters
Machining and program run
Effect of Cycle 11 SCALING FACTOR MP7410
SCALING FACTOR effective in three axes: 0
SCALING FACTOR effective in the working plane only: 1

Manage tool data/calibration data MP7411

The TNC saves the calibrated data for the 3-D touch probe internally: +0
The TNC uses the compensation values for the touch probe from the tool
table as calibration data for the 3-D touch probe: +1

SL cycles MP7420
Mill channel around the contour—clockwise for islands and
counterclockwise for pockets: Bit 0 = 0
Mill channel around the contour—clockwise for pockets and
counterclockwise for islands: Bit 0 = 1
First mill the channel, then rough out the contour: Bit 1 = 0
Rough out the contour, then mill the channel: Bit 1 = 1
Combine compensated contours: Bit 2 = 0
Combine uncompensated contours: Bit 2 = 1
Rough out to each pocket depth: Bit 3 = 0
Mill pocket and rough-out for each infeed depth before continuing to the
next depth: Bit 3 = 1

The following applies to Cycles 6, 15, 16, 21, 22, 23, and 24:
At the end of the cycle, move the tool to the position that was last
programmed before the cycle call: Bit 4 = 0
At the end of the cycle, retract the tool in the spindle axis only: Bit 4 = 1

Cycle 4 POCKET MILLING and MP7430

Cycle 5 CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING: 0.1 to 1.414
Overlap factor

Permissible deviation of circle radius MP7431

between circle end point and circle starting 0.0001 to 0.016 [mm]
point

Limit switch tolerance for M140 and M150 MP7432

Function inactive: 0
Tolerance for the distance by which the software limit switch may be
exceeded with M140/M150: 0.0001 to 1.0000

Operation of various miscellaneous MP7440

functions M Program stop with M6: Bit 0 = 0
No program stop with M6: Bit 0 = 1
Note: No cycle call with M89: Bit 1 = 0
The kV factors for position loop gain are set by Cycle call with M89: Bit 1 = 1
the machine tool builder. Refer to your machine Program stop with M functions: Bit 2 = 0
manual. No program stop with M functions: Bit 2 = 1
kV factors cannot be switched through M105 and M106: Bit 3 = 0
kV factors can be switched through M105 and M106: Bit 3 = 1
Reduce the feed rate in the tool axis with M103 F..
Function inactive: Bit 4 = 0
Reduce the feed rate in the tool axis with M103 F..
Function active: Bit 4 = 1
Exact stop for positioning with rotary axes inactive: Bit 5 = 0
Exact stop for positioning with rotary axes active: Bit 5 = 1

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 567

18.1 General User Parameters
Machining and program run
Error message during cycle call MP7441
Display error message if M3/M4 not active: Bit 0 = 0
Suppress error message if M3/M4 not active: Bit 0 = 1
reserved: Bit 1
Suppress error message if positive depth programmed: Bit 2 = 0
Display error message if positive depth programmed: Bit 2 = 1

M function for spindle orientation in the MP7442

fixed cycles Function inactive: 0
Orientation directly through the NC: -1
M function for orienting the spindle: 1 to 999

Maximum contouring speed at feed rate MP7470

override setting of 100% in the Program Run 0 to 99 999 [mm/min]
modes

Feed rate for rotary-axis compensation MP7471

movements 0 to 99 999 [mm/min]

Compatibility machine parameters for MP7475

datum tables Datum shifts are referenced to the workpiece datum: 0
If the value 1 was entered in older TNC controls or in controls with
software 340 420-xx, datum shifts were referenced to the machine datum.
This function is no longer available. You must now use the preset table
instead of datum tables referenced to REF (see “Datum management with
the preset table” on page 444).

Time to be added when calculating the tool MP7485

usage time 0 to 100 [%]

568 Tables and Overviews

 18.2 Pin Layouts and Connecting Cables for the Data Interfaces
18.2 Pin Layouts and Connecting
Cables for the Data Interfaces
RS-232-C/V.24 interface for HEIDENHAIN devices

The interface complies with the requirements of

EN 50 178 for “low voltage electrical separation.”
Please note that pins 6 and 8 of the connecting cable
274 545 are bridged.

When using the 25-pin adapter block:

Adapter block
TNC Connecting cable 365 725-xx Connecting cable 274 545-xx
310 085-01
Male Assignment Female Color Female Male Female Male Color Female
1 Do not assign 1 1 1 1 1 White/Brown 1
2 RXD 2 Yellow 3 3 3 3 Yellow 2
3 TXD 3 Green 2 2 2 2 Green 3
4 DTR 4 Brown 20 20 20 20 Brown 8
5 Signal GND 5 Red 7 7 7 7 Red 7
6 DSR 6 Blue 6 6 6 6 6
7 RTS 7 Grey 4 4 4 4 Grey 5
8 CTS 8 Pink 5 5 5 5 Pink 4
9 Do not assign 9 8 Violet 20
Housing Ext. shield Housing Ext. shield Housing Housing Housing Housing Ext. shield Housing

When using the 9-pin adapter block:

Adapter block
TNC Connecting cable 355 484-xx Connecting cable 366 964-xx
363 987-02
Male Assignment Female Color Male Female Male Female Color Female
1 Do not assign 1 Red 1 1 1 1 Red 1
2 RXD 2 Yellow 2 2 2 2 Yellow 3
3 TXD 3 White 3 3 3 3 White 2
4 DTR 4 Brown 4 4 4 4 Brown 6
5 Signal GND 5 Black 5 5 5 5 Black 5
6 DSR 6 Violet 6 6 6 6 Violet 4
7 RTS 7 Grey 7 7 7 7 Grey 8
8 CTS 8 White/Green 8 8 8 8 White/Green 7
9 Do not assign 9 Green 9 9 9 9 Green 9
Housing Ext. shield Housing Ext. shield Housing Housing Housing Housing Ext. shield Housing

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 569

18.2 Pin Layouts and Connecting Cables for the Data Interfaces
Non-HEIDENHAIN devices
The connector pin layout of a non-HEIDENHAIN device may differ
considerably from that of a HEIDENHAIN device.
It depends on the unit and the type of data transfer. The table below
shows the connector pin layout on the adapter block.
Adapter block
Connecting cable 366 964-xx
363 987-02
Female Male Female Color Female
1 1 1 Red 1
2 2 2 Yellow 3
3 3 3 White 2
4 4 4 Brown 6
5 5 5 Black 5
6 6 6 Violet 4
7 7 7 Grey 8
8 8 8 White/Green 7
9 9 9 Green 9
Housing Housing Housing Ext. shield Housing

570 Tables and Overviews

 18.2 Pin Layouts and Connecting Cables for the Data Interfaces
RS-422/V.11 interface
Only non-HEIDENHAIN devices are connected to the RS-422
interface.

The interface complies with the requirements of

EN 50 178 for “low voltage electrical separation.”
The pin layouts on the TNC logic unit (X28) and on the
adapter block are identical.

Adapter block
TNC Connecting cable 355 484-xx
363 987-01
Female Assignment Male Color Female Male Female
1 RTS 1 Red 1 1 1
2 DTR 2 Yellow 2 2 2
3 RXD 3 White 3 3 3
4 TXD 4 Brown 4 4 4
5 Signal GND 5 Black 5 5 5
6 CTS 6 Violet 6 6 6
7 DSR 7 Grey 7 7 7
8 RXD 8 White/Green 8 8 8
9 TXD 9 Green 9 9 9
Housing Ext. shield Housing Ext. shield Housing Housing Housing

Ethernet interface RJ45 socket

Maximum cable length:
„ Unshielded: 100 m
„ Shielded: 400 m
Pin Signal Description
1 TX+ Transmit Data

2 TX– Transmit Data

3 REC+ Receive Data

4 Vacant

5 Vacant

6 REC– Receive Data

7 Vacant

8 Vacant

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 571

18.3 Technical Information
18.3 Technical Information
Explanation of symbols
„ Standard
‡Axis option
‹Software option 1
z Software option 2

User functions
Short description „ Basic version: 3 axes plus spindle
„ Fourth NC axis plus auxiliary axis
or
„ 8 additional axes or 7 additional axes plus 2nd spindle
„ Digital current and speed control

Program entry HEIDENHAIN conversational format, with smarT.NC and as per ISO

Position data „ Nominal positions for lines and arcs in Cartesian coordinates or polar coordinates
„ Incremental or absolute dimensions
„ Display and entry in mm or inches
„ Display of the handwheel path during machining with handwheel superimpositioning

Tool compensation „ Tool radius in the working plane and tool length
„ Radius compensated contour look ahead for up to 99 blocks (M120)
„ Three-dimensional tool-radius compensation for subsequent changing of tool data
without having to recalculate the program

Tool tables Multiple tool tables with up to 30 000 tools

Cutting-data tables Cutting data tables for automatic calculation of spindle speed and feed rate from tool-
specific data (cutting speed, feed per tooth)

Constant cutting speed „ With respect to the path of the tool center
„ With respect to the cutting edge

Parallel operation Creating a program with graphical support while another program is being run

3-D machining „ Motion control with minimum jerk

(software option 2) „ 3-D compensation through surface normal vectors
„ Using the electronic handwheel to change the angle of the swivel head during program
run without affecting the position of the tool point (TCPM = Tool Center Point
Management)
„ Keeping the tool normal to the contour
„ Tool radius compensation normal to the direction of traverse and the tool direction
„ Spline interpolation

Rotary table machining „ Programming of cylindrical contours as if in two axes

(software option 1) „ Feed rate in mm/min

572 Tables and Overviews

 18.3 Technical Information
User functions
Contour elements „ Straight line
„ Chamfer
„ Circular path
„ Circle center point
„ Circle radius
„ Tangentially connected arc
„ Corner rounding

Approaching and departing „ Via straight line: tangential or perpendicular

the contour „ Via circular arc

FK free contour programming „ FK free contour programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational format with graphic
support for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC

Program jumps „ Subroutines

„ Program-section repeat
„ Any desired program as subroutine

Fixed cycles „ Drilling cycles for drilling, pecking, reaming, boring, tapping with a floating tap holder,
rigid tapping
„ Cycles for milling internal and external threads
„ Milling and finishing rectangular and circular pockets
„ Cycles for clearing level and inclined surfaces
„ Cycles for milling linear and circular slots
„ Linear and circular point patterns
„ Contour pockets—also with contour-parallel machining
„ Contour train
„ OEM cycles (special cycles developed by the machine tool builder) can also be
integrated

Coordinate transformation „ Datum shift, rotation, mirroring

„ Scaling factor (axis-specific)
„ Tilting the working plane (software option 1)

Q parameters „ Mathematical functions =, +, –, *, /, sin α , cos α

Programming with variables „ Logical comparisons (=, =/ , <, >)
„ Calculating with parentheses
„ tan α, arc sine, arc cosine, arc tangent, an, en, ln, log, absolute value of a number, the
constant π, negation, truncation of digits before or after the decimal point
„ Functions for calculation of circles
„ String parameters

Programming aids „ Online calculator

„ Context-sensitive help function for error messages
„ The context-sensitive help system TNCguide (FCL3 function)
„ Graphic support for the programming of cycles
„ Comment blocks in the NC program

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 573

18.3 Technical Information
User functions
Actual position capture „ Actual positions can be transferred directly into the NC program

Program verification graphics Graphic simulation before program run, even while another program is being run
Display modes
„ Plan view / projection in 3 planes / 3-D view
„ Magnification of details

Programming graphics „ In the Programming and Editing mode, the contours of the NC blocks are drawn on
screen while they are being entered (2-D pencil-trace graphics), even while another
program is running

Program Run graphics „ Graphic simulation of real-time machining in plan view / projection in 3 planes /
Display modes 3-D view

Machining time „ Calculation of the machining time in the Test Run mode of operation
„ Display of the current machining time in the Program Run modes

Returning to the contour „ Mid-program startup in any block in the program, returning the tool to the calculated
nominal position to continue machining
„ Program interruption, contour departure and return

Datum tables „ Multiple datum tables

Pallet tables „ Pallet tables (with as many entries as desired for the selection of pallets, NC programs
and datums) can be machined workpiece by workpiece or tool by tool

Touch probe cycles „ Calibrate touch probe

„ Compensation of workpiece misalignment, manual or automatic
„ Datum setting, manual or automatic
„ Automatic workpiece measurement
„ Cycles for automatic tool measurement
„ Cycles for automatic kinematics measurement

Specifications
Components „ MC 420 or MC 422 C main computer
„ CC 422 or CC 424 controller unit
„ Keyboard
„ 15.1-inch TFT color flat-panel display with soft keys

Program memory At least 25 GB, for the dual-processor system at least 13 GB

Input resolution and display „ Up to 0.1 µm for linear axes

step „ Up to 0.0001° for angular axes

Input range „ Maximum 99 999.999 mm or 99 999.999°

574 Tables and Overviews

 18.3 Technical Information
Specifications
Interpolation „ Linear in 4 axes
„ Linear in 5 axes (subject to export permit) (software option 1)
„ Circular in 2 axes
„ Circular in 3 axes with tilted working plane (software option 1)
„ Helix:
Combination of circular and linear motion
„ Spline:
Execution of splines (3rd degree polynomials)

Block processing time „ 3.6 ms

3-D straight line without radius
compensation „ 0.5 ms (software option 2)

Axis feedback control „ Position loop resolution: Signal period of the position encoder/1024
„ Cycle time of position controller: 1.8 ms
„ Cycle time of speed controller: 600 µs
„ Cycle time of current controller: minimum 100 µs

Range of traverse „ Maximum 100 m (3937 inches)

Spindle speed „ Maximum 40 000 rpm (with 2 pole pairs)

Error compensation „ Linear and nonlinear axis error, backlash, reversal spikes during circular movements,
thermal expansion
„ Stick-slip friction

Data interfaces „ One each RS-232-C/V.24 and RS-422/V.11 max. 115 kilobaud
„ Expanded interface with LSV-2 protocol for external operation of the TNC over the
interface with HEIDENHAIN software TNCremo.
„ Ethernet interface 100BaseT
Approx. 2 to 5 megabaud (depending on file type and network load)
„ USB 1.1 interface
For pointing (mouse) devices and block devices (memory sticks, hard disks, CD-ROM
drives)

Ambient temperature „ Operation: 0 °C to +45 °C

„ Storage: –30 °C to +70 °C

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 575

18.3 Technical Information
Accessories
Electronic handwheels „ One HR 420 portable handwheel with display or
„ One HR 410 portable handwheel or
„ One HR 130 panel-mounted handwheel or
„ Up to three HR 150 panel-mounted handwheels via HRA 110 handwheel adapter

Touch probes „ TS 220: 3-D touch trigger probe with cable connection, or
„ TS 440: 3-D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission
„ TS 444: Battery-free 3-D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission
„ TS 640: 3-D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission
„ TS 740: High-precision 3-D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission
„ TT 140: 3-D touch trigger probe for workpiece measurement

Software option 1
Rotary table machining „ Programming of cylindrical contours as if in two axes
„ Feed rate in mm/min

Coordinate transformation „ Tilting the working plane

Interpolation „ Circle in 3 axes with tilted working plane

Software option 2
3-D machining „ Motion control with minimum jerk
„ 3-D tool compensation through surface normal vectors
„ Using the electronic handwheel to change the angle of the swivel head during program
run without affecting the position of the tool point (TCPM = Tool Center Point
Management)
„ Keeping the tool normal to the contour
„ Tool radius compensation normal to the direction of traverse and the tool direction
„ Spline interpolation

Interpolation „ Linear in 5 axes (subject to export permit)

Block processing time „ 0.5 ms

DXF converter software option

Extracting contour programs „ Format supported: AC1009 (AutoCAD R12)
and machining positions from „ For plain-language and smarT.NC
DXF data
„ Simple and convenient specification of reference points

576 Tables and Overviews

 18.3 Technical Information
Dynamic Collision Monitoring (DCM) software option
Collision monitoring in all „ The machine manufacturer defines objects to be monitored
machine operating modes „ Fixture monitoring is also possible
„ Three warning levels in manual operation
„ Program interrupt during automatic operation
„ Includes monitoring of 5-axis movements
„ Program simulation before machining for possible collisions

Additional conversational language software option

Additional conversational „ Slovenian
languages „ Norwegian
„ Slovak
„ Latvian
„ Korean
„ Estonian
„ Turkish
„ Romanian
„ Lithuanian

Global Program Settings software option

Function for superimposing „ Swapping axes
coordinate transformations in „ Superimposed datum shift
the Program Run modes
„ Superimposed mirroring
„ Axis locking
„ Handwheel superimposition
„ Superimposed basic rotation and datum-based rotation
„ Feed rate factor

Adaptive Feed Control (AFC) software option

Function for adaptive feed- „ Recording the actual spindle power by means of a teach-in cut
rate control for optimizing the „ Defining the limits of automatic feed rate control
machining conditions during
series production „ Fully automatic feed control during program run

KinematicsOpt software option

Touch-probe cycles for „ Backup/restore active kinematics
automatic testing and „ Test active kinematics
optimization of the machine
kinematics „ Optimize active kinematics

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 577

18.3 Technical Information
FCL 2 upgrade functions
Enabling of significant „ Virtual tool axis
improvements „ Touch probe cycle 441, Rapid Probing
„ Offline CAD point filter
„ 3-D line graphics
„ Contour pocket: Assign a separate depth to each subcontour
„ smarT.NC: Coordinate transformation
„ smarT.NC: PLANE function
„ smarT.NC: Graphically supported block scan
„ Expanded USB functionality
„ Network attachment via DHCP and DNS

FCL 3 upgrade functions

Enabling of significant „ Touch probe cycle for 3-D probing
improvements „ Probing cycles 408 and 409 (Units 408 and 409 in smarT.NC) for setting a reference
point in the center of a slot or a ridge
„ PLANE function: Axis angle input
„ User documentation as context-sensitive help right on the TNC
„ Feed-rate reduction for the machining of contour pockets with the tool being in full
contact with the workpiece
„ smarT.NC: Contour pocket on pattern
„ smarT.NC: Parallel programming is possible
„ smarT.NC: Preview of contour programs in the file manager
„ smarT.NC: Positioning strategy for machining point patterns

FCL 4 upgrade functions

Enabling of significant „ Graphical depiction of the protected space when DCM collision monitoring is active
improvements „ Handwheel superimposition in stopped condition when DCM collision monitoring is
active
„ 3-D basic rotation (set-up compensation, must be adapted by the machine tool builder)

578 Tables and Overviews

 18.3 Technical Information
Input format and unit of TNC functions
Positions, coordinates, circle radii, chamfer –99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999
lengths (5.4: places before and after the decimal point) [mm]

Tool numbers 0 to 32 767.9 (5.1)

Tool names 16 characters, enclosed by quotation marks with TOOL CALL. Permitted
special characters: #, $, %, &, -

Delta values for tool compensation –99.9999 to +99.9999 (2.4) [mm]

Spindle speeds 0 to 99 999.999 (5.3) [rpm]

Feed rates 0 to 99 999.999 (5.3) [mm/min] or [mm/tooth] or [mm/rev]

Dwell time in Cycle 9 0 to 3600.000 (4.3) [s]

Thread pitch in various cycles –99.9999 to +99.9999 (2.4) [mm]

Angle of spindle orientation 0 to 360.0000 (3.4) [°]

Angle for polar coordinates, rotation, tilting –360.0000 to +360.0000 (3.4) [°]
the working plane

Polar coordinate angle for helical –99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999 (5.4) [°]
interpolation (CP)

Datum numbers in Cycle 7 0 to 2999 (4.0)

Scaling factor in Cycles 11 and 26 0.000 001 to 99.999 999 (2.6)

Miscellaneous functions M 0 to 999 (3.0)

Q parameter numbers 0 to 1999 (4.0)

Q parameter values –999 999 999 to +999 999 999 (9 digits, floating point)

Labels (LBL) for program jumps 0 to 999 (3.0)

Labels (LBL) for program jumps Any text string in quotes (“”)

Number of program section repeats REP 1 to 65 534 (5.0)

Error number with Q parameter function 0 to 1099 (4.0)

FN14

Spline parameter K –9.999 9999 to +9.999 9999 (1.7)

Exponent for spline parameter –255 to 255 (3.0)

Surface-normal vectors N and T with –9.999 9999 to +9.999 9999 (1.7)

3-D compensation

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 579

18.4 Exchanging the Buffer Battery
18.4 Exchanging the Buffer Battery
A buffer battery supplies the TNC with current to prevent the data in
RAM memory from being lost when the TNC is switched off.
If the TNC displays the error message Exchange buffer battery, then
you must replace the batteries:

CAUTION—danger to life!
To exchange the buffer battery, first switch off the TNC!
The buffer battery must be exchanged only by trained
service personnel.

Battery type:1 Lithium battery, type CR 2450N (Renata) ID 315 878-01

1 The backup battery is at the back of the MC 422 C
2 Exchange the battery. The battery contact accepts a new battery
only in the correct orientation.

580 Tables and Overviews

iTNC 530 with
Windows XP (Option)
19.1 Introduction
19.1 Introduction
End User License Agreement (EULA) for
Windows XP

Please pay attention to the Microsoft End User License

Agreement (EULA), which is included with your machine
documentation.

General

The special features of the iTNC 530 with Windows XP

are described in this chapter. For the Windows XP system
functions, please refer to the Windows documentation.

TNC controls from HEIDENHAIN have always been user friendly:

Thanks to their simple programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational
language, field-proven cycles, unambiguous function keys, and clear
and vivid graphic functions, they now count among the most popular
shop-floor programmable controls.
The standard Windows operating system is now also provided as a
user interface. The new and highly efficient HEIDENHAIN hardware
with two processors is the basis for the iTNC 530 with Windows XP.
The first processor handles real-time jobs and the HEIDENHAIN
operating system, whereas the second processor is available only to
the standard Windows operating system and thus provides the user
access to the world of information technology.
Here, too, ease of use is the highest priority:
„ The operating panel comprises a complete PC keyboard with
touchpad
„ The 15-inch high-resolution color flat-panel monitor displays both
the iTNC interface and the Windows applications.
„ Standard PC equipment such as a mouse or drives can easily be
connected to the control through USB interfaces.

582 iTNC 530 with Windows XP (Option)

 19.1 Introduction
Specifications

Specifications iTNC 530 with Windows XP

Execution Dual-processor control with
„ HEROS real-time operating system for
controlling the machine
„ Windows XP PC operating system as user
interface

Memory „ RAM memory:

„ 512 MB for control applications
„ 512 MB for Windows applications
„ Hard disk
„ 13 GB for TNC files
„ 13 GB for Windows files, of which
approx. 13 GB are available for
applications

Data interfaces „ Ethernet 10/100BaseT (up to 100 Mbps

depending on network utilization)
„ RS-232-C/V.24 (max. 115 200 bps)
„ RS-422/V.11 (max. 115 200 bps)
„ 2 x USB
„ 2 x PS/2

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 583

19.2 Starting an iTNC 530 Application
19.2 Starting an iTNC 530
Application
Logging on to Windows
After you have switched on the power supply, the iTNC 530 starts
booting automatically. When the input dialog for logging on to
Windows appears, there are two possibilities for logging on:
„ Logging on as a TNC user
„ Logging on as a local administrator

Logging on as a TNC user

U Enter the user name “TNC” in the User name input box. Leave the
Password input box blank and press the OK button.
U The TNC software is automatically started. The status message
Starting, please wait... appears in the iTNC Control Panel.

Do not open or use any other Windows programs as long

as the iTNC Control Panel is displayed (see figure). When
the iTNC software has successfully started, the Control
Panel minimizes itself to a HEIDENHAIN symbol on the
task bar.
This user identification permits very limited access to the
Windows operating system. You are neither allowed to
change the network settings, nor are you allowed to install
new software.

Logging on as a local administrator

Please contact your machine tool builder for the user

name and the password.

As a local administrator, you are allowed to install software and change

the network settings.

HEIDENHAIN does not assist you in installing Windows

applications and offers no guarantee for the function of the
applications you installed.
HEIDENHAIN is not liable for faulty hard disk contents
caused by installing updates to non-HEIDENHAIN
software or additional application software.
If HEIDENHAIN is required to render service after
programs or data have been changed, HEIDENHAIN will
charge you for the service costs incurred.

584 iTNC 530 with Windows XP (Option)

 19.2 Starting an iTNC 530 Application
In order to guarantee the trouble-free function of the iTNC application,
the Windows XP system must at all times have sufficient
„ CPU power
„ free hard disk memory on the C drive
„ RAM
„ bandwidth for the hard drive interface
available.
By sufficiently buffering the TNC data, the control can compensate
brief interruptions (up to one second at a block cycle time of 0.5 ms)
to the data transfer from the Windows PC. However, if the data
transfer from the Windows PC is interrupted for a longer time period,
problems can occur with the feed rate during program run, resulting in
damage to the workpiece.

Keep in mind the following requirements for software

installations:
The program to be installed must not overburden the
computing power of the Windows PC (512 MB RAM,
Pentium M with 1.8 GHz clock frequency).
Programs executed under Windows with the priority
levels above normal, high or real time (e.g. games),
must not be installed.
You should use virus scanners only when the TNC is not
running an NC program. HEIDENHAIN recommends using
virus scanners either just after switching the control on or
just before switching it off.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 585

19.3 Switching Off the iTNC 530
19.3 Switching Off the iTNC 530
Fundamentals
To prevent data from being lost at switch-off, you must shut down the
iTNC 530 properly. The following sections describe the various
possibilities for doing so.

Inappropriate switch-off of the iTNC 530 can lead to data

loss.
Exit the iTNC 530 application before exiting Windows.

Logging a user off

You can log a user off of Windows at any time without adversely
influencing the iTNC software. However, the iTNC screen is not visible
during the log-off process, and you cannot make any entries during
this time.

Note that machine-specific keys (such as NC Start or the

axis direction keys) remain active.

After a new user has logged on, the iTNC screen reappears.

586 iTNC 530 with Windows XP (Option)

 19.3 Switching Off the iTNC 530
Exiting the iTNC application

Caution: Danger to the machine and workpiece!

Before you exit the iTNC application, you absolutely must
press the Emergency Stop key. Otherwise you could lose
data or the machine could become damaged.

There are two possibilities for exiting the iTNC application:

„ Internal exiting via the Manual operating mode; simultaneously exits
Windows
„ External exiting via the iTNC Control Panel; only exits the iTNC
application

Internal exiting via the Manual operating mode

U Select the Manual operating mode.
U Shift the soft-key row until the soft key for shutting down the iTNC
application appears.
U Select the function for shutting down and confirm the
following dialog prompt again with the YES soft key.
U When the message It is now safe to turn off your
computer appears on the iTNC screen, you may
switch off the power supply to the iTNC 530.

External exiting via the iTNC Control Panel

U Press the Windows key on the ASCII keyboard to minimize the iTNC
application and display the Task Bar.
U Double-click the green HEIDENHAIN symbol to the lower right in
the Task Bar for the iTNC Control Panel to appear (see figure).
U Select the function for exiting the iTNC 530
application: Press the Stop iTNC button.
U After you have pressed the Emergency Stop button,
acknowledge the iTNC message with the Yes screen
button. The iTNC application is stopped.
U The iTNC Control Panel remains active. To restart the
iTNC 530, press the Restart iTNC button.
To exit Windows, select
U the Start button
U the menu item Shut down...
U again the menu item Shut down...
U and confirm with OK.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 587

19.3 Switching Off the iTNC 530
Shutting down Windows
If you try to shut down Windows while the iTNC software is still active,
the control displays a warning (see figure).

Caution: Danger to the machine and workpiece!

Before you confirm with OK, you absolutely must press
the Emergency Stop button. Otherwise you could lose
data or the machine could become damaged.

If you confirm with OK, the iTNC software is exited and Windows is
shut down.

Caution: Danger to the machine and workpiece!

After several seconds Windows displays its own warning,
covering the iTNC warning (see figure). Never confirm the
warning with End Now, since you could lose data or the
machine could become damaged.

588 iTNC 530 with Windows XP (Option)

 19.4 Network Settings
19.4 Network Settings
Prerequisite

You must log on as a local administrator to be able to

change the network settings. Please contact your machine
tool builder for the required user name and password.
The network should be configured only by network
specialists.

Adjusting the network settings

The iTNC 530 is shipped with two network connections: The Local
Area Connection and the iTNC Internal Connection (see figure).
The Local Area Connection is the iTNC’s connection to its network.
You may adjust all familiar Windows XP settings to your network (also
see the Windows XP network description).

The iTNC Internal Connection is exactly that: an internal

iTNC connection. The configuration of this connection
must not be changed. Changes might cause the iTNC to
stop functioning.
This internal network address has a default setting of
192.168.252.253 and must not collide with your company
network, meaning that the subnet 192.168.254.xxx
cannot already exist in your network. If necessary, contact
HEIDENHAIN if you are having address conflicts.
The option Obtain IP address automatically must be
inactive.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 589

19.4 Network Settings
Controlling access
Administrators have access to the TNC drives D, E and F. Please note
that some of the data in these partitions is binary encoded, and write-
accesses might lead to undefined behavior of the iTNC.
The user groups SYSTEM and Administrators have access rights to
partitions D, E and F. The SYSTEM group ensures that the Windows
service that starts the control has access. The Administrators group
ensures that the real-time processor of the iTNC receives a network
connection via the iTNC Internal Connection.

You may not restrict access by these groups, nor may you
add groups and prohibit certain accesses by these groups
(in Windows, access restrictions have priority over access
rights).

590 iTNC 530 with Windows XP (Option)

 19.5 Specifics About File Management
19.5 Specifics About File
Management
The iTNC drive
When you call the iTNC file manager, the left window shows all
available drives. For example:
„ C:\: Windows partition of the built-in hard disk
„ RS232:\: Serial interface 1
„ RS422:\: Serial interface 2
„ TNC:\: Data partition of the iTNC
There might also be other networks available if you have connected
them with Windows Explorer.

Please note that the data drive of the iTNC appears in the
file manager with the name TNC:\. In Windows Explorer,
this drive (partition) appears with the letter D.
Subdirectories on the TNC drive (e.g. RECYCLER and SYSTEM
VOLUME IDENTIFIER) are created by Windows XP and may
not be deleted.
With MP7225 you can define letters of drives that should
not be shown in the file management of the TNC.

If you connect a new network drive with Windows Explorer, you may
have to update the iTNC’s display of available drives:
U Press the PGM MGT key to call the file manager.
U Move the highlight to the drive window at left.
U Switch to the second level of the soft-key row.
U To update the drive overview, press the UPDATE TREE soft key.

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 591

19.5 Specifics About File Management
Data transfer to the iTNC 530

Before you can initiate data transfer on the iTNC, the

network drive must have been connected with Windows
Explorer. Access to UNC network names (e.g.
\\PC0815\DIR1) is not possible.

TNC-specific files
After integrating the iTNC 530 into your network, you can access any
computer and transfer files to it from the iTNC. However, certain file
types may only be transferred if data transfer was initiated by the
iTNC. The reason is that these files must be converted into binary
format during data transfer to the iTNC.

Simply copying the file types listed below to the D drive

using Windows Explorer is both prohibited and useless.

File types that may not be copied using Windows Explorer:

„ Conversational dialog programs (extension .H)
„ smarT.NC unit programs (extension .HU)
„ smarT.NC contour programs (extension .HC)
„ smarT.NC point tables (extension .HP)
„ ISO programs (extension .I)
„ Tool tables (extension .T)
„ Pocket tables (extension .TCH)
„ Pallet tables (extension .P)
„ Datum tables (extension .D)
„ Point tables (extension .PNT)
„ Cutting data tables (extension .CDT)
„ Freely definable tables (extension .TAB)
Procedure for data transfer: See “Data transfer to or from an external
data medium,” page 126.

ASCII files
There are no limitations regarding the direct copying of ASCII files
(files with the extension .A) with Windows Explorer.

Please note that all the files you want to use on the TNC
must be stored on drive D.

592 iTNC 530 with Windows XP (Option)

 Index
SYMBOLE C D
3-D compensation Constant contouring speed M90 ... 304 DXF data, processing ... 216
Peripheral milling ... 406 Context-sensitive help ... 146 Basic settings ... 218
3-D touch probes Contour approach ... 189 Contour selection ... 223
Calibrating Contour departure ... 189 Filter for hole positions ... 230
Triggering ... 456 Contour, selecting from DXF ... 223 Layer settings ... 220
Managing more than one block of Conversational programming ... 98 Machining positions,
calibration data ... 458 Copying program sections ... 103 selecting ... 226
3-D view ... 488 Corner rounding ... 196 Selecting hole positions
Cutting data calculation ... 367 Diameter input ... 229
A Cutting-data table ... 367 Individual selection ... 227
Accessories ... 87 Cylinder ... 291 Mouse over ... 228
Actual position capture ... 99 Workpiece presetting ... 221
Adaptive feed control ... 351 D Dynamic Collision Monitoring ... 325
AFC ... 351 Data backup ... 107 Test Run ... 331
Animation, PLANE function ... 377 Data carrier, checking ... 548 Tool holders ... 164
ASCII files ... 362 Data interface
Automatic cutting data Assigning ... 522 E
calculation ... 161, 367 Pin layout ... 569 Ellipse ... 289
Automatic program start ... 512 setting ... 521 Error list ... 142
Automatic tool measurement ... 160 Data transfer rate ... 521 Error messages ... 141, 142
Axes, exchanging ... 346 Data transfer software ... 523 Help with ... 141
Datum management ... 444 Ethernet interface
B Datum setting ... 442 Configuring ... 528
Basic rotation without a 3-D touch probe ... 442 Connecting and disconnecting
Measuring in the Manual Operation Datum setting, manual network drives ... 128
mode ... 459 Center line as datum ... 464 Connection possibilities ... 525
Block Circle center as datum ... 463 Introduction ... 525
Deleting ... 101 Corner as datum ... 462 External Access ... 551
Inserting, editing ... 101 In any axis ... 461 External data transfer
Blocks Using holes/studs ... 465 iTNC 530 ... 126
Buffer battery exchange ... 580 Datum table iTNC 530 with Windows XP ... 591
Confirming probed values ... 453
C Datum, setting the ... ... 94 F
Calculating with parentheses ... 268 DCM ... 325 FCL ... 518
Calculator ... 135 Dependent files ... 536 FCL function ... 9
Chamfer ... 195 Dialog ... 98 Feature content level ... 9
Circle center point ... 197 Directory ... 108, 114 Feed control, automatic ... 351
Circular path ... 198, 199, 201, 208, 209 Copying ... 118 Feed rate ... 440
Code numbers ... 519 Creating ... 114 Changing ... 441
Collision monitoring ... 325 Deleting ... 119 for rotary axes, M116 ... 397
Comments, adding ... 132 Feed rate factor for plunging
Compensating workpiece misalignment movements: M103 ... 309
By measuring two points of a Feed rate in millimeters per spindle
line ... 459 revolution: M136 ... 310
Over two holes ... 465 File
Over two studs ... 465 Creating ... 114

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 593

Index F H M
File management ... 108 Hard disk ... 106 Machining time, measuring the... ... 493
Calling ... 110 Hard disk, checking ... 548 Mid-program startup ... 506
Configuring with MOD ... 535 Helical interpolation ... 210 After power failure ... 506
Copying a file ... 115 Helix ... 210 Miscellaneous Functions
Copying a table ... 117 Help files, displaying ... 546 for Rotary Axes ... 397
Deleting a file ... 119 Help files, downloading ... 151 Miscellaneous functions
Dependent files ... 536 Help system ... 146 Entering ... 298
Directories ... 108 Help with error messages ... 141 For contouring behavior ... 304
Copying ... 118 For coordinate data ... 301
Creating ... 114 I For laser cutting machines ... 319
External data transfer ... 126 Inclined-tool machining in a tilted For program run control ... 300
File plane ... 396 For spindle and coolant ... 300
Creating ... 114 Indexed tools ... 163 MOD function
File name ... 107 Information on formats ... 579 Exiting ... 516
File selection ... 111 Interrupt machining ... 502 Overview ... 517
File type ... 106 iTNC 530 ... 70 Select ... 516
Overview of functions ... 109 with Windows XP ... 582 Monitoring
Overwriting files ... 116 Collision ... 325
Protecting a file ... 123 K Monitoring for tool breakage ... 361
Renaming a file ... 122 Keyboard ... 73
Shortcuts ... 125 N
Tagging files ... 120 L NC error messages ... 141, 142
File status ... 110 Laser cutting machines, miscellaneous Nesting ... 239
Filter for hole positions during DXF data functions ... 319 Network connection ... 128
transfer ... 230 L-block generation ... 543 Network connection, testing ... 534
Fixture monitoring ... 332 List of error messages ... 142 Network settings ... 528
Fixture placement ... 336 Local Q parameters, defining ... 253 iTNC 530 with Windows XP ... 589
Fixture position, checking ... 338 Look-ahead ... 311 Nonvolatile Q parameters,
Fixture templates ... 333 defining ... 253
Fixtures, editing ... 337 M Normal vector ... 385
Fixtures, removing ... 337 M functions
FixtureWizard ... 334 See “Miscellaneous functions” O
FN14: ERROR: Displaying error M91, M92 ... 301 Open contour corners M98 ... 308
messages ... 262 Machine axes, moving the … ... 432 Operating modes ... 74
FN15: PRINT: Unformatted output of In increments ... 433 Operating times ... 547
texts ... 267 With the electronic Option number ... 518
FN19: PLC: Transfer values to the handwheel ... 434, 435
PLC ... 267 With the machine axis direction P
Full circle ... 198 buttons ... 432 Pallet datum ... 411
Fundamentals ... 90 Machine parameters Pallet preset ... 411
For 3-D touch probes ... 555 Pallet table
G For external data transfer ... 555 Application ... 408, 414
Global program settings ... 340 For machining and program Entering coordinates ... 409, 415
Graphic simulation ... 492 run ... 567 Executing ... 413, 425
Displaying the tool ... 492 For TNC displays and TNC Selecting and leaving ... 410, 419
Graphics editor ... 559 Parametric programming: See Q
Display modes ... 486 parameter programming
During programming ... 136, 138
Detail enlargement ... 137
Magnification of details ... 491

594
 Index
P P Q
Part families ... 254 Preset table ... 444 Q parameters
Path ... 108 Confirming probed values ... 454 Checking ... 260
Path contours For pallets ... 411 Local QL parameters ... 250
Cartesian coordinates Principal axes ... 91 Nonvolatile QR parameters ... 250
Circular arc with tangential Probe cycles Preassigned ... 283
connection ... 201 See User’s Manual for Touch Probe Transferring values to the
Circular path around circle center Cycles PLC ... 267
CC ... 198 Probing cycles Unformatted output ... 267
Circular path with defined Program
radius ... 199 Editing ... 100 R
Overview ... 193 Open new ... 96 Radius compensation ... 178
Straight line ... 194 -Structure ... 95 Input ... 180
Polar coordinates Structuring ... 134 Outside corners, inside
Circular arc with tangential Program call corners ... 181
connection ... 209 Any desired program as Rapid traverse ... 154
Circular path around pole subroutine ... 237 Reference points, crossing over ... 428
CC ... 208 Program defaults ... 323 Reference system ... 91
Overview ... 206 Program management: see File Replacing texts ... 105
Straight line ... 207 management Retraction from the contour ... 314
Path functions Program name:\See File management, Returning to the contour ... 509
Fundamentals ... 184 File name Rotary axis
Circles and circular arcs ... 187 Program Run Reducing display M94 ... 399
Pre-position ... 188 Global program settings ... 340 Shorter-path traverse: M126 ... 398
Pin layout for data interfaces ... 569 Interrupting ... 502
Ping ... 534 Program run S
Plan view ... 486 Executing ... 501 Screen layout ... 72
PLANE function ... 375 Mid-program startup ... 506 Search function ... 104
Animation ... 377 Optional block skip ... 513 Secondary axes ... 91
Automatic positioning ... 392 Overview ... 500 Service pack, installing ... 520
Axis angle definition ... 390 Resuming after an Setting the baud rate ... 521
Euler angle definition ... 383 interruption ... 505 Software number ... 518
Inclined-tool machining ... 396 Program sections, copying ... 103 Software options ... 576
Incremental definition ... 389 Programming tool movements ... 98 Software update ... 520
Points definition ... 387 Program-section repeat ... 236 SPEC FCT ... 322
Positioning behavior ... 392 Projection in three planes ... 487 Special functions ... 322
Projection angle definition ... 381 Specifications ... 572
Reset ... 378 Q iTNC 530 with Windows XP ... 583
Selection of possible Q parameter programming ... 250, 272 Sphere ... 293
solutions ... 394 Additional functions ... 261 Spindle load monitoring ... 361
Space-angle definition ... 379 Basic arithmetic (assign, add, Spindle speed, changing the … ... 441
Vector definition ... 385 subtract, multiply, divide, square Spindle speed, entering ... 169
Pocket table ... 166 root) ... 255 Status display ... 77
Polar coordinates If/then decisions ... 259 Additional ... 78
Fundamentals ... 92 Programming General ... 77
Programming ... 206 notes ... 252, 274, 275, 276, 280, Straight line ... 194, 207
Positioning 282 String parameters ... 272
With a tilted working Trigonometric functions ... 257 Structuring programs ... 134
plane ... 303, 405 Subprogram ... 235
with manual data input (MDI) ... 478
Positions, selecting from DXF ... 226

HEIDENHAIN iTNC 530 595

Index S T V
Superimposed transformations ... 340 Tool length ... 156 Version numbers ... 519
Superimposing handwheel positioning Tool management ... 175 Visual display unit ... 71
M118 ... 313 Tool material ... 161, 369
Switch between upper and lower case Tool measurement ... 160 W
letters ... 363 Tool name ... 156 Windows XP ... 582
Switch-off ... 431 Tool number ... 156 Windows, logging on ... 584
Switch-on ... 428 Tool radius ... 156 WMAT.TAB ... 368
Swivel axes ... 400, 401 Tool table Workpiece blank, defining a ... ... 96
System time, reading the... ... 277 Editing functions ... 162, 176 Workpiece material, defining ... 368
System time, setting ... 549 Editing, exiting ... 162 Workpiece measurement ... 466
Input possibilities ... 158 Workpiece positions
T Tool type, selecting ... 161 Absolute ... 93
Teach in ... 99, 194 Tool usage file ... 173, 510 Incremental ... 93
Teach-in cut ... 355 Tool usage test ... 173, 510 Workspace monitoring ... 497, 538
TeleService ... 550 Tool-carrier kinematics ... 164 Writing probed values in datum
Test Run Touch probe cycles tables ... 453
Executing ... 497 Manual Operation mode ... 451 Writing probed values in preset
Overview ... 494 Touch probe functions, use with table ... 454
Speed setting ... 485 mechanical probes or dial
Up to a certain block ... 498 gauges ... 469
Text file Touch probe monitoring ... 315
Delete functions ... 364 Trigonometric functions ... 257
Editing functions ... 362 Trigonometry ... 257
Opening and exiting ... 362
Text sections, finding ... 366 U
Text variables ... 272 Unit of measure, selection ... 96
Tilting the working plane ... 375, 470 Updating TNC software ... 520
Manually ... 470 USB devices,
Time zone, setting ... 549 connecting/removing ... 129
TNCguide ... 146 USB interface ... 582
TNCremo ... 523 User parameters ... 554
TNCremoNT ... 523 General
Tool change ... 171 For 3-D touch probes ... 555
Tool compensation For external data transfer ... 555
Length ... 177 For machining and program
Radius ... 178 run ... 567
Tool data For TNC displays, TNC
Calling ... 169 editor ... 559
Delta values ... 157 Machine-specific ... 537
Entering into tables ... 158
Entering them into the
program ... 157
Indexing ... 163

596
Overview tables
Machining cycles
Cycle DEF- CALL-
Cycle designation
number active active
7 Datum shift „

8 Mirror image „

9 Dwell time „

10 Rotation „

11 Scaling factor „

12 Program call „

13 Oriented spindle stop „

14 Contour definition „

19 Tilting the working plane „

20 Contour data SL II „

21 Pilot drilling SL II „

22 Rough out SL II „

23 Floor finishing SL II „

24 Side finishing SL II „

25 Contour train „

26 Axis-specific scaling „

27 Cylinder surface „

28 Cylindrical surface slot „

29 Cylinder surface ridge „

30 Run 3-D data „

32 Tolerance „

39 Cylinder surface external contour „

200 Drilling „

201 Reaming „

202 Boring „

203 Universal drilling „

Cycle DEF- CALL-
Cycle designation
number active active
204 Back boring „

205 Universal pecking „

206 Tapping with a floating tap holder, new „

207 Rigid tapping, new „

208 Bore milling „

209 Tapping with Chip Breaking „

220 Circular point pattern „

221 Linear point pattern „

230 Multipass milling „

231 Ruled surface „

232 Face milling „

240 Centering „

241 Single-fluted deep-hole drilling „

247 Datum setting „

251 Rectangular pocket (complete machining) „

252 Circular pocket (complete machining) „

253 Key-way milling „

254 Circular slot „

256 Rectangular stud (complete machining) „

257 Circular stud (complete machining) „

262 Thread milling „

263 Thread milling/countersinking „

264 Thread drilling/milling „

265 Helical thread drilling/milling „

267 Outside thread milling „

270 Contour train data „

Miscellaneous functions
N Effect Effective at block... Start End Page
M0 Stop program/Spindle STOP/Coolant OFF „ Page 300

M1 Optional program STOP/Spindle STOP/Coolant OFF „ Page 514

M2 Stop program/Spindle STOP/Coolant OFF/Clear status display „ Page 300

(depending on machine parameter)/Go to block 1

M3 Spindle ON clockwise „ Page 300

M4 Spindle ON counterclockwise „
M5 Spindle STOP „

M6 Tool change/Stop program run (depending on machine parameter)/Spindle STOP „ Page 300

M8 Coolant ON „ Page 300

M9 Coolant OFF „

M13 Spindle ON clockwise/Coolant ON „ Page 300

M14 Spindle ON counterclockwise/Coolant ON „

M30 Same function as M2 „ Page 300

M89 Vacant miscellaneous function or „ Cycles

Cycle call, modally effective (depending on machine parameter) „ Manual

M90 Only in lag mode: Constant contouring speed at corners „ Page 304

M91 Within the positioning block: Coordinates are referenced to machine datum „ Page 301

M92 Within the positioning block: Coordinates are referenced to position defined by „ Page 301
machine tool builder, such as tool change position

M94 Reduce the rotary axis display to a value below 360° „ Page 399

M97 Machine small contour steps „ Page 306

M98 Machine open contours completely „ Page 308

M99 Blockwise cycle call „ Cycles

Manual

M101 Automatic tool change with replacement tool if maximum tool life has expired „ Page 172
M102 Cancel M101 „

M103 Reduce feed rate during plunging to factor F (percentage) „ Page 309

M104 Reactivate the datum as last defined „ Page 303

M105 Machining with second kv factor „ Page 554

M106 Machining with first kv factor „

M107 Suppress error message for replacement tools with oversize „ Page 172
M108 Cancel M107 „
N Effect Effective at block... Start End Page
M109 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge „ Page 310
(increase and decrease feed rate)
M110 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge „
(feed rate decrease only)
M111 Cancel M109/M110 „

M114 Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working with tilted axes „ Page 400
M115 Reset M114 „

M116 Feed rate for rotary axes in mm/minn „ Page 397

M117 Cancel M116 „

M118 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run „ Page 313

M120 Pre-calculate radius-compensated contour (LOOK AHEAD) „ Page 311

M124 Do not include points when executing non-compensated line blocks „ Page 305

M126 Shortest-path traverse of rotary axes „ Page 398

M127 Cancel M126 „

M128 Retain position of tool tip when positioning tilting axes (TCPM) „ Page 401
M129 Cancel M128 „

M130 Moving to position in an untilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane „ Page 303

M134 Exact stop at nontangential contour transitions when positioning with rotary axes „ Page 404
M135 Reset M134 „

M136 Feed rate F in millimeters per spindle revolution „ Page 310

M137 Reset M136 „

M138 Selection of tilted axes „ Page 404

M140 Retraction from the contour in the tool-axis direction „ Page 314

M141 Suppress touch probe monitoring „ Page 315

M142 Delete modal program information „ Page 316

M143 Delete basic rotation „ Page 316

M144 Compensating the machine’s kinematics configuration for ACTUAL/NOMINAL „ Page 405
positions at end of block
M145 Reset M144 „

M148 Retract the tool automatically from the contour at NC stop „ Page 317
M149 Cancel M148 „

M150 Suppress limit switch message (function effective blockwise) „ Page 318

M200 Laser cutting: Output programmed voltage directly „ Page 319

M201 Laser cutting: Output of voltage as a function of distance „
M202 Laser cutting: Output of voltage as a function of speed „
M203 Laser cutting: Output of voltage as a function of time (ramp) „
M204 Laser cutting: Output voltage as a function of time (pulse) „
Overview of DIN/ISO Functions of
the iTNC 530

M Functions M Functions

M00 Program STOP/Spindle STOP/Coolant OFF M109 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge
Optional program STOP (increase and decrease feed rate)
M01 STOP program run/Spindle STOP/Coolant M110 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge
M02 OFF/CLEAR status display (depending on (feed rate decrease only)
machine parameter)/Go to block 1 M111 Cancel M109/M110

M03 Spindle ON clockwise M114 Automatic compensation of machine geometry

M04 Spindle ON counterclockwise when working with tilted axes:
M05 Spindle STOP M115 Cancel M114

M06 Tool change/STOP program run (depending on M116 Feed rate for rotary axes in mm/min
machine parameter)/Spindle STOP M117 Cancel M116

M08 Coolant ON M118 Superimpose handwheel positioning during

M09 Coolant OFF program run

M13 Spindle ON clockwise/Coolant ON M120 Pre-calculate radius-compensated contour

M14 Spindle ON counterclockwise/Coolant ON (LOOK AHEAD)

M30 Same function as M02 M124 Do not include points when executing non-
compensated line blocks
M89 Vacant miscellaneous function or
Cycle call, modally effective (depending on M126 Shortest-path traverse of rotary axes
machine parameter) M127 Cancel M126

M90 Only in lag mode: Constant contouring speed at M128 Retain position of tool tip when positioning tilting
corners axes (TCPM)
M129 Cancel M128
M99 Blockwise cycle call
M130 Within the positioning block: Points are
M91 Within the positioning block: Coordinates are referenced to the untilted coordinate system
referenced to machine datum
M92 Within the positioning block: Coordinates are M134 Exact stop at nontangential contour transitions
referenced to position defined by machine tool when positioning with rotary axes
builder, such as tool change position M135 Cancel M134

M94 Reduce the rotary axis display to a value below M136 Feed rate F in millimeters per spindle revolution
360° M137 Cancel M136

M97 Machine small contour steps M138 Selection of tilted axes

M98 Machine open contours completely
M142 Delete modal program information
M101 Automatic tool change with replacement tool if
maximum tool life has expired M143 Delete basic rotation
M102 Cancel M101
M144 Compensating the machine’s kinematics
M103 Reduce feed rate during plunging to factor F configuration for ACTUAL/NOMINAL positions at
(percentage) end of block
M145 Cancel M144
M104 Reactivate most recently defined datum
M150 Suppress limit switch message
M105 Machining with second kv factor
M106 Machining with first kv factor

M107 Suppress error message for replacement tools

with oversize
M108 Cancel M107
M Functions G Functions
M200 Laser cutting: Direct output of the programmed Cycles for drilling, tapping and thread milling
voltage
M201 Laser cutting: Output voltage as a function of G240 Centering
distance G200 Drilling
M202 Laser cutting: Output voltage as a function of G201 Reaming
speed G202 Boring
M203 Laser cutting: Output voltage as a function of G203 Universal drilling
time (ramp) G204 Back boring
M204 Laser cutting: Output voltage as a function of G205 Universal pecking
time (pulse) G206 Tapping with a floating tap holder
G207 Rigid tapping
G208 Bore milling
G Functions G209 Tapping with chip breaking
G241 Single-fluted deep-hole drilling
Tool movements
Cycles for drilling, tapping and thread milling
G00 Straight-line interpolation, Cartesian coordinates,
rapid traverse G262 Thread milling
G01 Straight-line interpolation, Cartesian coordinates G263 Thread milling/countersinking
G02 Circular interpolation, Cartesian coordinates, G264 Thread drilling/milling
clockwise G265 Helical thread drilling/milling
G03 Circular interpolation, Cartesian coordinates, G267 External thread milling
counterclockwise
G05 Circular interpolation, Cartesian coordinates, Cycles for milling pockets, studs and slots
without indication of direction
G06 Circular interpolation, Cartesian coordinates, G251 Rectangular pocket, complete
tangential contour approach G252 Circular pocket, complete
G07* Paraxial positioning block G253 Slot, complete
G10 Straight-line interpolation, polar coordinates, rapid G254 Circular slot, complete
traverse G256 Rectangular stud
G11 Straight-line interpolation, polar coordinates G257 Circular stud
G12 Circular interpolation, polar coordinates,
clockwise Cycles for creating point patterns
G13 Circular interpolation, polar coordinates,
counterclockwise G220 Circular point pattern
G15 Circular interpolation, polar coordinates, without G221 Point patterns on lines
indication of direction
G16 Circular interpolation, polar coordinates, SL cycles, group 2
tangential contour approach
G37 Contour geometry, list of subcontour program
Chamfer/Rounding/Approach contour/Depart contour numbers
G120 Contour data (applies to G121 to G124)
G24* Chamfer with length R G121 Pilot drilling
G25* Corner rounding with radius R G122 Rough-out
G26* Tangential contour approach with radius R G123 Floor finishing
G27* Tangential contour approach with radius R G124 Side finishing
G125 Contour train (machining open contour)
Tool definition G127 Cylinder surface
G128 Cylindrical surface slot
G99* With tool number T, length L, radius R
Coordinate transformation
Tool radius compensation
G53 Datum shift in datum table
G40 No tool radius compensation G54 Datum shift in program
G41 Tool radius compensation, left of the contour G28 Mirror image
G42 Tool radius compensation, right of the contour G73 Rotation of the coordinate system
G43 Paraxial compensation for G07, lengthening G72 Scaling factor (reduce or enlarge contour)
G44 Paraxial compensation for G07, shortening G80 Tilting the working plane
G247 Datum setting
Blank form definition for graphics

G30 (G17/G18/G19) min. point

G31 (G90/G91) max. point
G Functions G Functions
Cycles for multipass milling Special cycles

G60 Run 3-D data G04* Dwell time with F seconds

G230 Multipass milling of plane surfaces G36 Spindle orientation
G231 Multipass milling of tilted surfaces G39* Program call
G62 Tolerance deviation for fast contour milling
*) Non-modal function G440 Measure axis shift
G441 Fast probing
Touch probe cycles for measuring workpiece
misalignment Define machining plane
G400 Basic rotation using two points G17 Working plane X/Y, tool axis Z
G401 Basic rotation from two holes G18 Working plane Z/X, tool axis Y
G402 Basic rotation from two studs G19 Working plane Y/Z, tool axis X
G403 Compensate a basic rotation via a rotary axis G20 Tool axis IV
G404 Set basic rotation
G405 Compensating misalignment with the C axis Dimensions

Touch probe cycles for datum setting G90 Absolute dimensions

G91 Incremental dimensions
G408 Slot center reference point
G409 Reference point at center of hole Unit of measure
G410 Datum from inside of rectangle
G411 Datum from outside of rectangle G70 Inches (set at start of program)
G412 Datum from inside of circle G71 Millimeters (set at start of program)
G413 Datum from outside of circle
G414 Datum in outside corner Other G functions
G415 Datum in inside corner
G416 Datum circle center G29 Transfer the last nominal position value as a pole
G417 Datum in touch probe axis (circle center)
G418 Datum in center of 4 holes G38 STOP program run
G419 Reference point in selectable axis G51* Next tool number (with central tool file)
G79* Cycle call
Touch probe cycles for workpiece measurement G98* Set label number

G55 Measure any coordinate *) Non-modal function

G420 Measure any angle
G421 Measure hole
Addresses
G422 Measure cylindrical stud
G423 Measure rectangular pocket % Program beginning
G424 Measure rectangular stud % Program call
G425 Measure slot
G426 Measure ridge # Datum number with G53
G427 Measure any coordinate
G430 Measure circle center A Rotation about X axis
G431 Measure any plane B Rotation about Y axis
C Rotation about Z axis
Touch probe cycles for kinematic measurement
D Q-parameter definitions
G450 Calibrate the TT
G481 Measure tool length DL Length wear compensation with T
G482 Measure tool radius DR Radius wear compensation with T
G483 Measure tool length and tool radius
E Tolerance with M112 and M124
Touch probe cycles for tool measurement
F Feed rate
G480 Calibrating the TT F Dwell time with G04
G481 Measure tool length F Scaling factor with G72
G482 Measure tool radius F Factor for feed-rate reduction F with M103
G483 Measure tool length and tool radius
G484 Calibrate infrared TT G G Functions
 Addresses Sequence of Program Steps for Machining
with Several Tools
H Polar coordinate angle
H Rotation angle with G73 Define/Call finishing mill
H Tolerance angle with M112 Contour cycle: floor finishing G123 Q11 ...
Cycle call
I X coordinate of the circle center/pole
Define/Call finishing mill
J Y coordinate of the circle center/pole Contour cycle: side finishing G124 Q11 ...
Cycle call
K Z coordinate of the circle center/pole
End of main program, return M02
L Set a label number with G98
L Jump to a label number Contour subprograms G98 ...
L Tool length with G99 G98 L0
N M functions
Radius compensation of the contour subprograms
N Block number
Radius
Contour Programming Sequence
P Cycle parameters in machining cycles Compen-
of the Contour Elements
P Value or Q parameter in Q-parameter definition sation

Q Q parameter Internal Clockwise (CW) G42 (RR)

(pocket) Counterclockwise (CCW) G41 (RL)
R Polar coordinate radius
R Circular radius with G02/G03/G05 External Clockwise (CW) G41 (RL)
R Rounding radius with G25/G26/G27 (island) Counterclockwise (CCW) G42 (RR)
R Tool radius with G99

S Spindle speed
S Oriented spindle stop with G36

ING Tool definition with G99

T Tool call
T Next tool with G51

U Axis parallel to X axis

V Axis parallel to Y axis
W Axis parallel to Z axis

X X axis
Y Y axis
Z Z axis

* End of block

Contour cycles

Sequence of Program Steps for Machining

with Several Tools
List of subcontour programs G37 P01 ...

Define contour data G120 Q1 ...

Define/Call drill
Contour cycle: pilot drilling G121 Q10 ...
Cycle call

Define/Call roughing mill

Contour cycle: rough-out G122 Q10 ...
Cycle call
Coordinate transformation

Coordinate
Activate Cancelation
transformation
Datum shift G54 X+20 Y+30 G54 X0 Y0 Z0
Z+10

Mirror image G28 X G28

Rotation G73 H+45 G73 H+0

Scaling factor G72 F 0.8 G72 F1

Working plane G80 A+10 B+10 G80

C+15

Working plane PLANE ... PLANE RESET

Q-parameter definitions

D Function
00 Assign
01 Addition
02 Subtraction
03 Multiplication
04 Division
05 Root
06 Sine
07 Cosine
08 Root sum of squares c = √a2+b2
09 If equal, go to label number
10 If not equal, go to label number
11 If greater than, go to label number
12 If less than, go to label number
13 Angle from c sin α and c cos α
14 Error number
15 Print
19 Assignment PLC
DR. JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH
Dr.-Johannes-Heidenhain-Straße 5
83301 Traunreut, Germany
{ +49 (8669) 31-0
| +49 (8669) 5061
E-mail: [email protected]
Technical support | +49 (8669) 32-1000
Measuring systems { +49 (8669) 31-3104
E-mail: [email protected]
TNC support { +49 (8669) 31-3101
E-mail: [email protected]
NC programming { +49 (8669) 31-3103
E-mail: [email protected]
PLC programming { +49 (8669) 31-3102
E-mail: [email protected]
Lathe controls { +49 (8669) 31-3105
E-mail: [email protected]
www.heidenhain.de

3-D Touch Probe Systems from HEIDENHAIN

help you to reduce non-cutting time:
For example in
• workpiece alignment
• datum setting
• workpiece measurement
• digitizing 3-D surfaces

with the workpiece touch probes

TS 220 with cable
TS 640 with infrared transmission

• tool measurement
• wear monitoring
• tool breakage monitoring

with the tool touch probe

TT 140

670 391-20 · Ver00 · SW05 · 15 · 12/2008 · F&W · Printed in Germany